Alteon OS 22.0.

2

Command Reference

part number: 315393-J, January 2005

4655 Great America Parkway Santa Clara, CA 95054 Phone 1-800-4Nortel http://www.nortelnetworks.com

Alteon OS 22.0.2 Command Reference

Copyright 2005 Nortel Networks, Inc., 4655 Great America Parkway, Santa Clara, California 95054, USA. All rights reserved. Part Number: 315393-J. This document is protected by copyright and distributed under licenses restricting its use, copying, distribution, and decompilation. No part of this document may be reproduced in any form by any means without prior written authorization of Nortel Networks, Inc. Documentation is provided “as is” without warranty of any kind, either express or implied, including any kind of implied or express warranty of noninfringement or the implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose. U.S. Government End Users: This document is provided with a “commercial item” as defined by FAR 2.101 (Oct 1995) and contains “commercial technical data” and “commercial software documentation” as those terms are used in FAR 12.211-12.212 (Oct 1995). Government End Users are authorized to use this documentation only in accordance with those rights and restrictions set forth herein, consistent with FAR 12.211- 12.212 (Oct 1995), DFARS 227.7202 (JUN 1995) and DFARS 252.227-7015 (Nov 1995). Nortel Networks, Inc. reserves the right to change any products described herein at any time, and without notice. Nortel Networks, Inc. assumes no responsibility or liability arising from the use of products described herein, except as expressly agreed to in writing by Nortel Networks, Inc. The use and purchase of this product does not convey a license under any patent rights, trademark rights, or any other intellectual property rights of Nortel Networks, Inc.

Alteon OS, Alteon 2424, Alteon 2424-SSL, Alteon 2224, 2216, 2208, 3408, Alteon 180, Alteon 180e,
Alteon 184, Alteon AD3, Alteon AD4, and ACEswitch are trademarks of Nortel Networks, Inc. in the United States and certain other countries. Cisco® and EtherChannel® are registered trademarks of Cisco Systems, Inc. in the United States and certain other countries. Check Point® and FireWall-1® are trademarks or registered trademarks of Check Point Software Technologies Ltd. Any other trademarks appearing in this manual are owned by their respective companies. Originated in the U.S.A.

2

315393-J, January 2005

Contents
Preface 15 Who Should Use This Book 15 How This Book Is Organized 15 Related Documentation 16 Typographic Conventions 17 How to Get Help 18 Chapter 1: The Command Line Interface 19 Connecting to the Switch 20 Establishing a Console Connection 20 Requirements 20 Procedure 20 Establishing a Telnet Connection 21 Using a BOOTP Server 21 Running Telnet 21 Establishing an SSH Connection 22 Running SSH 22 Accessing the Switch 23 CLI Versus Setup 25 Command Line History and Editing 25 Idle Timeout 25 Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration 27 Using the Setup Utility 27 Information Needed For Setup 27 Starting Setup When You Log In 28 Stopping and Restarting Setup Manually 29 Stopping Setup 29 Restarting Setup 29 Setup Part 1: Basic System Configuration 29
3

315393-J, January 2005

Alteon OS 22.0.2 Command Reference

Setup Part 2: Port Configuration 31 Setup Part 3: VLANs 34 Setup Part 4: IP Configuration 35 IP Interfaces 35 Default Gateways 36 IP Routing 37 Setup Part 5: Final Steps 38 Optional Setup for SNMP Support 39 Optional Setup for Telnet Support 39 Setting Passwords 40 Changing the Default Administrator Password 40 Changing the Default User Password 42 Changing the Default Layer 4 Administrator Password 44 Chapter 3: Menu Basics 47 The Main Menu 47 Menu Summary 48 Global Commands 49 Command Line History and Editing 51 Command Line Interface Shortcuts 52 Command Stacking 52 Command Abbreviation 52 Tab Completion 52 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 53 Information Menu 53 System Information Menu 55 SNMPv3 System Information Menu 57 SNMPv3 USM User Table Information 58 SNMPv3 View Table Information 59 SNMPv3 Access Table Information 60 SNMPv3 Group Table Information 61 SNMPv3 Community Table Information 61 SNMPv3 Target Address Table Information 62 SNMPv3 Target Parameters Table Information 63 SNMPv3 Notify Table Information 64 SNMPv3 Dump Information 65 General System Information 66

4

Contents

315393-J, January 2005

Alteon OS 22.0.2 Command Reference

Show Last 30 Syslog Messages 67 Saved Syslog Messages 68 Management Port Information 69 SONMP Information 70 System Capacity Information 71 System Information Dump 74 Layer 2 Information Menu 77 Layer 2 FDB Information 78 Show All FDB Information 79 Clearing Entries from the Forwarding Database 80 Link Aggregation Control Protocol Information Menu 80 LACP Aggregator Information 81 LACP Port Information 82 LACP Dump Information 84 Layer 2 Spanning Tree Group Information 85 Trunk Group Information 87 VLAN Information 88 Layer2 Dump Information 89 Layer3 Information Menu 90 IP Routing Information 91 Show All IP Route Information 92 Type Parameters 92 Tag Parameters 93 ARP Information Menu 93 Show ARP Entries on Referenced SP 95 Show All ARP Entry Information 95 ARP Address List Information 96 BGP Information Menu 96 BGP Peer information 97 BGP Summary information 97 Dump BGP Information 98 OSPF Information Menu 98 OSPF General Information 100 OSPF Interface Information 100 OSPF Database Information 101 OSPF Information Route Codes 102 OSPF Dump Information 103 IP Information 104

315393-J, January 2005

Contents

5

Alteon OS 22.0.2 Command Reference

VRRP Information 105 Layer3 Dump Information 107 Layer 4 Information Menu 110 Session Table Information 112 Samples of Session Dumps for Different Applications 113 Session dump information in Alteon OS 115 Global SLB Information Menu 117 Show All Layer 4 Information 118 Link Status Information 119 Port Information 120 Bandwidth Management Information 121 BWM IP User Information Menu 122 BWM Contract Information 124 Security Information 126 Software Enabled Keys 127 Information Dump 127 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 129 Statistics Menu 129 Port Statistics Menu 131 Bridging Statistics 132 Ethernet Statistics 133 Interface Statistics 136 Interface Protocol Statistics 138 Link Statistics 139 RMON Statistics 140 Port Dump Statistics 143 Layer 2 Statistics Menu 144 FDB Statistics 145 LACP Statistics 146 Spanning Tree Group Statistics 147 Layer 3 Statistics Menu 148 OSPF Statistics Menu 150 OSPF Global Statistics 151 IP Statistics 155 Route Statistics 157 ARP statistics 159 VRRP Statistics 159

6

Contents

315393-J, January 2005

Alteon OS 22.0.2 Command Reference

DNS Statistics 160 ICMP Statistics 161 Interface Statistics 163 TCP Statistics 165 UDP Statistics 167 Server Load Balancing Statistics Menu 167 Server Load Balancing SP statistics Menu 170 SP Real Server Statistics 170 SP Filter Statistics 171 SP Maintenance Statistics 172 Global SLB Statistics Menu 174 Real Server Global SLB Statistics 175 Virtual Server Global SLB Statistics 175 Global SLB Site Statistics 176 Global SLB Maintenance Statistics 177 Real Server SLB Statistics 179 Per Service Octet Counters 179 Real Server Group Statistics 180 Virtual Server SLB Statistics 181 Filter SLB Statistics 181 SLB Layer7 Statistics Menu 182 Layer7 Redirection Statistics 182 Layer 7 SLB String Statistics 183 Layer 7 SLB Maintenance Statistics 184 SLB Secure Socket Layer Statistics 186 File Transfer Protocol SLB and Filter Statistics Menu 187 Active FTP SLB Parsing and Filter Statistics 188 Passive FTP SLB Parsing Statistics 188 FTP SLB Maintenance Statistics 189 FTP SLB Statistics Dump 189 RTSP SLB Statistics 190 DNS SLB Statistics 191 WAP SLB Statistics 192 SLB Maintenance Statistics 194 SIP SLB Statistics 196 Clearing the SLB Statistics 196 BWM Statistics Menu 198 BWM Switch Processor Statistics 199

315393-J, January 2005

Contents

7

Alteon OS 22.0.2 Command Reference

BWM Switch Processor Contract Statistics Menu 199 BWM Switch Processor Rate Contract Statistics 199 BWM Contract Statistics 200 BWM Contract Rate Statistics 201 BWM History Statistics 203 BWM Maintenance Statistics 204 BWM IP Users Statistics 204 Management Processor Statistics 205 MP Packet Statistics 206 TCP Statistics 208 UCB Statistics 208 MP-Specific SFD Statistics 209 CPU Statistics 209 SP Specific Statistics 210 SP-Specific Maintenance Statistics 211 CPU Statistics 211 Security Statistics 212 DOS Attack Statistics Menu 213 Types of DOS Attacks 214 IP Access Control List Statistics 214 UDP Blast Statistics 215 UDP Blast Dump Statistics 215 UDP Pattern Match Statistics 216 Rate Limiting Statistics 216 Dump Statistics for Security 217 SNMP Statistics 218 NTP Statistics 222 Port Mirroring Statistics Menu 224 Management Port Statistics 224 Dump Statistics 225 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 227 Configuration Menu 227 Viewing, Applying, and Saving Changes 228 Viewing Pending Changes 229 Applying Pending Changes 229 Saving the Configuration 229 System Configuration 231

8

Contents

315393-J, January 2005

Alteon OS 22.0.2 Command Reference

System Host Log Configuration 233 Seven Levels of Severity 234 Management Port Configuration Menu 234 Management Port Link Menu 237 SSH Server Configuration Menu 237 RADIUS Server Configuration 239 TACACS+ Server Configuration Menu 240 NTP Server Configuration 242 SynOptics Network Management Protocol Configuration 243 System SNMP Configuration 244 SNMPv3 Configuration Menu 247 User Security Model Configuration Menu 249 SNMPv3 View Configuration Menu 250 View-based Access Control Model Configuration Menu 251 SNMPv3 Group Configuration Menu 253 SNMPv3 Community Table Configuration Menu 254 SNMPv3 Target Address Table Configuration Menu 255 SNMPv3 Target Parameters Table Configuration Menu 256 SNMPv3 Notify Table Configuration Menu 257 System Health Check Configuration Menu 258 System Access Control Configuration 259 Management Networks Menu 260 User Access Control Menu 261 HTTPS Access Configuration Menu 263 System User ID Configuration Menu 264 Port Configuration 265 Alteon OS 2000 Series 265 Fast Ethernet Ports 265 SFP GBIC Ports 265 Port Link Configuration 267 Alteon OS 3000 Series 269 Port Configuration on Alteon OS 3408 269 Single-Mode ports 270 Single-Mode Copper Port Gigabit Ethernet Link Configuration Menu 271 Single-Mode SFP Gigabit Ethernet Port Link Configuration Menu 273 Dual-Mode Ports 274 Dual-Mode Copper Port Link Configuration 276 Dual-Mode SFP Gigabit Link Configuration Menu 277

315393-J, January 2005

Contents

9

Alteon OS 22.0. January 2005 .2 Command Reference Temporarily Disabling a Port 277 Port Mirroring Menu 278 Port-Mirroring Menu 278 Bandwidth Management Configuration 279 Bandwidth Management Contract Configuration 281 BWM Contract Time Policy Configuration Menu 283 Bandwidth Management Policy Configuration 284 Bandwidth Management Group Configuration Menu 285 Bandwidth Management Current Configuration 286 Layer 2 Configuration Menu 287 Spanning Tree Group Configuration 288 Bridge Spanning Tree Configuration 290 Spanning Tree Port Configuration 291 Trunk Configuration 292 Link Aggregation Control Protocol Menu 294 LACP Port Configuration Menu 296 VLAN Configuration 297 Layer 3 Configuration Menu 299 IP Interface Configuration 301 Default IP Gateway Configuration 302 Default Gateway Metrics 303 IP Static Route Configuration 304 ARP Configuration Menu 304 ARP Static Configuration Menu 305 IP Forwarding Configuration Menu 306 Local Network Route Caching Definition 306 Defining IP Address Ranges for the Local Route Cache 307 Network Filter Configuration 308 Route Map Configuration Menu 309 IP Access List Configuration Menu 311 Autonomous System Filter Path 312 Routing Information Protocol Configuration 313 Open Shortest Path First Configuration 315 Area Index Configuration Menu 317 OSPF Summary Range Configuration Menu 318 OSPF Interface Configuration Menu 319 OSPF Virtual Link Configuration Menu 321 OSPF Host Entry Configuration Menu 322 10 Contents 315393-J.

2 Command Reference OSPF Route Redistribution Configuration Menu.Alteon OS 22. January 2005 Contents 11 .0. 323 OSPF MD5 Key Configuration Menu 324 Border Gateway Protocol Configuration 324 BGP Peer Configuration Menu 326 BGP Redistribution Configuration Menu 328 BGP Aggregate Routing Configuration Menu 329 IP Forwarding Port Configuration Menu 330 Domain Name System Configuration Menu 331 Bootstrap Protocol Relay Configuration Menu 332 VRRP Configuration Menu 333 Virtual Router Configuration Menu 334 Virtual Router Priority Tracking Configuration 336 Virtual Router Group Menu 338 Virtual Router Group Priority Tracking Configuration Menu 340 Virtual Router Group Configuration 341 Virtual Router Group Priority Tracking Configuration 343 VRRP Interface Configuration 345 VRRP Tracking Configuration 346 Default Gateway Metrics 347 Security Configuration Menu 348 IP Address Access Control List Configuration Menu 349 Pattern Matching Menu 350 Port Security Configuration Menu 351 UDP Blast Protection Configuration Menu 352 Setup 353 Dump 353 Saving the Active Switch Configuration 354 Restoring the Active Switch Configuration 354 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 355 SLB Configuration 356 Filtering and Layer 4 (Server Load Balancing) 358 Real Server SLB Configuration 358 Real Server Layer 7 Configuration 362 Real server IDS Configuration Menu 363 Real Server Group SLB Configuration 364 SLB Health Check Types 367 Server Load Balancing Metrics 370 315393-J.

0.1p Advanced Menu 391 Advanced Filter TCP Configuration 392 IP Advanced Menu 393 ICMP Message Types 394 Layer 7 Advanced Filter Configuration Menu 395 SLB Filter Advanced Security Menu 397 Advanced Security Rate Limiting Configuration Menu 398 Port SLB Configuration 399 Global SLB Configuration 401 GSLB Remote Site Configuration 403 GSLB Network Preference Configuration Menu 405 GSLB Rule Configuration Menu 406 Global SLB Rule Metric Menu 408 Layer 7 SLB Resource Definition Menu 408 Web Cache Redirection Configuration 409 Server Load Balance Resource Configuration Menu 411 WAP Configuration 412 Synchronize Peer Switch Configuration 413 Peer Switch Configuration 414 Advanced Layer 4 Configuration 415 SYN Attack Detection Configuration Menu 418 Advanced SMT Real Server Port Configuration Menu 418 Inbound Link Load Balancing configuration Menu 419 Inbound Link Load Balancing Domain Record Menu 420 Inbound Link Load Balancing Mapping Menu 421 Advanced Health Check Configuration Menu 421 Scriptable Health Checks Configuration 423 SNMP Health Check Configuration 425 WAP Health Check Configuration 426 WSP Content Health Check 428 WTP and WSP Content Health Check Menu 429 12 Contents 315393-J. January 2005 .Alteon OS 22.2 Command Reference Virtual Server SLB Configuration 372 Virtual Server Service Configuration 375 Virtual Server RTSP Configuration 380 Cookie-Based Persistence 381 SLB Filter Configuration 383 Defining IP Address Ranges for Filters 387 Advanced Filter Configuration 388 802.

0.2 Command Reference Proxy IP Address Configuration Menu 430 SLB Peer Proxy IP Address Menu 431 Chapter 8: The Operations Menu 433 Operations Menu 433 Operations-Level Port Options 435 Operations-Level SLB Options 436 Real Server Group Operations 437 Global SLB Operations Menu 438 Operations-Level VRRP Options.Alteon OS 22. January 2005 Contents 13 . 439 Operations-Level Bandwidth Management Options 439 Operations-Level IP Options 440 Operations-Level BGP Options 440 Activating Optional Software 441 Removing Optional Software 442 Chapter 9: The Boot Options Menu 443 Boot Menu 443 Scheduled Reboot of the Switch 444 Scheduled Reboot Menu 444 Updating the Switch Software Image 444 Downloading New Software to Your Switch 444 Selecting a Software Image to Run 446 Uploading a Software Image from Your Switch 446 Selecting a Configuration Block 447 Resetting the Switch 448 Chapter 10: The Maintenance Menu 449 Maintenance Menu 449 System Maintenance Options 451 Forwarding Database Options 451 ARP Cache Options 452 ARP Entries on a Single Port 453 IP Route Manipulation 454 Debugging Options 455 Uuencode Flash Dump 456 TFTP System Dump Put 456 Clearing Dump Information 457 Panic Command 457 315393-J.

2 Command Reference Unscheduled System Dumps 458 Appendix A: Alteon OS Syslog Messages 459 LOG_WARNING 459 LOG_ALERT 460 LOG_CRIT 461 LOG_ERR 461 LOG_NOTICE 467 LOG_INFO 469 Appendix B: Alteon OS SNMP Agent 471 Appendix C: Performing a Serial Download 475 Glossary 477 Index 481 14 Contents 315393-J. January 2005 .0.Alteon OS 22.

see the Hardware Installation Guide for your particular switch model.” describes how to connect to the switch and access the information and configuration menus. Port Mirroring. 315393-J. the IEEE 802. “First-Time Configuration. ports. Who Should Use This Book This Command Reference is intended for network installers and system administrators engaged in configuring and maintaining a network.” shows how to view switch configuration parameters. January 2005 15 .1d Spanning Tree Protocol. The administrator should be familiar with Ethernet concepts. SNMP. and more. “The Configuration Menu. “The Information Menu.Preface The Alteon OS 22. “The Statistics Menu. including a menu map. Port Trunking. IP addressing. For documentation on installing the switches physically. and SNMP configuration parameters.2 Command Reference describes how to configure and use the Alteon OS software with your Alteon OS. and menu shortcuts.” shows how to view switch performance statistics.” describes how to use the Setup utility for initial switch configuration and how to change the system passwords. IP Routing. VLANs. Spanning Tree Protocol. “Menu Basics.” shows how to configure switch system parameters.0. How This Book Is Organized “The Command Line Interface.” provides an overview of the menu system. global commands.

Appendix C. how to clear it. “Alteon OS Syslog Messages. Alteon OS Browser-Based Interface (BBI) Quick Guide (315395-C) Provides a description of the Switch BBI and how to configure and access it on the Switch. if any.” lists the Management Interface Bases (MIBs) sup- ported in the switch software.” shows how to use commands which affect switch performance immediately. and more. “Alteon OS SNMP Agent.Alteon OS 22. “Performing a Serial Download. “The Operations Menu. the physical features. Alteon OS 22. and how to clear part or all of the forwarding database. This document provides a description of new features and caveats and limitations.” shows how to generate and access a dump of critical switch state information. “The Maintenance Menu.” shows a listing of syslog messages.2 Command Reference “The SLB Configuration Menu. how to install it. “Glossary” defines the terminology used throughout the book.2 Release Notes (315397-H). 16 Preface 315393-J.0.” describes the use of the primary and alternate switch images. in the software.” shows how to configure Server Load Balancing.0.” shows how to directly load a binary software image into the switch for upgrade or maintenance. The menu describes how to activate or deactivate optional software features. Related Documentation Alteon OS 22. “The Boot Options Menu. Filtering. Alteon Application Switch Hardware Installation Guide (315396-E) Provides a description of the Alteon Application Switch hardware.2 Application Guide (Part No.0. Appendix A. and how to reset the software to factory defaults. and how to troubleshoot it. January 2005 . how to load a new software image. 315394-H) Provides application explanations and configuration examples for the Switch. “Index” includes pointers to the description of the key words used throughout the book. Global Server Load Balancing. but do not alter permanent switch configurations (such as temporarily disabling ports). Appendix B.

Alteon OS 22. It also depicts on-screen computer output and Main# prompts. AaBbCc123 This bold type appears in command examples. and directories used within the text. Example View the readme.txt file. January 2005 Preface 17 . This also shows book titles. special terms. host# ls [-a] 315393-J. files. Replace host# telnet <IP address> the indicated text with the appropriate real name or value when using the command. [ ] Command items shown inside brackets are optional and can be used or excluded as the situation demands. Do not type the brackets. or words to be emphasized.0.2 Command Reference Typographic Conventions The following table describes the typographic styles used in this book. Read your User’s Guide thoroughly. Table 1 Typographic Conventions Typeface or Symbol AaBbCc123 Meaning This type is used for names of commands. enter: examples as a parameter placeholder. Do not type the brackets. Main# sys <AaBbCc123> This italicized type appears in command To establish a Telnet session. It shows text that must be typed in exactly as shown.

refer to the following URL: http://www. January 2005 .Alteon OS 22. and Africa Telephone 00800 8008 9009 or +44 (0) 870 907 9009 (800) 4NORTEL or (800) 466-7835 (61) (2) 8870-8800 (800) 810-5000 North America Asia Pacific China Additional information about the Nortel Networks Technical Solutions Centers is available at the following URL: http://www. contact the technical support staff for that distributor or reseller for assistance.nortelnetworks. your call is routed to a technical support person who specializes in supporting that product or service. If you purchased a Nortel Networks service program. To locate an ERC for your product or service.0. Middle East. When you use an ERC. contact one of the following Nortel Networks Technical Solutions Centers: Technical Solutions Center Europe.com/help/contact/erc/index.2 Command Reference How to Get Help If you purchased a service contract for your Nortel Networks product from a distributor or authorized reseller.html 18 Preface 315393-J.nortelnetworks.com/help/contact/global An Express Routing Code (ERC) is available for many Nortel Networks products and services.

text-based command line interface and menu system for access via local terminal or remote Telnet session A GUI-based Element Management System (EMS) for interactive network access SNMP support for access through network management software such as HP OpenView Alteon OS Browser-Based Interface (BBI) The command line interface is the most direct method for collecting switch information and performing switch configuration. The extensive Alteon OS switching software included in your switch provides a variety of options for accessing and configuring the switch: A built-in. require some administrative configuration before they can be used effectively. This chapter explains how to access the Command Line Interface (CLI) to the switch. however. January 2005 19 .CHAPTER 1 The Command Line Interface Your Alteon Application Switch is ready to perform basic switching functions right out of the box. Some of the more advanced features. 315393-J. you are presented with a hierarchy of menus that enable you to view information and statistics about the switch. and to perform any necessary configuration. Using a basic terminal.

Alteon OS 22. see “Setting Passwords” on page 40). To establish the connection. 20 Chapter 1: The Command Line Interface 315393-J.0.2 Command Reference Connecting to the Switch You can access the command line interface in any one of the following ways: Using a console connection via the console port Using a Telnet connection over the network Using an SSH connection to securely log into another computer over a network Establishing a Console Connection Requirements To establish a console connection with the switch. you will need the following: An ASCII terminal or a computer running terminal emulation software set to the parameters shown in the table below: Table 1-1 Console Configuration Parameters Parameter Baud Rate Data Bits Parity Stop Bits Flow Control Value 9600 8 None 1 None A standard serial cable with a male DB9 connector (see your switch hardware installation guide for specifics). January 2005 . 2. Power on the terminal. 3. Connect the terminal to the Console port using the serial cable. Procedure 1. You will next be required to enter a password for access to the switch. (For more information. press <Enter> a few times on your terminal.

January 2005 Chapter 1: The Command Line Interface 21 . The port must be manually configured with the proper IP address. you need to have a device with Telnet software located on the same network as the switch. Telnet access provides the same options for user access and administrator access as those available through the console port. you can access the CLI using a Telnet connection. To configure the switch for Telnet access. add the MAC address of the switch to the BOOTP configuration file located on the BOOTP server. the Alteon OS software is set up to request its IP address from a BOOTP server.Alteon OS 22. The MAC address can be found on a small white label on the back panel of the switch. followed by the switch IP address: telnet <IP address> You will then be prompted to enter a password as explained on page 22. using serial connection. NOTE – If connecting to the management port.2 Command Reference Establishing a Telnet Connection A Telnet connection offers the convenience of accessing the switch from any workstation connected to the network.0. before you can use these methods of accessing the switch. The MAC address can also be found in the System Information menu (see “System Information” on page 55). BOOTP is not supported. 315393-J. The switch must have an IP address. run the Telnet program on your workstation and issue the Telnet command. Refer to “Establishing a Telnet Connection” on page 21. NOTE – You need to enable Telnet and SSH. Running Telnet Once the IP parameters on the Alteon Application Switch are configured. from a BOOTP server on your network Manually. The switch can get its IP address in one of two ways: Dynamically. Using a BOOTP Server By default. If you have a BOOTP server on your network. To establish a Telnet connection with the switch. when you configure the switch IP address (see “Setup Part 1: Basic System Configuration” on page 29).

Alteon OS 22.0.2 Command Reference

Establishing an SSH Connection
Although a remote network administrator can manage the configuration of an Alteon Application Switch via Telnet, this method does not provide a secure connection. The SSH (Secure Shell) protocol enables you to securely log into another computer over a network to execute commands remotely. As a secure alternative to using Telnet to manage switch configuration, SSH ensures that all data sent over the network is encrypted and secure. The switch can do only one session of key/cipher generation at a time. Thus, a SSH/SCP client will not be able to login if the switch is doing key generation at that time or if another client has just logged in before this client. Similarly, the system will fail to do the key generation if a SSH/SCP client is logging in at that time. The supported SSH encryption and authentication methods are listed below. Server Host Authentication: Client RSA-authenticates the switch in the beginning of every connection. Key Exchange: RSA Encryption: 3DES-CBC, DES User Authentication: Local password authentication, Radius The following SSH clients have been tested: SSH 1.2.23 and SSH 1.2.27 for Linux (freeware) SecureCRT 3.0.2 and SecureCRT 3.0.3 (Van Dyke Technologies, Inc.) F-Secure SSH 1.1 for Windows (Data Fellows) NOTE – The Alteon OS implementation of SSH is based on SSH version 1.5 and supports SSH-1.5-1.X.XX. SSH clients of other versions (especially Version 2) will not be supported.

Running SSH
Once the IP parameters are configured and the SSH service is turned on the Alteon Application Switch, you can access the command line interface using an SSH connection. To establish an SSH connection with the switch, run the SSH program on your workstation by issuing the SSH command, followed by the switch IP address:
>> # ssh <switch IP address>

22

Chapter 1: The Command Line Interface

315393-J, January 2005

Alteon OS 22.0.2 Command Reference

or, if SecurID authentication is required, use the following command:
>> # ssh -1 ace <switch IP address>

You will then be prompted to enter your user name and password.

Accessing the Switch
To enable better switch management and user accountability, seven levels or classes of user access have been implemented on the Alteon Application Switch. Levels of access to CLI, Web management functions, and screens increase as needed to perform various switch management tasks. Conceptually, access classes are defined as follows: User interaction with the switch is completely passive—nothing can be changed on the Alteon Application Switch. Users may display information that has no security or privacy implications, such as switch statistics and current operational state information. Operators can only effect temporary changes on the Alteon Application Switch. These changes will be lost when the switch is rebooted/reset. Operators have access to the switch management features used for daily switch operations. Because any changes an operator makes are undone by a reset of the switch, operators cannot severely impact switch operation. Administrators are the only ones that may make permanent changes to the switch configuration—changes that are persistent across a reboot/reset of the switch. Administrators can access switch functions to configure and troubleshoot problems on the Alteon Application Switch. Because administrators can also make temporary (operator-level) changes as well, they must be aware of the interactions between temporary and permanent changes. Access to switch functions is controlled through the use of unique surnames and passwords. Once you are connected to the switch via local console, Telnet, or SSH, you are prompted to enter a password. The default user names/password for each access level are listed in the following table. NOTE – It is recommended that you change default switch passwords after initial configuration and as regularly as required under your network security policies. For more information, see “Setting Passwords” on page 40.

315393-J, January 2005

Chapter 1: The Command Line Interface

23

Alteon OS 22.0.2 Command Reference

Table 1-2 User Access Levels
User Account User Description and Tasks Performed The User has no direct responsibility for switch management. He or she can view all switch status information and statistics, but cannot make any configuration changes to the switch. Password user

SLB Operator

The SLB Operator manages Web servers and other Internet ser- slboper vices and their loads. In addition to being able to view all switch information and statistics, the SLB Operator can enable/disable servers using the Server Load Balancing operation menu. The Layer 4 Operator manages traffic on the lines leading to the l4oper shared Internet services. This user currently has the same access level as the SLB operator. and the access level is reserved for future use, to provide access to operational commands for operators managing traffic on the line leading to the shared Internet services. The Operator manages all functions of the switch. In addition to oper SLB Operator functions, the Operator can reset ports or the entire switch. The SLB Administrator configures and manages Web servers and other Internet services and their loads. In addition to SLB Operator functions, the SLB Administrator can configure parameters on the Server Load Balancing menus, with the exception of not being able to configure filters or bandwidth management. The Layer 4 Administrator configures and manages traffic on the lines leading to the shared Internet services. In addition to SLB Administrator functions, the Layer 4 Administrator can configure all parameters on the Server Load Balancing menus, including filters and bandwidth management. The superuser Administrator has complete access to all menus, information, and configuration commands on the Alteon Application Switch, including the ability to change both the user and administrator passwords. slbadmin

Layer 4 Operator

Operator

SLB Administrator

Layer 4 Administrator

l4admin

Administrator

admin

NOTE – With the exception of the “admin” user, access to each user level can be disabled by setting the password to an empty value. All user levels below “admin” will by default be initially disabled (empty password) until they are enabled by the “admin” user. This prevents inadvertently leaving the switch open to unauthorized users.

24

Chapter 1: The Command Line Interface

315393-J, January 2005

Alteon OS 22.0.2 Command Reference

CLI Versus Setup
Once the administrator password is verified, you are given complete access to the switch. If the switch is still set to its factory default configuration, the system will ask whether you wish to run Setup (see Chapter 2, “First-Time Configuration”), a utility designed to help you through the first-time configuration process. If the switch has already been configured, the Main Menu of the CLI is displayed instead. The following table shows the Main Menu with administrator privileges.
[Main Menu] info stats cfg oper boot maint diff apply save revert exit

-

Information Menu Statistics Menu Configuration Menu Operations Command Menu Boot Options Menu Maintenance Menu Show pending config changes [global command] Apply pending config changes [global command] Save updated config to FLASH [global command] Revert pending or applied changes [global command] Exit [global command, always available]

NOTE – If you are accessing a user account or Layer 4 administrator account, some menu options will not be available.

Command Line History and Editing
For a description of global commands, shortcuts, and command line editing functions, see “Menu Basics” on page 47.”

Idle Timeout
By default, the switch will disconnect your console or Telnet session after five minutes of inactivity. This function is controlled by the idle timeout parameter, which can be set from 1 to 10080 minutes. For information on changing this parameter, see “System Configuration” on page 231.

315393-J, January 2005

Chapter 1: The Command Line Interface

25

Alteon OS 22.0.2 Command Reference

26

Chapter 1: The Command Line Interface

315393-J, January 2005

CHAPTER 2

First-Time Configuration
To help with the initial process of configuring your switch, the Alteon OS software includes a Setup utility. The Setup utility prompts you step-by-step to enter all the necessary information for basic configuration of the switch. This chapter describes how to use the Setup utility and how to change system passwords. NOTE – If you are configuring a 2000-SSL Series Switch, you can use the Switch Setup Utility in the Alteon OS 2000-SSL Series Quick Setup Guide (part number 215102-A) instead for setting up the Switch and the SSL Processor. Then return to this guide for configuration and management information on your Switch.

Using the Setup Utility
Whenever you log in as the system administrator under the factory default configuration, you are asked whether you wish to run the Setup utility. Setup can also be activated manually from the command line interface any time after login.

Information Needed For Setup
Setup requests the following information: Basic system information Date & time Whether to use BOOTP or not Whether to use Spanning Tree Protocol or not Management port configuration Optional configuration for each port Speed, duplex, flow control, and negotiation mode (as appropriate) Whether to use VLAN tagging or not (as appropriate)
27

315393-J, January 2005

Alteon OS 22.0.2 Command Reference

Optional configuration for each VLAN Name of VLAN Which ports are included in the VLAN Optional configuration of IP parameters IP address, subnet mask, and broadcast address, and VLAN for each IP interface IP addresses for up to four default gateways Destination, subnet mask, and gateway IP address for each IP static route Whether IP forwarding is enabled or not Whether the RIP supply is enabled or not

Starting Setup When You Log In
The Setup prompt appears automatically whenever you login as the system administrator under the factory default settings. 1. Connect to the switch console. After connecting, the login prompt will appear as shown below.
Enter Password:

2.

Enter admin as the default administrator password. If the factory default configuration is detected, the system prompts:
Connected to Alteon Application Switch 2424 18:44:05 Mon April 12, 2004 The switch is booted with factory default configuration. To ease the configuration of the switch, a "Set Up" facility which will prompt you with those configuration items that are essential to the operation of the switch is provided. Would you like to run "Set Up" to configure the switch? [y/n]:

NOTE – If the default admin login is unsuccessful, or if the administrator Main Menu appears instead, the system configuration has probably been changed from the factory default settings. If you are certain that you need to return the switch to its factory default settings, see “Selecting a Configuration Block” on page 447. 3.
28

Enter y to begin the initial configuration of the switch, or n to bypass the Setup facility.

Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration

315393-J, January 2005

Alteon OS 22.0.2 Command Reference

Stopping and Restarting Setup Manually
Stopping Setup
To abort the Setup utility, press <Ctrl-C> during any Setup question. When you abort Setup, the system will prompt:
Would you like to run from top again? [y/n]

Enter n to abort Setup, or y to restart the Setup program at the beginning.

Restarting Setup
You can restart the Setup utility manually at any time by entering the following command at the administrator prompt:
# /cfg/setup

Setup Part 1: Basic System Configuration
When Setup is started, the system prompts:
"Set Up" will walk you through the configuration of System Date and Time, BOOTP, Spanning Tree, Management port, Port Speed/Mode, VLANs, and IP interfaces. [type Ctrl-C to abort "Set Up"] -----------------------------------------------------------Will you be configuring VLANs? [y/n]

1.

Enter y if you will be configuring VLANs. Otherwise enter n. If you decide not to configure VLANs during this session, you can configure them later using the configuration menus, or by restarting the Setup facility. For more information on configuring VLANs, see the Alteon OS 22.0.2 Application Guide. Next, the Setup utility prompts you to input basic system information.

2.

Enter the year of the current date at the prompt:
System Date: Enter year [2004]:

Enter the last two digits of the year as a number from 00 to 99. “00” is considered 2000. To keep the current year, press <Enter>.

315393-J, January 2005

Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration

29

Alteon OS 22.0.2 Command Reference

3.

Enter the month of the current system date at the prompt:
System Date: Enter month [4]:

Enter the month as a number from 1 to 12. To keep the current month, press <Enter>. 4. Enter the day of the current date at the prompt:
Enter day [12]:

Enter the date as a number from 1 to 31. To keep the current day, press <Enter>. 5. Enter the hour of the current system time at the prompt:
System Time: Enter hour in 24-hour format [18]:

Enter the hour as a number from 00 to 23. To keep the current hour, press <Enter>. 6. Enter the minute of the current time at the prompt:
Enter minutes [55]:

Enter the minute as a number from 00 to 59. To keep the current minute, press <Enter>. 7. Enter the seconds of the current time at the prompt:
Enter seconds [37]:

Enter the seconds as a number from 00 to 59. To keep the current second, press <Enter>. The system displays the date and time settings:
System clock set to 18:55:36 Mon April 12, 2004.

8.

Enable or disable the use of BOOTP at the prompt:
BootP Option: Current BOOTP usage: Enter new BOOTP usage [d/e]:

disabled

30

Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration

315393-J, January 2005

To skip port configuration. you will be prompted for IP address. When configuring port options for other switches. default gateway. and other management port options. or enter e to enable the use of BOOTP. or enter n to leave Spanning Tree on. Enter d to disable the use of BOOTP. 2. set up the management port: Management Port Config: Configure management port? [y/n] y If you answer y to configure the management port. January 2005 Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration 31 . 9. some of the prompts and options may be different.0. press <Enter> without specifying any port and go to “Setup Part 3: VLANs” on page 34. press <Enter>. before the system will prompt for IP parameters. or skip port configuration at the prompt: Port Config: Enter port number: (1-28) If you wish to change settings for individual ports. BOOTP must be disabled however. Turn Spanning Tree Protocol on or off at the prompt: Spanning Tree: Current Spanning Tree setting: ON Turn Spanning Tree OFF? [y/n] Enter y to turn off Spanning Tree.2 Command Reference If available on your network. broadcast address. Select the port to configure. To keep the current setting. 315393-J. subnet mask. a BOOTP server can supply the switch with IP parameters so that you do not have to enter them manually. If desired. Setup Part 2: Port Configuration NOTE – The port configuration options shown in these steps are for the Alteon OS 2424.Alteon OS 22. enter the number of the port you wish to configure. 1.

6. or none to turn flow control off for the port. half for half-duplex. tx for transmit flow control. 32 Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration 315393-J. the system prompts: Port Auto Negotiation: Current Port 1 autonegotiation: Enter new value ["on"/"off"]: on Enter on to enable autonegotiation. To keep the current setting. If appropriate. press <Enter>.0. or enter any to have the switch auto-sense the port speed. To keep the current setting. off to disable it. or any to have the switch auto-negotiate. If you selected a port that has an Ethernet/Fast Ethernet connector.Alteon OS 22. If appropriate. the system prompts: Fast Link Configuration: Port Speed: Current Port 1 speed setting: 10/100 Enter new speed ["10"/"100"/"any"]: Enter the port speed from the options available. 5. both to enable both. To keep the current setting.2 Command Reference 3. configure Ethernet/Fast Ethernet port speed. If you selected a port that has an Ethernet/Fast Ethernet connector. If you selected a port that has an Ethernet/Fast Ethernet connector. configure Ethernet/Fast Ethernet port flow control. If appropriate. 4. or press <Enter> to keep the current setting. the system prompts: Port Flow Control: Current Port 1 flow control setting: both Enter new value ["rx"/"tx"/"both"/"none"]: Enter rx to enable receive flow control. press <Enter>. configure Ethernet/Fast Ethernet port duplex mode. press <Enter>. January 2005 . the system prompts: Port Mode: Current port 1 mode setting: any Enter new speed ["full"/"half"/"any"] Enter full for full-duplex. configure Ethernet/Fast Ethernet port autonegotiation mode. If you selected a port that has an Ethernet/Fast Ethernet connector. If appropriate.

enable or disable VLAN tagging for the port. To keep the current setting. both to enable both.2 Command Reference 7. configure Gigabit Ethernet port autonegotiation mode. press <Enter> without specifying any port. The system prompts you to configure the next port: Enter port number: When you are through configuring ports. Otherwise. 8. If appropriate. repeat the steps in this section. the system prompts: Gig Link Configuration: Port Flow Control: Current Port 1 flow control setting: both Enter new value ["rx"/"tx"/"both"/"none"]: Enter rx to enable receive flow control. tx for transmit flow control.Alteon OS 22. If configuring VLANs.0. off to disable it. If appropriate. or none to turn flow control off for the port. To keep the current setting. 315393-J. 10. If you selected a port that has a Gigabit Ethernet connector. configure Gigabit Ethernet port flow parameters. If you have selected to configure VLANs back in Part 1. press <Enter>. the system prompts: Port VLAN tagging config (tagged port can be a member of multiple VLANs) Current TAG flag: disabled Enter new TAG status [d/e]: Enter d to disable VLAN tagging for the port or enter e to enable VLAN tagging for the port. the system prompts: Port Auto Negotiation: Current Port 1 autonegotiation: Enter new value ["on"/"off"]: on Enter on to enable port autonegotiation. press <Enter>. If you selected a port that has a Gigabit Ethernet connector. 9. or press <Enter> to keep the current setting. January 2005 Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration 33 .

When you are finished adding ports to this VLAN. enter the number of the VLAN you wish to configure.2 Command Reference Setup Part 3: VLANs If you chose to skip VLANs configuration back in Part 1. 1. Pending new VLAN name: "VLAN 2" Enter new VLAN name. The system prompts you to define the first port in the VLAN: Define ports in VLAN: Current VLAN 2: empty Enter port numbers one per line. 3.0. skip to “Setup Part 4: IP Configuration” on page 35. 2. NULL at end: Type the first port number to add to the current VLAN and press <Enter>. The right angle prompt appears: > For each additional port in the VLAN. 4. press <Enter>. Repeat this until all ports for the VLAN being configured are entered. press <Enter> without typing a VLAN number and go to “Setup Part 4: IP Configuration” on page 35. press <Enter> without specifying any port. Enter the VLAN port numbers. without quotes: Entering a new VLAN name is optional. NULL at end: 34 Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration 315393-J. or skip VLAN configuration at the prompt: VLAN Config: Enter VLAN number from 2 to 4090. To skip VLAN configuration. NULL at end: If you wish to change settings for individual VLANs. Enter the new VLAN name at the prompt: VLAN is newly created. type the port number and press <Enter> to move to the next line. The system prompts you to configure the next VLAN: VLAN Config: Enter VLAN number from 2 to 4090.Alteon OS 22. To use the pending new VLAN name. Select the VLAN to configure. January 2005 .

press <Enter> without typing an interface number and go to “Default Gateways” on page 36. IP Interfaces IP interfaces are used for defining subnets to which the switch belongs. When all VLANs have been configured. Up to 256 IP interfaces can be configured on the Alteon Application Switch. To skip IP interface configuration. enter the number of the IP interface you wish to configure. For the specified IP interface. enter the IP subnet mask in dotted decimal notation: Current subnet mask: Enter new subnet mask: 0. Select the IP interface to configure.0. the system prompts for IP parameters. If you wish to configure individual IP interfaces.0. January 2005 Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration 35 . or skip interface configuration at the prompt: IP Config: IP interfaces: Enter interface number: (1-256) NOTE – The total number of interfaces on an Alteon Application Switch 2424-SSL is 1-255.Alteon OS 22. No two IP interfaces can be on the same IP subnet. Otherwise. At the prompt. 3. 1. press <Enter>.0. if you disabled BOOTP.0 To keep the current setting. press <Enter> without specifying any VLAN.0. skip to Setup Part 5: Final Steps.0 315393-J. Setup Part 4: IP Configuration If BOOTP was enabled back in Part 1. enter the IP address in dotted decimal notation: Current IP address: Enter new IP address: 0. The IP address assigned to each IP interface provides the switch with an IP presence on your network.0.2 Command Reference Repeat the steps in this section until all VLANs have been configured. The interfaces can be used for connecting to the switch for remote configuration. and for routing between subnets and VLANs (if used). 2.

or press <Enter> without specifying a VLAN number to accept the current setting. specify a VLAN for the interface. If configuring VLANs.2 Command Reference To keep the current setting.0. or n to leave it disabled: Enable IP interface? [y/n] 7. 5. 6. At the prompt. This prompt appears if you selected to configure VLANs back in Part 1: Current VLAN: Enter new VLAN: 1 Enter the number for the VLAN to which the interface belongs.0. Default Gateways 1. enter y to enable the IP interface. enter the broadcast IP address in dotted decimal notation: Current broadcast address: Enter new broadcast address: 0. select a default gateway for configuration.Alteon OS 22. At the prompt. press <Enter> without specifying any interface number. or skip default gateway configuration: IP default gateways: Enter default gateway number: (1-259) Enter the number for the default gateway to be configured. 36 Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration 315393-J. To skip default gateway configuration. January 2005 . At the prompt. press <Enter>. The system prompts you to configure another interface: Enter interface number: (1-256) Repeat the steps in this section until all IP interfaces have been configured.0. press <Enter>. 4. press <Enter> without typing a gateway number and go to “IP Routing” on page 37. When all interfaces have been configured.0 To keep the current setting.

enter n and proceed to Step 2. IP Routing When IP interfaces are configured for the various subnets attached to your switch.0. 1. 3.To keep the current setting. can be accomplished through configuring static routes or by letting the switch learn routes dynamically. enter the IP address for the selected default gateway: Current IP address: Enter new IP address: 0. This eliminates the need to bounce inter-subnet communication off an external router device.0 Enter the IP address in dotted decimal notation. enable or disable the RIP supply: Enable RIP supply? [y/n] 315393-J. or n to leave it disabled: Enable default gateway? [y/n] 4. Routing on more complex networks. 2. When all default gateways have been configured. IP routing between them can be performed entirely within the switch. At the prompt. where subnets may not have a direct presence on the Alteon Application Switch. At the prompt. press <Enter> without specifying any number.2 Command Reference 2. press <Enter>.0. The system prompts you to configure another default gateway: Enter default gateway number: (1-259) Repeat the steps in this section until all default gateways have been configured. At the prompt. This part of the Setup program prompts you to configure the various routing parameters. January 2005 Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration 37 .0. At the prompt. enable or disable forwarding for IP Routing: Enable IP forwarding? [y/n] Enter y to enable IP forwarding. To disable IP forwarding. enter y to enable the default gateway.Alteon OS 22. or press <Enter> without specifying an address to accept the current setting.

Enter n to continue without saving the changes.Alteon OS 22. Enter n to return to the Apply the changes? prompt. NOTE – After initial configuration is complete. 38 Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration 315393-J. or n to continue. We recommend that you review the changes. 3. decide whether you wish to review the configuration changes: Review the changes made? [y/n] Enter y to review the changes made during this session of the Setup utility. Next. 4. If you do not apply or save the changes. Changes are normally saved at this point.0. At the prompt. the system prompts whether to abort them: Abort all changes? [y/n] Enter y to discard the changes. decide whether to make the changes permanent: Save changes to flash? [y/n] Enter y to save the changes to flash. or n to continue without applying. 2.2 Command Reference Setup Part 5: Final Steps 1. decide whether to apply the changes at the prompt: Apply the changes? [y/n] Enter y to apply the changes. When prompted. it is recommended that you change the default passwords as shown in “Setting Passwords” on page 40. January 2005 . Changes are normally applied. 5. Enter n to continue without reviewing the changes. When prompted. decide whether to restart Setup or continue: Would you like to run from top again? [y/n] Enter y to restart the Setup utility from the beginning.

>> System# apply >> System# save Optional Setup for Telnet Support NOTE – This step is optional. Apply and save configuration if you are not configuring the switch with Telnet support. >> # /cfg/sys/ssnmp/rcomm|wcomm 3. NOTE – If you need to configure SNMPv3. Enable telnet.0. they are public and private respectively. 1.2 Command Reference Optional Setup for SNMP Support NOTE – This step is optional. Perform this procedure only if you are planning on connecting to the switch through any telnet application. refer to “SNMPv3 Configuration Menu” on page 247 of this manual. Otherwise apply and save after “Optional Setup for Telnet Support” on page 39. such as Alteon EMS. 1. January 2005 Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration 39 . Apply and save SNMP and /or telnet configuration(s). Perform this procedure only if you are planning on using SNMPbased tools. Set SNMP read or write community string. >> System# apply >> System# save 315393-J. >> # /cfg/sys/access/snmp (disabled/read-only/read-write) [d/r/w]: 2. By default. >> # /cfg/sys/access/tnet ena 2.Alteon OS 22. Enable SNMP and select one of the options.

you must login using the administrator password.Alteon OS 22. call your technical support representative for help using the password fix-up mode. Setting Passwords It is recommended that you change the user and administrator passwords after initial configuration and as regularly as required under your network security policies. 2. To change the default password. January 2005 . enter y to enable the RIP supply. Connect to the switch and log in using the admin password. RIP listen is set by default. including the ability to change both the user and administrator passwords. use the following command to access the Configuration Menu: Main# /cfg 40 Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration 315393-J.2 Command Reference If your network uses Routing Interface Protocol (RIP).0. and configuration commands. follow this procedure: 1. To change both the user password and the administrator password. Passwords cannot be modified from the user command mode. The default password for the administrator account is admin. enter n to disable it. information. NOTE – If you forget your administrator password. From the Main Menu. Changing the Default Administrator Password The administrator has complete access to all menus. When RIP is enabled. Otherwise.

Port Menu pmirr . [System Menu] syslog mmgmt sshd radius tacacs ntp sonmp ssnmp health access date time idle notice bannr smtp hprompt bootp cur - Syslog Menu Management Port Menu SSH Server Menu RADIUS Authentication Menu TACACS+ Authentication Menu NTP Server Menu SONMP Menu System SNMP Menu System Health Check Menu System Access Menu Set system date Set system time Set timeout for idle CLI sessions Set login notice Set login banner Set SMTP host Enable/disable display hostname (sysName) in CLI prompt Enable/disable use of BOOTP Display current system-wide parameters 315393-J.0.2 Command Reference The Configuration Menu is displayed. From the Configuration Menu.Backup current configuration to tftp server gtcfg .Port Mirroring Menu bwm .Layer 3 Menu slb .Security Menu setup .Server Load Balancing (Layer 4-7) Menu security . January 2005 Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration 41 .Layer 2 Menu l3 .Bandwidth Management Menu l2 .Restore current configuration from tftp server 3.Dump current configuration to script file ptcfg . [Configuration Menu] sys .System-wide Parameter Menu port .Alteon OS 22.Step by step configuration set up dump . use the following command to select the System Menu: >> Configuration# sys The System Menu is displayed.

From the System menu. This password cannot be changed from the user account. 7. Enter the new administrator password.0. 42 Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration 315393-J. Apply and save your change by entering the following commands: System# apply System# save Changing the Default User Password The user login has limited control of the switch. again. call your technical support representative for help using the password fix-up mode. Enter current administrator password: NOTE – If you forget your administrator password. Enter the new administrator password at the prompt: Enter new administrator password: 8. validation required. use the following path to select the User menu: System# access/user 5.. Only the administrator has the ability to change passwords. as shown in the following procedure.2 Command Reference 4. System# user/admpw 6. Enter the current administrator password at the prompt: Changing ADMINISTRATOR password.. at the prompt: Re-enter new administrator password: 9. Select the administrator password. Through a user account.Alteon OS 22. January 2005 . The default password for the user account is user. but you can’t make configuration changes. you can view switch information and statistics.

.2 Command Reference 1. 2.Alteon OS 22. Entering the administrator password confirms your authority. January 2005 Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration 43 . at the prompt: Re-enter new user password: 8. use the following command to select the System Menu: >> Configuration# sys 4. From the Main Menu. Enter the current administrator password at the prompt.0. use the following command to access the Configuration Menu: Main# cfg 3. Only the administrator can change the user password. again. Enter the new user password. Connect to the switch and log in using the admin password.. Apply and save your changes: System# apply System# save 315393-J. validation required. System# access/user/usrpw 5. Enter current administrator password: 6. Select the user password. Changing USER password. Enter the new user password at the prompt: Enter new user password: 7. From the Configuration Menu.

Select the Layer 4 administrator password: System# l4apw 4. you must login using the administrator password. Enter the current administrator password (not the Layer 4 administrator password) at the prompt: Changing L4 ADMINISTRATOR password. use the following path to access the user command: Main# /cfg/sys/access/user 3. From the Main Menu. Connect to the switch and log in using the administrator account. 2. but can configure changes only on the Server Load Balancing menus. 5. January 2005 .0.. Enter the new Layer 4 administrator password at the prompt: Enter new L4 administrator password: 6. again.2 Command Reference Changing the Default Layer 4 Administrator Password The Layer 4 administrator has limited control of the switch. Through a Layer 4 administrator account. follow this procedure: 1. validation required. The default password for the Layer 4 administrator account is l4admin. call your technical support representative for help using the password fix-up mode. you can view all switch information and statistics. Enter current administrator password: NOTE – If you forget your administrator password. To change the default password..Alteon OS 22. Passwords cannot be modified from the Layer 4 administrator account or the user account. To change any switch password. at the prompt: Re-enter new L4 administrator password: 44 Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration 315393-J. Enter the new administrator password.

Apply and save your change by entering the following commands: System# apply System# save 315393-J.2 Command Reference 7. January 2005 Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration 45 .0.Alteon OS 22.

2 Command Reference 46 Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration 315393-J.Alteon OS 22. January 2005 .0.

In addition.CHAPTER 3 Menu Basics The Alteon Application Switch’s Command Line Interface (CLI) is used for viewing switch information and statistics. To make the CLI easy to use. NOTE – The ssl option is only visible on the Alteon OS 2000-SSL Series. Some features are not available under the user login. and provides a list of commands and shortcuts that are commonly available from all the menus within the CLI. always available] 315393-J. January 2005 47 . [Main Menu] info stats cfg oper boot maint diff apply save revert exit - Information Menu Statistics Menu Configuration Menu Operations Command Menu Boot Options Menu Maintenance Menu Show pending config changes [global command] Apply pending config changes [global command] Save updated config to FLASH [global command] Revert pending or applied changes [global command] Exit [global command. the various commands have been logically grouped into a series of menus and sub-menus. This chapter describes the Main Menu commands. the administrator can use the CLI for performing all levels of switch configuration. The Main Menu The Main Menu appears after a successful connection and login. The following table shows the Main Menu for the administrator login. along with a summary of what each command will do. Below each menu is a prompt where you can enter any command appropriate to the current menu. Each menu displays a list of commands and/or sub-menus that are available.

Included are port. Changes to configuration are not active until explicitly applied. 48 Chapter 3: Menu Basics 315393-J. This menu is used for bringing ports temporarily in and out of service. Statistics Menu Provides sub-menus for displaying switch performance statistics. IF. and to clear entries in the forwarding database and the ARP and routing tables. and Layer 4 statistics.0. It includes sub-menus for configuring every aspect of the switch. selecting configuration blocks. Configuration Menu This menu is available only from an administrator login. TCP. Layer 4 settings. DNS. SNMP. routing. It is also used for activating or deactivating optional software packages. VRRP. Boot Options Menu This menu is used for upgrading switch software. ARP. and more. enabling you to generate a dump of the critical state information in the switch. Maintenance Menu This menu is used for debugging purposes.Alteon OS 22. January 2005 . and for resetting the switch when necessary. performing port mirroring. IP. Operations Command Menu Operations-level commands are used for making immediate and temporary changes to switch configuration. UDP.2 Command Reference Menu Summary Information Menu Provides sub-menus for displaying information about the current status of the switch: from basic system settings to VLANs. Changes can be saved to non-volatile memory. and enabling or disabling Server Load Balancing functions. ICMP.

the current setting is displayed. January 2005 Chapter 3: Menu Basics 49 . Remove pending configuration changes between “apply” commands. go to the Main Menu. and for applying and saving configuration changes. Write configuration changes to non-volatile flash memory. this is used to separate multiple commands placed on the same line. Show any pending configuration changes. or print . Apply pending configuration changes. or command separator ! Execute command from history pwd quit revert history Table 3-1 Description of Global Commands Command ? command or help .. Use this command to restore configuration parameters set since last “apply” command.. When used without the command parameter. You will see the following screen: Global Commands: [can be issued from any menu] help up print lines verbose exit diff apply save ping traceroute telnet pushd popd who The following are used to navigate the menu structure: . type help. navigating through menus.0.Alteon OS 22. When used without a value. For help on a specific command. These commands are useful for obtaining online help. Exit from the command line interface and log out. or up / Action Provides more information about a specific command on the current menu. Print current menu . Display the current menu. Go up one level in the menu structure. lines diff apply save revert exit or quit 315393-J.2 Command Reference Global Commands Some basic commands are recognized throughout the menu hierarchy. Move up one menu level / Top menu if first. Otherwise. Set the number of lines (n) that display on the screen at one time. If placed at the beginning of a command. a summary of the global commands is displayed. The default is 24 lines.

Alteon OS 22. msec delay (optional) is the number of milliseconds between attempts. By default. the -d or -data option for network ports is in effect. When used without a value. By default. tries (optional) is the number of attempts (1-32). specify the -m or -mgmt option. 2 =Verbose: Everything is shown. traceroute pwd verbose n telnet history pushd popd who 50 Chapter 3: Menu Basics 315393-J. specify the -m or -mgmt option. The DNS parameters must be configured if specifying hostnames (see “Domain Name System Configuration Menu” on page 331). and delay (optional) is the number of milliseconds for wait for the response. the -d or -data option for network ports is in effect.0. If the management port is used. By default. the -d or -data option for network ports is in effect. This command stores the current location of the menu tree. Where IP address is the hostname or IP address of the device. Use this command to identify the route used for station-to-station connectivity across the network. The format is as follows: <hostname>|<IP address> [port] [-m|-mgmt|-d|-data]. This command displays the currently logged user’s session information. If the management port is used. The format is as follows: traceroute <host name>| <IP address> [<max-hops (1-32)> [msec delay]] [-m|-mgmt|-d|-data] Where IP address is the hostname or IP address of the target station. but no menus. the DNS parameters must be configured if specifying hostnames. This command brings up the history of the last 10 commands. January 2005 . specify the -m or -mgmt option. 1 =Normal: Prompts and requested output are shown.2 Command Reference Table 3-1 Description of Global Commands Command ping Action Use this command to verify station-to-station connectivity across the network. This command takes the user one level back to the menu location stored by the last pushd command. maxhops (optional) is the maximum distance to trace (1-16 devices). As with ping. Sets the level of information displayed on the screen: 0 =Quiet: Nothing appears except errors—not even prompts. Display the command path used to reach the current menu. This command is used to telnet out of the switch. The format is as follows: ping <host name>|<IP address> [tries <(1-32)> [msec delay]] [-m| -mgmt|-d|-data] Where IP address is the hostname or IP address of the device. If the management port is used. the current setting is displayed.

(Also the down arrow key.) Recall the next command from the history list.2 Command Reference Command Line History and Editing Using the command line interface. The recalled command can be entered as is.0. you can retrieve and modify previously entered commands with just a few keystrokes. Redraw the screen.) Erase one character to the left of the cursor position. Clear the entire line. (Also the Delete key.) Move the cursor back one position to the left. Insert new characters at the cursor position. Kill (erase) all characters from the cursor position to the end of the command line. The recalled command can be entered as is. Move cursor to the end of the command line. This can be used multiple times to work forward through the last 10 commands.) Move the cursor forward one position to the right. Repeat the nth command shown on the history list. The following options are available globally at the command line: Table 3-2 Command Line History and Editing Options Option history !! !n <Ctrl-p> Description Display a numbered list of the last 10 previously entered commands. (Also the up arrow key. January 2005 Chapter 3: Menu Basics 51 . Delete one character at the cursor position. Move the cursor to the beginning of command line. Repeat the last entered command. or edited using the options below. <Ctrl-n> <Ctrl-a> <Ctrl-e> <Ctrl-b> <Ctrl-f> <Backspace> <Ctrl-d> <Ctrl-k> <Ctrl-l> <Ctrl-u> Other keys 315393-J. or edited using the options below.Alteon OS 22.) Recall the previous command from the history list. This can be used multiple times to work backward through the last 10 commands. (Also the right arrow key. (Also the left arrow key.

January 2005 . For example. the keyboard shortcut to access the Spanning Tree Port Configuration Menu from the Main# prompt is as follows: Main# cfg/l2/stg/port Command Abbreviation Most commands can be abbreviated by entering the first characters which distinguish the command from the others in the same menu or sub-menu. 52 Chapter 3: Menu Basics 315393-J. If only one command fits the input text when <Tab> is pressed. Entering additional letters will further refine the list of commands or options displayed. For example.2 Command Reference Command Line Interface Shortcuts Command Stacking As a shortcut. You can connect as many commands as required to access the menu option that you want. the CLI will display all commands or options in that menu that begin with that letter. waiting to be entered.Alteon OS 22.0. separated by forward slashes (/). the command shown above could also be entered as follows: Main# c/l2/st/p Tab Completion By entering the first letter of a command at any menu prompt and hitting <Tab>. If the <Tab> key is pressed without any input on the command line. you can type multiple commands on a single line. the currently active menu will be displayed. that command will be supplied on the command line.

see page 90.Show Security status swkey . For details.Dump all information The information provided by each menu option is briefly described in Table 4-1 on page 53. For details. Table 4-1 Information Menu Options (/info) Command Syntax and Usage sys Displays system menu information.Layer 4-7 Information Menu link .Show link status port .Layer 2 Information Menu l3 . l3 Displays the Layer 3 information menu. l2 Displays the Layer 2 Information Menu. see page 77. with pointers to where detailed information can be found. January 2005 53 .Show enabled software features dump . This chapter discusses how to use the command line interface to display switch infor- mation. see page 55.CHAPTER 4 The Information Menu You can view configuration information for the switch in both the user and administrator command modes. /info Information Menu [Information Menu] sys .Bandwidth Management Information Menu security .Show port information bwm .Layer 3 Information Menu slb . To view menu options.System Information Menu l2 . 315393-J.

see page 126.0. including: Port number Whether the port uses VLAN Tagging or not Port VLAN ID (PVID) Port name VLAN membership For details. or auto) Flow control for transmit and receive (no. depending on your configuration). To view a sample. or 1000) Duplex mode (half. bwm Displays Bandwidth Management information. see page 127. see page 119. including: Port number Port speed (10. To view menu options. set your communication software on your workstation to capture session data prior to issuing the dump commands. For details. January 2005 . 100. If you want to capture dump data to a file.2 Command Reference Table 4-1 Information Menu Options (/info) Command Syntax and Usage slb Displays the Layer 4 Information Menu. yes. swkey Displays a list of all the optional software packages which have been activated or installed on your switch. see page 110. see page 120. For details. dump Dumps all switch information available from the Information Menu (10K or more. security Displays current UDP blast settings and the security status of the port.Alteon OS 22. port Displays port status information. 54 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-J. full. For details see page 127. see page 121. or auto) Link status (up or down) For details. 10/100. link Displays configuration information about each port.

To view the menu options. 315393-J. log Displays last 30 syslog messages.0. mgmt Displays Management port information. see page 57. January 2005 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 55 . and date.Alteon OS 22. day. savedlog Displays syslog messages that are saved in flash. general Displays general system information including: System information like time. See page 67 for a sample output and detailed information. if one is configured See page 66 for a sample output. See page 68 for a sample output. See page 69 for detailed information. Switch model name and number How long the switch has been up Time of last boot MAC address of the switch management processor Internal SSL Processor MAC Address if the switch is 2424-SSL IP address of IP interface #1 Hardware order number and part numbers of the Mainboard Hardware.2 Command Reference /info/sys System Information Menu [System Menu] snmpv3 general log savedlog mgmt sonmp capacity fan temp dump SNMPv3 Information Menu Show general system information Show last 30 syslog messages Display syslog messages saved in flash Show Management Port information Show SONMP topology table information Show switch capacity information Show switch fan status Show switch temperature sensor status Dump all system information Table 4-2 Information System Menu Options (/info/sys) Command Syntax and Usage snmpv3 Displays SNMPv3 Information Menu. and Fast Ethernet Board Hardware Software image file and version number Configuration name Log-in banner. Management Processor Board Hardware.

0. capacity gen|bwm|l2|l3|slb|port Displays the switch capacity information. The output contains capacity information about Layer 2. See page 71 for a sample output. General switch information. temp Displays the temperature status of the switch sensors. See page 74 for a sample output. OSPF. fan Displays the fan status of the switch. and SNMPv3. 56 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-J. This output displays the maximum switch capacity for the various applications and services that the switch supports. January 2005 . VRRP. GSLB.Alteon OS 22. Network Filters.2 Command Reference Table 4-2 Information System Menu Options (/info/sys) Command Syntax and Usage sonmp Displays SONMP topology table information. Route Maps. Layer 4-7. Layer 3. RIP. See page 70 for detailed information. dump Displays all system information. Bandwidth Management. which includes Server Load Balancing. Health Checks. Filters. BGP.

user name. To view a sample.Show vacmViewTreeFamily table information access . [SNMPv3 Information Menu] usm . view Displays information about view. the security model.Show all SNMPv3 information Table 4-3 SNMPv3 information Menu Options (/info/sys/snmpv3) Command Syntax and Usage usm Displays User Security Model (USM) table information.Show notify table information dump . see page 62. To view a sample.Show vacmSecurityToGroup table information comm . To view a sample. mask and type of view. comm Displays information about the community table information. see page 61. see page 58. access Displays View-based Access Control information.0.Show community table information taddr . see page 61. and group name. To view a sample.2 Command Reference /info/sys/snmpv3 SNMPv3 System Information Menu SNMP version 3 (SNMPv3) is an extensible SNMP Framework that supplements the SNMPv2 Framework by supporting the following: a new SNMP message format security for messages access control remote configuration of SNMP parameters For more details on the SNMPv3 architecture please refer to RFC2271 to RFC2276. group Displays information about the group that includes. sub tress. To view the table. 315393-J.Alteon OS 22. see page 60. January 2005 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 57 . taddr Displays the Target Address table information. To view a sample.Show vacmAccess table information group .Show targetParams table information notify .Show targetAddr table information tparam .Show usmUser table information view . see page 59.

NO PRIVACY 58 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-J. To view a sample. see page 63. January 2005 . To view a sample. notify Displays the Notify table information. see page 64. which is an indication that the messages sent on behalf of the user can be authenticated the privacy protocol. /info/sys/snmpv3/usm SNMPv3 USM User Table Information The User-based Security Model (USM) in SNMPv3 provides security services such as authentication and privacy of messages.Alteon OS 22. The USM user table contains information like: the user name a security name in the form of a string whose format is independent of the Security Model an authentication protocol. usmUser Table: User Name -------------------------------admin adminmd5 adminsha v1v2only Protocol -------------------------------NO AUTH. DES PRIVACY HMAC_SHA.0. dump Displays all the SNMPv3 information. DES PRIVACY NO AUTH. see page 65. To view a sample.2 Command Reference Table 4-3 SNMPv3 information Menu Options (/info/sys/snmpv3) Command Syntax and Usage tparam Displays the Target parameters table information. NO PRIVACY HMAC_MD5. This security model makes use of a defined set of user identities displayed in the USM user table.

6. Mask Type 315393-J.6.3.1.3.3 1.3. Displays the bit mask.3.6.3. This indicates whether messages sent on behalf of this user are protected from disclosure using a privacy protocol.Alteon OS 22.1.1. The software also supports two authentication algorithms: MD5 and HMAC-SHA.6. Displays whether a family of view subtrees is included or excluded from the MIB view.16 1.6. January 2005 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 59 .2 Command Reference Table 4-4 USM User Table Information Parameters (/info/sys/usm) Field User Name Protocol Description This is a string that represents the name of the user that you can use to access the switch.15 1. View Name ----------------org v1v2only v1v2only v1v2only v1v2only Subtree -----------------1. Displays the MIB subtree as an OID string.0.18 Mask -------------Type -------included included excluded excluded excluded Table 4-5 SNMPv3 View Table Information Parameters (/info/sys/snmpv3/view) Field View Name Subtree Description Displays the name of the view.2 supports DES algorithm for privacy.0. A view subtree is the set of all MIB object instances which have a common Object Identifier prefix to their names. Alteon OS 22.3 1. /info/sys/snmpv3/view SNMPv3 View Table Information The user can control and restrict the access allowed to a group to only a subset of the management information in the management domain that the group can access within each context by specifying the group’s rights in terms of a particular MIB view for security reasons.3.6.

The options are: exact and prefix. for example. This group's access rights are determined by a read-view.2 Command Reference /info/sys/snmpv3/access SNMPv3 Access Table Information The access control sub system provides authorization services. Displays the security model used. Level Match ReadV WriteV NotifyV 60 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-J. The View-based Access Control Model defines a set of services that an application can use for checking access rights of a group. Displays the match for the contextName. The write-view represents the set of object instances authorized for the group when writing objects. a write-view and a notify-view. Displays the minimum level of security required to gain rights of access. Displays the Notify view to which this entry authorizes the notify access. January 2005 . Displays the MIB view to which this entry authorizes the write access.----------.---------admin usm noAuthNoPriv exact org org org v1v2grp snmpv1 noAuthNoPriv exact org org v1v2only admingrp usm authPriv exact org org org Table 4-6 SNMPv3 Access Table Information (/info/sys/snmpv3/access) Field Group Name Prefix Model Description Displays the name of group. which could be the read or write type of operation or notification into a MIB view. a context. For example. Group Name Prefix Model Level Match ReadV WriteV NotifyV ---------.------.-----. SNMPv1. security information. Displays the MIB view to which this entry authorizes the read access. authNoPriv. and a message type.Alteon OS 22. or authPriv. Displays the prefix that is configured to match the values. The vacmAccessTable maps a group name. or SNMPv2 or USM. The read-view represents the set of object instances authorized for the group while reading the objects.-----. The notify-view represents the set of object instances authorized for the group when sending a notification. noAuthNoPriv.0.

and SNMPv3.2 Command Reference /info/sys/snmpv3/group SNMPv3 Group Table Information A group is a combination of security model and security name that defines the access rights assigned to all the security names belonging to that group. which is any one of: USM. /info/sys/snmpv3/comm SNMPv3 Community Table Information This command displays the community table information stored in the SNMP engine. Displays the name for the group.0. SNMPv2.---------.Alteon OS 22. Sec Model ---------snmpv1 usm usm usm User Name ------------------------------v1v2only admin adminmd5 adminsha Group Name -------------------v1v2grp admin admingrp admingrp Table 4-7 SNMPv3 Group Table Information Parameters (/info/sys/snmpv3/group) Field Sec Model User Name Group Name Description Displays the security model used. Displays the access name of the group. Index Name User Name Tag ---------. The group is identified by a group name. January 2005 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 61 .-------------------. SNMPv1.---------trap1 public v1v2only v1v2trap 315393-J.

Alteon OS 22.0.2 Command Reference

Table 4-8 SNMPv3 Community Table Parameters (/info/sys/snmpv3/comm)
Field Index Name User Name Tag Description Displays the unique index value of a row in this table Displays the community string, which represents the configuration. Displays the User Security Model (USM) user name. Displays the community tag. This tag specifies a set of transport endpoints from which a command responder application accepts management requests and to which a command responder application sends an SNMP trap.

/info/sys/snmpv3/taddr
SNMPv3 Target Address Table Information
This command displays the SNMPv3 target address table information, which is stored in the SNMP engine.
Name Transport Addr Port Taglist Params ---------- --------------- ---- ---------- --------------trap1 47.81.25.66 162 v1v2trap v1v2param

Table 4-9 SNMPv3 Target Address Table Information Parameters (/info/sys/ snmpv3/taddr)
Field Name Transport Addr Port Taglist Params Description Displays the locally arbitrary, but unique identifier associated with this snmpTargetAddrEntry. Displays the transport addresses. Displays the SNMP UDP port number. This column contains a list of tag values which are used to select target addresses for a particular SNMP message. The value of this object identifies an entry in the snmpTargetParamsTable. The identified entry contains SNMP parameters to be used when generating messages to be sent to this transport address.

62

Chapter 4: The Information Menu

315393-J, January 2005

Alteon OS 22.0.2 Command Reference

/info/sys/snmpv3/tparam
SNMPv3 Target Parameters Table Information
Name MP Model --------------- -------v1v2param snmpv2c User Name -------------v1v2only Sec Model --------snmpv1 Sec Level --------noAuthNoPriv

Table 4-10 SNMPv3 Target Parameters Table Information (/info/sys/snmpv3/ tparam)
Field Name MP Model User Name Sec Model Description Displays the locally arbitrary, but unique identifier associated with this snmpTargeParamsEntry. Displays the Message Processing Model used when generating SNMP messages using this entry. Displays the securityName, which identifies the entry on whose behalf SNMP messages will be generated using this entry. Displays the security model used when generating SNMP messages using this entry. The system may choose to return an inconsistentValue error if an attempt is made to set this variable to a value for a security model which the system does not support. Displays the level of security used when generating SNMP messages using this entry.

Sec Level

315393-J, January 2005

Chapter 4: The Information Menu

63

Alteon OS 22.0.2 Command Reference

/info/sys/snmpv3/notify
SNMPv3 Notify Table Information
Name Tag -------------------- -------------------v1v2trap v1v2trap

Table 4-11 SNMPv3 Notify Table Information (/info/sys/snmpv3/notify)
Field Name Tag Description The locally arbitrary, but unique identifier associated with this snmpNotifyEntry. This represents a single tag value which is used to select entries in the snmpTargetAddrTable. Any entry in the snmpTargetAddrTable that contains a tag value equal to the value of this entry, is selected. If this entry contains a value of zero length, no entries are selected.

64

Chapter 4: The Information Menu

315393-J, January 2005

Alteon OS 22.0.2 Command Reference

/info/sys/snmpv3/dump
SNMPv3 Dump Information
usmUser Table: User Name -------------------------------admin adminmd5 adminsha v1v2only Protocol -------------------------------NO AUTH, NO PRIVACY HMAC_MD5, DES PRIVACY HMAC_SHA, DES PRIVACY NO AUTH, NO PRIVACY

vacmAccess Table: Group Name Prefix Model Level Match ReadV WriteV NotifyV ---------- ------ ------- ---------- ------ ------- -------- -----admin usm noAuthNoPriv exact org org org v1v2grp snmpv1 noAuthNoPriv exact org org v1v2only admingrp usm authPriv exact org org org vacmViewTreeFamily Table: View Name Subtree -------------------- --------------org 1.3 v1v2only 1.3 v1v2only 1.3.6.1.6.3.15 v1v2only 1.3.6.1.6.3.16 v1v2only 1.3.6.1.6.3.18

Mask ------------

Type -------------included included excluded excluded excluded

vacmSecurityToGroup Table: Sec Model User Name ---------- ------------------------------snmpv1 v1v2only usm admin usm adminsha

Group Name ----------------------v1v2grp admin admingrp

snmpCommunity Table: Index Name User Name Tag ---------- ---------- -------------------- ---------snmpNotify Table: Name Tag -------------------- -------------------snmpTargetAddr Table: Name Transport Addr Port Taglist Params ---------- --------------- ---- ---------- --------------snmpTargetParams Table: Name MP Model User Name Sec Model Sec Level -------------------- -------- ------------------ --------- -------

315393-J, January 2005

Chapter 4: The Information Menu

65

Alteon OS 22.0.2 Command Reference

/info/sys/general
General System Information
On an Alteon Application Switch 2424:
Enter password: System Information at

9:06:50 Tue Oct 26, 2004

Alteon Application Switch 2424 Switch is up 1 day, 19 hours, 52 minutes and 55 seconds. Last boot: 13:13:52 Fri Oct 22, 2004 (power cycle) MAC Address: 00:0e:40:2f:5b:00 IP Hardware Order No: EB1412003 Mainboard Hardware: Management Processor Board Hardware: Fast Ethernet Board Hardware: (If 1) Address: 47.80.23.249 Part No: P314090-A Part No: P314080-A Part No: P314091-A Rev: 03 Rev: 02 Rev: 03

Software Version 22.0.2.0 (FLASH image2), active configuration.

On an Alteon Application Switch 2424-SSL:
Enter password: System Information at 19:03:14 Tue Oct 26, 2004 Alteon Application Switch 2424-SSL Switch is up 2 days, 19 hours, 6 minutes and 33 seconds. Last boot: 23:56:35 Mon Oct 25, 2004 (unknown reason or power cycle) Last apply: 14:43:37 Fri Oct 22, 2004 Last save: 14:45:44 Fri Oct 22, 2004 MAC Address: 00:0c:f8:90:ee:00 IP (If 20) Address: 21.10.0.1 Internal SSL Processor MAC Address: 00:0c:f8:90:ee:1f Hardware Order No: EB1412006 Mainboard Hardware: Part No: P315720-A Rev: 03 Management Processor Board Hardware: Part No: P314080-A Rev: 02 Fast Ethernet Board Hardware: Part No: P314091-A Rev: 03 Software Version 22.0.2 (FLASH image1), active configuration.

66

Chapter 4: The Information Menu

315393-J, January 2005

Alteon OS 22.0.2 Command Reference

NOTE – The display of temperature will come up only if the temperature of any of the sensors exceeds 60oC. There will be a warning from the software if any of the sensors exceeds this temperature threshold. The switch will shut down if the power supply overheats and the temperature gets to 100oC. Information about fan failures will also be displayed if one or more fans are not functioning.

/info/sys/log
Show Last 30 Syslog Messages
Date Time Criticality level Message Nov 19 12:16:51 ALERT stp: STG 1, new root bridge Nov 19 13:52:03 ALERT ip: cannot contact default gateway 47.80.22.1 Nov 19 13:52:23 NOTICE ip: default gateway 47.80.22.1 operational Nov 19 13:52:23 NOTICE ip: default gateway 47.80.22.1 enabled Nov 19 14:21:27 ALERT ip: cannot contact default gateway 47.80.22.1 Nov 19 14:21:47 NOTICE ip: default gateway 47.80.22.1 operational Nov 19 14:21:47 NOTICE ip: default gateway 47.80.22.1 enabled Nov 19 14:38:55 NOTICE mgmt: admin login from host 47.81.27.4 Nov 19 14:44:02 NOTICE mgmt: admin idle timeout from Telnet/SSH Nov 19 16:15:06 INFO mgmt: new configuration applied Nov 19 16:15:20 INFO mgmt: new configuration saved Nov 19 16:18:44 INFO mgmt: new configuration applied Nov 19 16:19:37 ERROR mgmt: Error: Apply not done Nov 19 16:19:57 INFO mgmt: new configuration applied Nov 19 16:34:35 NOTICE mgmt: admin login from host 47.81.27.4 Nov 19 16:39:43 NOTICE mgmt: admin idle timeout from Telnet/SSH Nov 19 16:39:59 NOTICE mgmt: admin login from host 47.81.27.4 Nov 19 16:54:13 NOTICE mgmt: admin idle timeout from Telnet/SSH Nov 19 17:20:37 NOTICE mgmt: admin login from host 47.81.27.4 Nov 19 17:26:21 NOTICE mgmt: admin login from host 47.81.25.49 Nov 19 17:31:53 NOTICE mgmt: admin idle timeout from Telnet/SSH

Each syslog message has a criticality level associated with it, included in text form as a prefix to the log message. One of eight different prefixes is used, depending on the condition that the administrator is being notified of, as shown below. EMERG: indicates the system is unusable ALERT: Indicates action should be taken immediately CRIT: Indicates critical conditions ERR: indicates error conditions or error operations
Chapter 4: The Information Menu 67

315393-J, January 2005

Alteon OS 22.0.2 Command Reference

WARNING: indicates warning conditions NOTICE: indicates a normal but significant condition INFO: indicates an information message DEBUG: indicates a debut-level message

/info/sys/savedlog
Saved Syslog Messages
Aug 20 13:54:21 NOTICE 47.80.22.1 operational Aug 20 13:57:53 ALERT gateway 47.80.22.1 Aug 20 13:57:57 NOTICE 47.80.22.1 operational Aug 20 13:58:23 ALERT gateway 47.80.22.1 Aug 20 13:58:33 NOTICE 47.80.22.1 operational Aug 24 14:43:43 NOTICE Aug 24 14:49:50 NOTICE Aug 24 14:51:38 NOTICE Aug 24 14:57:30 NOTICE Aug 24 15:05:54 NOTICE Aug 24 15:11:40 NOTICE Aug 24 16:00:40 NOTICE Aug 24 16:00:52 NOTICE ip: management port default gateway ip: cannot contact management port default ip: management port default gateway ip: cannot contact management port default ip: management port default gateway mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: admin login from host 47.81.25.12 admin idle timeout from Telnet/SSH admin login from host 47.81.25.12 admin idle timeout from Telnet/SSH admin login from host 47.81.25.12 admin idle timeout from Telnet/SSH admin login from host 47.81.25.12 switch reset from CLI

68

Chapter 4: The Information Menu

315393-J, January 2005

Alteon OS 22.0.2 Command Reference

/info/sys/mgmt
Management Port Information
Speed ----100 Duplex -----full Link ---up

MAC address: 00:01:81:2e:a4:8d Interface information: 47.80.23.251 255.255.254.0 Gateway information: 47.80.22.1

47.80.23.255

Use this command to display Management port information on an Alteon Application Switch including: Port speed (10/100) Duplex mode (half, full, any, or auto) Link (Up or down) MAC Address of the system IP address of the Interface IP address of the gateway.

315393-J, January 2005

Chapter 4: The Information Menu

69

Alteon OS 22.0.2 Command Reference

/info/sys/sonmp
SONMP Information
This command displays the SynOptics Network Management Protocol (SONMP) topology table. SONMP protocol is enabled on Alteon Application Switches using the /cfg/sys/ sonmp on command, and is necessary so that an Alteon switch can be discovered by the Nortel Networks Optivity Switch Manager.When SONMP is enabled, devices on the network exchange multicast packets namely: flatnet hellos and segment hellos. The IP address of the device is written into the hello packets. As the network devices exchange information, a topology table is built like the one shown below.
Slot Port ----0 /0 1 /11 1 /11 1 /11 1 /11 1 /11 Seg Id --------------- --47.80.23.247 0 47.80.22.1 770 47.80.23.25 259 47.80.23.25 260 47.80.23.241 257 50.10.10.1 263 IP address MAC address ----------------00:01:81:2e:a3:60 00:e0:16:7c:28:24 00:60:cf:81:54:28 00:60:cf:81:54:38 00:60:cf:43:a2:10 00:60:cf:46:d5:60 Local State Seg ------------------ ----- ----Alteon2224 true topChanged Passport1200 true heartbeat Passport8610 true heartbeat Passport8610 true heartbeat AlteonAD4 true topChanged Alteon184 true topChanged Chassis Type

Table 4-12 SONMP Information Parameters Description
Parameter Slot Port Description Specifies the slot and port on which the topology message was received. This is the IP address of the sender of the topology message. The “segment identifier” of the segment from which the remote agent send the topology message. Different devices may use different methods for representing the segment identifier. The MAC address of the sender of the topology message. The chassis type of the device that sent the topology message. Indicates if the sender of the topology message is on the same Ethernet segment (i.e. not across a bridge) as the reporting agent. The current state of the sender of the topology message. the values are: topChanged—topology information has recently changed heartbeat—topology information unchanged. new—sending agent is in new state.

IP Address Seg ID

Mac Address Chassis Type Local Seg

State

70

Chapter 4: The Information Menu

315393-J, January 2005

.0. 315393-J. January 2005 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 71 .Alteon OS 22.2 Command Reference /info/sys/capacity System Capacity Information The following sample output from an Alteon OS 2424 displays the maximum and currently enabled switch capacity for various services and applications from Layer 2-7. Maximum LAYER 2 FDB FDB per SP VLANs Static Trunk Groups LACP Trunk Groups Trunks per Trunk Group Spanning Tree Groups Monitor Ports LAYER 3 IP Interfaces IP Gateways IP Routes Static Routes ARP Entries Static ARP Entries Local Nets DNS Servers BOOTP Servers RIP Interfaces OSPF OSPF OSPF OSPF OSPF LSDB Interfaces Areas Summary Ranges Virtual Links Hosts Limit 16384 8192 255 12 28 8 16 1 Current(Enabled) 54 1(1) 0(0) 16(1) 256 4+255 4096 128 8192 128 5 2 2 256 256 3 16 3 128 12288 1(1) 1+0(1+0) 7 0 5 0 0 0 0 0 0(0) 0(0) 0(0) 0(0) 0(0) Continued..

.. 72 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-J.PORTS Port # Client Server Filter RTS Continued.0.2 Command Reference BGP Peers BGP Route Aggregators Route Maps Network Filters AS Filters VRRP Routers VRRP Router Groups VRRP Interfaces SLB (LAYER 4-7) Real Servers Server Groups Virtual Servers Virtual Services Real Services Global Global Global Global Global Global Global Global Global Global SLB SLB SLB SLB SLB SLB SLB SLB SLB SLB Domains Services Local Servers Remote Servers Remote Sites Failovers per Remote Site Networks Geographical Regions Rules Metrics Per Rule 16 16 32 256 8 1024 16 256 0(0) 0(0) 0(0) 0(0) 0(0) 0(0) 0 1024 1024 1024 1024 8192 1024 8192 1024 1024 64 2 128 7 128 8 2048 32 32 5 1024 2097104 16 64 8 0(0) 0 0(0) 0(0) 0(0) 0(0) 0(0) 0(0) 2(2) 0(0) 7(7) 0(1) 8(8) 0(0) 0 0 0 1 0 0(0) Filters PIPs Scriptable Health Checks SNMP Health Checks Rules for URL Parsing SLB Sessions Number of Rports to Vport Domain Records Mapping Per Domain Record LAYER 4 .Alteon OS 22. January 2005 .

2 Command Reference BWM Policies Contracts Groups Contracts per Group Time Policies per Contract GENERAL Syslog hosts RADIUS servers NTP servers SMTP hosts Mnet/Mmask End Users Panic Dumps MP memory SP memory SNMPv3 SNMPv3 SNMPv3 SNMPv3 SNMPv3 Users Views Access Groups Target Address Entries Target Params Entries 512 256 32 8 2 0 1(1) 0 2 2 1 1 5 10 2 128M 128M 16 128 32 16 16 0 0 0 1 0 3 5 2 0 0 315393-J.0.Alteon OS 22. January 2005 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 73 .

25. Last 30 syslog message information: Jun 22 15:16:00 NOTICE system: link up on port 9 Jun 22 15:16:30 NOTICE system: rebooted (power cycle) Jun 22 15:16:32 NOTICE ip: default gateway 47.27.6 Jun 30 12:37:26 NOTICE mgmt: admin idle timeout from Telnet/SSH Jul 2 9:51:57 NOTICE mgmt: admin login from host 47.8.81.81. Jun 23 12:18:36 NOTICE mgmt: admin idle timeout from Telnet/SSH Jun 30 12:32:11 NOTICE mgmt: admin login from host 47.6 Continued 74 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-J.27.81.22. January 2005 .81.81.80. 7 minutes and 58 seconds.0 (FLASH image1).0.23. 2008 (power cycle) MAC Address: 00:0e:40:2f:5b:00 IP Hardware Order No: EB1412003 Mainboard Hardware: Management Processor Board Hardware: Fast Ethernet Board Hardware: (If 1) Address: 47.0.249 Part No: P314090-A Part No: P314080-A Part No: P314091-A Rev: 03 Rev: 02 Rev: 03 6. topology change detected Jun 22 15:28:55 NOTICE mgmt: admin login from host 47.22. active configuration.25.12 Jun 23 12:13:39 INFO mgmt: new configuration applied Jun 23 12:13:53 NOTICE mgmt: Failed login attempt via BBI.1 operational Jun 22 15:16:32 NOTICE ip: default gateway 47.99 Jul 2 9:56:11 NOTICE mgmt: admin logout from Telnet/SSH Jul 6 9:41:55 NOTICE mgmt: admin login from host 47.0.12 Jul 6 9:47:06 NOTICE mgmt: admin idle timeout from Telnet/SSH Jul 6 10:22:32 NOTICE mgmt: admin login from host 47.25.1 enabled Jun 22 15:17:05 ALERT stp: STG 1. Last boot: 15:15:56 Tue Jun 22.80.80.2 Command Reference /info/sys/dump System Information Dump System Information at 10:23:41 Tue Jul Alteon Application Switch 2424 Switch is up 13 days. 2004 Software Version 22. 19 hours.81.12 Jun 22 15:32:57 ERROR cli: No apply needed Jun 22 15:35:33 INFO mgmt: new configuration applied Jun 22 15:40:37 NOTICE mgmt: admin idle timeout from Telnet/SSH Jun 23 12:13:04 NOTICE mgmt: admin login from host 47.Alteon OS 22.

-----.3.-----.------testgrp usm v1v2grp snmpv1 v1v2only wyingrp usm admingrp usm test1grp usm test2grp usm Protocol -------------------------------NO AUTH.-------.16 Continued 315393-J.15 1.Alteon OS 22.3.2 Command Reference Management port information: Speed ----10/100 Duplex -----any Link ---disabled Interface information: Gateway information: Engine ID = 80:00:07:50:03:00:0E:40:2F:5B:00 usmUser Table: User Name -------------------------------test wyin adminmd5 adminsha v1v2only vacmAccess Table: Group Name Prefix Model ---------. NO PRIVACY HMAC_MD5.0.6.--------noAuthNoPriv exact iso iso iso noAuthNoPriv exact iso iso noAuthNoPriv authPriv noAuthNoPriv noAuthNoPriv exact exact exact exact iso iso iso iso iso iso iso iso iso iso iso iso vacmViewTreeFamily Table: View Name Subtree -------------------.6. DES PRIVACY HMAC_SHA.1.------------------------iso 1 included v1v2only included v1v2only excluded v1v2only excluded 1 Mask ------------ Type ---- 1. NO PRIVACY NO AUTH.1. DES PRIVACY NO AUTH.6. NO PRIVACY Level Match ReadV WriteV NotifyV -----------. January 2005 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 75 .3.6.3.

------------Local Seg ----State ----- 76 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-J.------------.--------------.3.---.-------------------snmpTargetAddr Table: Name Transport Addr Port Taglist Params ---------.18 vacmSecurityToGroup Table: Sec Model User Name Group Name ---------. January 2005 .---------------.6.------------------------------.---.0.---------.6.-------.-------------------.---------.-----------------------snmpv1 v1v2only v1v2grp usm test testgrp usm wyin wyingrp usm test1 test1grp usm adminmd5 admingrp usm adminsha admingrp snmpCommunity Table: Index Name User Name Tag ---------.Alteon OS 22.--------------.3.2 Command Reference v1v2only excluded 1.--------.--------------snmpTargetParams Table: Name MP Model User Name Sec Model Sec Level -------------------.------Slot IP address Seg MAC address Chassis Type Port Id ----.1.---------snmpNotify Table: Name Tag -------------------.

For details. stg <STG index to display or carriage return for all STGs> In addition to seeing if Spanning Tree Protocol is enabled or disabled.Alteon OS 22. see page 80. lacp Displays Link Aggregation Control Protocol Information Menu. January 2005 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 77 . see page 83. For details.2 Command Reference /info/l2 Layer 2 Information Menu [Layer 2 Menu] fdb lacp stg trunk vlan dump Forwarding Database Information Menu Link Aggregation Control Protocol Menu Show STG information Show Trunk Group information Show VLAN information Dump all layer 2 information Table 4-13 Layer 2 Information Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage fdb Displays the Forwarding Database Information Menu. see page 78. you can view the state of each port in the various trunk groups. see page 87. you can view the following STP bridge information: Priority Hello interval Maximum age value Forwarding delay Aging time You can also see the following port-specific STP information: Port number and priority Cost State For details. For details.0. 315393-J. trunk When trunk groups are configured.

Each SP supports up to 8K entries. including: VLAN Number VLAN Name Status Port membership of the VLAN For details.2 Command Reference Table 4-13 Layer 2 Information Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage vlan <VLAN number to display or carriage return to display all VLANs> Displays VLAN configuration information.Show a single FDB entry by MAC address port . You are prompted to enter the MAC address of the device. [Forwarding Database Menu] find . For example. xxxxxxxxxxxx. January 2005 . xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx. 78 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-J. Enter the MAC address using the format. You can also enter the MAC address using the format. 08:00:20:12:34:56. The FDB also shows which other ports have seen frames destined for a particular MAC address. /info/l2/fdb Layer 2 FDB Information The forwarding database (FDB) contains information that maps the media access control (MAC) address of each known device to the switch port where the device address was learned. dump Displays all Layer 2 information. Table 4-14 Layer 2 FDB Information Menu Options (/info/l2/fdb) Command Syntax and Usage find <MAC address> [<VLAN>] Displays a single database entry by its MAC address.Show FDB entries referenced by a single SP dump .Show FDB entries on a single trunk vlan . For example.Show all FDB entries NOTE – The master forwarding database supports up to 16K MAC address entries on the MP per switch.0.Alteon OS 22.Show FDB entries on a single VLAN refpt . see page 88.Show FDB entries on a single port trunk . 080020123456.

” 315393-J. dump Displays all entries in the Forwarding Database. see page 79.2 Command Reference Table 4-14 Layer 2 FDB Information Menu Options (/info/l2/fdb) Command Syntax and Usage port <port number.------------00:02:01:00:00:00 300 23 FWD 1 2 1 23 00:02:01:00:00:01 300 23 FWD 1 2 1 23 00:02:01:00:00:02 300 23 FWD 1 2 1 23 00:02:01:00:00:03 300 23 FWD 1 2 1 23 00:02:01:00:00:04 300 23 FWD 1 2 1 23 00:02:01:00:00:05 300 23 FWD 1 2 1 23 00:02:01:00:00:06 300 23 FWD 1 2 1 23 00:02:01:00:00:07 300 23 FWD 1 2 1 23 00:02:01:00:00:08 300 23 FWD 1 2 1 23 00:02:01:00:00:09 300 23 FWD 1 2 1 23 00:02:01:00:00:0a 300 23 FWD 1 2 1 23 00:02:01:00:00:0b 300 23 FWD 1 2 1 23 00:02:01:00:00:0c 300 23 FWD 1 2 1 23 An address that is in the forwarding (FWD) state. If the state for the port is listed as unknown (UNK). For more information.-------------.0. no outbound port is indicated.----. January 2005 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 79 . When in the trunking (TRK) state.---. refpt <SP number (1-4)> Displays the FDB entries referenced by a single port. trunk <trunk group number> Displays all FDB entries on a single trunk. /info/l2/fdb/dump Show All FDB Information MAC address VLAN Port State Referenced SPs Referenced ports ----------------. When an address is in the unknown state. the port field represents the trunk group number.---. although ports which reference the address as a destination will be listed under “Reference ports.Alteon OS 22. the MAC address has not yet been learned by the switch. vlan <VLAN number (1-4090)> Displays all FDB entries on a single VLAN. but has only been seen as a destination address. means that it has been learned by the switch. 0 for "unknown"> Displays all FDB entries for a particular port.

If the state is listed as a virtual server (VIP).Show LACP port information . see port <port index 1 to max num ports> Displays information of an LACP port. [LACP Menu] aggr port dump . the MAC address is for a standard VRRP virtual router.Show all LACP ports information Table 4-15 Link Aggregation Control Protocol Information Menu Options (/info/ lacp) Command Syntax and Usage aggr <aggregator index 1 to max num ports> Displays information an LACP aggregator. see dump Displays LACP information of all the ports. see page 83. Clearing Entries from the Forwarding Database To delete a MAC address from the forwarding database (FDB) or to clear the entire FDB. To view a sample output.Alteon OS 22.2 Command Reference If the state for the port is listed as an interface (IF). /info/l2/lacp Link Aggregation Control Protocol Information Menu The following menu options display the Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) information on the Alteon OS. January 2005 .0. To view a sample output. To view a sample output. refer to “Forwarding Database Options” on page 451. the MAC address is for a virtual server router—a virtual router with the same IP address as a virtual server.Show LACP aggregator information for the port . 80 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-J. Use this command to verify the state of ports in an LACP trunk group.

00:01:81:2e:a1:d1 Actor System Priority .300 Partner System Priority .1 ready .0.10 index 0 port 1 index 1 port 2 index 2 port 3 index 3 port 4 index 4 port 5 index 5 port 6 index 6 port 7 index 7 port 8 index 8 port 9 index 9 port 10 315393-J.300 Actor Oper Key . January 2005 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 81 .FALSE Actor Admin Key .2 Command Reference /info/lacp/aggr LACP Aggregator Information Aggregator Id 1 ---------------------------------------------MAC address .32768 Partner System ID .TRUE Number of Ports in aggr .Alteon OS 22.32768 Actor System ID .00:01:81:2e:a1:b0 Individual .00:0d:29:e3:4a:00 Partner Oper Key .

0x0 Partner Oper Port state Activity: Active Timeout: Long FALSE FALSE Aggregation: Distributing: TRUE FALSE Long Aggregation: TRUE Distributing: FALSE TRUE TRUE Long Aggregation: TRUE Continued 82 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-J.Alteon OS 22. January 2005 .0.TRUE Actor Actor Actor Actor Actor Actor System ID System Priority Admin Key Oper Key Port Number Port Priority Admin System Priority Oper System Priority Admin System ID Oper System ID Admin Key Oper Key Admin Port Number Admin Port Priority Oper Port Number Oper Port Priority 00:01:81:2e:a1:b0 32768 300 300 1 32768 0 32768 00:00:00:00:00:00 00:0d:29:e3:4a:00 0 1 0 0 4 32768 Partner Partner Partner Partner Partner Partner Partner Partner Partner Partner Actor Admin Port state Activity: Active Timeout: Synchronization:FALSE Collecting: Defaulted: FALSE Expired: Actor Oper Port state Activity: Active Timeout: Synchronization:TRUE Collecting: Defaulted: FALSE Expired: Partner Admin Port state .TRUE lacp_admin_enabled .2 Command Reference /info/lacp/port LACP Port Information port 1 ---------------------------------------------lacp_enabled .

LACP_PERIODIC_SLOW_STATE .LACP_RX_CURRENT_STATE .FALSE turned ON! 315393-J.FALSE .Selected .FALSE .LACP_MUX_COL_DIS_STATE .Alteon OS 22. January 2005 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 83 .0.2 Command Reference Synchronization: TRUE Defaulted: FALSE Collecting: Expired: TRUE Distributing: FALSE TRUE Rx machine state Mux machine state Periodic machine state Individual Selected Aggregator ID Attached Aggregator ID ready_n ntt selected port_moved Collision and Detection state .1 .FALSE .1 .

0.Alteon OS 22.2 Command Reference /info/lacp/dump LACP Dump Information port attached trunk aggr ------------------------------------------------------------------1 active 300 300 y 32768 1 13 2 active 300 300 y 32768 1 13 3 active 300 300 y 32768 1 13 4 active 300 300 y 32768 1 13 5 active 300 300 y 32768 1 13 6 active 300 300 y 32768 1 13 7 active 300 300 y 32768 1 13 8 active 300 300 y 32768 1 13 9 active 300 300 n 32768 --10 active 300 300 n 32768 --11 active 300 300 n 32768 --12 active 300 300 n 32768 --13 active 300 300 n 32768 --14 off 14 14 n 32768 --15 off 15 15 n 32768 --16 off 16 16 n 32768 --17 off 17 17 n 32768 --18 off 18 18 n 32768 --19 off 19 19 n 32768 --20 off 20 20 n 32768 --21 off 21 21 n 32768 --22 off 22 22 n 32768 --23 off 23 23 n 32768 --24 off 24 24 n 32768 --25 off 25 25 n 32768 --26 off 26 26 n 32768 --27 off 27 27 n 32768 --28 off 28 28 n 32768 --lacp adminkey operkey selected prio 84 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-J. January 2005 .

Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) configures the network so that a switch uses only the most efficient path.0.------- 8000-00:01:81:2e:a1:80 32773 The switch software uses the IEEE 802. Spanning Tree Group 1: On Current Root: 8000 00:01:81:2e:a1:80 Parameters: Priority 32768 Cost ---0 0 0 0 5 0 0 0 0 0 0 Path-Cost 0 Port Hello MaxAge FwdDel Aging 0 2 20 15 300 FwdDel 15 Aging 300 Hello 2 MaxAge 20 Port ----1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Priority -------128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 State ---------DISABLED DISABLED DISABLED DISABLED FORWARDING DISABLED DISABLED DISABLED DISABLED DISABLED DISABLED Designated Bridge Des Port ---------------------. NOTE – Alteon OS 22. In addition to seeing if STP is enabled or disabled.1d Spanning Tree Protocol (STP). January 2005 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 85 .Alteon OS 22.0.2 supports up to 16 multiple Spanning Tress or Spanning Tree Groups. you can view the following STP bridge information: Priority Hello interval Maximum age value Forwarding delay Aging time 315393-J.2 Command Reference /info/l2/stg Layer 2 Spanning Tree Group Information When multiple paths exist on a network.

or DISABLED. how often the root bridge transmits a configuration bridge protocol data unit (BPDU).Alteon OS 22. LEARNING. in seconds. The forward delay parameter specifies. Any bridge that is not the root bridge uses the root bridge hello value. FORWARDING.0. January 2005 .2 Command Reference You can also see the following port-specific STP information: Port number and priority Cost State Designated Bridge Designated Port The following table describes the STP parameters. in seconds. Generally speaking. the port with the lowest port priority becomes the designated port for the segment. Table 4-16 Spanning Tree Parameter Descriptions Parameter Priority (bridge) Hello Description The bridge priority parameter controls which bridge on the network will become the STP root bridge. The state field shows the current state of the port. The port priority parameter helps determine which bridge port becomes the designated port. The aging time parameter specifies. the maximum time the bridge waits without receiving a configuration bridge protocol data unit before it reconfigure the STP network. The state field can be either BLOCKING. the amount of time that a bridge port has to wait before it changes from learning state to forwarding state. LISTENING. in seconds. The maximum age parameter specifies. A setting of 0 indicates that the cost will be set to the appropriate default after the link speed has been auto negotiated. The port path cost parameter is used to help determine the designated port for a segment. the amount of time the bridge waits without receiving a packet from a station before removing the station from the Forwarding Database. The hello time parameter specifies. MaxAge FwdDel Aging priority (port) Cost State 86 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-J. the faster the port. In a network topology that has multiple bridge ports connected to a single segment. the lower the path cost. in seconds.

combining their bandwidth to create a single. you can view the state of each port in the various trunk groups. a physical port number four with bridge priority 32768 will be displayed as 32678+4=32772. port state: 1: STG 1 forwarding 2: STG 1 forwarding NOTE – If Spanning Tree Protocol on any port in the trunk group is set to forwarding. January 2005 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 87 . When trunk groups are configured. This is a number that is the numerical sum of bridge priority and the actual physical port number. 315393-J.Alteon OS 22.2 Command Reference Table 4-16 Spanning Tree Parameter Descriptions (Continued) Parameter Designated Bridge Description The designated bridge resides closest to the root bridge and is responsible for forwarding packets from LAN towards the root bridge.0. bw contract 256. This bridge is displayed as character string starting with the bridge priority (1-65535) followed by a hyphen and six byte MAC address of that switch. Designated port /info/l2/trunk Trunk Group Information Trunk groups can provide super-bandwidth. multi-link connections between Alteon Application Switches or other trunk-capable devices. larger virtual link. For example. A trunk group is a group of ports that act together. Trunk group 1. the remaining ports in the trunk group will also be set to forwarding. The designated port identifies a physical port.

----Default VLAN ena n 256 ena 1-28 This information display includes all configured VLANs and all member ports that have an active link state.----. January 2005 . VLAN information includes: VLAN Number VLAN Name Status Jumbo Frames Bandwidth Contract if BWM is enabled Source MAC Address Learning Port membership of the VLAN 88 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-J.2 Command Reference /info/l2/vlan VLAN Information VLAN ---1 Name Status Jumbo BWC Learn Ports -------------------------------. Port membership is represented in slot/port format.Alteon OS 22.-----.----.---.0.

2 Command Reference /info/l2/dump Layer2 Dump Information Spanning Tree Group 1: On Current Root: 8000 00:01:81:2e:a1:80 Parameters: Priority 32768 Cost ---0 0 0 0 5 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Path-Cost 0 Hello 2 Port Hello MaxAge FwdDel Aging 0 2 20 15 300 FwdDel 15 Aging 300 MaxAge 20 Port -----1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Priority -------128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 State ---------DISABLED DISABLED DISABLED DISABLED FORWARDING DISABLED DISABLED DISABLED DISABLED DISABLED DISABLED DISABLED Designated Bridge Des Port ---------------------.0.------ 8000-00:01:81:2e:a1:80 32773 315393-J.Alteon OS 22. January 2005 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 89 .

January 2005 . IP address. see page 93. subnet mask. bgp Displays BGP Information Menu. Default gateway information: Metric for selecting which configured gateway to use. ip Displays IP Information. VLAN number. or 16 for infinite hops) The IP interface that the route uses For details. see page 98. see page 104. subnet mask. For details. and health status IP forwarding information: Enable status. gateway number. includes: IP interface information: Interface number. see page 96. For details. arp Displays the Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) Information Menu.0.2 Command Reference /info/l3 Layer3 Information Menu [Layer 3 Menu] route arp bgp ospf ip vrrp dump IP Routing Information Menu ARP Information Menu BGP Information Menu OSPF Routing Information Menu Show IP information Show Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol information Dump all layer 3 information Table 4-17 Layer 3 Information Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage route Displays the IP Routing Menu. specifying the number of hops to the destination (1-15 hops. ospf Displays OSPF routing information menu. IP information. and gateway address Type of route Tag indicating origin of route Metric for RIP tagged routes. the system displays the following for each configured or learned route: Route destination IP address. and operational status. see page 91. To view menu options. IP address. Using the options of this menu.Alteon OS 22. broadcast address. lnet and lmask Port status 90 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-J. For details.

Show tag .Show type . 192.4. 315393-J. see Table 4-19 on page 92. Table 4-18 Route Information Menu Options (/info/route) Command Syntax and Usage find <IP address (such as. you can display all or a portion of the IP routes currently held in the switch. /info/l3/route IP Routing Information [IP Routing Menu] find . For details. For a description of IP routing types. tag fixed|static|addr|rip|ospf|bgp|broadcast|martian|vip Displays routes of a single tag.2 Command Reference Table 4-17 Layer 3 Information Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage vrrp Displays the VRRP Information Menu.4.Alteon OS 22. if <interface number (1-256)> Displays routes on a single interface.Show if . gw <default gateway address (such as.Show gw . NOTE – The total number of interfaces on an Alteon Application Switch 2424-SSL is 1-255.44)> Displays routes to a single gateway. 192. For a description of IP routing types. dump Displays all Layer 3 information. January 2005 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 91 . see page 105.17.Show a single route by destination IP address routes to a single gateway routes of a single type routes of a single tag routes on a single interface all routes Using the commands listed below. type indirect|direct|local|broadcast|martian|multicast Displays routes of a single type. see Table 4-20 on page 93.101)> Displays a single route by destination IP address.Show dump .17.0.

80.255 47.255.0 multicast addr * 255.255.Alteon OS 22.0.255.255.0 0.255.23. Indicates a multicast route.--------.255 broadcast broadcast 1 * 127.255.80. see page 92.6 255.0 multicast addr * 224.0 47.0.22.0 0.255. The destination belongs to a host or subnet which is filtered out.0.0.23. Indicates a broadcast route.0.0. For more information.80.255.255.249 255. Packets to this destination are discarded.255 255.0.0.23.0.0. January 2005 .0 0.best Destination Mask Gateway Type Tag Metr If --------------.255.255.255.80.249 local addr 1 * 47.80.80.0. Packets will be delivered to a destination host or subnet attached to the switch.0 224.0.-* 0.255 0.255.1 indirect static 1 * 47.----. Table 4-19 IP Routing Type Parameters (/info/l3/route/dump/type) Parameter indirect Description The next hop to the host or subnet destination will be forwarded through a router at the Gateway address.0.0.22. Indicates a route to one of the switch’s IP interfaces.0 martian martian * 224.80.249 direct fixed 1 * 47.255 255.255 0.5 255.0 255.254.0.23.0.0 martian martian * 224.0.0.0 47.255.0.255 broadcast broadcast Type Parameters The following table describes the Type parameters.0.2 Command Reference Table 4-18 Route Information Menu Options (/info/route) Command Syntax and Usage dump Displays all routes configured in the switch.0.23.255 47.0.0. /info/l3/route/dump Show All IP Route Information Status code: * .0.255.--------------.------------.0 255.0.255 255. direct local broadcast martian multicast 92 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-J.

The address was learned by Open Shortest Path First (OSPF).0.Show all ARP entries help . addr rip ospf bgp broadcast martian vip /info/l3/Arp ARP Information Menu Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) is the TCP/IP protocol that resides within the Internet layer.Show help on the fields of ARP entries addr . ARP queries machines on the local network for their physical addresses. Then the corresponding physical address is used to send a packet.Show a single ARP entry by IP address port .Show ARP entries on a single port vlan . In any IP communication. Table 4-20 IP Routing Tag Parameters (info/l3/route/tag) Parameter fixed static Description The address belongs to a host or subnet attached to the switch. [Address Resolution Protocol Menu] find . January 2005 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 93 . The address belongs to one of the switch’s IP interfaces.Alteon OS 22. The address belongs to a filtered group. the ARP cache is consulted to see if the IP address of the router is present in the ARP cache. The address was learned by the Routing Information Protocol (RIP).Show ARP entries on a single VLAN refpt . The address was learned via Border Gateway Protocol (BGP) Indicates a broadcast address. VIP routes are needed to advertise virtual server IP addresses via BGP. ARP also maintains IP to physical address pairs in its cache memory. The address is a static route which has been configured on the Alteon Application Switch. ARP resolves a physical address from an IP address.Show ARP entries referenced by a single SP dump . Indicates a route destination that is a virtual server IP address.2 Command Reference Tag Parameters The following table describes the Tag parameters.Show ARP address list 315393-J.

refpt <SP number (1-4)> Displays the ARP entries referenced by a single SP.Layer 4 IP address (VIP) u .17.101> Displays a single ARP entry by IP address. For details. For example: IP address: Flags: IP address of ARP entry J . VLAN and port for the address. vlan <VLAN number (1-4090)> Displays the ARP entries on a single VLAN. etc. January 2005 . R . port <port number> Displays the ARP entries on a single port.2 Command Reference The ARP information includes IP address and MAC address of each entry.Indirect ARP (cache) entry for IP address reachable via indirect routes (static/dynamic) 4 . including: IP address and MAC address of each entry Address status flag (see below) The VLAN and port to which the address belongs The ports which have referenced the address (empty if no port has routed traffic to the IP address shown) For more information.0.Unresolved ARP entry.ARP entry belongs to a Jumbo capable VLAN P . The MAC address has not been learned. MAC address. and VLAN flags. dump Displays all ARP entries. see page 95. Table 4-21 ARP Information Menu Options (/info/l3/arp) Command Syntax and Usage find <IP address (such as. 192. help Displays help on the ARP field entries.Alteon OS 22. IP interface. MAC address: VLAN: Port: Referenced SPs: MAC address of ARP entry VLAN of this ARP entry Physical port where this IP address owner is connected SPs on which this ARP entry is present addr Displays the ARP address list: IP address.Permanent ARP entry (not obtained via ARP request). e. IP mask. 94 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-J. address status flags (see Table 4-22 on page 95).4. VIP.g. see page 95. and port referencing information.

Alteon OS 22.249 P MAC address VLAN Port ----------------.---1.3.10 00:b0:d0:98:d8:1b 1 3 172. January 2005 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 95 .10 P 4 00:09:97:16:5f:01 47. The MAC address has not been learned.2 Command Reference /info/l3/arp/refpt Show ARP Entries on Referenced SP IP address Flags ------------.0.10.1 P 00:09:97:16:5f:00 1 172.23.11 00:b0:d0:98:d8:1b 1 3 Referenced SPs ------------1-4 1-4 empty 1-4 1-4 empty empty Referenced ports are the ports that request the ARP entry.31. ARP entry belongs to a Jumbo capable VLAN R U J 315393-J.11. So the traffic coming into the referenced ports has the destination IP address.----47.31. If you have VMA turned off.80.----------------.81 P 00:09:97:16:5f:00 1 172.80. From the ARP entry (the referenced ports).80.----.10.---.22. the designated port will be the normal ingress port.---. NOTE – If you have VMA turned on.31.----00:0e:40:2f:5b:00 1 Referenced SPs -----------1-4 /info/l3/arp/dump Show All ARP Entry Information IP address Flags MAC address VLAN Port --------------. this traffic needs to be forwarded to the egress port (port 6 in the above example). the referenced port will be the designated port.1.3. Unresolved ARP entry.1 P 4 00:09:97:16:5f:01 10. Permanent entry created for Layer 4 proxy IP address or virtual server IP address.23. Indirect route entry.3.1 00:e0:16:7c:28:86 1 23 47. The Flag field is interpreted as follows: Table 4-22 ARP Dump Flag Parameters Flag P P 4 Description Permanent entry created for switch IP interface.

summary Displays peer summary information such as AS.255. See page 97 for a sample output.4.255.10.Alteon OS 22. message received.255.0.1 172. dump Displays the BGP routing table.81 IP mask --------------255.255.80.255.255. January 2005 .31.Show all BGP peers in summary dump . See page 98 for a sample output.255.31.Show BGP routing table Table 4-23 BGP Peer Information Menu Options (/info/l3/bgp) Command Syntax and Usage peer Displays BGP peer information.4.1 172.1 47.200 172. state.255 MAC address ----------------00:09:97:16:5f:01 00:09:97:16:5f:01 00:09:97:16:5f:0e 00:09:97:16:5f:00 00:09:97:16:5f:00 00:09:97:16:5f:00 VLAN ---Flags ----- D 1 1 1 /info/l3/bgp BGP Information Menu Border Gateway Protocol (BGP) is an Internet protocol that enables routers on a network to share routing information with each other and advertise information about the segments of the IP address space they can access within their network with routers on external networks. refer to BGP section in chapter: “The Configuration Menu” on page 227 and the Application Guide.255 255.10.255 255.23.31.255 255.255 255. up/down.255.Show all BGP peers summary .11.255.10 1.255. See page 97 for a sample output. For more information. 96 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-J. [BGP Menu] peer .255 255.3.255. message sent.1.2 Command Reference /info/l3/arp/addr ARP Address List Information IP address --------------10.255.

---------1: 205. Local AS: 0. Holdtime: 0.1 .1. LastErrorSubcode: unspecified(0) Established state transitions: 0 /info/l3/bgp/summary BGP Summary information Following is an example of the information that /info/l3/bgp/summary provides.201.1.0. MinAdvTime: 60 LastErrorCode: unknown(0).0. Holdtime: 0. TTL 1 Remote AS: 0.5 BGP status: idle. Old status: idle Total received packets: 0. Sent updates: 0 Keepalive: 0. Link type: IBGP Remote router ID: 0. BGP Peer Information: 3: 2.201. Local AS: 0. Total sent packets: 0 Received updates: 0.1.-------.5 BGP status: idle. version 0. TTL 1 Remote AS: 0.1.142 4 142 113 121 00:00:28 established 2: 205. BGP Peer Summary Information: Peer V AS MsgRcvd MsgSent Up/Down State --------------. Local router ID: 1.4 .-------.0.178. version 0.-------. Link type: IBGP Remote router ID: 0.148 0 148 0 0 never connect 315393-J.0. Sent updates: 0 Keepalive: 0. January 2005 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 97 .1.178.15.0.-------. Local router ID: 1. LastErrorSubcode: unspecified(0) Established state transitions: 0 4: 2. Old status: idle Total received packets: 0. MinAdvTime: 60 LastErrorCode: unknown(0).0..2 Command Reference /info/l3/bgp/peer BGP Peer information Following is an example of the information that /info/l3/bgp/peer provides.23.0.1.Alteon OS 22. Total sent packets: 0 Received updates: 0.

known as the backbone.Show summary address list nsumadd .0 205.0. Areas inject summary routing information into the backbone.147 1 128 *> 205.EGP.178.Show details of virtual links nbr .incomplete Network Next Hop Metr LcPrf Wght --------------. e . January 2005 .Show area(s) information if .internal Origin codes: i .178. [OSPF Information Menu] general .147 1 128 13. In any AS with multiple areas.21.0.0 205.178.17.15.Show NSSA summary address list routes . ? .Show OSPF routes dump .0 205.0 0. >> BGP# dump Status codes: * valid.Show interface(s) information virtual . The AS can be divided into smaller logical units known as areas.0.0.---. The Alteon OS implementation conforms to the OSPF version 2 specifications detailed in Internet RFC 1583.0.Show general information aindex .Show OSPF information 98 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-J.--------------.Alteon OS 22.Database Menu sumaddr .178. All other areas in the AS must be connected to the backbone. which then distributes it to other areas as needed. i . one area must be designated as area 0.0.0 * 205. OSPF is designed for routing traffic within a single IP domain called an Autonomous System (AS).21.21.2 Command Reference /info/l3/bgp/dump Dump BGP Information Following is an example of the information that /info/l3/bgp/dump provides.21. > best.147 1 256 *>i205. The backbone acts as the central OSPF area. For more information on how to configure OSPF on the switch.----.----*> 10.178.Show neighbor(s) information dbase .178.IGP.0.147 1 256 Path -------------147 148 i 0 i 147 i 147 i 147 {35} ? /info/l3/ospf OSPF Information Menu Alteon OS supports the Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) routing protocol. refer to the OSPF section in chapter “The Configuration Menu” on page 227 and your Alteon OS Application Guide.

If no router ID is supplied.2 Command Reference Table 4-24 OSPF Information Menu (/info/l3/ospf) Command Syntax and Usage general Displays general OSPF information.0. it displays area information for all the areas. To view menu options.C. See page 100 for a sample output. See page 100 for a sample output. it displays the information about all the current neighbors. it displays information for all the interfaces. virtual Displays information about all the configured virtual links. if <interface number [1-256]> Displays interface information for a particular interface. sumaddr <area index (0-2)> Displays the list of summary ranges belonging to non-NSSA areas. nsumadd <area index (0-2)> Displays the list of summary ranges belonging to NSSA areas.D)> Displays the status of a neighbor with a particular router ID. nbr <nbr router-id (A. January 2005 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 99 . 315393-J.B. aindex <area index [0-2]> Displays area information for a particular area index. If no parameter is supplied. If no parameter is supplied. routes Displays OSPF routing table. dbase Displays OSPF database menu. See for a sample output. See page 102 for a sample output. dump Display all the OSPF information. see page 101.Alteon OS 22.

2 are >=EXCH state.14.10. Ip Address 10.10.0.0 Authentication : none Import ASExtern : yes Number of times SPF ran : 8 Area Border Router count : 2 AS Boundary Router count : 0 LSA count : 5 LSA Checksum sum : 0x2237B Summary : noSummary /info/l3/ospf/if OSPF Interface Information Ip Address 10.1. Poll interval 0. Area 0.0.10.10.80.1 Backup Designated Router (ID) 10. 2 are =FULL state Number of areas is 2. Ip Address 10. Hello 10. Retransmit 5. Wait 1663. Authentication type none 100 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-J.10.0.23. Transit delay 1 Neighbor count is 1 If Events 4. January 2005 .2 Command Reference /info/l3/ospf/general OSPF General Information OSPF Version 2 Router ID: 47.10. State DR. of which 2 are >=INIT state.12.0.10. Dead 40.2 Timer intervals.247 Started at 95 and the process uptime is 352315 Area Border Router: yes.1. of which 3-transit 0-nssa Area Id : 0.Alteon OS 22. Admin Status UP Router ID 10. AS Boundary Router: no LS types supported are 6 External LSA count 0 External LSA checksum sum 0x0 Number of interfaces in this router is 2 Number of virtual links in this router is 1 16 new lsa received and 34 lsa originated from this router Total number of entries in the LSDB 10 Database checksum sum 0x0 Total neighbors are 1. Priority 1 Designated Router (ID) 10.0.1.12.1.1.10.12.

C.1.Router LS Database info self .Alteon OS 22.B. 315393-J.D)>|<link_state_id (A.D)>|<self> Displays ASBR summary LSAs. c) the total number of LSAs for each LSA type for all areas combined.1.1.1 displays ASBR summary LSAs having the link state ID 10.C. The usage of this command is the same as the usage of the command asbrsum.LS Database summary ext . for example: 20.D)> Takes advertising router as a parameter.B. Displays all the Link State Advertisements (LSAs) in the LS database that have the advertising router with the specified router ID.1.0. No parameters are required. asbrsum <adv-rtr (A.LS Database info for an Advertising Router asbrsum .B.D)>|<link_state_id (A.1.B.D)>|<self> Displays the AS-external (type 5) LSAs with detailed information of each field of the LSAs.1. d) asbrsum with no parameters displays all the ASBR summary LSAs. January 2005 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 101 .1. dbsumm Displays the following information about the LS database in a table format: a) the number of LSAs of each type in each area.Self Originated LS Database info summ .1.ASBR Summary LS Database info dbsumm . c) asbrsum self displays the self advertised ASBR summary LSAs. ext <adv-rtr (A.All Table 4-25 OSPF Database Information Menu (/info/l3/ospf/dbase) Command Syntax and Usage advrtr <router-id (A.1.Network-Summary LS Database info all . b) the total number of LSAs for each area. b) asbrsum link_state_id 10.C.Network LS Database info nssa .External LS Database info nw . The usage of this command is as follows: a) asbrsum adv-rtr 20.C. d) the total number of LSAs for all LSA types for all areas combined.C.1.NSSA External LS Database info rtr .1.B.2 Command Reference /info/l3/ospf/dbase OSPF Database Information [OSPF Database Menu] advrtr .1 displays ASBR summary LSAs having the advertising router 20.1.1.

1.1.1/32 via 30.18.1. The usage of this command is the same as the usage of the command asbrsum. The usage of this command is the same as the usage of the command asbrsum.10.18. /info/l3/ospf/routes OSPF Information Route Codes Codes: IA . rtr <adv-rtr (A.18.C.7/32 via 30.C.1.0/24 via 200.D)>|<link_state_id (A.2 Command Reference Table 4-25 OSPF Database Information Menu (/info/l3/ospf/dbase) Command Syntax and Usage nw <adv-rtr (A.1. The usage of this command is the same as the usage of the command asbrsum.18.B.1. N1 .B.OSPF NSSA external type 1.1.1.1.18.B.1.B.1.D)>|<self> Displays the network summary (type 3) LSAs with detailed information of each field of the LSAs.2 E2 172.1.0.2 E2 172.3/32 via 30.1.1.0/28 via 200.1.1.2 E2 172.2 IA 80. nssa <adv-rtr (A.B.1.C.OSPF external type 2 IA 10.network LS database.1.1.B.C.1.0.1. No parameters are required. January 2005 .1.C.1.1.0/16 via 200. self Displays all the self-advertised LSAs.18.1.2 IA 100.1.1.1.1.2 E2 172.5/32 via 30.2 102 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-J.2 E2 172.2 E2 172.B.D)>|<link_state_id (A. E2 .D)>|<self> Displays the network (type 2) LSAs with detailed information of each field of the LSA.1.2 E2 172.1.C.0/27 via 20.2 IA 150.D)>|<self> Displays the router (type 1) LSAs with detailed information of each field of the LSAs.C.1.1.1.Alteon OS 22.1. The usage of this command is the same as the usage of the command asbrsum.1.B.OSPF inter area.C. summ <adv-rtr (A.1.OSPF external type 1.18.1.1.4/32 via 30.8/32 via 30.1.1.1.1.1.D)>|<link_state_id (A.2 IA 40.OSPF NSSA external type 2 E1 .D)>|<link_state_id (A.0/24 via 20.0/28 via 20.1. N2 . all Displays all the LSAs.2 E2 172.6/32 via 30.1.D)>|<self> Displays the NSSA (type 7) LSAs with detailed information of each field of the LSAs.18.2 IA 140.2/32 via 30.

1 Started at 42 and the process uptime is 1197051 Area Border Router: no.1.1. 0 are =FULL state Number of areas is 0. AS Boundary Router: no External LSA count 0 Number of interfaces in this router is 0 Number of virtual links in this router is 0 0 new lsa received and 0 lsa originated from this router Total number of entries in the LSDB 0 Total neighbors are 0.1) No areas enabled.2 Command Reference /info/ospf/dump OSPF Dump Information OSPF Version 2 Router ID: 1.0. 0 are >=EXCH state. January 2005 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 103 .1.Alteon OS 22.1.---------- Prio ---- State ----- Address ------- OSPF LS Database: OSPF LSDB breakdown for router with ID (1. of which 0-transit 0-nssa OSPF Neighbors: Intf NeighborID ---. 315393-J. of which 0 are >=INIT state.

3.23.255. vlan 1.1.1 255.255.31.0.4.255.0 47. January 2005 .255.31. up vlan 1.255.255.31.4.80. up Default gateway information: metric strict 2: 47. dirbr disabled Current local networks: Current IP port settings: All other ports have forwarding ON Current network filter settings: none Current route map settings: Current OSPF settings: ON Default route none Router ID: 1.1 lsdb limit 0 104 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-J.255.255. 172.81 255. up vlan 1.3.1.31.80. 172. up Current IP forwarding settings: ON.1 255.Alteon OS 22.2 Command Reference /info/l3/ip IP Information Interface information: 1: 47.23. vlan any.1.22.254.80.0 2: 172.0 3: 172.

prio 100. master 11. 20: vrid 20. renter.1. 28. 27. prio 118. 27: vrid 27. renter.202. master 14.1. if if if if if if if if if if 10. prio 110. Refer to your Alteon OS Application Guide for more information on VRRP.210. renter.2.200. prio 100. This is accomplished by configuring the same virtual router IP address and ID number on each participating VRRP-capable routing device. renter. prio 102. backup 20.8. prio 102. 254: vrid 254. prio 118.2 Command Reference /info/l3/vrrp VRRP Information Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP) support on Alteon Application Switch provides redundancy between routers in a LAN. One of the virtual routers is then elected as the master.1.2. 205. 13.8.1. renter. if 172. 11: vrid 11. backup 172. prio 110. renter. backup 1.178. and assumes control of the shared virtual router IP address.2. server VRRP information: 1: vrid 2. based on a number of priority criteria. renter. renter identifies virtual routers which are not owned by this device. renter. if 3: vrid 3. renter. prio 110. prio 100.18.204. proxy When virtual routers are configured. 10.100.200. prio 110.200. renter. master.178.100. prio 102. renter.21. you can view the status of each virtual router using this command.2. backup 13. 27. 172.2.1. master 12. 28: vrid 28. master 28. 13: vrid 13. January 2005 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 105 . if 28. master. prio 102. server 255: vrid 255.21. one of the backup virtual routers will assume routing authority and take control of the virtual router IP address. master.2.18. 172. 1.Alteon OS 22. backup.200. 14: vrid 14.2.1. 205. A virtual router is the owner when the IP address of the virtual router and its IP interface are the same.1.2. 28. renter. 12: vrid 12. 20. 100: vrid 100.2. 315393-J. VRRP information: 10: vrid 10.178.0.18.200. server 172: vrid 172. if 2: vrid 1.200. 14. VRRP information includes: Virtual router number Virtual router ID and IP address Interface number Ownership status owner identifies the preferred master virtual router.2. master if 27. prio 118. If the master fails. 11.200.200. 12.1.1. server 1. master 27.1. renter. prio 118.100. renter. 205. renter. master.200.

backup identifies that the virtual router is in backup mode. During the election process. 106 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-J. The use of virtual proxy routers enables redundant switches to share the same IP address. Server status. Activity status master identifies the elected master virtual router. January 2005 . minimizing the number of unique IP addresses that must be configured. The server state identifies virtual routers that support Layer 4 services. The proxy state identifies virtual proxy routers.2 Command Reference Priority value. These are known as virtual server routers: any virtual router whose IP address is the same as any configured virtual server IP address. Proxy status. the virtual router with the highest priority becomes master.Alteon OS 22. where the virtual router shares the same IP address as a proxy IP address.0.

1. adv 60 retry 120.21. AS number 100 Current BGP peer settings: 1: 45.1. orig 15. ospf disabled fixed disabled. ras 300. dirbr disabled Current local networks: Current IP port settings: All other ports have forwarding ON Current network filter settings: none Current route map settings: Current BGP settings: ON.1.201 255.201.1. rip disabled.0 45.1.1.21. up vlan 1. 172. January 2005 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 107 .255 .203.0. vip disabled in-rmap: empty out-rmap: empty Current BGP aggr settings: Continued 315393-J. up Default gateway information: metric strict Current IP forwarding settings: ON.0 4: 172.2 Command Reference /info/l3/dump Layer3 Dump Information This command dumps all the information about Layer 3 parameters. This dump is a collection of all the individual commands described in the sections above.255.0 3: 205. ttl 1. vlan 1. hold 180. pref 100.1.255 .Alteon OS 22.1.1.1.1.201 255.255.1. static disabled. up vlan 1.254 255.0.255 . enabled metric none.255.255.255. IP information: IP information: Router ID: 45. AS number 100 Interface information: 2: 45. alive 60.255.0. 205. default none.

1.255.255.1.254 direct fixed 4 * 172.1.254 P 00:01:81:2e:a2:20 1 1-4 205.1.255.255.1.255.0.--------------205.255 broadcast broadcast 4 Continued 108 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-J.255 172.1.3 00:09:6b:00:6f:b7 1 24 empty 205.0.255 255.1.------------.1.255 172. ARP cache information: IP address Flags MAC address VLAN Port Referenced SPs --------------.1.----.255.---------------45.255 45.1.255.21.---.0 martian martian * 172.255.21.1.255 255.0 0.0.1.1.1.1.255.1.255 MAC address VLAN Flags ----------------.1.0 172.201 255.255.0 255.1.1.1 00:09:6b:b5:0b:d6 1 24 empty 205.254 255.1.202 00:09:97:5e:69:00 1 24 empty 172.0 45.255.1.1.75 00:0f:06:ec:8a:00 1 24 empty 45.201 direct fixed 2 * 45.0.2 00:09:6b:b5:08:48 1 24 empty 205.255 205.0 255.255.0.255.0.-----------.254 local addr 4 * 172.Alteon OS 22.best Destination Mask Gateway Type Tag Metr If --------------.100 255.1.255 172.1.255.201 P 00:01:81:2e:a2:20 1 1-4 ARP address information: IP address IP mask --------------.1.1.----------------.----00:01:81:2e:a2:2e D 00:01:81:2e:a2:20 1 00:01:81:2e:a2:20 1 00:01:81:2e:a2:20 1 Route table information: Status code: * .0.21.255.1.1.255 45.4 00:09:6b:00:76:1b 1 24 empty 205.---.1.100 P 4 00:01:81:2e:a2:2e 1-4 205.255. January 2005 .255.201 local addr 2 * 45.1.0.255.254 255.201 P 00:01:81:2e:a2:20 1 1-4 45.5 00:09:6b:00:74:97 1 24 empty 205.201 255.0.1.21.255broadcast broadcast 2 * 127.1.0.----.1.21.6 00:09:6b:00:71:bb 1 24 empty 205.-* 45.255.21.1.21.1.1.255.201 255.21.0.------------.1.0 255.1.1.1.1.1.255.2 Command Reference Virtual Router Redundancy is globally turned OFF.255 45.255.

1.255 255.1.1. January 2005 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 109 .255.1.0 0 ? *> 205.0 0.0 0 ? *> 172. i .255.1.0.201 local addr 3 * 205.0.255.0.0.Alteon OS 22.0 224.1.0.----.incomplete Network Next Hop Metr LcPrf Wght Path --------------.1.--------------*> 45.0.0 0.100 255.255.1.EGP.255.255 broadcast broadcast 3 * 224.201 direct fixed 3 * 205.255 205.201 255.0 205.IGP.----.255 255.0 0.255.255 255.0 0.255 205.1.21.0 martian martian * 255.255 broadcast broadcast OSPF is disabled.0 255.1.0.0.255.255. > best.0 0 ? 315393-J.0.255.0.255.1.2 Command Reference * 205.internal Origin codes: i .----.1.100 direct vip * 205.0.--------------. ? . Status codes: * valid.0.0.0.255.255 205.0.255.1.1.1. e .1.1.255.255.1.1.

Show virtual server information filt .Show IDS server selected by hash or minmisses metric bind . phash. gslb Displays the Global SLB Information Menu.: [Server Load Balancing Information Menu] sess . In an average network that employs multiple servers without server load balancing. Placing this kind of strain on a server can decrease the performance of the entire network as user requests are rejected by the server and then resubmitted by the user stations.Show port information idshash .Session Table Information Menu gslb .Global SLB Information Menu real . it can become overutilized. 110 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-J. see page 112.Show real server information virt .Alteon OS 22.2 Command Reference /info/slb Layer 4 Information Menu Server Load Balancing (SLB) allows you to configure the Alteon Application Switch to balance user session traffic among a pool of available servers that provide shared services. With this software feature.Show real server selected by hash. physical switch port. MAC address. see page 117.Show all layer 4 information Table 4-26 Layer 4 Information Menu Options (/info/slb) Command Syntax and Usage sess Displays the Session Table Information Menu. January 2005 . each server usually specializes in providing one or two unique services. To view menu options.0. based on a variety of load-balancing algorithms.Show filter information port . VLAN. the switch is aware of the services provided by each server and can direct user session traffic to an appropriate server. real IP address. If one of these servers provides access to applications or data that is in high demand.Decode the HEX value to get VIP. or minmisses metric cookie . real <real server number (1-1023)> Displays Real server number. layer where health check is performed. Refer to your Alteon OS Application Guide for detailed information on this feature.Show SYN attack detection information dump . and health check result. To view menu options. RIP and Rport synatk .

real server group. 315393-J. group backup server. port <port number> Displays the physical port number. bind <IP address> <mask> <group number> Displays the real server selected by hash. health check layer. or minmisses metric. idshash <IP address 1> <IP address 2> Displays the Intrusion Detection System server selected by hash or minmisses metric. see page 118. dump Displays all Layer 4 information for the switch. server port mapping. group backup server. URL for health checks. real server group. real server port. for example. and real server group.Alteon OS 22. and status.2 Command Reference Table 4-26 Layer 4 Information Menu Options (/info/slb) Command Syntax and Usage virt <virtual server number (1-1024)> Displays Virtual Server State: Virtual server number. IP address. To identify whether or not the server is under SYN attack. cookie <16 or 20 bytes cookie value in HEX as 0xXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX> Decodes the hexadecimal value to get the virtual server IP address. January 2005 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 111 . synatk Displays SYN attack detection information. virtual MAC address Virtual Port State: Virtual service or port. filter status. phash. filt <filter ID (1-2048)>|list|allow|deny|redir|nat Displays the filter number. proxy IP address. the number of new half open sessions is examined within a set period of time. and client and/or server Layer 4 activity. real server IP address. For details. destination port. every two seconds. IP address. This feature requires dbind to be enabled.0. and real server port. a list of applied filters. backup server.

Show all session entries with matching flag port .Show all session entries on sp dump .Show all session entries with proxy IP address pport . filter <filter ID (1-2048)> Displays all session entries with matching filter. flag <E|L|N|P|S|Rt|Ru|Ri|Vi|Vr|Vs|Vm|U|W> Displays all session entries with matching flag. January 2005 .Session entry description Table 4-27 Session Information Menu Options (/info/slb/sess) Command Syntax and Usage cip <IP address> Displays all session entries with client’s source IP address.Alteon OS 22. dport <Destination real port> Displays all session entries with destination port. See “Session dump information in Alteon OS” on page 115 for a description of these options.Show all session entries with source port dip .Show all session entries with real IP address sp .Show all session entries with ingress port real .0.Show all session entries with matching filter flag .Show all session entries with destination IP address dport . cport <real port> Displays all session entries with source (client) port.Show all session entries help . pip <Proxy IP address> Displays all session entries with proxy IP address. dip <Destination IP address> Displays all session entries with the destination IP address. pport <proxy port> Displays all session entries with proxy port.Show all session entries with destination port pip .2 Command Reference /info/slb/sess Session Table Information [Session Table Information Menu] cip . 112 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-J.Show all session entries with proxy port filter .Show all session entries with source IP address cport .

200 44687. 1 to 13 associated with a session as identified in the above example. 39.2.1.1.81.12.1. are described in “Session dump information in Alteon OS” on page 115.1 http -> 47.11 wcr age 4 f:12 E 3. the destination port shows “rtsp” and server port shows “0” L7 WCR RTSP Chapter 4: The Information Menu 113 315393-J.1 21220 -> 47.1 4586.1 rtsp -> 47.1.12.12.8.19 4586.2. Samples of Session Dumps for Different Applications L4 HTTP 3.24.21.81. 39.2.13 0 age 10 P During client-server port negotiation.12.2.1 rtsp -> 47. 39. 3.19 6970.1 http -> 1.12.81.21.Alteon OS 22.01: 172. January 2005 . sp <port number (1-4)> Displays all session entries on switch processor.0.01: 172. help Displays the description of the session entry. real <IP address> Displays all session entries with real server IP address.1.2.21.01: 172.2. dump Displays all session entries. 39.19 1040.8. 2.144.21.21.3.2 3567 3.24. The second session is RTSP UDP data connection.3.144.2. 39.1 http -> 47.21.168.01: 172.01: 172.144. 172.51 http -> 192.2.2.19 1040.19 6970.79 http age 4 L4-L7 WCR HTTP 2.1 http age 6 f:10 EUSPT c (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7a) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12) (13) Note: The fields.16: 172. 01: 1.79 urlwcr age 6 f:123 E RTSP L4-L7 RTSP 3.2.21.81.2.2 Command Reference Table 4-27 Session Information Menu Options (/info/slb/sess) Command Syntax and Usage port <port number> Displays all session entries on the ingress port.13 21220 age 10 P The first session is RTSP TCP control connection.2.81.13 rtsp age 10 EU 3. Information similar to the following may appear in a session entry dump: 3.

52.168.21.Alteon OS 22.4.31.4.1 rtsp -> 47.123 160.30 age 4 EPS C:3 The destination port.12.215 80.1. 172.200 ftp-data ->172. 39.4.162.00: 237.0. 172.10.215 4102.11 age 8 EP c:1 1. 114 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-J.00: 172.31.19 4586.2 Command Reference 3.215 4098.3.26 1706.19 6970.13 urlwcr age 10 f:100 EU 3.3.144.81.31.01: 172. 205.8.31. 39.10 linklb age 8 f:10 E FTP 1.20.09: 172.178.20 ftp-data age 10 E NAT 2. 10.4.3.13 21220 age 10 P Filtering LinkLB 2.1.2.200 0 172.12. 172.200 ftp ->172.2.16 2559.81.0. January 2005 .31.01: 172.84 http -> 192.31.31.2.4.144.09: 172.14. real server IP and server port are not shown for persistent session.2.26 http NAT age 2 f:24 E Persistent session 3.4.20 ftp age 10 EU 1.31.0.1 21220 -> 47.4.05: 172.21.31.07: 10.21.

for load balancing.1 1040. This field contains the real server IP address of the corresponding server that the switch selects to forward the client packet to. For example: 3.168. It will show “ALLOW”. 2. If the switch does not find live server. For example: 3.1 rtsp -> 2.2.1 http age 10 f:11 2.2.1 http age 10 3.1 21220 age 10 P For filtering. (2) Ingress port (3) Source IP address (4) Source port (5) Destination IP address (6) Destination port (7a) Proxy IP address (7) Proxy Port This field identifies the TCP/UDP source port substituted by the switch.3.2.07: 1. No address is shown if the filter action is Allow.1 http -> 3.1.Alteon OS 22.1 http-> 192.1.01: 1.4. this field also shows the real server IP address.2 Command Reference Session dump information in Alteon OS Field (1) SP number Description This field indicates the Switch Processor number that created the session. For load balancing.2.2.1 http -> 3.3.0.01: 1. If the switch does not find a live server. 2. This field contains the Proxy IP address substituted by the switch.2.1. No address is shown if the filter action is Allow. January 2005 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 115 . This field identifies the source port from the client’s TCP/UDP packet.2.1. It will show ALLOW.1 6970. 2. “DENY” or “NAT” instead.1 1040.1. this field contains the IP address of the real server that the switch selects to forward client packet to.2. this field is the same as destination IP address (as in row 5). This field shows the physical port through which the client traffic enters the switch. 2.1.1.1.10 linklb age 8 f:10 E (8) Real Server IP Address 315393-J.1 1706.2. this field contains the same information as the destination IP address mentioned in field (5).2. DENY or NAT instead. This field identifies the destination IP address from the client’s TCP/UDP packet. Deny or NAT. This field identifies the destination port from client’s TCP/UDP packet. This field contains the source IP address from the client’s IP packet.3. Deny or NAT. This field also shows the real server IP address for filtering.01: 1.3.

For RTSP UDP session. age < 160 .The session is aged out in 160 minutes.0. This indicates that slowage is used. if: age 10 . or Cookie Pbind. “U”: Indicates the session is Layer 7 delayed binding and the switch is trying to open TCP connection to the real server. (13) Persistent session user count This counter indicates the number of client sessions created to associate with this persistent session. linkslb or nonat. This field is the filtering application port for filtering. the session is freed. this server port is obtained from the client-server negotiation.Alteon OS 22.The session is aged out in 10 minutes. For example. “Ru”: Indicates UDP rate limiting for every client entry. (11) Filter number (12) Flag This field indicates the session created by filtering code as a result of the IP header keys matching the filtering criteria. January 2005 . “N”: Indicates no NAT. “S”: Indicates the session is a persistent session and the application is SSL session ID. “P”: Indicates the session is a persistent session and is not to be aged out. Fields (6). “Vi”: Indicates the session is a SIP INVITE session. “E”: Indicates the session is established and will be aged out if no traffic is received within session timeout value. “Rt”: Indicates the session is TCP rate limiting for every client entry. “L”: Indicates the session is a link load balance session.2 Command Reference Field (9) Server port Description This field is the same as the destination port (field 6) for load balancing except for the RTSP UDP session. “Ri”: Indicates the session is ICMP rate limiting per-client entry. idslb. It is for internal use only. 116 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-J. This field can be urlwcr. which means the session only translates the destination MAC when forwarding client traffic to the real server. The user can configure slowage by using the command: /cfg/slb/adv/slowage. “Vr”: Indicates the session is a SIP REGISTER session. (7) and (8) cannot have persistent session. If no packet is received within the value specified. (10) Age This is the session timeout value. “Vs”: Indicates the session is a SIP SUBSCRIBE session. “W”: Indicates the session only translates the destination MAC when forwarding Layer 7 WCR traffic to the real server. “Vm”: Indicates the session is a SIP MESSAGE session. wcr.

Show Global SLB site . dump Displays all Global SLB information. geo Displays the Global SLB geographical preference information. 315393-J.Show Global SLB geo . January 2005 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 117 .Show all Global virtual server information remote site information rule information geographical preference information SLB information Table 4-28 Global SLB Information Menu Options (/info/slb/gslb) Command Syntax and Usage virt <virtual server number (1-1024)> Displays the Global SLB virtual server information such as the domain name of the virtual server.2 Command Reference /info/slb/gslb Global SLB Information Menu An Alteon OS running Global SLB selects the most appropriate site to direct the client traffic for a given domain during the initial client connection.Show Global SLB rule . the number of the local and remote virtual servers. site Displays the Global SLB remote site information.Show Global SLB dump . the number of virtual services on those virtual servers.0. and the group of real servers associated with the local and remote virtual servers.Alteon OS 22. The menu for this feature displays the following information: [Global SLB Information Menu] virt .

3 ms. health 3. filters: 200 idslb filt enabled. rport 3128. health 3.101.20. up exclusionary string matching: disabled 3: urltwo 4: urlthree Redirect filter state: Action redir dport http.20.20. dbind HTTP Application: urlslb real servers: 26: 20.20. up Port 1: 2: 3: 4: state: filt disabled.2. health 3. 2 ms. backup none.102. backup none. radius snoop disabled real servers: 1: 210.1. up 20.0. up exclusionary string matching: disabled 1: any 2: urlone 27: 20. 00:60:cf:47:5c:1e virtual ports: http: rport http.20.1. port 7.2 Command Reference /info/slb/dump Show All Layer 4 Information Real 1: 2: 26: 27: server state: 210.2.1. up Virtual server state: 1: 20.2. backup none proxy enabled.1. 2 ms. 00:03:47:07:a4:9e. vlan 1. health 3. up 20. backup none. vlan 1.20.200. backup none. group 88.1. vlan 1. January 2005 .20. vlan 1. filters: 200 filt disabled. port 1.2. 1 ms.Alteon OS 22. port 6.20.1.200.20. port 8. health 3. backup none.102. up 210.101. filters: 80 idslb filt enabled. vlan any 200: group 1. up 2: 210. 00:01:02:71:9c:a6.20.200. 00:01:02:c1:4b:48. 00:01:02:70:4d:4a. filters: 50 200 118 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-J.

or auto) Flow control for transmit and receive (no.Alteon OS 22. full. or 1000) Duplex mode (half. including: Port number Port speed (10. yes.2 Command Reference /info/link Link Status Information Port ----1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 Speed ----10/100 10/100 10/100 10/100 10/100 10/100 10/100 10/100 100 10/100 10/100 10/100 10/100 10/100 10/100 10/100 10/100 10/100 10/100 10/100 10/100 10/100 10/100 10/100 1000 1000 1000 1000 Duplex -------any any any any any any any any half any any any any any any any any any any any any any any any full full full full Flow Ctrl --TX-----RX-yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes no no yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes Link -----down down down down down down down down up down down down down down down down down down down down down down down down down down down down Use this command to display link status information about each port on an Alteon Application Switch slot. any. 100. January 2005 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 119 .0. 10/100. or auto) Link status (up or down) 315393-J.

Alteon OS 22.0. January 2005 .2 Command Reference /info/port Port Information Port ----1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 Tag --n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n RMON ---e d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d PVID ---1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 BWC ----256 256 256 256 256 256 256 256 256 256 256 256 256 256 256 256 256 256 256 256 256 256 256 256 256 256 256 256 NAME -------------VLAN(s) --------------------1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Port information includes: Port number Whether the port uses VLAN tagging or not (y or n) Whether Remote Monitor is enabled or disabled Port VLAN ID (PVID) Port name VLAN membership Whether RMON is enabled or disabled on the port 120 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-J.

0. such as e-commerce transactions.Alteon OS 22. Traffic classification can be based on user or application information. See page 122 for sample output. BWM policies can be configured to set lower and upper bounds on the bandwidth allocation. January 2005 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 121 . cont Displays the BWM contract information configured on this switch. 315393-J. It allows companies to guarantee that critical business traffic. You can see the following information on your switch when you execute this command: [Bandwidth Management Information Menu] ipuser . receive higher priority versus non-criticaltraffic.BWM IP User Entries Information Menu cont .Show Bandwidth Management Contract information Table 4-29 Bandwidth Management Information Command Syntax and Usage ipuser Displays the IP user entries with their IP addresses.2 Command Reference /info/bwm Bandwidth Management Information Bandwidth Management (BWM) enables Web site managers to allocate a portion of the available bandwidth for specific users or applications.

2 Command Reference /info/bwm/ipuser BWM IP User Information Menu [BWM IP User Entries Information Menu] ip . 1-256> Displays the IP user entries for a specific BWM contract. cont <BW Contract number.Show all IP user entries for a contract sp .Show all IP user entries on sp dump . The same fields as described in cont above are displayed.Alteon OS 22.Show all IP user entries with IP address cont . sp <SP number (1-4)> Displays the IP user entries on the Switch Processor. 122 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-J. dump Displays all the IP user entries. but only for the specified sp number.0. January 2005 .Show all IP user entries Table 4-30 BWM IP User Information Menu (/info/bwm/ipuser) Command Syntax and Usage ip <IP address> Displays the IP user entries for a specific IP address.

0.1.0.101 16 201478 0 98 98 2 10 11.0. Contract Rate: the BWM contract number of the ipuser entry. January 2005 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 123 .109 16 203016 0 99 99 SP Rate: the switch processor number (1-4) of the ipuser entry.106 16 199940 0 97 97 2 10 11. Octets: the number of octets processed on this ipuser entry Discards: the number of octets discarded on this ipuser entry Allowed Rate: the rate of traffic allowed for this IP address Offered Rate: the rate including the discards for this IP address 315393-J.---------.-------.100 86 21500000 301001440 1953 29297 2 10 11.1.---------.1.103 16 196864 0 96 96 2 10 11.1.105 16 198402 0 96 96 2 10 11.1.----2 11 11.0.100 86 1076600 0 97 97 2 10 11.2 Command Reference The format of the output of the above commands: SP Contract IP Address Age Octets Discards Allowed Offered Rate Rate -.1. IP address: the IP address of the ipuser entry.0.1.0.107 16 199940 0 97 97 2 10 11.0.1.0.---------------.0.--.1.102 16 198402 0 96 96 2 10 11.104 16 204554 0 99 99 2 10 11. Age: the age of the entry in seconds.108 16 199940 0 97 97 2 10 11.0.1.Alteon OS 22.1.0.0.

Alteon OS 22.0.2 Command Reference

/info/bwm/cont
BWM Contract Information
Current Bandwidth Management setting: ON Policy Enforcement:enabled BWM history will be mailed in a minute to 'abcd' at host '100.81.138.26' BWM IP user table entries 64k

Contract Policy Per User Traffic Num Name Prec Hard Soft Resv Limit Key State Shaping 1 123456789012345 2 1 50M 1M 500K E D 2 vlan 4 1 60M 2M 500K E D 3 filter 7 20 2M 1M 500K E D 4 5 1 2M 1M 500K D D 5 512 1 2M 1M 500K E D 10 10 1 1M 0K 0K 500K sip E D 11 11 1 100M 80M 500K 2M sip E D 12 12 1 2M 1M 500K E D 13 13 1 3M 1M 500K E D 14 14 1 4M 400K 100K E D 15 15 1 2M 1M 500K E D

This command displays information about any configured contracts and the BWM policies applied to the contracts. Table 4-31 BWM Contract Information
Field Contract Policy Description

Displays the BWM contract number. Displays specific information about a policy applied to a contract. Includes the following:
The policy number applied to the contract Prec: the precedence applied to the policy Hard: the hard limit applied to the policy Soft: the soft limit applied to the policy Resv: the reserve limit applied to the policy

124

Chapter 4: The Information Menu

315393-J, January 2005

Alteon OS 22.0.2 Command Reference

Table 4-31 BWM Contract Information
Field Per User Description These two columns display information for an ipuser limit, if applied to the contract. Includes the following: Limit: the user rate limit applied to the ipuser. Key: If an ipuser rate limit is enforced, this field displays whether the user limit is enforced on a source IP address (sip) or a destination IP address (dip). Displays whether the BWM contract is enabled (E) or disabled (D).

State Traffic Shaping

Displays whether Traffic Shaping is enabled (E) or disabled (D) for this contract.

315393-J, January 2005

Chapter 4: The Information Menu

125

Alteon OS 22.0.2 Command Reference

/info/security Security Information
This command displays information about the current security settings that includes: rate threshold for security logging
whether the out-of-order IP fragment packets have the option of allow or deny on the filters

the current IP addresses in the Access Control List (ACL) the current UDP blast protection settings the current port security settings
Current security settings: seclog 128 fragment allow pdepth none Current IP address ACL settings: Number Address Mask -------- ---------------- ---------------Current UDP blast protection settings: UDP Port ----------1-5000 Packet Rate (per second) -----------------------20

Port security state:

126

Chapter 4: The Information Menu

315393-J, January 2005

Alteon OS 22.0.2 Command Reference

/info/swkey Software Enabled Keys
For optional Layer 4 switching software, the information would be displayed as follows:
Enabled Software features: Layer 4: GSLB Bandwidth Management Security Pack Enabled Software features: Layer 4: GSLB Inbound Linklb Intelligent Traffic Management

Software key information includes a list of all the optional software packages which have been activated or installed on your switch. For information on ordering optional software license keys, see “How to Get Help” on page 18.

/info/dump Information Dump
Use the dump command to dump all switch information available from the Information Menu (10K or more, depending on your configuration). This data is useful for tuning and debugging switch performance. If you want to capture dump data to a file, set your communication software on your workstation to capture session data prior to issuing the dump commands.

315393-J, January 2005

Chapter 4: The Information Menu

127

Alteon OS 22.0.2 Command Reference

128

Chapter 4: The Information Menu

315393-J, January 2005

CHAPTER 5

The Statistics Menu
You can view switch performance statistics in both the user and administrator command modes. This chapter discusses how to use the command line interface to display switch statistics.

/stats Statistics Menu
[Statistics Menu] port - Port Stats Menu l2 - Layer 2 Stats Menu l3 - Layer 3 Stats Menu slb - Server Load Balancing (L4-7) Stats Menu bwm - Bandwidth Management Stats Menu mp - MP-specific Stats Menu sp - SP-specific Stats Menu security - Security Stats Menu snmp - Show SNMP stats ntp - Show NTP stats pm - Port Mirroring Stats Menu mgmt - Management Port Stats dump - Dump all stats

315393-J, January 2005

129

Alteon OS 22.0.2 Command Reference

Table 5-1 Statistics Menu Options (/stats)
Command Syntax and Usage port <port number> Displays the Port Statistics Menu for the specified port. Use this command to display traffic statistics on a port-by-port basis. Traffic statistics are included in SNMP Management Information Base (MIB) objects. To view menu options, see page 131. l2 Displays Layer 2 Statistics Menu. To view menu options, see page 144. l3 Displays Layer3 Statistics Menu. To view menu options, see page 148. slb Displays the Server Load Balancing (SLB) Menu. To view menu options, see page 167. bwm Displays the Bandwidth Management Menu. To view menu options, see page 198. mp Displays the Management Processor Statistics Menu. Use this command to view information on how switch management processes and resources are currently being allocated. To view menu options, see page 205. sp <SP number (1-4)> Displays Switch Processor-Specific Menu. To view menu options, see page 210. security Displays Security Statistics Menu. To view menu options, see page 212. snmp Displays SNMP Statistics. See page 218 for a sample output and description of SNMP statistics. ntp <clear> Displays Network Time Protocol (NTP) Statistics. See page 222 for a sample output and a description of NTP Statistics. You can execute the clear command option to delete all statistics. pm Displays Port Mirroring Statistics Menu. To view menu options, see page 224. mgmt Displays interface statistics for the Management Port. See page 224 for sample output. dump Dumps all switch statistics. Use this command to gather data for tuning and debugging switch performance. If you want to capture dump data to a file, set your communication software on your workstation to capture session data prior to issuing the dump command. For details, see page 225.

130

Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu

315393-J, January 2005

Alteon OS 22.0.2 Command Reference

/stats/port <port number> Port Statistics Menu
This menu displays traffic statistics on a port-by-port basis. Traffic statistics include SNMP Management Information Base (MIB) objects.
[Port Statistics Menu] brg - Show bridging ("dot1") stats ether - Show Ethernet ("dot3") stats if - Show interface ("if") stats ip - Show Internet Protocol ("IP") stats link - Show link stats rmon - Show RMON stats dump - Dump port stats clear - Clear all port stats

Table 5-2 Port Statistics Menu Options (/stats/port)
Command Syntax and Usage brg Displays bridging (“dot1”) statistics for the port. See page 132 for a sample output and the description of statistics. ether Displays Ethernet (“dot1”) statistics for the port. See page 133 for a sample output and the description of statistics. if Displays interface statistics for the port. See page 136 for a sample output and the description of statistics. ip Displays IP statistics for the port. See page 138 for a sample output and the description of statistics. link Displays link statistics for the port. See page 139 for a sample output and the description of statistics. rmon Displays Remote Monitor (RMON) statistics for the port. See page 140 for a sample output and the description of statistics. dump Displays all the port statistics.

315393-J, January 2005

Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu

131

Alteon OS 22.0.2 Command Reference

Table 5-2 Port Statistics Menu Options (/stats/port) (Continued)
Command Syntax and Usage clear This command clears all the statistics on this port.

/stats/port <port number>/brg
Bridging Statistics
This menu option enables you to display the bridging statistics of the selected port.
Bridging statistics for port 1: dot1PortInFrames: dot1PortOutFrames: dot1PortInDiscards: dot1TpLearnedEntryDiscards: dot1BasePortDelayExceededDiscards: dot1BasePortMtuExceededDiscards: dot1StpPortForwardTransitions:

63242584 63277826 0 0 NA NA 0

Table 5-3 Bridging Statistics of a Port (/stats/port/brg)
Statistics dot1PortInFrames Description The number of frames that have been received by this port from its segment. A frame received on the interface corresponding to this port is only counted by this object if and only if it is for a protocol being processed by the local bridging function, including bridge management frames. The number of frames that have been transmitted by this port to its segment. Note that a frame transmitted on the interface corresponding to this port is only counted by this object if and only if it is for a protocol being processed by the local bridging function, including bridge management frames. Count of valid frames received which were discarded (that is, filtered) by the Forwarding Process. The total number of Forwarding Database entries, which have been or would have been learnt, but have been discarded due to a lack of space to store them in the Forwarding Database. If this counter is increasing, it indicates that the Forwarding Database is regularly becoming full (a condition which has unpleasant performance effects on the subnetwork). If this counter has a significant value but is not presently increasing, it indicates that the problem has been occurring but is not persistent.

dot1PortOutFrames

dot1PortInDiscards

dot1TpLearnedEntry Discards

132

Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu

315393-J, January 2005

counted exclusively according to the error status presented to the LLC. 315393-J. Received frames for which multiple error conditions are obtained are.Alteon OS 22. January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 133 . dot1BasePortMtu ExceededDiscards dot1StpPortForward Transitions /stats/port <port number>/ether Ethernet Statistics This menu option enables you to display the ethernet statistics of the selected port Ethernet statistics for port 1: dot3StatsAlignmentErrors: dot3StatsFCSErrors: dot3StatsSingleCollisionFrames: dot3StatsMultipleCollisionFrames: dot3StatsSQETestErrors: dot3StatsDeferredTransmissions: dot3StatsLateCollisions: dot3StatsExcessiveCollisions: dot3StatsInternalMacTransmitErrors: dot3StatsCarrierSenseErrors: dot3StatsFrameTooLongs: dot3StatsInternalMacReceiveErrors: dot3CollFrequencies [1-15]: 0 0 0 0 NA 0 0 0 NA 0 0 0 NA Table 5-4 Ethernet Statistics for Port (/stats/port/ether) Statistics dot3StatsAlignment Errors Description A count of frames received on a particular interface that are not an integral number of octets in length and do not pass the Frame Check Sequence (FCS) check.0. according to the conventions of IEEE 802. The number of frames discarded by this port due to an excessive size. The number of times this port has transitioned from the Learning state to the Forwarding state. It is incremented by both transparent and source route bridges. It is incremented by both transparent and source route bridges. The count represented by an instance of this object is incremented when the alignmentError status is returned by the MAC service to the Logical Link Control (LLC) (or other MAC user).3 Layer Management.2 Command Reference Table 5-3 Bridging Statistics of a Port (/stats/port/brg) Statistics dot1BasePortDelay ExceededDiscards Description The number of frames discarded by this port due to excessive transit delay through the bridge.

2 Command Reference Table 5-4 Ethernet Statistics for Port (/stats/port/ether) Statistics dot3StatsFCSErrors Description A count of frames received on a particular interface that are an integral number of octets in length but do not pass the Frame Check Sequence (FCS) check.3 Layer Management. This count does not include frames received with frametoo-long or frame-too-short errors. and is not counted by the corresponding instance of the dot3StatsMultipleCollisionFrame object. January 2005 . A frame that is counted by an instance of this object is also counted by the corresponding instance of either the ifOutUcastPkts.31998 Edition. Note: Coding errors detected by the physical layer for speeds above 10 Mb/s will cause the frame to fail FCS check. A count of successfully transmitted frames on a particular interface for which transmission is inhibited by more than one collision.0. A count of successfully transmitted frames on a particular interface for which transmission is inhibited by exactly one collision. and is not counted by the corresponding instance of the dot3StatsSingleCollisionFrames object. section 7. This counter does not increment when the interface is operating in fullduplex mode. This counter does not increment when the interface is operating in fullduplex mode. dot3StatsSingleCollisionFrames dot3StatsMultipleCollisionFrames dot3StatsSQETestErrors 134 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J. ifOutMulticastPkts.Alteon OS 22. Received frames for which multiple error conditions are obtained are. or ifOutBroadcastPkts.802.6. A frame that is counted by an instance of this object is also counted by the corresponding instance of either the ifOutUcastPkts. according to the conventions of IEEE 802.2. This counter does not increment when the interface is operating in fullduplex mode. ifOutMulticastPkts. or ifOutBroadcastPkts.4. The SQE TEST ERROR is set in accordance with the rules for the verification of the SQE detection mechanism in the PLS Carrier Sense Function as described in IEEE Std. counted exclusively according to the error status presented to the LLC. A count of times that the SQE TEST ERROR message is generated by the PLS sub layer for a particular interface. The count represented by an instance of this object is incremented when the frameCheckError status is returned by the MAC service to the LLC (or other MAC user).

an instance of this object may represent a count of transmission errors on a particular interface that are not otherwise counted. The count represented by an instance of this object is incremented at most once per transmission attempt. In particular. The count represented by an instance of this object does not include frames involved in collisions. A count of frames for which transmission on a particular interface fails due to an internal MAC sub layer transmit error. A (late) collision included in a count represented by an instance of this object is also considered as a (generic) collision for purposes of other collision-related statistics. A frame is only counted by an instance of this object if it is not counted by the corresponding instance of either the dot3StatsLateCollisions object. or the dot3StatsCarrierSenseErrors object. the dot3StatsExcessiveCollisions object. This counter does not increment when the interface is operating in fullduplex mode. Five hundred and twelve bit-times corresponds to 51.Alteon OS 22.2 microseconds on a 10 Mbit/s system. The number of times that the carrier sense condition was lost or never asserted when attempting to transmit a frame on a particular interface. even if the carrier sense condition fluctuates during a transmission attempt. The precise meaning of the count represented by an instance of this object is implementation-specific. A count of frames for which transmission on a particular interface fails due to excessive collisions.0.2 Command Reference Table 5-4 Ethernet Statistics for Port (/stats/port/ether) Statistics dot3StatsDeferredTransmissions Description A count of frames for which the first transmission attempt on a particular interface is delayed because the medium is busy. This counter does not increment when the interface is operating in fullduplex mode. The number of times that a collision is detected on a particular interface later than one slotTime into the transmission of a packet. This counter does not increment when the interface is operating in fullduplex mode. dot3StatsLateCollisions dot3StatsExcessive Collisions dot3StatsInternalMacTransmitErrors dot3StatsCarrierSenseErrors 315393-J. January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 135 . This counter does not increment when the interface is operating in fullduplex mode.

3 Layer Management. A count of frames for which reception on a particular interface fails due to an internal MAC sub layer receive error. a frame which is transmitted after experiencing exactly 4 collisions would be indicated by incrementing only dot3CollFrequencies [4]. A frame is only counted by an instance of this object if it is not counted by the corresponding instance of either the dot3StatsFrameTooLongs object. Received frames for which multiple error conditions are obtained are. No other instance of dot3CollFrequencies would be incremented in this example. according to the conventions of IEEE 802. Interface statistics for port 1: ifHCIn Counters Octets: 51697080313 UcastPkts: 65356399 BroadcastPkts: 0 MulticastPkts: 0 Discards: 0 Errors: 0 ifHCOut Counters 51721056808 65385714 6516 0 0 0 136 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J. In particular. A count of individual MAC frames for which the transmission (successful or otherwise) on a particular interface occurs after the frame has experienced exactly the number of collisions specified by the index.0. the dot3StatsAlignmentErrors object. The count represented by an instance of this object is incremented when the frameTooLong status is returned by the MAC service to the LLC (or other MAC user). or the dot3StatsFCSErrors object. dot3StatsInternalMacReceiveErrors dot3CollFrequencies /stats/port <port number>/if Interface Statistics This menu option enables you to display the interface statistics of the selected port. January 2005 . This counter does not increment when the interface is operating in fullduplex mode. counted exclusively according to the error status presented to the LLC.Alteon OS 22. For example.2 Command Reference Table 5-4 Ethernet Statistics for Port (/stats/port/ether) Statistics dot3StatsFrameTooLongs Description A count of frames received on a particular interface that exceed the maximum permitted frame size. an instance of this object may represent a count of received errors on a particular interface that are not otherwise counted. The precise meaning of the count represented by an instance of this object is implementation-specific.

this includes both Group and Functional addresses. and which were addressed to a multicast address at this sublayer. This does include the number of octets in valid MAC Control frames received on this interface. including the MAC header and FCS. this includes both Group and Functional addresses. One possible reason for discarding such a packet could be to free up buffer space. which were not addressed to a multicast or broadcast address at this sublayer.layer. delivered by this sub-layer to a higher sub. The sum for this interface of dot3statsAlignmentErrors. delivered by this sub-layer to a higher sub. dot3StatsFrameTooLongs. The number of octets transmitted in valid MAC frames on this interface. dot3StatsInternalMacReceiveErrors and dot3StatsSymbolErrors. This does not include the number of octets in valid MAC Control frames transmitted on this interface. including the MAC header and FCS. and which were not addressed to a multicast or broadcast address at this sub-layer. including those that were discarded or not sent. The total number of packets that higher-level protocols requested to be transmitted. January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 137 .2 Command Reference Table 5-5 Interface Statistics for Port (/stats/port/if) Statistics ifHCInOctets Description The number of octets in valid MAC frames received on the interface. For a MAC layer protocol. The number of inbound packets which were chosen to be discarded even though no errors had been detected to prevent their being delivered to a higher-layer protocol. The total number of packets that higher-level protocols requested to be transmitted. dot3StatsFCSErrors. The number of packets. For a MAC layer protocol. including those that were discarded or not sent.0. One possible reason for discarding such a packet could be to free up buffer space. including those that were discarded or not sent. The number of packets delivered by this sub-layer to a higher (sub) layer.layer. and which were addressed to a broadcast address at this sublayer. The number of outbound packets which were chosen to be discarded even though no errors had been detected to prevent their being transmitted. The number of packets. which were addressed to a multicast address at this sub-layer. which were addressed to a broadcast address at this sub-layer. The total number of packets that higher-level protocols requested to be transmitted.Alteon OS 22. ifHCInUcastPkts ifHCInBroadcastPkts ifHCInMulticastPkts ifHCInDiscards ifHCInErrors ifHCOutOctets ifHCOutUcastPkts ifHCOutBroadcastPkts ifHCOutMulticastPkts ifHCOutDiscards 315393-J.

2 Command Reference Table 5-5 Interface Statistics for Port (/stats/port/if) Statistics ifHCOutErrors Description The sum for this interface of: dot3statsSQETestErrors. The number of input datagrams for which this entity (the switch) was not their final IP destination. The number of locally-addressed datagrams received successfully but discarded because of an unknown or unsupported protocol. January 2005 . including those received in error. ipInAddrErrors ipForwDatagrams ipInUnknownProtos 138 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J. This count includes invalid addresses (for example. dot3StatsInternalMacTransmitErrors and dot3StatsCarrierSenseErrors.0. this counter includes datagrams discarded because the destination address was not a local address. this counter will include only those packets which were Source-Routed via this entity (the switch). as a result of which an attempt was made to find a route to forward them to that final destination. Class E).Alteon OS 22. 0. dot3StatsExcessiveCollisions. The number of input datagrams discarded because the IP address in their IP header's destination field was not a valid address to be received at this entity (the switch).0) and addresses of unsupported Classes (for example. For entities which are not IP Gateways and therefore do not forward datagrams.0. /stats/port <port number>/ip Interface Protocol Statistics This menu option enables you to display the interface statistics of the selected port.0. IP statistics for port 1: ipInReceives: ipInAddrErrors: ipInUnknownProtos: ipInDelivers: ipTtlExceeds: ipLANDattacks: 0 0 0 0 0 0 ipForwDatagrams: ipInDiscards: 0 0 Table 5-6 Interface Protocol Statistics (/stats/port/ip) Statistics ipInReceives Description The total number of input datagrams received from interfaces. In entities which do not act as IP Gateways. dot3StatsLateCollisions.Route option processing was successful. and the Source.

315393-J. The total number of input datagrams successfully delivered to IP userprotocols (including ICMP). ipInDelivers ipTtlExceeds ipLANDattacks /stats/port <port number>/link Link Statistics This menu enables you to display the link statistics of the selected port.Alteon OS 22. Link statistics for port 1: linkStateChange: 4 Table 5-7 Link Statistics (/stats/port/link) Statistics linkStateChange Description The total number of link state changes. but which were discarded (for example. January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 139 .0.2 Command Reference Table 5-6 Interface Protocol Statistics (/stats/port/ip) Statistics ipInDiscards Description The number of input IP datagrams for which no problems were encountered to prevent their continued processing. The number of IP datagram for which an ICMP TTL exceeded message was sent. Note that this counter does not include any datagrams discarded while awaiting re-assembly. for lack of buffer space). The number of packets that have the same source and destination IP address.

The differences in the sampled values are Pkts and Octets. etherStatsOctets 140 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J. January 2005 .2 Command Reference /stats/port <port number>/rmon RMON Statistics This menu option enables you to display the remote monitor statistics of the selected port. the etherStatsPkts and etherStatsOctets objects should be sampled before and after a common interval. This object can be used as a reasonable estimate of utilization (which is the percent utilization of the ethernet segment). 000 The result of this equation is the percent value of utilization. respectively.6 + 6. it is just the number of times this condition has been detected. The total number of octets of data (including those in bad packets) received on the network (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets). Note that this number is not necessarily the number of packets dropped.8 ) Utilization = --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Interval × 10. If greater precision is desired.Alteon OS 22.0. RMON statistics for port 1: etherStatsDropEvents: etherStatsOctets: etherStatsPkts: etherStatsBroadcastPkts: etherStatsMulticastPkts: etherStatsCRCAlignErrors: etherStatsUndersizePkts: etherStatsOversizePkts: etherStatsFragments: etherStatsJabbers: etherStatsCollisions: etherStatsPkts64Octets: etherStatsPkts65to127Octets: etherStatsPkts128to255Octets: etherStatsPkts256to511Octets: etherStatsPkts512to1023Octets: etherStatsPkts1024to1518Octets: 0 129677 1485 734 712 0 0 0 0 0 0 954 578 35 26 16 8 Table 5-8 Remote Monitor Statistics (/stats/port/rmon) Statistics etherStatsDrop Events Description The total number of events in which packets were dropped by the probe due to lack of resources.4 ) + ( Octets × 0. These values are used to calculate the utilization as follows: Pkts × ( 9. and the number of seconds in the interval is Interval.

2 Command Reference Table 5-8 Remote Monitor Statistics (/stats/port/rmon) Statistics etherStatsPkts Description The total number of packets (including bad packets. (A runt is a packet that is less than 64 bytes. but had either a bad Frame Check Sequence (FCS) with an integral number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS with a non-integral number of octets (Alignment Error). January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 141 .2. The total number of good packets received that were directed to the broadcast address.5 (10Base-5) and section 10. The total number of packets received that were less than 64 octets long (excluding framing bits.) The total number of packets received that were longer than 1518 octets (excluding framing bits.4 (10Base-2). Note that this definition of jabber is different than the definition in IEEE802.3. but including FCS octets). These documents define jabber as the condition where any packet exceeds 20 ms.0.3 section 8. and had either a bad Frame Check Sequence (FCS) with an integral number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS with a non-integral number of octets (Alignment Error). The total number of packets received that were longer than 1518 octets (excluding framing bits. inclusive.Alteon OS 22. Note that this number does not include packets directed to the broadcast address.1. This is because it counts both runts (which are normal occurrences due to collisions) and noise hits. The total number of good packets received that were directed to a multicast address. but including Frame Check Sequence (FCS) octets) of between 64 and 1518 octets. The total number of packets received that had a length (excluding framing bits. Note that it is entirely normal for etherStatsFragments to increment. and multicast packets) received. The allowed range to detect jabber is between 20 milliseconds and 150 milliseconds. but including FCS octets) and were otherwise well formed. but including FCS octets) and were otherwise well formed.1. Note that this does not include multicast packets. The total number of packets received that were less than 64 octets in length (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets) and had either a bad Frame Check Sequence (FCS) with an integral number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS with a non-integral number of octets (Alignment Error). etherStatsBroadcastPkts etherStatsMulticastPkts etherStatsCRCAlign Errors etherStatsUndersizePkts etherStatsOversizePkts etherStatsFragments etherStatsJabbers 315393-J. broadcast packets.

Note also that an RMON probe inside a repeater should ideally report collisions between the repeater and one or more other hosts (transmit collisions as defined by IEEE 802. Section 8.3 states that a station must detect a collision.3 defines a collision as the simultaneous presence of signals on the DO and RD circuits (transmitting and receiving at the same time). January 2005 . The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were 64 octets in length (excluding framing bits but including Frame Check Sequence (FCS) octets).3. The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were between 256 and 511 octets in length (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets).3 (10Base-5) and section 10. A repeater port must detect a collision when two or more stations are transmitting simultaneously. The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were between 512 and 1023 octets in length (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets). A 10Base-T station can only detect collisions when it is transmitting.1. The value returned will depend on the location of the RMON probe. should report the same number of collisions. 14. if three or more stations are transmitting simultaneously.2 Command Reference Table 5-8 Remote Monitor Statistics (/stats/port/rmon) Statistics etherStatsCollisions Description The best estimate of the total number of collisions on this Ethernet segment.4 (10Base-T) of IEEE standard 802.1.2. Probe location plays a much smaller role when considering 10Base-T.3 (10Base-2) of IEEE standard 802.2. in the receive mode. The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were between 1024 and 1518 octets in length (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets). The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were between 65 and 127 octets in length (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets).0.3k) plus receiver collisions observed on any coax segments to which the repeater is connected.Alteon OS 22. etherStatsPkts64Octets etherStatsPkts65to127Octets etherStatsPkts128to255Octets etherStatsPkts256to511Octets etherStatsPkts512to1023Octets etherStatsPkts1024to1518Octets 142 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J. Thus a probe placed on a repeater port could record more collisions than a probe connected to a station on the same segment would. Thus probes placed on a station and a repeater. The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were between 128 and 255 octets in length (excluding framing bits but including Frame Check Sequence (FCS) octets).1.

2 Command Reference /stats/port <port number>/dump Port Dump Statistics Bridging statistics for port 1: dot1PortInFrames: 1284 dot1PortOutFrames: 142 dot1PortInDiscards: 130 dot1TpLearnedEntryDiscards: 0 dot1BasePortDelayExceededDiscards: NA dot1BasePortMtuExceededDiscards: NA dot1StpPortForwardTransitions: 2 -----------------------------------------------------------------Ethernet statistics for port 1: dot3StatsAlignmentErrors: 0 dot3StatsFCSErrors: 0 dot3StatsSingleCollisionFrames: 0 dot3StatsMultipleCollisionFrames: 0 dot3StatsSQETestErrors: NA dot3StatsDeferredTransmissions: 0 dot3StatsLateCollisions: 0 dot3StatsExcessiveCollisions: 0 dot3StatsInternalMacTransmitErrors: NA dot3StatsCarrierSenseErrors: 1 dot3StatsFrameTooLongs: 0 dot3StatsInternalMacReceiveErrors: 0 dot3CollFrequencies [1-15]: NA -----------------------------------------------------------------Interface statistics for port 1: ifHCIn Counters ifHCOut Counters Octets: 124166 19560 UcastPkts: 39 27 BroadcastPkts: 631 14 MulticastPkts: 614 101 Discards: 130 0 Errors: 1 0 -----------------------------------------------------------------IP statistics for port 1: ipInReceives: 0 ipInAddrErrors: 0 ipForwDatagrams: 0 ipInUnknownProtos: 0 ipInDiscards: 0 ipInDelivers: 0 ipTtlExceeds: 0 ipLANDattacks: 0 -----------------------------------------------------------------Link statistics for port 1: linkStateChange: 3 ------------------------------------------------------------------ 315393-J. January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 143 .0.Alteon OS 22.

lacp <port number (1 to max num ports)> Displays Link Aggregation Control Protocol statistics. see page 145. To view statistics and their description. To view statistics and their description.2 Command Reference RMON statistics for port 1: etherStatsDropEvents: etherStatsOctets: etherStatsPkts: etherStatsBroadcastPkts: etherStatsMulticastPkts: etherStatsCRCAlignErrors: etherStatsUndersizePkts: etherStatsOversizePkts: etherStatsFragments: etherStatsJabbers: etherStatsCollisions: etherStatsPkts64Octets: etherStatsPkts65to127Octets: etherStatsPkts128to255Octets: etherStatsPkts256to511Octets: etherStatsPkts512to1023Octets: etherStatsPkts1024to1518Octets: 0 123840 1406 698 669 0 0 0 0 0 0 906 548 35 25 16 8 /stats/l2 Layer 2 Statistics Menu [Layer 2 Statistics Menu] fdb . stg Displays Spanning Tree Group statistics.Alteon OS 22.Show STG stats Table 5-9 Layer 2 Statistics Menu Options (/stats/l2) Command Syntax and Usage fdb Displays Forwarding Database statistics. January 2005 . To view statistics and their description. see page 147.Show FDB stats lacp . see page 146. 144 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J.Show LACP stats stg .0.

Current number of entries in the Forwarding Database.Alteon OS 22. Number of successful searches in the Forwarding Database. Number of entry lookups in the Forwarding Database. Highest number of entries recorded at any given time in the Forwarding Database. Number of maximum Forwarding Database entries supported by the switch.0. Number of search failures in the Forwarding Database.2 Command Reference /stats/l2/fdb FDB Statistics FDB statistics: creates: current: lookups: finds: find_or_c's: max: 9611 58 850254 5832 11874 16384 deletes: hiwat: lookup fails: find fails: overflows: 9553 65 151373 0 0 This menu option enables you to display statistics regarding the use of the forwarding database. Number of entries found or created in the Forwarding Database. Number of entries overflowing the Forwarding Database. January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 145 . FDB statistics are described in the following table: Table 5-10 Forwarding Database Statistics (/stats/l2/fdb) Statistic creates current lookups finds find_or_c’s deletes hiwat Description Number of entries created in the Forwarding Database. including the number of new entries. Number of unsuccessful searches made in the Forwarding Database. and unsuccessful searches. finds. lookup fails find fails overflows max 315393-J. Number of entries deleted from the Forwarding Database.

January 2005 . Marker Rsp PDUs trans. Valid Marker PDUs received Valid Marker Rsp PDUs received Unknown version/TLV type Illegal subtype received LACPDUs transmitted Marker PDUs transmitted The number of valid Marker PDUs that the switch received on this port. The number of LACPDUs transmitted out of this port.Alteon OS 22. The number of illegal LACP subtype received on this port. The number of unknown version or TLV type that the switch received on this port. The number of Marker PDUs transmitted out of this port.0.The number of Marker Responses transmitted out of this port. The number of valid Marker Responses that the switch received on this port. mitted 146 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J.2 Command Reference /stats/l2/lacp LACP Statistics >> Layer 2 Statistics# lacp 1 port 1 Valid LACPDUs received Valid Marker PDUs received Valid Marker Rsp PDUs received Unknown version/TLV type Illegal subtype received LACPDUs transmitted Marker PDUs transmitted Marker Rsp PDUs transmitted - 9394 0 0 0 0 8516 0 0 Table 5-11 LACP Statistics Parameters (/stats?l2/lacp) Field Description Valid LACPDUs received The number of LACPDUs that the switch received on this port.

Xmt Cfg 315393-J.2 Command Reference /stats/l2/stg Spanning Tree Group Statistics Spanning Tree Group 1: Port Rcv Cfg Rcv TCN ----. Displays the number of configuration BPDUs transmitted.------------------1 0 0 2 0 0 3 0 0 4 0 0 5 0 0 6 0 0 7 0 0 8 0 0 9 139046 176 10 0 0 11 0 0 12 0 0 13 0 0 14 0 0 15 0 0 16 0 0 17 0 0 18 0 0 19 0 0 20 0 0 21 0 0 22 0 0 23 0 0 24 0 0 25 0 0 26 0 0 27 0 0 28 0 0 Xmt Cfg ---------0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 27 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Xmt TCN ---------0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Table 5-12 Spanning Tree Group Statistics Parameters (/stats/l2/stg) Field Port Rcv cfg Rcv TCN Description Displays the port number.0.Alteon OS 22. Displays the number of configuration BPDUs received Displays the number of TCN (Topology Change Notification) messages received. January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 147 .

Clear IP stats dump .OSPF Statistics Menu ip .0. See page 150 for sample output.Show ICMP stats if . See page 157 for sample output.Show TCP stats udp .Show route stats arp . route Displays route statistics. January 2005 .Alteon OS 22.Show DNS stats icmp .2 Command Reference Table 5-12 Spanning Tree Group Statistics Parameters (/stats/l2/stg) Field Xmt TCN Description Displays the number of TCN (Topology Change Notification) messages transmitted /stats/l3 Layer 3 Statistics Menu [Layer 3 Statistics Menu] ospf .Dump layer 3 stats Table 5-13 Layer 3 Statistics Menu (/stats/l3) Command Syntax and Usage ospf Displays OSPF statistics Menu.Show UDP stats ifclear .Show IP stats route . ip Displays IP statistics. See page 159 for sample output.Clear IP interface ("if") stats ipclear . 148 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J. arp Displays Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) statistics.Show IP interface ("if") stats tcp . See page 155 for sample output.Show ARP stats vrrp .Show VRRP stats dns .

See page 165 for sample output. Use this command to gather data for tuning and debugging Layer 3 switch performance. See page 161 for sample output. set your communication software on your workstation to capture session data prior to issuing the dump command. udp Displays UDP statistics. 315393-J. ipclear Clears IP statistics. if <interface number (1-256)> Displays IP interface statistics for the management processors. but ignored (vrrpBadAdvers) See page 159 for sample output. icmp Displays ICMP statistics.0.Alteon OS 22. Use this command with caution as it will delete all the IP interface statistics.2 Command Reference Table 5-13 Layer 3 Statistics Menu (/stats/l3) Command Syntax and Usage vrrp When virtual routers are configured. See page 167 for sample output. January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 149 . dump Dumps all Layer 3 switch statistics. Use this command with caution as it will delete all the IP statistics. dns Displays Domain Name Server/System (DNS) statistics. tcp Displays TCP statistics. you can display the following protocol statistics for VRRP: Advertisements received (vrrpInAdvers) Advertisements transmitted (vrrpOutAdvers) Advertisements received. ifclear Clears IP interface statistics. See page 160 for sample output. If you want to capture dump data to a file. See page 163 for sample output.

Show global stats aindex . January 2005 . 150 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J. aindex <area index (0-2)> Displays area index statistics.Alteon OS 22. See page 151 for sample output and details.0.2 Command Reference /stats/l3/ospf OSPF Statistics Menu [OSPF stats Menu] general .Show area(s) stats if .Show interface(s) stats Table 5-14 OSPF Statistics Menu (/stats/l3/ospf) Command Syntax and Usage general Displays global statistics. if <interface number (1-256)> Displays interface statistics.

OSPF stats ---------Rx/Tx Stats: Pkts hello database ls requests ls acks ls updates Nbr change stats: hello start n2way adjoint ok negotiation done exchange done bad requests bad sequence loading done n1way rst_ad down Timers kickoff hello retransmit lsa lock lsa ack dbage summary ase export Rx -------0 23 4 3 7 9 Tx -------0 518 12 1 7 7 Intf change Stats: hello down loop unloop wait timer backup nbr change 2 0 2 2 2 2 0 0 2 0 0 1 4 2 0 0 2 0 5 514 1028 0 0 0 0 0 315393-J.Alteon OS 22. January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 151 .0.2 Command Reference /stats/l3/ospf/general OSPF Global Statistics The OSPF General Statistics contain the sum total of all OSPF packets received on all OSPF areas and interfaces.

The sum total of all Database Description packets transmitted on all OSPF areas and interfaces. The sum total of all Hello packets transmitted on all OSPF areas and interfaces. The sum total of all Hello packets received on all OSPF areas and interfaces. The sum total of all Link State Update packets transmitted on all OSPF areas and interfaces. Description Tx Pkts Rx Hello Tx Hello Rx Database Tx Database Rx ls Requests Tx ls Requests Rx ls Acks Tx ls Acks Rx ls Updates Tx ls Updates 152 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J. The sum total of all Link State Update packets received on all OSPF areas and interfaces. The sum total of all Link State Acknowledgement packets received on all OSPF areas and interfaces. The sum total of all Link State Request packets transmitted on all OSPF areas and interfaces. The sum total of all Link State Request packets received on all OSPF areas and interfaces. The sum total of all Database Description packets received on all OSPF areas and interfaces. The sum total of all Link State Acknowledgement packets transmitted on all OSPF areas and interfaces.2 Command Reference Table 5-15 OSPF General Statistics (stats/l3/ospf/general) Statistics Rx/Tx Stats: Rx Pkts The sum total of all OSPF packets received on all OSPF areas and interfaces.Alteon OS 22. The sum total of all OSPF packets transmitted on all OSPF areas and interfaces. January 2005 .0.

across all OSPF areas and interfaces.2 Command Reference Table 5-15 OSPF General Statistics (stats/l3/ospf/general) (Continued) Statistics Nbr Change Stats: hello The sum total of all Hello packets received from neighbors on all OSPF areas and interfaces. an indication that Hello packets should now be sent to the neighbor at intervals of HelloInterval seconds) across all OSPF areas and interfaces. The sum total number of Link State Requests which have been received for a link state advertisement not contained in the database across all interfaces and OSPF areas. in which this router is not mentioned across all OSPF interfaces and areas. The total number of Neighboring routers down (that is. in the initial state of a neighbor conversation) across all OSPF areas and interfaces. The sum total number of bidirectional communication establishment between this router and other neighboring routers. in an adjacency's final state) having transmitted a full sequence of Database Description packets. The sum total number of Database Description packets which have been received that either: a) Has an unexpected DD sequence number b) Unexpectedly has the init bit set c) Has an options field differing from the last Options field received in a Database Description packet. January 2005 . The sum total number of neighbors in this state wherein the Master/slave relationship has been negotiated. Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 153 Description Start n2way adjoint ok negotiation done exchange done bad requests bad sequence loading done n1way rst_ad down 315393-J. The sum total number of Hello packets received from neighbors.0. and sequence numbers have been exchanged. The sum total number of times the Neighbor adjacency has been reset across all OPSF areas and interfaces. across all OSPF areas and interfaces. Any of these conditions indicate that some error has occurred during adjacency establishment for all OSPF areas and interfaces. The sum total number of decisions to be made (again) as to whether an adjacency should be established/maintained with the neighbor across all OSPF areas and interfaces. The sum total number of neighbors in this state (that is. The sum total number of neighbors in this state (that is. The sum total number of link state updates received for all out-of-date portions of the database across all OSPF areas and interfaces.Alteon OS 22.

January 2005 . The sum total number of times the Link State Advertisement (LSA) lock timer has been fired across all OSPF areas and interfaces. The total number of times the Autonomous System Export (ASE) timer has been fired. indicating the end of the waiting period that is required before electing a (Backup) Designated Router across all OSPF areas and interfaces. The sum total number of times the Wait Timer has been fired.0. The total number of times the data base age (Dbage) has been fired. The sum total number of interfaces. Description unloop wait timer backup nbr change Timers Kickoff: hello The sum total number of times the Hello timer has been fired (which triggers the send of a Hello packet) across all OPSF areas and interfaces. The sum total of interfaces no longer connected to the attached network across all OSPF areas and interfaces. The sum total number of Backup Designated Routers on the attached network for all OSPF areas and interfaces. The sum total number of changes in the set of bidirectional neighbors associated with any interface across all OSPF areas. connected to the attached network in all OSPF areas. The total number of times the Summary timer has been fired.Alteon OS 22. The sum total number of times the LSA Ack timer has been fired across all OSPF areas and interfaces. The sum total number of interfaces down in all OSPF areas.2 Command Reference Table 5-15 OSPF General Statistics (stats/l3/ospf/general) (Continued) Statistics Intf Change Stats: hello down loop The sum total number of Hello packets sent on all interfaces and areas. The sum total number of times the Retransmit timer has been fired across all OPSF areas and interfaces. retransmit lsa lock lsa ack dbage summary ase export 154 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J.

Route option processing was successful. errors discovered in processing their IP options. which were Source-Routed via this entity (the switch). 0. In entities which do not act as IP Gateways. other format errors. and the Source. This count includes invalid addresses (for example. The number of locally addressed datagrams received successfully but discarded because of an unknown or unsupported protocol. ipInHdrErrors ipInAddrErrors ipForwDatagrams ipInUnknownProtos 315393-J. The number of input datagrams discarded due to errors in their IP headers.Alteon OS 22.2 Command Reference /stats/l3/ip IP Statistics IP statistics: ipInReceives: ipInAddrErrors: ipInUnknownProtos: ipInDelivers: ipOutDiscards: ipReasmReqds: ipReasmFails: ipFragFails: ipRoutingDiscards: ipReasmTimeout: 3115873 35447 500504 2334166 4 0 0 0 0 5 ipInHdrErrors: ipForwDatagrams: ipInDiscards: ipOutRequests: ipOutNoRoutes: ipReasmOKs: ipFragOKs: ipFragCreates: ipDefaultTTL: 1 0 0 1010542 4 0 0 0 255 Table 5-16 IP Statistics (/stats/l3/ip) Statistics ipInReceives Description The total number of input datagrams received from interfaces.0.0. including bad checksums.0) and addresses of unsupported Classes (for example. as a result of which an attempt was made to find a route to forward them to that final destination. The number of input datagrams for which this entity (the switch) was not their final IP destination. The number of input datagrams discarded because the IP address in their IP header's destination field was not a valid address to be received at this entity (the switch). including those received in error. January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 155 . time-to-live exceeded. For entities which are not IP Gateways and therefore do not forward datagrams.0. this counter will include only those packets. this counter includes datagrams discarded because the destination address was not a local address. version number mismatch. and so forth. Class E).

for example.assembly algorithm (for whatever reason: timed out. Note that this counter does not include any datagrams counted in ipForwDatagrams. January 2005 . but which were discarded (for example. for lack of buffer space). The total number of input datagrams successfully delivered to IP userprotocols (including ICMP). The number of failures detected by the IP re. because their Don't Fragment flag was set. The number of IP datagrams successfully re. errors. Note that this includes any datagrams which a host cannot route because all of its default gateways are down.0.assembled.2 Command Reference Table 5-16 IP Statistics (/stats/l3/ip) Statistics ipInDiscards Description The number of input IP datagrams for which no problems were encountered to prevent their continued processing. The number of IP datagrams that have been discarded because they needed to be fragmented at this entity (the switch) but could not be. The number of IP datagrams discarded because no route could be found to transmit them to their destination. The total number of IP datagrams which local IP user-protocols (including ICMP) supplied to IP in requests for transmission. The number of output IP datagrams for which no problem was encountered to prevent their transmission to their destination. and so forth). Note that this counter would include datagrams counted in ipForwDatagrams if any such packets met this (discretionary) discard criterion. The number of IP datagram fragments that have been generated as a result of fragmentation at this entity (the switch). Note that this counter includes any packets counted in ipForwDatagrams. The number of IP fragments received which needed to be reassembled at this entity (the switch). but which were discarded (for example. ipInDelivers ipOutRequests ipOutDiscards ipOutNoRoutes ipReasmReqds ipReasmOKs ipReasmFails ipFragOKs ipFragFails ipFragCreates 156 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J. which meet this no-route criterion. Note that this counter does not include any datagrams discarded while awaiting re-assembly. Note that this is not necessarily a count of discarded IP fragments since some algorithms (notably the algorithm in RFC 815) can lose track of the number of fragments by combining them as they are received. for lack of buffer space).Alteon OS 22. The number of IP datagrams that have been successfully fragmented at this entity (the switch).

One possible reason for discarding such an entry could be to free-up buffer space for other routing entries.------------.0. January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 157 . which were chosen to be discarded even though they are valid. whenever a TTL value is not supplied by the transport layer protocol. ipDefaultTTL ipReasmTimeout /stats/l3/route Route Statistics Route statistics: ipRoutesCur: 3 ipRoutesHighWater: 3 ipRoutesMax: 4096 -----------------------------------------------------------------SP Route statistics: SP ipRoutesCur ipRoutesHighWater ipRoutesMax --.------------1 3 3 4096 2 3 3 4096 3 3 3 4096 4 3 3 4096 -----------------------------------------------------------------RIP statistics: ripInPkts: ripDiscardPkts: BGP statistics: bgpInPkts: bgpBadPkts: bgpRoutesAdded: bgpRoutesCur: bgpRoutesIgnored: 0 ripOutPkts: 0 ripRoutesAgedOut: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 bgpOutPkts: bgpSessFailures: bgpRoutesRemoved: bgpRoutesFailed: bgpRoutesFiltered: 0 0 0 0 0 315393-J. The maximum number of seconds. which received fragments are held while they are awaiting reassembly at this entity (the switch). The default value inserted into the Time-To-Live (TTL) field of the IP header of datagrams originated at this entity (the switch).2 Command Reference Table 5-16 IP Statistics (/stats/l3/ip) Statistics ipRoutingDiscards Description The number of routing entries.------------------.Alteon OS 22.

The total number of RIP advertisement packets received that were dropped. The maximum number of supported routes. The total number of routes that were removed from the routing table. The total number of BGP packets dropped. Description ripRoutesAgedOut BGP statistics: bgpInPkts bgpOutPkts bgpBadPkts bgpSessFailures bgpRoutesAdded bgpRoutesRemoved bgpRoutesCur bgpRoutesFailed bgpRoutesIgnored The total number of BGP packets received.2 Command Reference Table 5-17 Route Statistics (/stats/l3/route) Statistics Route Statistics & SP Route Statistics: ipRoutesCur ipRoutesHighWater ipRoutesMax RIP statistics: ripInPkts ripOutPkts ripDiscardPkts The total number of good RIP advertisement packets received. The highest number of routes ever recorded in the route table. The total number of routes that were added to the routing table. The total number of outstanding routes in the route table. The total number of current BGP routes.Alteon OS 22. The total number of routes ignored because the peer was not connected locally or multihop was not configured.0. The total number of routes dropped by the filter. January 2005 . The total number of routes learned via RIP that has aged out. The total number of BGP packets sent. The total number of failed sessions. The total number of BGP routes that failed to add in the routing table. bgpRoutesFiltered 158 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J. The total number of RIP advertisement packets sent.

If the master fails. based on a number of priority criteria.2 Command Reference /stats/l3/arp ARP statistics This menu option enables you to display Address Resolution Protocol statistics.--------------1 1 1 8192 2 1 1 8192 3 1 1 8192 4 1 1 8192 Table 5-18 ARP Statistics (/stats/l3/arp) Statistics arpEntriesCur arpEntriesHighWater arpEntriesMax Description The total number of outstanding ARP entries in the ARP table. The maximum number of ARP entries that are supported. you can display the following protocol statistics for VRRP: Advertisements received (vrrpInAdvers) Advertisements transmitted (vrrpOutAdvers) Advertisements received. but ignored (vrrpBadAdvers) 315393-J. /stats/l3/vrrp VRRP Statistics Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP) support on the Alteon Application Switch provides redundancy between routers in a LAN. and assumes control of the shared virtual router IP address. When virtual routers are configured. This is accomplished by configuring the same virtual router IP address and ID number on each participating VRRP-capable routing device. January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 159 .Alteon OS 22.--------------. The highest number of ARP entries ever recorded in the ARP table.0. one of the backup virtual routers will assume routing authority and take control of the virtual router IP address.--------------------. One of the virtual routers is then elected as the master. MP ARP statistics: arpEntriesCur: 2 arpEntriesHighWater: 2 arpEntriesMax: 8192 -----------------------------------------------------------------SP ARP statistics: SP arpEntriesCur arpEntriesHighWater arpEntriesMax --.

/stats/l3/dns DNS Statistics This menu option enables you to display Domain Name System statistics. The total number of DNS response packets that have been transmitted. January 2005 .0. 160 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J. The total number of VRRP advertisements received that were dropped. The total number of VRRP advertisements that have been sent. DNS statistics: dnsInRequests: dnsBadRequests: 0 0 dnsOutRequests: 0 Table 5-20 DNS Statistics (/stats/l3/dns) Statistics dnsInRequests dnsOutRequests dnsBadRequests Description The total number of DNS request packets that have been received.Alteon OS 22.2 Command Reference The statistics for the VRRP LAN are displayed: VRRP statistics: vrrpInAdvers: vrrpOutAdvers: vrrpBadVersion: vrrpBadAddress: vrrpBadPassword: 0 0 0 0 0 vrrpBadAdvers: vrrpBadVrid: vrrpBadData: vrrpBadInterval: 0 0 0 0 Table 5-19 VRRP Statistics (/stats/l3/vrrp) Statistics vrrpInAdvers vrrpBadAdvers vrrpOutAdvers vrrpBadVersion vrrpBadVrid vrrpBadAddress vrrpBadData vrrpBadPassword vrrpBadInterval Description The total number of VRRP advertisements that have been received. The total number of DNS request packets received that were dropped.

0. January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 161 . The number of ICMP Source Quench (buffer almost full. stop sending data) messages received.2 Command Reference /stats/l3/icmp ICMP Statistics ICMP statistics: icmpInMsgs: icmpInDestUnreachs: icmpInParmProbs: icmpInRedirects: icmpInEchoReps: icmpInTimestampReps: icmpInAddrMaskReps: icmpOutErrors: icmpOutTimeExcds: icmpOutSrcQuenchs: icmpOutEchos: icmpOutTimestamps: icmpOutAddrMasks: 245802 41 0 0 244350 0 0 0 0 0 253777 0 0 icmpInErrors: icmpInTimeExcds: icmpInSrcQuenchs: icmpInEchos: icmpInTimestamps: icmpInAddrMasks: icmpOutMsgs: icmpOutDestUnreachs: icmpOutParmProbs: icmpOutRedirects: icmpOutEchoReps: icmpOutTimestampReps: icmpOutAddrMaskReps: 1393 0 0 18 0 0 253810 15 0 0 18 0 0 Table 5-21 ICMP Statistics (/stats/l3/icmp) Statistics icmpInMsgs Description The total number of ICMP messages which the entity (the switch) received. Note that this counter includes all those counted by icmpInErrors. The number of ICMP Time Exceeded messages received. icmpInErrors icmpInDestUnreachs icmpInTimeExcds icmpInParmProbs icmpInSrcQuenchs icmpInRedirects icmpInEchos icmpInEchoReps icmpInTimestamps icmpInTimestampReps icmpInAddrMasks 315393-J. The number of ICMP Address Mask Request messages received. and so forth).Alteon OS 22. The number of ICMP Redirect messages received. The number of ICMP Echo (request) messages received. The number of ICMP Timestamp (request) messages received. The number of ICMP Destination Unreachable messages received. The number of ICMP messages which the entity (the switch) received but determined as having ICMP-specific errors (bad ICMP checksums. The number of ICMP Parameter Problem messages received. The number of ICMP Echo Reply messages received. The number of ICMP Timestamp Reply messages received. bad length.

Alteon OS 22. This value should not include errors discovered outside the ICMP layer such as the inability of IP to route the resultant datagram. The number of ICMP Timestamp Reply messages sent. The number of ICMP Redirect messages sent. stop sending data) messages sent. January 2005 . since hosts do not send redirects. The number of ICMP Address Mask Reply messages sent. For a host. The number of ICMP Destination Unreachable messages sent. The number of ICMP Parameter Problem messages sent. The number of ICMP Address Mask Request messages sent. The number of ICMP Echo (request) messages sent. The number of ICMP Timestamp (request) messages sent. The number of ICMP Source Quench (buffer almost full. The total number of ICMP messages which this entity (the switch) attempted to send. this object will always be zero. In some implementations there may be no types of errors that contribute to this counter's value.2 Command Reference Table 5-21 ICMP Statistics (/stats/l3/icmp) Statistics icmpInAddrMaskReps icmpOutMsgs Description The number of ICMP Address Mask Reply messages received.0. icmpOutErrors icmpOutDestUnreachs icmpOutTimeExcds icmpOutParmProbs icmpOutSrcQuenchs icmpOutRedirects icmpOutEchos icmpOutEchoReps icmpOutTimestamps icmpOutTimestampReps icmpOutAddrMasks icmpOutAddrMaskReps 162 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J. The number of ICMP Echo Reply messages sent. The number of ICMP messages which this entity (the switch) did not send due to problems discovered within ICMP such as a lack of buffer. Note that this counter includes all those counted by icmpOutErrors. The number of ICMP Time Exceeded messages sent.

this counter will always be 0. For character-oriented or fixed-length interfaces which support protocol multiplexing the number of transmission units received via the interface which were discarded because of an unknown or unsupported protocol. ifInUcastPkts ifInNUCastPkts ifInDiscards ifInErrors ifInUnknownProtos 315393-J. the number of inbound packets that contained errors preventing them from being delivered to a higher-layer protocol. For any interface which does not support protocol multiplexing. For character-oriented or fixed-length interfaces. For packet-oriented interfaces.0. delivered by this sub-layer to a higher (sublayer). This object is deprecated in favor of ifInMulticastPkts and ifInBroadcastPkts. which were addressed to a multicast or broadcast address at this sub-layer. One possible reason for discarding such a packet could be to free up buffer space.2 Command Reference /stats/l3/if <interface number> Interface Statistics IP interface 1 statistics: ifInOctets: 48948386 ifInNUCastPkts: 167895 ifInErrors: 0 ifOutOctets: 27100789 ifOutNUcastPkts: 218652 ifOutErrors: 0 ifInUcastPkts: ifInDiscards: ifInUnknownProtos: ifOutUcastPkts: ifOutDiscards: ifStateChanges 220553 0 0 441938 0 1 Table 5-22 Interface Statistics (/stats/if) Statistics ifInOctets Description The total number of octets received on the interface. For packet-oriented interfaces. which were not addressed to a multicast or broadcast address at this sub-layer. The number of packets. delivered by this sub-layer to a higher (sublayer). the number of inbound transmission units that contained errors preventing them from being deliverable to a higher-layer protocol. The number of inbound packets that were chosen to be discarded even though no errors had been detected to prevent their being delivered to a higher-layer protocol. including framing characters. January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 163 . The number of packets. the number of packets received via the interface which were discarded because of an unknown or unsupported protocol.Alteon OS 22.

For packet-oriented interfaces. including those that were discarded or not sent. which were chosen to be discarded even though no errors had been detected to prevent their being transmitted. The number of outbound packets. January 2005 . and which were not addressed to a multicast or broadcast address at this sub-layer. and which were addressed to a multicast or broadcast address at this sub-layer. The total number of packets that higher-level protocols requested to be transmitted. One possible reason for discarding such a packet could be to free up buffer space. including framing characters.2 Command Reference Table 5-22 Interface Statistics (/stats/if) Statistics ifOutOctets Description The total number of octets transmitted out of the interface. The total number of packets that higher-level protocols requested to be transmitted. the number of outbound packets that could not be transmitted because of errors. This object is deprecated in favor of ifOutMulticastPkts and ifOutBroadcastPkts. ifOutUcastPkts ifOutNUcastPkts ifOutDiscards ifOutErrors ifStateChanges 164 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J. The number of times an interface has transitioned from either down to up or from up to down. including those that were discarded or not sent.Alteon OS 22. the number of outbound transmission units that could not be transmitted because of errors.0. For character-oriented or fixed-length interfaces.

0. this object should contain the value -1. More refined semantics for objects of this type depend upon the algorithm used to determine the retransmission timeout. The limit on the total number of TCP connections the entity (the switch) can support. The maximum value permitted by a TCP implementation for the retransmission timeout. measured in milliseconds. The number of times TCP connections have made a direct transition to the SYN-SENT state from the CLOSED state. In particular. In entities where the maximum number of connections is dynamic. January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 165 . an object of this type has the semantics of the LBOUND quantity described in RFC 793. In particular. The number of times TCP connections have made a direct transition to the SYN-RCVD state from the LISTEN state. measured in milliseconds. The minimum value permitted by a TCP implementation for the retransmission timeout. an object of this type has the semantics of the UBOUND quantity described in RFC 793. tcpRtoMin tcpRtoMax tcpMaxConn tcpActiveOpens tcpPassiveOpens 315393-J. when the timeout algorithm is rsre(3). when the timeout algorithm is rsre(3). More refined semantics for objects of this type depend upon the algorithm used to determine the retransmission timeout.Alteon OS 22.2 Command Reference /stats/l3/tcp TCP Statistics TCP statistics: tcpRtoAlgorithm: tcpRtoMax: tcpActiveOpens: tcpAttemptFails: tcpInSegs: tcpRetransSegs: tcpCurBuff: tcpCurInConn: tcpCurLstnConn: tcpAllocTCBFails: 4 240000 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 tcpRtoMin: tcpMaxConn: tcpPassiveOpens: tcpEstabResets: tcpOutSegs: tcpInErrs: tcpCurConn: tcpCurOutConn: tcpOutRsts: 0 1600 0 0 0 0 6 0 0 Table 5-23 TCP Statistics (/stats/l3/tcp) Statistics tcpRtoAlgorithm Description The algorithm used to determine the timeout value used for retransmitting unacknowledged octets.

The total number of TCP ports on which the switch is listening. The total number of segments received. The number of TCP segments sent containing the RST flag.Alteon OS 22.that is. tcpEstabResets tcpInSegs tcpOutSegs tcpRetransSegs tcpInErrs tcpCurBuff tcpCurConn tcpCurInConn tcpCurOutConn tcpCurLstnConn tcpOutRsts tcpAllocTCBFails 166 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J.0. including those on current connections but excluding those containing only retransmitted octets. The number of times TCP connections have made a direct transition to the CLOSED state from either the ESTABLISHED state or the CLOSEWAIT state. This count includes segments received on currently established connections. The total number of segments sent. The total number of outstanding memory allocations from heap by TCP protocol stack. The total number of segments received in error (for example. The total number of outstanding TCP sessions that are currently opened. including those received in error. January 2005 . bad TCP checksums). The total number of remotely-initiated TCP connections. plus the number of times TCP connections have made a direct transition to the LISTEN state from the SYN-RCVD state.2 Command Reference Table 5-23 TCP Statistics (/stats/l3/tcp) Statistics tcpAttemptFails Description The number of times TCP connections have made a direct transition to the CLOSED state from either the SYN-SENT state or the SYN-RCVD state. The total number of switch-originated TCP connection requests. the number of TCP segments transmitted containing one or more previously transmitted octets. The total number of segments retransmitted .

The total number of received UDP datagrams for which there was no application at the destination port.Global SLB Stats Menu real .Alteon OS 22. The total number of UDP datagrams sent from this entity (the switch).Show virtual server stats filt .Show auxiliary session table stats dump .Clear non-operational Server Load Balancing stats aux .Show DNS SLB stats wap .Show real server group stats virt .Show SSL SLB stats ftp .Show Layer 7 stats ssl . The number of received UDP datagrams that could not be delivered for reasons other than the lack of an application at the destination port.Show filter stats layer7 .SLB Switch SP Stats Menu gslb .Show FTP SLB parsing and NAT stats rtsp .Show RTSP SLB stats dns . udpNoPorts /stats/slb Server Load Balancing Statistics Menu [Server Load Balancing Statistics Menu] sp .Show WAP SLB stats maint .2 Command Reference /stats/l3/udp UDP Statistics UDP statistics: udpInDatagrams: udpInErrors: 54 0 udpOutDatagrams: udpNoPorts: 43 1578077 Table 5-24 UDP Statistics (/stats/l3/udp) Statistics udpInDatagrams udpOutDatagrams udpInErrors Description The total number of UDP datagrams delivered to the switch.Show SIP SLB stats clear . January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 167 .Dump all SLB statistics 315393-J.Show maintenance stats sip .Show real server stats group .0.

see page 179. Real server transmit/receive octets. For per-service octet counters. For per-service octet counters.Alteon OS 22. layer7 Displays Layer 7 statistics. See page 181 for sample output. January 2005 . See page 187 for sample output. Highest number of simultaneous sessions recorded for each real server. filt <filter ID (1-2048)> Displays the total number of times any filter has been used. see page 174. 168 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J. See page 182 for sample output. Current and total sessions for all real servers associated with the virtual server.0. virt <virtual server number (1-1024)> Displays the following virtual server statistics: Current and total sessions for each real server associated with the virtual server. See page 181 for sample output. See page 186 for sample output. Highest number of simultaneous sessions recorded for each real server. see page 179. see page 170. ssl Displays SSL server load balancing statistics. For more information. See page 180 for sample output. To view menu options. rtsp Displays RTSP SLB statistics. Real server transmit/receive octets. See page 190 for sample output. group <real server group number (1-256)> Displays the following real server group statistics: Current and total sessions for each real server in the real server group. ftp Displays FTP SLB parsing and NAT statistics.2 Command Reference Table 5-25 SLB Statistics Menu Options (/stats/slb) Command Syntax and Usage sp <SP number (1-4)> Displays the server load balancing statistics menu. real <real server number (1-1023)> Displays the following real server statistics: Number of times the real server has failed its health checks Number of sessions currently open on the real server Total sessions the real server was assigned Highest number of simultaneous sessions recorded for each real server Real server transmit/receive octets See page 179 for sample output. gslb Displays the Global SLB Statistics menu. Current and total sessions for all real servers associated with the real server group.

Alteon OS 22. This command does not reset the switch and does not affect the following counters: Counters required for Layer 4 and Layer 7 operation (such as current real server sessions). clear [y|n] Clears all non-operating SLB statistics on the Alteon Application Switch.2 Command Reference Table 5-25 SLB Statistics Menu Options (/stats/slb) Command Syntax and Usage dns Displays DNS SLB statistics. To save dump data to a file.0. Use this command to gather data for tuning and debugging switch performance. dump Dumps all switch SLB statistics. aux Displays auxiliary session table statistics. refer to Table 5-48 on page 196. See page 191 for sample output. To view the statistics reset by this command. 315393-J. See page 194 for sample output. All related SNMP counters. wap Displays WAP SLB statistics. set your communication software on your workstation to capture session data prior to issuing the dump command. maint Displays SLB maintenance statistics. resetting them to zero. See page 192 for sample output. sip Displays SIP SLB statistics. January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 169 . See page 196 for sample output.

See page 171 for a sample output.Show real server stats group . filt <filter ID (1-2048)> Displays statistics of the filter.Show real server group stats virt .Show maintenance stats aux .0. /stats/slb/sp/real <real server number> SP Real Server Statistics Port 1 Real server 1 stats: Current sessions: Total sessions: Octets: 3 3 24 170 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J. See page 170 for a sample output. virt <virtual server number (1-1024)> Displays statistics of the virtual server. January 2005 . clear Deletes all the SP statistics.Show auxiliary session table stats clear . See page 171 for a sample output.Clear SP stats Table 5-26 SP Statistics Menu options (/stats/slb/sp) Command Syntax and Usage real <real server number (1-1023)> Displays real server statistics of the switch port. aux Displays the statistics of the auxiliary session table. See page 172 for a sample output.Show filter stats maint . group <real server group number (1-1024)> Displays real server group statistics of the switch port. See page 171 for a sample output.2 Command Reference /stats/slb/sp Server Load Balancing SP statistics Menu [Server Load Balancing SP Statistics Menu] real .Show virtual server stats filt .Alteon OS 22. maint Displays the SP maintenance statistics.

15 20 77 12 ---.100.---------.--------------. January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 171 .10.--------------.10.-------.100.-------.-------.Alteon OS 22.-------200.100 40 137 21 Octets --------------480000 616000 --------------1096000 /stats/slb/sp <sp number>/filt <filter number> SP Filter Statistics SP 1 Filter 1 stats: Total firings: 2 315393-J.100.15 20 77 12 ---.-------1 200.---------.---------.14 20 60 9 2 200.-------40 137 21 Octets --------------480000 616000 --------------1096000 /stats/slb/sp <sp number>/virt <virtual server number> SP Virtual Server Statistics Real server group 1 stats: Current Total Highest Real IP address Sessions Sessions Sessions ---.---------.100.-------.10.10.--------------.10.--------------.14 20 60 9 2 200.0.-------1 200.100.2 Command Reference /stats/slb/sp <sp number>/group <real group server number> SP Real Group Server Statistics Real server group 1 stats: Current Total Highest Real IP address Sessions Sessions Sessions ---.

Indicates the number of times the switch received a Layer 4 request for a virtual server which was not configured.Alteon OS 22. Number of session bindings currently in use (the last 4 and 64 seconds). January 2005 . Number of sessions removed from the session table because the server assigned to them failed and graceful server failure was not enabled.2 Command Reference /stats/slb/sp <sp number>/maint SP Maintenance Statistics SP 1 SLB Maintenance stats: Maximum sessions: Current sessions: 4 second average: 64 second average: Terminated sessions: Allocation failures: Non TCP/IP frames: UDP datagrams: Incorrect VIPs: Incorrect Vports: No available real server: Filtered (denied) frames: LAND attacks: No TCP control bits: Invalid reset packet drops: Total IP fragment sessions: IP fragment sessions: IP fragment discards: IP fragment table full: 524276 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Table 5-27 SP Maintenance Statistics (/stats/slb/sp/maint) Statistic Maximum sessions Current Sessions Description The maximum number of simultaneous sessions supported.0. Terminated Sessions Allocation Failures UDP Datagrams Non TCP/IP Frames Incorrect VIPs 172 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J. Indicates the number of non-IP based frames received by the virtual server. Indicates instances where the Switch ran out of available sessions for a port. Indicates that the virtual server IP address and MAC are receiving UDP frames when UDP balancing is not turned on.

This indicates the number of times a real server failure has occurred and caused a backup server to be brought online. January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 173 . Normally this indicates a mis-configuration on the virtual server or the client. This indicates the number of frames that were dropped because of one of the following reasons: 1. The number of packets that were dropped because the packet had no control bits set in the TCP header. This counter increases whenever a packet has the same source and destination IP addresses and ports.Alteon OS 22. Free service pool entries 315393-J. IP fragment table full This counter indicates how many times session table is full.0.) 3. but it may be an indication of a potential security probing application like SATAN. 2. When there are no available session entries. This dropped frames counter indicates that all real servers are either out of service or at their maxcon limit. The number of fragmented packets that are discarded due to lack of resources.2 Command Reference Table 5-27 SP Maintenance Statistics (/stats/slb/sp/maint) Statistic Incorrect Vports Description This dropped frames counter indicates that the virtual server has received frames for TCP/UDP services that have not been configured. There are no real servers (in the case of redirection filters. They matched an active filter with the deny action set. Current IP fragment sessions IP fragment discards This represents the current number of fragment sessions.This represents the total number of fragment sessions the switch has sions processed so far. This indicates the number of times a real server has reached the maxcon limit and caused an overflow server to be brought online. No Available Real Server Backup Server Activations Overflow Server Activations Filtered (Denied) Frames LAND attacks No TCP Control Bits Invalid reset packet drops Total IP fragment ses.

site <remote site. rule <rule.Show Global SLB rule stats geo .Show Global SLB network preference stats rule . under which the remote server is configured. 174 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J. maint To view an example and description of Global SLB maintenance statistics. see page 177.Alteon OS 22.Show Global SLB geographical preference stats maint .0. To view an example. 1-64> Displays Global SLB statistics for the remote site. clear Deletes all Global SLB statistics. geo Displays Global SLB statistics for the geographical preference.Show Global SLB maintenance stats clear . see page 175. virt <virtual server number (1-1024)> To view an example and description of what is displayed on-screen.Show Global SLB remote site stats network . network <network. 1-64> Displays Global SLB statistics for the network. see page 175. To view an example and description of what is displayed on-screen.2 Command Reference /stats/slb/gslb Global SLB Statistics Menu [Global SLB Statistics Menu] real .Show all Global SLB stats Table 5-28 Global SLB Statistics Menu Options (/stats/slb/gslb) Command Syntax and Usage real <real server number (1-1023)> Where the real server number represents the real server ID on this switch. January 2005 .Show Global SLB remote real server stats virt . 1-64> Displays Global SLB statistics for the rule. see page 176.Show Global SLB virtual server stats site . dump Displays all Global SLB statistics.Clear all Global SLB stats dump .

The remote site number.---.----------. 315393-J.10 5 0 0 -----. The number of DNS responses that return the IP address of the corresponding server.----------. under which the remote server is configured.1 0 0 r2 200.200.--------------. the following statistics can be viewed: Number of DNS responses directed to the remote real server Number of HTTP redirects to the remote real server /stats/slb/gslb/virt <virtual server number> Virtual Server Global SLB Statistics Global SLB virtual server 1 http service stats: Domain: www. the number represents the real server ID on this switch.com Server IP address Site DNS directs HTTP redirects -----.Alteon OS 22.example.---. IP Address Site DNS directs IP address of the server. v# represents a local virtual server number r# represents a remote site.200.-------------Totals 0 0 Table 5-29 Virtual Server Global SLB Statistics (/stats/slb/gslb/virt) Field Server Description Type of server configuration and server ID number.gslb. Since each remote sites is configured on its peers as if it were a real server (with certain special properties). January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 175 .--------------.200.0.200.2 Command Reference /stats/slb/gslb/real <real server number> Real Server Global SLB Statistics Real server 1 global stats: DNS directs: HTTP redirects: 3210 12 For any remote real server configured for Global Server Load Balancing.-------------v1 200.

176 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J. The number of remote site updates sent using DSSP version 2. The number of remote site updates received using DSSP version 2. The number of remote site updates received using DSSP version 1. The number of remote site updates sent using DSSP version 1.Alteon OS 22. /stats/slb/gslb/site Global SLB Site Statistics Global SLB remote site 1 stats: Bad remote site packets received: DSSPv1 remote site updates sent: DSSPv1 remote site updates received: DSSPv2 remote site updates sent: DSSPv2 remote site updates received: 386 0 0 768 348 Table 5-30 Global SLB Site Statistics Parameters (/stats/slb/gslb/site) Field Bad remote site packets received DSSPv1 remote site updates sent DSSPv1 remote site updates received DSSPv2 remote site updates sent DSSPv2 remote site updates received Description The number of bad packets received from remote site.2 Command Reference Table 5-29 Virtual Server Global SLB Statistics (/stats/slb/gslb/virt) Field HTTP redirects Description The number of HTTP requests redirected to the corresponding server.0. January 2005 .

2 Command Reference /stats/slb/gslb/maint Global SLB Maintenance Statistics Global SLB maintenance stats: Bad remote site packets received: DSSPv1 remote site updates sent: DSSPv1 remote site updates received: DSSPv2 remote site updates sent: DSSPv2 remote site updates received: DNS queries received: Bad DNS queries received: DNS responses sent: HTTP requests received: Bad HTTP requests received: HTTP responses sent: Hostname domain hits: Network domain hits: Basic domain hits: No server selected for hostname domain: No server selected for network domain: No server selected for basic domain: No matching domain: Last no result domain: Last source IP: 0 0 0 127746 85164 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0. The number of Distributed Site State Protocol (DSSP) version one updates/packets sent to the remote sites. Bad updates or dropped packets usually indicate that there is a configuration problem at local or remote GSLB switches. The number of Distributed Site State Protocol (DSSP) version two updates/packets received from the remote sites.0. check your syslog for configuration error messages.0. The number of Distributed Site State Protocol (DSSP) version one updates/packets received from the remote sites. The number of Distributed Site State Protocol (DSSP) version two updates/packets sent to the remote sites.0 Table 5-31 Global SLB Maintenance Statistics (/stats/slb/gslb/maint) Field Bad remote site packets received Description The number of bad packets received from the remote site. January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 177 .Alteon OS 22. DSSPv1 remote site updates sent DSSPv1 remote site updates received DSSPv2 remote site updates sent DSSPv2 remote site updates received 315393-J.0. If bad updates or dropped packets occur.

Alteon OS 22. January 2005 . The number of times no server was selected after matching the basic domain name. The number of times the DNS queries received did not match the host name. domain name. or the network domain configured.2 Command Reference Table 5-31 Global SLB Maintenance Statistics (/stats/slb/gslb/maint) Field DNS queries received Bad DNS queries received DNS responses sent Description The number of DNS queries received. Client HTTP GET request packets that do not contain the entire URL are considered bad and are dropped. The number of HTTP responses sent by the switch that includes HTTP redirects. The number of times the DNS queries received matched for the basic domain name configured. The number of times no server was selected after matching the host name domain. The number of bad DNS queries received. The source IP address of the last DNS query or HTTP request received. The number of times no server was selected after matching the network domain name.0. The domain in the last DNS query received that did not match the host name. The number of DNS responses sent by the switch that includes DNS directs and DNS error responses. or the network domain configured. The number of times the DNS queries received matched for the hostname configured. domain name. The number of times the DNS queries received matched for the network domain name configured. HTTP requests received The number of HTTP requests received. Bad HTTP requests received The number of bad/dropped client HTTP requests. HTTP responses sent Hostname domain hits Network domain hits Basic domain hits No server selected for hostname domain No server selected for network domain No server selected for basic domain No matching domain Last no result domain Last source IP 178 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J.

2 Command Reference /stats/slb/real <real server number> Real Server SLB Statistics Real server 1 stats: Current sessions: Total sessions: Highest sessions: Octets 129 65478 4343 523824000 NOTE – Octets are provided per server. the octet counters represent the combined number of transmit and receive bytes (octets). Table 5-32 Real Server SLB Statistics (/stats/slb/real) Statistics Current sessions Description The total number of outstanding sessions that are established to the particular real server.0. The total number of octets sent by the particular real server.1. These counters are then added to report the total octets for each virtual server. you can configure IP address 10. The octet counters are provided per server–not per service. not per service. unless configured as described in “Per Service Octet Counters” on page 179. The total number of sessions that have been established to the particular real server.21 for FTP services on the same physical server. Configure a separate IP address for each service on each server being load balanced.1.20 for HTTP services. 315393-J.Alteon OS 22. Total sessions Highest sessions Octets Per Service Octet Counters For each load-balanced real server. For instance. and 10. January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 179 . If you need octet counters on a perservice basis.1.1. you can accomplish this through the following configuration: 1. The highest number of sessions ever recorded for the particular real server.

14 20 60 9 2 200. On the Alteon Application Switch. 180 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J.--------------. /stats/slb/group <real server group number> Real Server Group Statistics Real server group 1 stats: Current Total Highest Real IP address Sessions Sessions Sessions ---. configure one real server group for each type of service.10.-------1 200. see the procedure on “Per Service Octet Counters” on page 179.--------------.---------. in keeping with our example.-------. Continuing the example above. and group each appropriate real server IP address into the group that handles the specific service. On the Alteon Application Switch. Highest number of simultaneous sessions recorded for each real server. Current and total sessions for all real servers associated with the real server group. Real server transmit/receive octets.Alteon OS 22. two real servers would be configured for the physical server (representing each real service).15 20 77 12 ---. 3.-------40 137 21 Octets --------------480000 616000 --------------1096000 Real server group statistics include the following: Current and total sessions for each real server in the real server group. If there were five physical servers providing the two services (HTTP and FTP). configure a real server with a real IP address for each service above.10. two groups would be configured: one for handling HTTP and one for handling FTP.---------. Configure a virtual server and add the appropriate services to that virtual server.2 Command Reference 2. January 2005 .0. 4. For per-service octet counters.100. Thus.-------. and five for the FTP services on each physical server. 10 real servers would have to be configured: five for the HTTP services on each physical server.100.

--------------. /stats/slb/filt <filter number> Filter SLB Statistics Filter 1 stats: Total firings: 1011 You can obtain the total number of times any filter has been matched.Alteon OS 22.-------200.20 40 309 21 Octets --------------480000 616000 --------------1096000 NOTE – The virtual server IP address is shown on the last line.15 20 77 12 ---.0. below the real server IP addresses.10.100.-------.---------. For per-service octet counters.10. see “Per Service Octet Counters” on page 179. Real server transmit/receive octets.100.14 20 60 9 2 200.100. Current and total sessions for all real servers associated with the virtual server. January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 181 .10.-------.--------------.---------. Virtual server statistics include the following: Current and total sessions for each real server associated with the virtual server. 315393-J.-------1 200.2 Command Reference /stats/slb/virt <virtual server number> Virtual Server SLB Statistics Virtual server 1 stats: Current Total Highest Real IP address Sessions Sessions Sessions ---. Highest number of simultaneous sessions recorded for each real server.

Alteon OS 22.Show Layer 7 Maintenance stats Table 5-33 SLB Layer 7 Statistics Menu Options (/stats/slb/layer7) Command Syntax & Usage redir Displays URL Redirection statistics. Total none-GETs hits The total number of none GET requests forwarded to the origin server. See page 183 for a sample output.Show SLB String stats maint . Total straight to ori. maint Displays Layer 7 maintenance statistics.0. /stats/slb/layer7/redir Layer7 Redirection Statistics Total Total Total Total Total Total Total Total Total Total URL based web cache redirection stats: cache server hits: origin server hits: straight to origin server hits: none-GETs hits: 'Cookie: ' hits: no-cache hits: RTSP cache server hits: RTSP origin server hits: HTTP redirection hits: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Table 5-34 Layer 7 Redirection Statistics (/stats/slb/layer7/redir) Statistics Description Total cache server hits The total number of HTTP requests redirected to the cache server.The total number of HTTP requests forwarded from straight to the gin server hits origin server. str Displays SLB string statistics. See page 182 for a sample output. Total origin server hits The total number of HTTP requests forwarded to the origin server.Show URL Redirection stats str .2 Command Reference /stats/slb/layer7 SLB Layer7 Statistics Menu [Layer 7 Statistics Menu] redir . See page 184 for a sample output. 182 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J. January 2005 .

com 6 www.2 Command Reference Table 5-34 Layer 7 Redirection Statistics (/stats/slb/layer7/redir) Statistics Total 'Cookie:' hits Total no-cache hits Total RTSP cache server hits Total RTSP origin server hits Total HTTP redirection hits Description The total number of cookie requests forwarded to the origin server. The total number of HTTP requests that were redirected by redirection filter.0.Alteon OS 22.junk.abc.[nopqrstuvwxyz]*.com 4 www.org Hits 1527115 0 0 0 0 0 0 Table 5-35 Layer 7 SLB String Statistics (/stats/slb/layer7/str) Statistics ID SLB String Hits Description The user-defined strings being used in URL matching. The total number of RTSP requests redirected to the cache server.[abcdefghijklm]*.com 3 www.[nopqrstuvwxyz]*. /stats/slb/layer7/str Layer 7 SLB String Statistics SLB String stats: ID SLB String 1 any 2 www. The total number of requests containing no-cache header forwarded to the origin server. The total number of RTSP requests forwarded to the origin server.org 7 www.[abcdefjhijklm]*. January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 183 . 315393-J.com 5 www. The total number of instances that are load-balanced due to matching of the particular URL ID.

the switch will send a reset frame to the client to terminate the connection. The number of reset frames sent to the server by the switch during server connection termination due to delayed binding.Alteon OS 22.Seq buffers: 0 Alloc Fails .1 184 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J.Ubufs: Max sessions per bucket: 0 Max frames per session: Max bytes buffered (sess): 0 1260 1260 1260 1260 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Table 5-36 SLB Layer 7 Maintenance Statistics (/stats/slb/layer7/maint) Statistics Clients reset by switch on client side Description The number of reset frames sent to the client by the switch during server connection termination.0.2 Command Reference /stats/slb/layer7/maint Layer 7 SLB Maintenance Statistics Layer 7 maintenance stats: Clients reset by switch on client side: 0 Clients reset by switch on server side: 0 Connection Splicing to support HTTP/1.1 client requests.1: 0 Invalid HTTP methods: 0 Aged delayed binding sessions: 0 Half open connections: 0 Switch retries: 0 Random early drops: 0 Requests exceeded 9000 bytes: 0 Invalid 3-way handshakes: 0 Exceeded max frame size: 0 Out of order packet drops: 0 Current SP[1] memory units: 1260 Lowest: Current SP[2] memory units: 1260 Lowest: Current SP[3] memory units: 1260 Lowest: Current SP[4] memory units: 1260 Lowest: Current SP memory units: 5040 Current SEQ buffer entries: 0 Highest: Current Data buffer use: 0 Highest: Current SP buffer entries: 0 Highest: Total Nonzero SEQ Alloc: 0 Total SEQ Buffer Allocs: 0 Total SEQ Frees: Total Data Buffer Allocs: 0 Total Data Frees: Alloc Fails . The total number of connection swapping between different real servers in supporting multiple HTTP/1. This means that when the switch could not connect to the real sever and the client’s retries exceeded the threshold due to delayed binding. January 2005 .0 Clients reset by switch on server side Connection Splicing to support HTTP/1.

The total numbers of outstanding TCP connections that are half opened.2 Command Reference Table 5-36 SLB Layer 7 Maintenance Statistics (/stats/slb/layer7/maint) Statistics Invalid HTTP methods Description The total number of HTTP requests that contain invalid methods sent by the client. The number of outstanding sequence buffers used. The highest number of data buffers ever used. The total number of switch retries to connect to the real server. The total number of SYN frames dropped when the buffer is low.0. It is incremented when the switch responds to TCP SYN packet and decremented upon receiving TCP SYN ACK packet from the requester. January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 185 . The total number of switch-generated frames that exceeded the maximum allowed frame size. The total number of sequence buffer allocated. The total number of aged delayed binding sessions caused by failed connection initialization between the switch and the server.Alteon OS 22.2 The total number of sequence buffer allocations. Aged delayed binding sessions Half open connections Switch retries Random early drops Requests exceeded 4500 bytes Invalid 3-way handshakes Exceeded max frame size Out of order packet drops: Current SP memory units Current SEQ buffer entries Highest SEQ buffer entries Current Data buffer use Highest Data buffer use Total Nonzero SEQ Alloc Total SEQ Buffer Allocs Total SEQ Frees 315393-J. The total number of dropped frames because of invalid 3-way hand shakes. The total number of sequence buffer is freed. The total number of GET requests that exceeded 4500 bytes. The highest number of sequence buffers ever used. The total number of TCP packets dropped because they were received out of order. The currently available SP memory units. The number of outstanding data buffers used.

2 Command Reference Table 5-36 SLB Layer 7 Maintenance Statistics (/stats/slb/layer7/maint) Statistics Total Data Buffer Allocs Total Data Frees Alloc Fails . Max frames per session The maximum number of frames to be buffered per session.Seq buffers Alloc Fails .-------.Alteon OS 22. 186 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J.2 The total of number buffers freed. The number of times allocation of a session table entry failed when attempting to store a SessionId in the table. The number of times sequence buffer allocation failed. The maximum number of items (sessions) allowed in the session table hash bucket chain. January 2005 .---------. The number of times the URL data buffer allocation failed. /stats/slb/ssl SLB Secure Socket Layer Statistics SSL SLB maintenance stats: SessionId allocation fails: Total number of SSL ID reassignments: 0 0 Current Total Highest Sessions Sessions Sessions ------------------------.-------Unique SessionIds 0 0 0 SSL connections 0 0 0 Persistent Port Sessions 0 0 0 Table 5-37 SLB Secure Socket Layer Statistics (/stats/slb/ssl) Statistics SSL SLB maintenance stats SessionId allocation fails Total number of SSL ID reassignments Description Debug stats for SSL SessionId based persistence. Max bytes buffered (sess) The maximum number of bytes to be buffered per session.Ubufs Max sessions per bucket Description The total number of buffers allocated to store client request.0.

SSL connections Persistent Port Sessions /stats/slb/ftp File Transfer Protocol SLB and Filter Statistics Menu [FTP SLB parsing and active .2 Command Reference Table 5-37 SLB Secure Socket Layer Statistics (/stats/slb/ssl) Statistics Description The table shows the Current Sessions.Show dump .Show maint . The number of different TCP connections using SSL service. The number of SessionIds maintained to allow for persistence across different client ports. See page 188 for sample output.Dump Filter Statistics Menu] active FTP NAT filter stats FTP SLB parsing server stats FTP maintenance stats all FTP SLB/NAT stats Table 5-38 FTP SLB Parsing and Filter Statistics Menu Options (/stats/slb/ftp) Command Syntax and Usage active Shows active FTP SLB parsing and filter statistics. 315393-J. dump Shows all FTP SLB/NAT statistics. maint Shows maintenance statistics.Alteon OS 22. See page 189 for sample output. these should all bind to the same server. parsing Shows parsing statistics. January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 187 .Show parsing .0. See page 189. This number shows the number of unique SSL sessions seen on the switch. See page 188 for sample output. the total sessions seen on the switch since last reset and the high water mark of current sessions for the following: Unique SessionIds Many SSL sessions can use the same SessionId.

0. The difference in the numbers of ACK and SEQ that the Switch needs for packet adjustment. /stats/slb/ftp/parsing Passive FTP SLB Parsing Statistics Total FTP SLB Parsing Stats(PASV): Total FTP: Total New FTP SLB parsing Index: FTP SLB parsing ACK/SEQ diff: 0 0 0 Table 5-40 Passive FTP SLB Parsing Statistics (/stats/slb/ftp/parsing) Statistics Total FTP Description The number of times the switch receives both active and passive FTP connections. January 2005 . Total New FTP SLB parsing Index FTP SLB parsing ACK/ SEQ diff 188 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J. The number of times the switch receives both active and passive FTP connections. The number of times the switch creates a new index due to port command from the client.2 Command Reference /stats/slb/ftp/active Active FTP SLB Parsing and Filter Statistics Total Active FTP NAT stats(PORT): Total FTP: Total New Active FTP Index: Active FTP NAT ACK/SEQ diff: 0 0 0 Table 5-39 Active FTP Slb Parsing and Filter statistics (/stats/slb/ftp/active) Statistics Total Active FTP NAT stats (PORT) Total FTP Total New Active FTP Index Active FTP NAT ACK/SEQ diff Description The number of times the switch receives the port command from the client.Alteon OS 22. The difference in the numbers of ACK and SEQ that the switch needs FTP SLB parsing. The number of times the switch creates a new index in response to the pasv command from the client.

The number of times the switch creates a new index in response to the pasv command from the client. The number of times the switch could not switch mode from active to passive and vice versa. Total FTP NAT Filtered The total number of FTP NAT filter sessions that occurred. The difference in the numbers of ACK and SEQ that the switch needs for FTP SLB parsing.0. /stats/slb/ftp/dump FTP SLB Statistics Dump Total FTP : Total FTP NAT Filtered: Total new active FTP NAT Index: Total new FTP SLB parsing Index: FTP Active FTP NAT ACK/SEQ diff: FTP SLB parsing ACK/SEQ diff: FTP mode switch error: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Table 5-42 FTP SLB Statistics Dump (/stats/slb/ftp/dump) Statistics Total FTP Description The total number of FTP sessions that occurred. The total number of times the adjustment between ACK and SEQ occurred on the filter. Total new active FTP NAT Index Total new FTP SLB parsing Index FTP Active FTP NAT ACK/SEQ diff FTP SLB parsing ACK/ SEQ diff FTP mode switch error The total number of new data sessions created for FTP NAT filter in active mode. January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 189 .Alteon OS 22. 315393-J.2 Command Reference /stats/slb/ftp/maint FTP SLB Maintenance Statistics FTP mode switch error: 0 Table 5-41 FTP SLB Maintenance Statistics (/stats/slb/ftp/maint) Statistics FTP mode switch error Description The number of times the switch is not able to switch modes from active to passive and vice versa.

---------.---------. The total number of UDP connections for data channels.---------.-------0 0 0 0 0 0 Table 5-43 RTSP SLB Statistics (/stats/slb/rtsp) Statistics ControlConnection UDP Streams Description The total number of TCP connections for RTSP control connection. The total number of buffer allocations used. Redirect ConnectionDenied BufferAllocs AllocFailures 190 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J.---------. The number depends upon the type of media player being used.---------1 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 -.0.---------.Alteon OS 22.---------.---------. The total number of times the connection got redirected. January 2005 . The total number of times the buffer allocation failed.---------.---------.---------. The total number of times the connections got denied due to shortage of resources or the real server being down.2 Command Reference /stats/slb/rtsp RTSP SLB Statistics Control UDP Connection Buffer Alloc SP Connection Streams Redirect Denied Allocs Failures -.

The total number of DNS queries received through UDP requests. The total number of DNS queries that have short or invalid domain names to be resolved. January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 191 . Currently only one domain name resolution per request is supported. The total number of malformed DNS queries received. Total number of domain name parse errors Total number of failed real server name matches Total number of DNS parsing internal errors 315393-J.0. The total number of out of memory and other unexpected errors the user gets while processing the DNS query.Alteon OS 22. The total number of DNS queries that contain more than one domain name to be resolved.2 Command Reference /stats/slb/dns DNS SLB Statistics Total Total Total Total Total Total Total number number number number number number number of of of of of of of TCP DNS queries: UDP DNS queries: invalid DNS queries: multiple DNS queries: domain name parse errors: failed real server name matches: DNS parsing internal errors: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Table 5-44 DNS SLB Statistics (/stats/slb/dns) Statistics Total number of TCP DNS queries Total number of UDP DNS queries Total number of invalid DNS queries Total number of multiple DNS queries Description The total number of DNS queries that received through TCP connections. The total number of times the user failed to find a real server which has the same layer 7 strings that match the domain name to be resolved.

DMA: 0 Table 5-45 WAP SLB Statistics (/stats/slb/wap) Statistics Description WAP Maintenance stats: current sessions allocation failures The number of session bindings currently in use.SP dead: 0 -----------------------------------------------------------------RADIUS Snooping stats: acct reqs: 0 acct wrap reqs: 0 acct start reqs: 0 acct update reqs: 0 acct stop reqs: 0 acct bad reqs: 0 acct reqs(FIP): 0 acct reqs(no FIP): 0 add session reqs: 0 del session reqs: 0 req fails.Alteon OS 22. This dropped frames counter indicates that all real servers are either out of service or at their maxcon limit.2 Command Reference /stats/slb/wap WAP SLB Statistics This command displays all the Radius and WAP related counters. January 2005 . Normally this indicates a mis-configuration on the virtual server or the client.0. Indicates instances where the switch ran out of available bindings for a port. Indicates the number of times the switch received a Layer 4 request for a virtual server which was not configured. This dropped frames counter indicates that the virtual server has received frames for TCP/UDP services that have not been configured.SP dead: 0 req fails. WAP Maintenance stats: current sessions: 0 allocation failures: 0 incorrect VIPs: 0 incorrect Vports: 0 no available real server: 0 requests to wrong SP: 0 -----------------------------------------------------------------TPCP External Notification stats: add session reqs: 0 del session reqs: 0 req fails.SP dead: 0 req fails. incorrect VIPs incorrect Vports no available real server requests to wrong SP The number of session add/delete requests sent to the wrong SP. 192 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J.

2 Command Reference Table 5-45 WAP SLB Statistics (/stats/slb/wap) Statistics Description TPCP External Notification stats: add session reqs req fails. The number of WAP session add requests via RADIUS snooping. The number of add-request failures due to dead target SP. The number of add/delete requests failed due to DMA write failure.DMA 315393-J.0. The number of wrapped RADIUS Accounting frames received.SP dead req fails. The number of RADIUS Accounting Start frames received.SP dead The number of WAP session add requests via TPCP.Alteon OS 22. The number of RADIUS Accounting Update frames. January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 193 . The number of bad RADIUS Accounting frames received. acct start reqs acct update reqs acct stop reqs acct bad reqs add session reqs del session reqs req fails. The number of RADIUS Accounting Stop frames received. The number of WAP session delete requests via RADIUS snooping. RADIUS Snooping stats: acct reqs acct wrap reqs The number of RADIUS Accounting frames received. The number of add/delete request failures due to dead target SP.

Indicates the number of non-IP based frames received by the virtual server. Number of session bindings currently in use (the last 4 and 64 seconds). Table 5-46 Server Load Balancing Maintenance Statistics (/stats/slb/maint) Statistic Maximum sessions Current Sessions Description The maximum number of simultaneous sessions supported.Alteon OS 22. UDP Datagrams Non TCP/IP Frames Incorrect VIPs Indicates that the virtual server IP address and MAC are receiving UDP frames when UDP balancing is not turned on.2 Command Reference /stats/slb/maint SLB Maintenance Statistics SLB Maintenance stats: Maximum sessions: Current sessions: 4 second average: 64 second average: Terminated sessions: Allocation failures: UDP datagrams: Non TCP/IP frames: Incorrect VIPs: Incorrect Vports: No available real server: Backup server activations: Overflow server activations: Filtered (denied) frames: LAND attacks: No TCP control bits: Invalid reset packet drops: Total IP fragment sessions: Current IP fragment sessions IP fragment discards: IP fragment table full: Free Service pool entries: 2097104 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 8192 SLB Maintenance statistics are described in the following table. Indicates the number of times the switch received a Layer 4 request for a virtual server which was not configured. Terminated Sessions Number of sessions removed from the session table because the server assigned to them failed and graceful server failure was not enabled. Allocation Failures Indicates instances where the Switch ran out of available sessions for a port. January 2005 .0. 194 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J.

315393-J. This counter increases whenever a packet has the same source and destination IP addresses and ports. January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 195 . This indicates the number of frames that were dropped because they matched an active filter with the deny action set.0. but it may be an indication of a potential security probing application like SATAN. This counter indicates how many times session table is full. The number of fragmented packets that are discarded due to lack of resources. This indicates the number of times a real server failure has occurred and caused a backup server to be brought online. This indicates the number of times a real server has reached the maxcon limit and caused an overflow server to be brought online.Alteon OS 22. No Available Real Server Backup Server Activations Overflow Server Activations Filtered (Denied) Frames LAND attacks No TCP Control Bits The number of packets that were dropped because the packet had no control bits set in the TCP header.2 Command Reference Table 5-46 Server Load Balancing Maintenance Statistics (/stats/slb/maint) Statistic Incorrect Vports Description This dropped frames counter indicates that the virtual server has received frames for TCP/UDP services that have not been configured. Normally this indicates a mis-configuration on the virtual server or the client. This dropped frames counter indicates that all real servers are either out of service or at their maxcon limit. This represents the current number of fragment sessions. Invalid reset packet drops Total IP fragment sessions Current IP fragment sessions IP fragment discards IP fragment table full Free service pool entries This represents the total number of fragment sessions the switch has processed so far.

Total number of SIP Incomplete Messages Total number of packets received which do not have the complete SIP message in a single packet.Alteon OS 22.0.2 Command Reference /stats/slb/sip SIP SLB Statistics SIP Stats: Total number Total number Total number Total number of of of of SIP SIP SIP SIP Client Parse Errors Server Parse Errors Unknown Method packets Incomplete Messages : : : : 0 0 0 0 Table 5-47 SIP SLB Statistics (/stats/slb/sip) Statistics Total number of SIP Client Parse Errors Total number of SIP Server Parse Errors Description The total number of errors encountered during client processing when parsing an incoming SIP packet. The total number of errors encountered during server processing when parsing an incoming SIP packet. /stats/slb/clear Clearing the SLB Statistics The following statistics are reset to zero when the clear command is given and confirmed: Table 5-48 SLB Statistics Reset (/stats/slb/clear) Statistics Real server stats: Description Health check failures Total sessions Highest sessions Octets Total sessions Highest sessions Octets Total sessions Highest sessions Octets Real server group stats: Virtual server stats 196 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J. Total number of SIP Total number of packets received with methods not known to the Unknown Method packets SIP parser on the switch. January 2005 .

Total sessions Total firings: Octets Per real server: DNS handoffs HTTP redirects Per server group: DNS handoffs HTTP redirects Redir: Total cache server hits Total origin server hits Total none-GETs hits Total 'Cookie: ' hits Total no-cache hits LB: ID SLB String hits Total Sessions Highest Sessions Total FTP Total FTP NAT Filtered Total new active FTP NAT Index Total new FTP SLB parsing Index FTP Active FTP NAT ACK/SEQ diff FTP SLB parsing ACK/SEQ diff Health check failures Total sessions Highest sessions Octets Total sessions Highest sessions Octets Total sessions Highest sessions Octets Global SLB stats URL SLB and Redirection stats SSL SLB stats FTP SLB parsing and NAT stats Real server stats Real server group stats Virtual server stats 315393-J.Alteon OS 22. Total sessions Virtual server: Octets.2 Command Reference Table 5-48 SLB Statistics Reset (/stats/slb/clear) Statistics Filter stats SLB switch port stats. January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 197 .0. per port Description Total firings Real server stats: Octets. Total sessions Real server group: Octets.

See page 204 for sample output. 198 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J.BW History stats maint .2 Command Reference /stats/bwm BWM Statistics Menu [Bandwidth Management Statistics Menu] port .Clear BWM statistics Table 5-49 Bandwidth Management Statistics Menu Options (/stats/bwm) Command Syntax and Usage port <port number> Displays Switch Port Contract Statistics Menu.Show BWM maint statistics ipusers .Show BWM IP user stats for iplimit contracts dump . maint Displays bandwidth management maintenance statistics.Switch Port Contract Stats Menu cont . clear Clears all bandwidth management statistics.0. dump Displays all bandwidth management statistics. Each IP address is limited to the user limit configured in /cfg/bwm/contract on page 281. To view menu options. January 2005 . ipusers Displays Bandwidth Management IP user stats for iplimit contracts. see page 199.Dump all BWM statistics clear . See page 204 for sample output.BW Contract stats rcont . rcont <BW Contract number (1-256)> Displays bandwidth management contract rate statistics.Alteon OS 22. See page 200 for details. See page 201 for details.BW Contract rate stats hist . hist Displays bandwidth management history statistics. cont <BW Contract number (1-256)> Displays bandwidth management contract statistics. See page 203 for sample output.

---------.BW Contract rate stats Table 5-50 Management Port Statistics Menu Options (/stats/bwm/sp) Command Syntax and Usage cont <BW Contract number (1-256)> Displays bandwidth management contract statistics.-----1 cont1 40465360 262049256 0 16320 2 cont2 0 0 0 16320 20 cont20 674252832 1798583472 16384 16320 26 cont26 0 0 0 16320 256 Default 772710 0 0 16320 /stats/bwm/port <port number>/rcont BWM Switch Processor Rate Contract Statistics This command repeats its output when the printed lines are less than the configured CLI lines per screen. See page 199 for a sample output. zero for infinite 315393-J.Alteon OS 22. For example: >> AAS_2424 .---------.Bandwidth Management Statistics# lines ? lines sets lines-per-screen 0-300. /stats/bwm/port <port number>/cont BWM Switch Processor Contract Statistics Menu BW Contract statistics Contract Name Octets Discards BufUsed BufMax -------. the command will continue to repeat its output until you type a key on the console or telnet session. January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 199 .--------------. You can configure the number of CLI lines per screen using the global (hidden) command: lines <number of lines>.------.0.Bandwidth Management Statistics# lines Current lines-per-screen: 24 >> AAS_2424 .2 Command Reference /stats/bwm/port <port number> BWM Switch Processor Statistics [Bandwidth Management Port Statistics Menu] cont . If the CLI lines are configured at zero per screen. rcont <BW Contract number (1-256)> Displays bandwidth management contract rate statistics.BW Contract stats rcont .

---------. NOTE – This command displays enabled contracts only.Alteon OS 22.0.------.----1 cont1 0 40465360 262049256 0 16320 2 cont2 0 0 0 0 16320 20 cont20 5230 682947936 1822133376 16384 16320 26 cont26 0 0 0 0 16320 256 Default 0 773974 0 0 16320 1 cont1 0 40465360 262049256 0 16320 2 cont2 0 0 0 0 16320 20 cont20 5238 684289056 1825753104 16384 16320 26 cont26 0 0 0 0 16320 256 Default 0 774114 0 0 16320 /stats/bwm/cont <contract number> BWM Contract Statistics BW Contract statistics Contract Name Octets Discards BufUsed BufMax -------.--------------.2 Command Reference BW Contract statistics Contract Name Rate(Kbps) Octets Discards BufUsed BufMax -------. The contract name.---------. The number of octets that are being transmitted through a particular contract since the switch is booted.---------.-----1 cont1 223868832 568900584 16384 456960 2 cont2 0 0 0 456960 20 cont20 224149728 568632456 16384 456960 25 cont25 0 0 0 456960 26 cont26 0 0 0 456960 256 Default 401270 0 0 456960 The following description of statistics applies on a specific switch port for all enabled contracts.---------. January 2005 .------. Table 5-51 Bandwidth Management Contract Statistics (/stats/bwm/cont) Statistics Contract Name Octets Description The contract number. Discards 200 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J. The number of octets that are being discarded because of seeing more traffic than the bandwidth contract limit permits.--------------.---------.

Bandwidth Management Statistics# lines Current lines-per-screen: 24 >> AAS_2424 .0. For example: >> AAS_2424 .2 Command Reference Table 5-51 Bandwidth Management Contract Statistics (/stats/bwm/cont) Statistics BufUsed Description The current amount of buffer space used to store the packets that is waiting to be transmitted. If the CLI lines are configured at zero per screen. You can configure the number of CLI lines per screen using the global (hidden) command: lines <number of lines>.Bandwidth Management Statistics# lines ? lines sets lines-per-screen 0-300. the command will continue to repeat its output until you type a key on the console or telnet session.Alteon OS 22. BufMax /stats/bwm/rcont BWM Contract Rate Statistics Use this command to show the rate statistics of all the enabled contracts. zero for infinite 315393-J. January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 201 . The switch starts dropping the packets of a particular contract after the maximum buffer space allocated for that contract is being occupied. Maximum buffer space that can be used to store the packets before they can be transmitted. NOTE – This command displays enabled contracts only. This command repeats its output when the printed lines are less than the configured CLI lines per screen.

January 2005 . Octets Discards BufUsed BufMax 202 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J.--------------. Maximum buffer space that can be used to store the packets before they can be transmitted.------.2 Command Reference BW Contract statistics Contract Name Rate(Kbps) Octets Discards BufUsed BufMax -------. The number of octets that are being transmitted through a particular contract since the switch is booted.---------.----1 cont1 5222 285408288 735607152 16384 456960 2 cont2 0 0 0 0 456960 20 cont20 5238 285720864 735308784 16384 456960 26 cont26 0 0 0 0 456960 256 Default 4 517182 0 0 456960 1 cont1 5230 286747296 739228896 16384 456960 2 cont2 0 0 0 0 456960 20 cont20 5230 287059872 738930528 16384 456960 26 cont26 0 0 0 0 456960 256 Default 8 519400 0 0 456960 1 cont1 5222 288084192 742853160 16384 456960 2 cont2 0 0 0 0 456960 20 cont20 5238 288400992 742550760 16384 456960 26 cont26 0 0 0 0 456960 256 Default 8 521578 0 0 456960 Table 5-52 Bandwidth Management Contract Rate Statistics (/stats/bwm/rcont) Statistics Contract Name Rate (in Kbps) Description The contract number.---------. The number of octets that are being discarded because of seeing more traffic than the bandwidth contract limits.Alteon OS 22. The contract name. The switch starts dropping the packets of a particular contract after the maximum buffer space allocated for that contract is being occupied.---------.0. The current amount of buffer space used to store the packets that is waiting to be transmitted. Rate at which the packets are going out of the switch on a particular contract.

80. Table 5-53 Bandwidth Management History Statistics (/stats/bwm/hist) Statistics Contract Octets Discards Description The contract number for which history is enabled.23.80. The sampling is done at one-minute intervals.124 3 filter_number03 0 0 20030910:15:11/ -8:00 47.23.23.124 256 Default 608 0 20030910:15:11/ -8:00 Switch IP Cont Name Octets You can dump the stats kept in the SMTP history buffer that get dumped periodically when an E-mail is sent.80.124 6 filter_number06 0 0 20030910:15:11/ -8:00 47. January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 203 .23.124 2 filter_number02 0 0 20030910:15:11/ -8:00 47.124 1 filter_number01 0 0 20030910:15:11/ -8:00 47.80.---------. Indicates the time the packets were received or discarded. TimeStamp 315393-J.---.124 10 filter_number10 0 0 20030910:15:11/ -8:00 47.23.124 9 filter_number09 0 0 20030910:15:11/ -8:00 47.80.80.23.23.124 4 filter_number04 0 0 20030910:15:11/ -8:00 47.80.2 Command Reference /stats/bwm/hist BWM History Statistics Discards TimeStamp YyyyMmDd:Hr:Mi/TmZone --------------.23.124 5 filter_number05 0 0 20030910:15:11/ -8:00 47. Use this command to show the history of all the contracts for which history command is enabled. This command is used to keep long term history only for the contracts that are enabled and have history command turned on.80.80.---------47.Alteon OS 22.124 8 filter_number08 0 0 20030910:15:11/ -8:00 47.---------------.124 7 filter_number07 0 0 20030910:15:11/ -8:00 47.---------.80.0. The number of octets sent out on a particular contract.80.23.23. The number of octets discarded because of seeing more traffic than the bandwidth contract limit permits.23.

---------. January 2005 .---------.2 Command Reference /stats/bwm/maint BWM Maintenance Statistics BWM Maint statistics -----------------------------------------------------------------Maint Stats for rate limiting contracts Discard pkts 0 Discard octets 0 Out pkts 0 Out octets 0 Transmit failed 0 User Limit entry allocation failures 0 -----------------------------------------------------------------Maint Stats for traffic shaping contracts QFull Discard pkts 0 QFull Discard octets 0 Out of buffers pkts 0 Out of buffers pkts 0 Transmit failed 0 TDT set when qfull 0 TDT set between soft and hard 0 TDT set at soft 0 /stats/bwm/ipusers BWM IP Users Statistics This command displays the number of BWM IP user entries for each BWM contract for each SP.Alteon OS 22.---------10 0 10 0 0 10 11 0 10 0 0 10 ---------.0.---------.---------. BWM IP users statistics Contract SP1 SP2 SP3 SP4 Total -------.---------.---------.---------0 20 0 0 20 204 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J.---------.

315393-J. To view a sample output. see page 209. To view a sample output. To view a sample output and a description of the stats.Show CPU utilization mem . to check for leads and load. To view a sample output and a description of the stats.Show Packet and TCP stats tcb . January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 205 . mem Displays memory statistics.Show memory stats Table 5-54 Management Processor Statistics Menu Options (/stats/mp) Command Syntax and Usage pkt Displays packet statistics.Show All UDP control blocks in use sfd . 4. To view a sample output and a description of the stats.Show All TCP control blocks in use ucb . sfd Displays all Socket File Descriptors that are in use. cpu Displays CPU utilization for periods of up to 1. and 64 seconds. see page 206.2 Command Reference /stats/mp Management Processor Statistics [MP-specific Statistics Menu] pkt .0.Show All Socket FD in use cpu . see page 208. ucb Displays all UDP control blocks that are in use.Alteon OS 22. see page 209. tcb Displays all TCP control blocks that are in use. see page 208.

Description frees mediums jumbos smalls alloc fails frees mediums hi-watermark jumbos hi-watermark The highest number of packet allocation with size between 1536 bytes to 9K bytes from the packet buffer pool by the TCP/IP protocol stack.0. Total number of packet allocations with size between 1536 bytes to 9K bytes from the packet buffer pool by the TCP/IP protocol stack. January 2005 . Total number of packets freed from the packet buffer pool by the TCP/IP protocol stack. smalls hi-watermark The highest number of packet allocation with size less than 128 bytes from the packet buffer pool by the TCP/IP protocol stack.2 Command Reference /stats/mp/pkt MP Packet Statistics Packet counts: allocs: mediums: jumbos: smalls: alloc fails: TCP counts: allocs: current: alloc fails: 89262 0 0 0 0 4866 46 0 frees: mediums hi-watermark: jumbos hi-watermark: smalls hi-watermark: packet discards: frees: current hi-watermark: alloc discards: 89262 4 0 4 0 4827 146 0 Table 5-55 Packet Statistics (/stats/mp/pkt) Statistics Packet counts: allocs Total number of packet allocations from the packet buffer pool by the TCP/IP protocol stack. 206 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J. Total number of packet allocations with size less than 128 bytes from the packet buffer pool by the TCP/IP protocol stack. Total number of packet allocation failures from the packet buffer pool by the TCP/IP protocol stack. Total number of times the packet buffers are freed (released) to the packet buffer pool by the TCP/IP protocol stack. Total number of packet allocations with size between 128 to 1536 bytes from the packet buffer pool by the TCP/IP protocol stack.Alteon OS 22. The highest number of packet allocation with size between 128 to 1536 bytes from the packet buffer pool by the TCP/IP protocol stack.

January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 207 . The packets are discarded because buffer resources are not available or the buffer threshold is reached and the low priority packets are discarded. The packets are discarded because MP memory resources are not available.0. current alloc fails frees current hi-watermark alloc discards 315393-J. Total number of times the TCP packet buffers are freed (released) to MP memory by the TCP/IP protocol stack. The number of TCP packets that are discarded by the MP. TCP counts: allocs Total number of TCP packet allocations from MP memory by the TCP/IP protocol stack.Alteon OS 22. Total number of TCP packet allocation failures from MP memory by the TCP/IP protocol stack.2 Command Reference Table 5-55 Packet Statistics (/stats/mp/pkt) Statistics packet discards Description The number of packets that are discarded by the MP. The highest number of TCP packet allocation from MP memory by the TCP/IP protocol stack. Total number of TCP packet allocations from MP memory by the TCP/IP protocol stack.

Alteon OS 22.81.0 117f81a8: 47.80.27.0 0 <=> 0.6 0/1331 0.16.2 Command Reference /stats/mp/tcb TCP Statistics All TCP allocated control blocks: 117f6d00: 0.0.0.0/47.59 80 23 listen established Table 5-56 MP Specified TCP Statistics (/stats/mp/tcb) Statistics 117f6d00/117f81a8 0. January 2005 .0.59 80/23 listen/established Description Memory Destination IP address Destination port Source IP Source port State /stats/mp/ucb UCB Statistics All UDP allocated control blocks: 161: listen 1985: listen 3122: listen Table 5-57 UCB Statistics on MP (/stats/mp/ucb) Field 161/1985/3122 Listen Description UDP port number State 208 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J.16.80.0/47.0.0.6 1331 <=> 47.81.0.0.27.0.0.

0 server 0 <=> 47.0.Alteon OS 22.31 0 <=> 47.0.0. CPU utilization: cpuUtil1Second: cpuUtil4Seconds: cpuUtil64Seconds: 100% 100% 100% Table 5-58 CPU Statistics (stats/mp/cpu) Statistics cpuUtil1Second Description The percentage of CPU utilization as measured over the last one second interval.133. The percentage of CPU utilization as measured over the last four second interval.133. January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 209 .0 server 2 -1 18 108d5cfc: 0.0.0.0 server 3 -1 19 1180a258: 0.2 Command Reference /stats/mp/sfd MP-Specific SFD Statistics All Socket FD allocated: 0 -1 16 1180b128: 0.0.31 0 <=> 47.88.0.0. The percentage of CPU utilization as measured over the last 64 second interval.133.133.0 server 1 -1 17 108c5bd8: 0.31 81 23 22 443 listen listen listen listen TCP TCP TCP TCP /stats/mp/cpu CPU Statistics This menu option enables you to display the CPU utilization statistics on MP.88.31 0 <=> 47.88.0. cpuUtil4Seconds cpuUtil64Seconds 315393-J.88.

Alteon OS 22. See page 211 for a sample output.2 Command Reference /stats/sp <SP Number> SP Specific Statistics [SP-specific Statistics Menu] maint . clear cpu 210 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J. see page 211. and MP DOS shield statistics.Show CPU utilization Table 5-59 SP Specific Statistics (/stats/sp) Statistics maint Description Displays internal statistics.Clear maintenance stats cpu . To view a sample output and a description of the stats. Deletes all the maintenance statistics. Layer 2 FDB maintenance statistics. January 2005 . Displays what percentage of the CPU has been utilized.Show maintenance stats clear .0.

315393-J. CPU utilization for SP 1: cpuUtil1Second: cpuUtil4Seconds: cpuUtil64Seconds: 6% 6% 6% Table 5-60 CPU Statistics (stats/sp/cpu) Statistics cpuUtil1Second Description The percentage of CPU utilization as measured over the last one second interval. January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 211 .2 Command Reference /stats/sp <SP number>/maint SP-Specific Maintenance Statistics Maintenance statistics for SP 1: Receive Letter success from MP: 158648 Receive Letter success from SP 2: 0 Receive Letter success from SP 3: 0 Receive Letter success from SP 4: 0 Receive Letter errors from MP: 0 Receive Letter errors from SP 2: 0 Receive Letter errors from SP 3: 0 Receive Letter errors from SP 4: 0 Send Letter success to MP: 125516 Send Letter success to SP 2: 0 Send Letter success to SP 3: 6799 Send Letter success to SP 4: 6791 Send Letter failures to MP: 0 Send Letter failures to SP 2: 0 Send Letter failures to SP 3: 0 Send Letter failures to SP 4: 0 learnErrNoddw: 0 resolveErrNoddw: ageMPNoddw: 0 deleteMiss: pfdbFreeEmpty: 0 arpDiscards: 0 icmpDiscards: tcpDiscards: 0 udpDiscards: 0 0 0 0 /stats/sp/cpu CPU Statistics This menu option enables you to display the CPU utilization statistics on the Switch Processor (SP).0.Alteon OS 22.

To view a sample output and a description of the statistics.Dump all security statistics Command Syntax and Usage dos Displays the DOS Attack statistics menu. January 2005 . udpblast Displays the UDP Blast statistics menu. ipacl Displays the IP Address Access Control List statistics menu.0. To view a sample output and a description of the stats.2 Command Reference Table 5-60 CPU Statistics (stats/sp/cpu) Statistics cpuUtil4Seconds Description The percentage of CPU utilization as measured over the last four second interval. 212 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J. The percentage of CPU utilization as measured over the last 64 second interval. To view a sample output and a description of the stats.UDP Blast Statistics Menu pgroup .Show pattern match group statistics ratelim . see page 213. To view a sample output and a description of the statistics.Alteon OS 22.Show rate limiting statistics dump . see page 215. cpuUtil64Seconds /stats/security Security Statistics [Security Statistics Menu] dos .IP Address ACL Statistics Menu udpblast . pgroup Displays the Pattern Match Group statistics menu. see page 214. see page 216. see page 216.DoS Attack Statistics Menu ipacl . ratelim Displays the Rate Limiting statistics menu. To view a sample output and a description of the statistics.

0. clear Deletes all DOS attack statistics. on the selected port only. Fraggle. for each of the following types of DOS attacks: Smurf.DoS attack statistics description Table 5-61 DOS Attacks Statistics Menu Options (/stats/security/dos) Command Syntax and Usage port <port number> Displays the number of times the packets were dropped for each of the following types of DOS attacks.Alteon OS 22. see “Types of DOS Attacks” on page 214. ScanSynFin. PortZero. LandAttack. 315393-J. help Displays a description of each type of DOS attack by name and how it works. Nullscan. Blat For a description of these different types of DOS attacks.Dump all DoS attack statistics clear .Port DoS attack statistics dump . January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 213 . /stats/security/dos DOS Attack Statistics Menu [DoS Attack Statistics Menu] port .Clear all DoS attack statistics help . dump Displays the number of times the packets were dropped on the switch. Xmascan.2 Command Reference Command Syntax and Usage dump Displays all security statistics.

Nullscan. and ScanSynFin. >> /stats/security/dos help Smurf: The ICMP ping request to a broadcast destination IP(x. Enable DOS protection on ports connected to any network that could be the source of an attack.x.x. ScanSynFin: SYN and FIN bits are set in the packet. LandAttack. 214 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J.x. /stats/security/ipacl IP Access Control List Statistics The following IP Access Control List statistics can be viewed with this command: [IP ACL Statistics Menu] dump . PortZero.0. Refer to your Alteon OS Application Guide for a detailed description of DOS attacks. Fraggle: The UDP packet to a broadcast destination IP(x.255).Clear all access control Stats Table 5-62 IPACL Security Statistics Menu Options (/stats/security/ipacl) Command Syntax and Usage dump Displays the accumulated blocked packets for each IP address and mask pair. January 2005 . LandAttack: Packets with source IP equal destination IP. URG and PSH bits are set.Alteon OS 22.255).2 Command Reference Types of DOS Attacks Alteon OS can protect switch ports against a variety of Denial of Service (DOS) attacks including Port Smurf. You can use the help command to obtain a brief explanation of each type of DOS attack detected by the switch.IP address access control Stats clear . Xmascan.x. PortZero: TCP/UDP Packets with either source/destination port is zero. Blat: TCP packets with SIP!=DIP and SPORT=DPORT. Xmascan: TCP sequence number is zero and the FIN. clear Deletes all the statistics of accumulated blocked packets. Nullscan: TCP sequence number is zero and all control bits are zeros. Fraggle.

/stats/security/udpblast/dump UDP Blast Dump Statistics UDP blast protection stats: UDP Port Blocked Packets ------------------------Current Packet Rate/Second -------------------------- Table 5-64 UDP Blast Dump Statistics Parameters (/stats/security/udpblast/dump) Field UDP Port Blocked Packets Current Packet Rate/ Second Description UDP ports that experienced UDP blast attacks. clear Deletes all the accumulated blocked packets. The number of blocked packets.2 Command Reference /stats/security/udpblast UDP Blast Statistics [UDP Blast Statistics Menu] dump . Displays the current rate of packet to the UDP port. January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 215 .Clear all UDP Blast Stats Table 5-63 UDP Blast Statistics Menu Options (/stats/security/udpblast) Command Syntax and Usage dump Displays all the accumulated blocked packets for each port.0. and the current packet rate per second.Alteon OS 22. See page 215 for a sample output and a description of the statistics.UDP Blast Stats clear . 315393-J.

Alteon OS 22. Pattern groups are configured in the “Pattern Matching Menu” on page 350. /stats/security/ratelim Rate Limiting Statistics Rate limiting stats: TCP: Total hold downs triggered: Current per-client state entries: UDP: Total hold downs triggered: Current per-client state entries: ICMP: Total hold downs triggered: Current per-client state entries: 0 0 0 0 0 0 Table 5-65 Rate Limiting Statistics (/stats/security/ratelim) Field Total holds down triggered Current per-client state entries Description The total number of packets dropped after the hold-down period expired.2 Command Reference /stats/security/pgroup UDP Pattern Match Statistics Pattern Match Group stats: ID Name 1 Hits 0 This menu displays how many times each configured pattern group has been matched and a subsequent filtering action performed. January 2005 .0. 216 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J. The total number of per-client state entries for TCP/UDP/ICMP rate limiting.

Alteon OS 22.2 Command Reference /stats/security/dump Dump Statistics for Security IP ACL stats: Address Blocked Packets ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------UDP blast protection stats: UDP Port Blocked Packets Current Packet Rate/Second ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Pattern Match Group stats: ID Name Hits 1 0 100 0 101 0 -----------------------------------------------------------------Rate limiting stats: TCP: Total hold downs triggered: Current per-client state entries: UDP: Total hold downs triggered: Current per-client state entries: ICMP: Total hold downs triggered: Current per-client state entries: 0 0 0 0 0 0 315393-J.0. January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 217 .

0.2 Command Reference /stats/snmp SNMP Statistics NOTE – You can reset the SNMP counter to zero by using clear command as follows: >> Statistics# snmp clear SNMP statistics: snmpInPkts: snmpInBadC'tyNames: snmpInASNParseErrs: snmpOutPkts: snmpInTooBigs: snmpInBadValues: snmpInGenErrs: snmpInTotalSetVars: snmpInGetNexts: snmpInGetResponses: snmpOutTooBigs: snmpOutBadValues: snmpOutGenErrs: snmpOutGetNexts: snmpOutGetResponses: snmpSilentDrops: 150097 0 0 150097 0 0 0 2731 131389 0 0 0 1 0 150093 0 snmpInBadVersions: snmpInBadC'tyUses: snmpEnableAuthTraps: snmpInBadTypes: snmpInNoSuchNames: snmpInReadOnlys: snmpInTotalReqVars: snmpInGetRequests: snmpInSetRequests: snmpInTraps: snmpOutNoSuchNames: snmpOutReadOnlys: snmpOutGetRequests: snmpOutSetRequests: snmpOutTraps: snmpProxyDrops: 0 0 0 0 0 0 798464 17593 615 0 1 0 0 0 4 0 SNMPv3 Statistics: snmpUnknownSecurityModels: snmpInvalidMsgs: snmpUnknownPDUHandlers: snmpUnknownContexts: snmpUnavailableContexts: usmStatsUnsupportedSecLevels: usmStatsNotInTimeWindows: usmStatsUnknownUserNames: usmStatsUnknownEngineIDs: usmStatsWrongDigests: usmStatsDecryptionErrors: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 2 0 0 Table 5-66 SNMP Statistics (/stats/snmp) Statistics snmpInPkts Description The total number of Messages delivered to the SNMP entity from the transport service. 218 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J.Alteon OS 22. January 2005 .

The total number of SNMP Messages which failed ASN parsing.208).1 or BER errors encountered by the SNMP protocol entity when decoding SNMP Messages received.Alteon OS 22. The total number of SNMP Protocol Data Units (PDUs) which were delivered to the SNMP protocol entity and for which the value of the error-status field is badValue. The total number of SNMP Messages which were passed from the SNMP protocol entity to the transport service. BER describes how to represent or encode values of each ASN. The total number of valid SNMP Protocol Data Units (PDUs). The total number of ASN. January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 219 .1 (Abstract Syntax Notation One. The total number of SNMP Messages delivered to the SNMP protocol entity which represented an SNMP operation which was not allowed by the SNMP community named in the Message. snmpInBadC'tyNames snmpInBadC'tyUses snmpInASNParseErrs snmpEnableAuth Traps snmpOutPkts snmpInBadTypes snmpInTooBigs snmpInNoSuchNames snmpInBadValues snmpInReadOnlys 315393-J. ASN. defined in X.209). Note: OSI's method of specifying abstract objects is called ASN. It should be noted that it is a protocol error to generate an SNMP PDU. which were delivered to the SNMP protocol entity and for which the value of the error-status field is `read-Only'. defined in X. which were delivered to the SNMP protocol entity and were for an unsupported SNMP version. The total number of SNMP Messages delivered to the SNMP entity which used an SNMP community name not known to the said entity (the switch).1 type as a string of eight-bit octets. from simple types such as integers and bit strings to structured types such as sets and sequences. this object is provided as a means of detecting incorrect implementations of the SNMP.1 is a flexible notation that allows one to define a variety of data types. The total number of SNMP Protocol Data Units (PDUs) which were delivered to the SNMP protocol entity and for which the value of the error-status field is too big. The total number of SNMP Protocol Data Units (PDUs) which were delivered to the SNMP protocol entity and for which the value of the error-status field is noSuchName. which contains the value `read-Only' in the error-status field. An object to enable or disable the authentication traps generated by this entity (the switch). As such.2 Command Reference Table 5-66 SNMP Statistics (/stats/snmp) Statistics snmpInBadVersions Description The total number of SNMP Messages.0. and one set of rules for representing such objects as strings of ones and zeros is called the BER (Basic Encoding Rules.

which have been accepted and processed by the SNMP protocol entity. The total number of SNMP Set-Request Protocol Data Units (PDUs). The total number of SNMP Get-Next Protocol Data Units (PDUs). The total number of SNMP Get-Request Protocol Data Units (PDUs). The total number of MIB objects which have been retrieved successfully by the SNMP protocol entity as a result of receiving valid SNMP GetRequest and Get-Next Protocol Data Units (PDUs). which have been generated by the SNMP protocol entity. which were generated by the SNMP protocol entity and for which the value of the errorstatus field is too big.0. snmpInTotalReqVars snmpInTotalSetVars snmpInGetRequests snmpInGetNexts snmpInSetRequests snmpInGetResponses snmpInTraps snmpOutTooBigs snmpOutNoSuchNames snmpOutBadValues snmpOutReadOnlys snmpOutGenErrs snmpOutGetRequests 220 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J.Alteon OS 22. which have been accepted and processed by the SNMP protocol entity. The total number of SNMP Protocol Data Units (PDUs). which were delivered to the SNMP protocol entity and for which the value of the error-status field is genErr. The total number of SNMP Get-Request Protocol Data Units (PDUs). which were generated by the SNMP protocol entity and for which the value of the errorstatus field is badValue. which have been altered successfully by the SNMP protocol entity as a result of receiving valid SNMP SetRequest Protocol Data Units (PDUs). Not in use. The total number of SNMP Protocol Data Units (PDUs). which have been accepted and processed by the SNMP protocol entity. which have been accepted and processed by the SNMP protocol entity. The total number of SNMP Trap Protocol Data Units (PDUs). The total number of MIB objects. which were generated by the SNMP protocol entity and for which the value of the errorstatus field is genErr. January 2005 . which have been accepted and processed by the SNMP protocol entity. which were generated by the SNMP protocol entity and for which the value of the errorstatus is noSuchName. The total number of SNMP Get-Response Protocol Data Units (PDUs). The total number of SNMP Protocol Data Units (PDUs).2 Command Reference Table 5-66 SNMP Statistics (/stats/snmp) Statistics snmpInGenErrs Description The total number of SNMP Protocol Data Units (PDUs). The total number of SNMP Protocol Data Units (PDUs).

which have been generated by the SNMP protocol entity. and InformRequest-PDUs delivered to the SNMP entity which were silently dropped because the transmission of the message to a proxy target failed in a manner such that no Response-PDU could be returned.2 Command Reference Table 5-66 SNMP Statistics (/stats/snmp) Statistics snmpOutGetNexts Description The total number of SNMP Get-Next Protocol Data Units (PDUs). The total number of packets received by the SNMP engine which were dropped because there were invalid or inconsistent components in the SNMP message. which have been generated by the SNMP protocol entity. which have been generated by the SNMP protocol entity. The total number of packets received by the SNMP engine which were dropped because the context contained in the message was unavailable.Alteon OS 22. January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 221 . The total number of GetRequest-PDUs. snmpOutSetRequests snmpOutGet Responses snmpOutTraps snmpSilentDrops snmpProxyDrops SNMPv3 Statistics: snmpUnknownSecurityModels The total number of packets received by the SNMP engine which were dropped because they referenced a securityModel that was not known to or supported by the SNMP engine. The total number of packets received by the SNMP engine which were dropped because the context contained in the message was unknown. SetRequest-PDUs. The total number of SNMP Set-Request Protocol Data Units (PDUs). which have been generated by the SNMP protocol entity. for example. The total number of GetRequest-PDUs. snmpInvalidMsgs snmpUnknownPDUHandlers snmpUnknownContexts snmpUnavailableContexts 315393-J. GetBulkRequest-PDUs. The total number of SNMP Get-Response Protocol Data Units (PDUs).0. The total number of SNMP Trap Protocol Data Units (PDUs). GetNextRequest-PDUs. no SNMP application had registered for the proper combination of the contextEngineID and the pduType. GetNextRequest-PDUs. and InformRequest-PDUs delivered to the SNMPv2 entity which were silently dropped because the size of a reply containing an alternate ResponsePDU with an empty variable bindings field was greater than either a local constraint or the maximum message size associated with the originator of the request. The total number of packets received by the SNMP engine which were dropped because the PDU contained in the packet could not be passed to an application responsible for handling the pduType. SetRequest-PDUs. GetBulkRequest-PDUs.

The total number of packets received by the SNMP engine which were dropped because they could not be decrypted. usmStatsNotInTimeWindows usmStatsUnknownUserNames usmStatsUnknownEngineIDs usmStatsWrong Digests usmStatsDecryption Errors /stats/ntp NTP Statistics Alteon OS uses NTP (Network Timing Protocol) version 3 to synchronize the switch’s internal clock with an atomic time calibrated NTP server. 2004 Current system time: 18:55:49 Tue Jul 13.2 Command Reference Table 5-66 SNMP Statistics (/stats/snmp) Statistics usmStatsUnsupportedSecLevels Description The total number of packets received by the SNMP engine which were dropped because they requested a securityLevel that was unknown to the SNMP engine or otherwise unavailable. With NTP enabled. the switch can accurately update its internal clock to be consistent with other devices on the network and generates accurate syslogs. The total number of packets received by the SNMP engine which were dropped because they appeared outside of the authoritative SNMP engine's window.Alteon OS 22. Last update time: 18:04:16 Tue Jul 13. NTP statistics: Primary Server: Requests Sent: 17 Responses Received: 17 Updates: 1 Secondary Server: Requests Sent: 0 Responses Received: 0 Updates: 0 Last update based on response from primary server. The total number of packets received by the SNMP engine which were dropped because they referenced an snmpEngineID that was not known to the SNMP engine. The total number of packets received by the SNMP engine which were dropped because they referenced a user that was not known to the SNMP engine.0. 2004 222 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J. January 2005 . The total number of packets received by the SNMP engine which were dropped because they didn't contain the expected digest value.

Responses Received: The total number of NTP responses received from the primary NTP server. Updates: The total number of times the switch updated its time based on the NTP responses received from the primary NTP server. 315393-J. The switch system time when the command /stats/ntp was issued. Responses Received: The total number of NTP responses received from the secondary NTP server. Secondary Server Requests Sent: The total number of NTP requests the switch sent to the secondary NTP server to synchronize time.Alteon OS 22.2 Command Reference Table 5-67 NTP Statistics Parameters (/stats/ntp) Field Primary Server Description Requests Sent: The total number of NTP requests the switch sent to the primary NTP server to synchronize time. The time stamp showing the time when the switch was last updated. January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 223 . NOTE – You can issue /stats/ntp/clear command to delete all statistics.0. Last update based on response from primary server Last update time Current system time Last update of time on the switch based on either primary or secondary NTP response received. Updates: The total number of times the switch updated its time based on the NTP responses received from the secondary NTP server.

clear Deletes all the port mirroring statistics. RX packets RX errors 224 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J. CAUTION—Use this command carefully as it will delete all statistics permanently.0. /stats/mgmt Management Port Statistics Management port interface RX bytes: RX packets: RX errors: RX dropped: RX overruns: RX frame errors: RX multicast: statistics: 0 TX bytes: 0 TX packets: 0 TX errors: 0 TX dropped: 0 TX overruns: 0 TX carrier errors: 0 TX collisions: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Table 5-69 Management Port Statistics (/stats/mgmt) Statistics RX bytes Description The total number of incoming bytes successfully transferred by the interface.Alteon OS 22. The total number of incoming packets successfully transferred by the interface. The number of bad packets received. January 2005 . and the statistics of the traffic on the ingress and egress ports.2 Command Reference /stats/pm Port Mirroring Statistics Menu [Port Mirroring Statistics Menu] dump .Clear all Port Mirroring Stats Table 5-68 Port Mirroring Command Syntax and Usage dump Displays the port number.Port Mirroring Stats clear .

depending on your configuration). The number of multicast packets received. RX overruns RX frame errors RX multicast TX bytes TX packets TX errors TX dropped TX overruns TX carrier errors TX collisions /stats/dump Dump Statistics Use the dump command to dump all switch statistics available from the Statistics Menu (40K or more. The number of received packets that were dropped because their size exceeded that of the receive queue. The number of packets dropped due to lack of transmit buffers.2 Command Reference Table 5-69 Management Port Statistics (/stats/mgmt) Statistics RX dropped Description The number of incoming packets that were dropped due to lack of receive buffers. Collisions occur when two or more stations are transmitting signals at the same time. The total number of outgoing bytes successfully transferred by the interface. Not applicable.Alteon OS 22. The number of incoming packets dropped due to IP framing errors. This data can be used to tune or debug switch performance. The number of collisions due to congestion on the medium. January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 225 . 315393-J.0. The number of packets dropped due to transmission problems. set your communication software on your workstation to capture session data prior to issuing the dump commands. The number of packets dropped because size exceeded that of the transmit queue. The total number of outgoing packets successfully transferred by the interface. If you want to capture dump data to a file.

0.2 Command Reference 226 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J. January 2005 .Alteon OS 22.

To view menu options.Security Menu setup . the menu options under the Server Load Balancing Menu (/cfg/slb) are in Chapter 7.Dump current configuration to script file ptcfg . Important difference are called out in the text. To view menu options. port <port number> Displays the Port Configuration Menu. To make finding information easier. and saving switch configuration changes. 227 315393-J.Bandwidth Management Menu l2 .Layer 3 Menu slb . Many of the commands. see page 231.Port Mirroring Menu bwm . January 2005 .Layer 2 Menu l3 .Step by step configuration set up dump .Port Menu pmirr . /cfg Configuration Menu [Configuration Menu] sys .System-wide Parameter Menu port . although not new.Backup current configuration to tftp server gtcfg .Server Load Balancing (Layer 4-7) Menu security .CHAPTER 6 The Configuration Menu This chapter discusses how to use the Command Line Interface (CLI) for making. display more or different information than in the previous version. viewing. see page 265.Restore current configuration from tftp server Table 6-1 Configuration Menu Options (/cfg) Command Syntax and Usage sys Displays the System-wide parameter Configuration Menu.

setup Step-by-step configuration set-up of the switch. see page 353. To view menu options. All changes are considered “pending” until you explicitly apply them. For details. see page 354. slb Displays the Server Load Balancing Configuration Menu. l3 Displays Layer 3 Configuration Menu. January 2005 . ptcfg <host name or IP address of TFTP server> <filename on host> Backs up current configuration to TFTP server. l2 Displays Layer 2 Configuration Menu. dump Dumps current configuration to a script file. Applying. gtcfg <host name or IP address of TFTP server> <filename on host> Restores current configuration from TFTP server.2 Command Reference Table 6-1 Configuration Menu Options (/cfg) Command Syntax and Usage pmirr Displays the Mirroring Configuration Menu. see page 348. see page 354. any changes are lost the next time the switch boots unless the changes are explicitly saved. “The SLB Configuration Menu”. To view menu options. the changes you make do not take effect immediately. see page 299. see Chapter 7. see page 287. Viewing. For details. For details. To view menu options. To view menu options. bwm Displays the Bandwidth Management Configuration Menu. you can do the following: View the pending changes Apply the pending changes Save the changes to flash memory 228 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J. see page 278. To view menu options. security Displays the Security Menu. For details.Alteon OS 22. While configuration changes are in the pending state. To view menu options. and Saving Changes As you use the configuration menus to set switch parameters. see page 279. Also. see page 353.0.

except for starting Spanning Tree Protocol. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 229 . save them (see below).Alteon OS 22. NOTE – All configuration changes take effect immediately when applied. To turn STP on or off.2 Command Reference Viewing Pending Changes You can view all pending configuration changes by entering diff at the menu prompt. Therefore. NOTE – The diff command is a global command. you must apply the changes. Applying Pending Changes To make your configuration changes active. you can enter diff at any prompt in the CLI. Therefore. you can enter apply at any prompt in the administrative interface. # apply NOTE – The apply command is a global command. they will be lost the next time the system is rebooted. and then reset the switch (see “Resetting the Switch” on page 448).0. To apply configuration changes. enter the following command at any CLI prompt: # save 315393-J. To save the new configuration. NOTE – If you do not save the changes. Saving the Configuration In addition to applying the configuration changes. you must apply them. enter apply at any prompt in the CLI. you can save them to flash memory on the Alteon Application Switch.

enter the following instead: # save n You can decide which configuration you want to run the next time you reset the switch.Alteon OS 22. It is a global command that can be executed from any menu.0.2 Command Reference When you save configuration changes. The configuration being replaced by the save is first copied to the backup configuration block. the changes are saved to the active configuration block. 230 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J. Your options include: The active configuration block The backup configuration block Factory default configuration You can view all pending configuration changes that have been applied but not saved to flash memory using the diff flash command. If you do not want the previous configuration block copied to the backup configuration block. January 2005 . see “Selecting a Configuration Block” on page 447. For instructions on selecting the configuration to run at the next system reset.

mmgmt Displays Management Port Menu.Alteon OS 22.2 Command Reference /cfg/sys System Configuration [System Menu] syslog mmgmt sshd radius tacacs ntp sonmp ssnmp health access date time idle notice bannr smtp hprompt bootp cur Syslog Menu Management Port Menu SSH Server Menu RADIUS Authentication Menu TACACS+ Authentication Menu NTP Server Menu SONMP Menu System SNMP Menu System Health Check Menu System Access Menu Set system date Set system time Set timeout for idle CLI sessions Set login notice Set login banner Set SMTP host Enable/disable display hostname (sysName) in CLI prompt Enable/disable use of BOOTP Display current system-wide parameters This menu provides configuration of switch management parameters such as user and administrator privilege mode passwords. see page 234. see page 240. tacacs Displays TACACS+ authentication Menu. 315393-J.0. To view menu options. Web-based management settings. To view menu options. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 231 . and management access list. Table 6-2 System Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys) Command Syntax and Usage syslog Displays the Syslog Menu. see page 237. To view menu options. see page 233. radius Displays the RADIUS Authentication Menu. sshd Displays the SSH Server Menu. To view menu options. To view menu options. see page 239.

January 2005 . sonmp Displays the SynOptics Network Management Protocol (SONMP) menu. date Prompts the user for the system date. see page 259. ssnmp Displays the System SNMP Menu. smtp <SMTP host name or IP address> Sets the Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) host. If you enable BOOTP. see page 243. It is also displayed as part of the output from the /info/sys command. idle <idle timeout in minutes. health Displays system health check menu. When a user or administrator logs into the switch. access Displays System Access Menu. To view menu options. 232 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J. This command is disabled by default. The default is 5 minutes.Alteon OS 22. To view menu options. To view menu options. To view menu options. affects both console and Telnet> Sets the idle timeout for CLI sessions. cur Displays the current system parameters. bannr <string. see page 258. notice <max 1024 char multi-line login notice> <'-' to end> Displays login notice immediately before the “Enter password:” prompt. which is used for sending bandwidth management history information. time Configures the system time using a 24-hour clock format. the login banner is displayed. the switch will query its BOOTP server for all of the switch IP parameters. hprompt disable|enable Enables or disables displaying of the host name (system administrator’s name) in the Command Line Interface (CLI). This notice can contain up to 1024 characters and new lines. see page 244.0.2 Command Reference Table 6-2 System Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys) Command Syntax and Usage ntp Displays the Network Time Protocol (NTP) Server Menu. see page 242. bootp disable|enable Enables or disables the use of BOOTP. To view menu options. maximum 80 characters> Configures a login banner of up to 80 characters. from 1 to 10080 minutes.

gslb. For a detailed description of the seven levels of severity. The default is 0.17.4. console disable|enable Enables or disables delivering syslog messages to the console. or enable/disable syslog on all available features. disabling console ensures the switch is not affected by syslog messages. log all the seven severity levels. which means. facil <syslog host local facility (0-7)> This option sets the facility level of the first syslog host displayed. 192. The default is 7. 192.2 Command Reference /cfg/sys/syslog System Host Log Configuration [Syslog Menu] host host2 sever sever2 facil facil2 console log cur Set IP address of first syslog host Set IP address of second syslog host Set the severity of first syslog host Set the severity of second syslog host Set facility of first syslog host Set facility of second syslog host Enable/disable console output of syslog messages Enable/disable syslogging of features Display current syslog settings Table 6-3 System Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/syslog) Command Syntax and Usage host <new syslog host IP address (such as. log <feature|all> <enable|disable> Displays a list of features for which syslog messages can be generated.4. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 233 . host2 <new syslog host IP address (such as. The default is 7. see page 234.223)> Sets the IP address of the first syslog host. facil2 <syslog host local facility (0-7)> This option sets the facility level of the second syslog host displayed. sever <syslog host local severity (0–7)> This option sets the severity level of the first syslog host displayed.17. filter). cur Displays the current syslog settings. For a detailed description of the seven levels of severity. You can choose to enable/ disable specific features (such as vlans. see page 234. sever2 <syslog host local severity (0–7)> This option sets the severity level of the second syslog host displayed.223)> Sets the IP address of the second syslog host.Alteon OS 22. which means log all the seven severity levels. When necessary. It is enabled by default. 315393-J.0. The default is 0.

by using the operational commands to set these options on a one-time basis. This means that corrective action must be taken immediately. SNMP. and default gateway. If this port is disabled. The Management port must be configured with a static IP address. This means that the system is unusable.0. 3: Error. the factory default settings for some of the management features remain with the network ports. subnet mask. 1: Alert. 7.2 Command Reference Seven Levels of Severity Following is the description of the seven levels of severity: 0: Emergency. 6: Informational. the Management port saves consuming a port that could otherwise be used for processing data and traffic. the network ports have to perform all switch management (other than the switch management using the console). This port is isolated from and does not participate in the networking protocols that run on the network ports. This port manages the switch using either telnet CLI. 5: Notice. and must be enabled before it can be used. broadcast address. /cfg/sys/mmgmt Management Port Configuration Menu The Management port is a Fast Ethernet port that is used exclusively to manage the switch. This means that the condition of the system is normal but with significant conditions that need attention. While the switch can be managed from any network port. 234 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J. or in some cases. 2: Critical.Alteon OS 22. You can change the defaults by configuring these features to permanently use the management port. This means the condition of the system is critical. This means that the system has errors that should be corrected. or HTTP. This means that the system is working but giving out information about certain unfavorable conditions. If this port is enabled. This means that the system is giving out debug-level messages. This means that the system is giving a warning. 4: Warning. Debug. January 2005 .

2 Command Reference NOTE – The Management port does not support BOOTP.Set number of failed attempts to declare gateway DOWN dns .Alteon OS 22.255. [Management Port Menu] port . intr <interval (0 . Default is data port.4. To view the menu options. 192.17.101)> Sets the IP address.Set default port for RADIUS tacacs .Enable management port dis .Set default IP for SONMP hello packets tftp .Set default port for TFTP ena . dns default port mgmt|data Sets DNS over management or data port.Set default port for SNMP traps syslog .Set default gateway address intr .Set IP address mask .1)> Sets the IP address for the default gateway. gw <gateway address (such as. 315393-J.Set default port for DNS ntp .0.Set default port for NTP radius .4.Set default port for SMTP snmp .Set subnet mask gw . mask <subnet mask (such as. addr <IP address (such as.Disable management port cur . retry <number of attempts (1-120> Sets the number of failed ping attempts before a gateway is declared DOWN.60 seconds)> Sets the interval between gateway ping attempts.17.Display current configuration Table 6-4 Management Port Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/mmgmt) Command Syntax and Usage port Displays the management port link menu. 192. 255.Management Port Phy Menu addr .255.Set default port for SYSLOG sonmp .Set interval between gateway ping attempts retry .Set default port for TACACS+ smtp .0)> Sets the subnet mask. see page 237. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 235 .

syslog default port mgmt|data Sets syslog host access over management or data ports. cur Displays the current configuration. dis Disables the Management port. smtp default port mgmt|data Sets SMTP over management or data ports. Default is data port. January 2005 . sonmp default port mgmt|data Sets default IP address for SONMP hello packets. ena Enables the Management port. Default is data port. When this option is set to mgmt then the Management Port IP address is used in the SONMP hello packets transmitted by the switch. snmp default port mgmt|data Sets SNMP trap host over management or data ports. then the IP address of the data port interface specified by srcif (/cfg/sys/sonmp/srcif) command is used in the hello packets. Default is data port.0. Default is data port.Alteon OS 22. radius default port mgmt|data Sets RADIUS over management or data ports. But if it is set to data. 236 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J. Default is data port. tacacs mgmt|data Sets TACACS+ over management or data ports. The default is data port. Default is data port.2 Command Reference Table 6-4 Management Port Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/mmgmt) Command Syntax and Usage ntp default port mgmt|data Sets NTP over management or data ports. tftp default port mgmt|data Sets TFTP over management or data port.

and passwords are protected by being encrypted. ssh. sometimes known as Secure Socket Shell.0. Default is any. is a UNIX-based command interface and protocol for securely getting access to a remote computer. 315393-J.slogin. cur Displays the current link configuration.Alteon OS 22. SSH uses RSA public key cryptography for both connection and authentication. and rcp. and scp . /cfg/sys/sshd SSH Server Configuration Menu Secure Shell (SSH). January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 237 .Set autonegotiation cur . By default this command is turned on. SSH commands are encrypted and secure in several ways. It is widely used by network administrators to control Web and other kinds of servers remotely. rlogin. mode full|half|any Sets half or full duplex mode. Both ends of the client/server connection are authenticated using a digital certificate. Default is any.Set full or half duplex mode auto .that are secure versions of the earlier UNIX utilities. SSH is actually a suite of three utilities .Display current link configuration Table 6-5 Management Port Link Menu Options (/cfg/sys/mgmt/port) Command Syntax and Usage speed 10|100|any Sets the speed of the link with the Management port.Set link speed mode .2 Command Reference /cfg/sys/mmgmt/port Management Port Link Menu [Management Port Link Menu] speed . rsh. auto on|off Sets auto negotiation for the port.

Table 6-6 System Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/sshd) Command Syntax and Usage intrval <interval (0-24)> Sets the interval for generating the RSA server key. cur Displays the current SSH server configuration. When you enter this command. sshport <TCP port number> Sets the SSH server port number. ena Enables SCP. skeygen Generates the RSA server key.Alteon OS 22. RSA server key generation starts immediately. on Enables the SSH server. hkeygen Generates the RSA host key. SSH scripts can be viewed by using the /cfg/dump command (see page 353). dis Disables SCP. When you enter this command. January 2005 . RSA host key generation starts immediately. this menu enables Secure Shell access from any SSH client.2 Command Reference [SSHD Menu] intrval scpadm hkeygen skeygen sshport ena dis on off cur - Set Interval for generating the RSA server key Set SCP-only admin password Generate the RSA host key Generate the RSA server key Set SSH server port number Enable the SCP apply and save Disable the SCP apply and save Turn SSH server ON Turn SSH server OFF Display current SSH server configuration NOTE – For the Alteon Application Switch. 238 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J.0. scpadm Sets the Secure Copy (SCP)-only admin password.

retries <RADIUS server retries (1-3)> Sets the number of failed authentication requests before switching to a different RADIUS server.3000. port <RADIUS port to configure. timeout <RADIUS server timeout seconds (1-10)> Sets the amount of time. The default is 3 seconds.Set RADIUS port retries .Set RADIUS server timeout telnet . between 1500 . The default is 1645.Turn RADIUS authentication OFF cur . The default is 3 requests.2 Command Reference NOTE – The top four commands are only accessible at the serial port /cfg/sys/radius RADIUS Server Configuration [RADIUS Server Menu] prisrv .Display current RADIUS configuration Table 6-7 RADIUS Server Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/radius) Command Syntax and Usage prisrv <IP address> Sets the primary RADIUS server address.Enable/disable RADIUS backdoor for telnet on . secret2 <1-32 character secret> This is the shared secret password between the switch and the secondary RADIUS server(s).Set secondary RADIUS server secret port .Alteon OS 22.Set RADIUS server retries timeout . default 1645> Enter the number of the UDP port to be configured.0. in seconds. before a RADIUS server authentication attempt is considered to have failed.Set primary RADIUS server secret secret2 .Set primary RADIUS server address secsrv . secret <1-32 character secret> This is the shared secret password between the switch and the primary RADIUS server(s). January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 239 .Turn RADIUS authentication ON off . secsrv <IP address> Sets the secondary RADIUS server address. 315393-J.Set secondary RADIUS server address secret .

) TACACS+ protocol is seen as more reliable than RADIUS as TACACS+ uses the Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) whereas RADIUS uses the User Datagram Protocol (UDP). TACACS+ protocol has been implemented on Alteon OS to support the customers that have Cisco’s TACACS+ protocol as their network security feature. RADIUS combines authentication and authorization in a user profile. and accounting. January 2005 . 240 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J. TACACS+ offers the following advantages over RADIUS as the authentication device: TACACS+ is TCP-based so it facilitates connection-oriented traffic. Telnet also applies to SSH/SCP connections. /cfg/sys/tacacs TACACS+ Server Configuration Menu TACACS (Terminal Access Controller Access Control System) is an authentication protocol that allows a remote access server to forward a user's logon password to an authentication server to determine whether access can be allowed to a given system.Alteon OS 22. authorization. Apart from that. It supports full-packet encryption as against password-only in authentication requests.0. on Enables the RADIUS server. off Disables the RADIUS server.2 Command Reference Table 6-7 RADIUS Server Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/radius) Command Syntax and Usage telnet disable|enable Enables or disables the RADIUS back door for telnet. (Both TACACS and TACACS+ are described in Request for Comments 1492. Also. cur Displays the current RADIUS server parameters. TACACS is an encryption protocol and therefore less secure than TACACS+ and Remote Authentication Dial-In User Service (RADIUS) protocols. whereas TACACS+ separates the two operations. Supports decoupled authentication.

retries <RADIUS server retries. default 1645> Enter the number of the TCP port to be configured.3000. port <RADIUS port configure. between 1500 . January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 241 . Telnet also applies to SSH/SCP connections. 1-10> Sets the amount of time. before a TACACS+ server authentication attempt is considered to have failed. timeout <RADIUS server timeout seconds. on Enables the TACACS+ server. 1-3> Sets the number of failed authentication requests before switching to a different TACACS+ server. The default is 1645.0. secsrv <IP address> Defines the secondary TACACS+ server address. The default is 3 seconds.Alteon OS 22.2 Command Reference [TACACS+ Server prisrv secsrv secret secret2 port retries timeout telnet on off cur - Menu] Set primary TACACS+ server address Set secondary TACACS+ server address Set primary TACACS+ server secret Set secondary TACACS+ server secret Set TACACS+ TCP port Set TACACS+ server retries Set TACACS+ server timeout (seconds) Enable/disable TACACS+ backdoor for telnet Turn TACACS+ authentication ON Turn TACACS+ authentication OFF Display current TACACS+ configuration Table 6-8 TACACS+ Server Menu Options (/cfg/sys/tacacs) Command Syntax and Usage prisrv <IP address> Defines the primary TACACS+ server address. secret2 <1-32 character secret> This is the shared secret between the switch and the secondary TACACS+ server(s). The default is 3 requests. telnet disable|enable Enables or disables the TACACS+ back door for telnet. 315393-J. in seconds. secret <1-32 character secret> This is the shared secret between the switch and the primary TACACS+ server(s).

Set NTP server resync interval tzone .Set NTP timezone offset from GMT dlight . The default value is 1440 minutes.Set secondary NTP server address intrval .Turn NTP service OFF cur . tzone <offset from GMT.Display current NTP configuration Table 6-9 NTP Server Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/ntp) Command Syntax and Usage prisrv <primary NTP server IP address> Prompts for the IP address of the primary NTP server to which you want to synchronize the switch clock.Turn NTP service ON off .Enable/Disable daylight savings time on .Set primary NTP server address secsrv . this option is disabled.0. in HH:MM> Prompts for the NTP time zone offset. January 2005 . intrval <resync interval in minutes> Specifies how often the switch will re-synchronize the switch clock with the NTP server. By default. This interval of time will be specified in minutes (1-44640). cur Displays current TACACS+ configuration parameters. secsrv <secondary NTP server IP address> Prompts for the IP address of the secondary NTP server to which you want to synchronize the switch clock.2 Command Reference Table 6-8 TACACS+ Server Menu Options (/cfg/sys/tacacs) Command Syntax and Usage off Disables the TACACS+ server.Alteon OS 22. of the switch you are synchronizing from Greenwich Mean Time (GMT). /cfg/sys/ntp NTP Server Configuration This menu enables you to synchronize the switch clock to a Network Time Protocol (NTP) server. in hours and minutes. 242 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J. [NTP Server Menu] prisrv .

January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 243 . If the interface specified by this command is not up. By default.0. on This command enables the SONMP protocol. off Disables the NTP synchronization service. Table 6-10 System Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/sonmp) Command Syntax and Usage srcif <interface number (1-256)> This command specifies the IP address to be used in the hello packets. the switch will add an extra hour to the system clock so that it is consistent with the local clock. The following commands add support for the Ethernet Autotopology algorithm and the Bay Topology MIB.2 Command Reference Table 6-9 NTP Server Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/ntp) Command Syntax and Usage dlight disable|enable Disables or enables daylight savings time in the system clock. When enabled.Alteon OS 22. 315393-J. The topology algorithm is executed by each Alteon switch on which SONMP is enabled. and turns Ethernet Autotopology on. then the first interface which is up and running is used in the hello packets. this option is disabled. cur Displays the current NTP service settings. on Enables the NTP synchronization service. /cfg/sys/sonmp SynOptics Network Management Protocol Configuration [SONMP Menu] srcif on off cur Set source interface to be used in hello packets Turn Ethernet Autotopology ON Turn Ethernet Autotopology OFF Display current SONMP configuration SynOptics Network Management Protocol (SONMP) is a proprietary network management protocol that is used by Nortel Networks Optivitiy Switch Manager (OSM) to discover Alteon Application Switches on the network.

and turns Ethernet Autotopology off. January 2005 .2 Command Reference Table 6-10 System Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/sonmp) Command Syntax and Usage off This command disables the SONMP protocol. /cfg/sys/ssnmp System SNMP Configuration Alteon OS supports SNMP-based network management. In SNMP model of network management. SNMP parameters that can be modified include: System name System location System contact Use of the SNMP system authentication trap function Read community string Write community string Trap community strings 244 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J.0. cur This command displays the current SONMP configuration.Alteon OS 22. you can manage the switch using the following standard SNMP MIBs: MIB II (RFC 1213) Ethernet MIB (RFC 1643) Bridge MIB (RFC 1493) An SNMP agent is a software process on the managed device that listens on UDP port 161 for SNMP messages. If you are running an SNMP network management station on your network. a management station (client/manager) accesses a set of variables known as MIBs (Management Information Base) provided by the managed device (agent). Each SNMP message sent to the agent contains a list of management objects to retrieve or to modify.

This command enables the user to select one of the configured interfaces as the source interface using the interface number. The write community string controls SNMP “set” and “get” access to the switch. The default write community string is private. The default read community string is public.Set SNMP "sysLocation" cont . The read community string controls SNMP “get” access to the switch.Set timeout for the SNMP state machine auth . It can have a maximum of 32 characters. wcomm <new SNMP write community string (maximum 32 characters)> Configures the SNMP write community string. see page 247.Enable/disable SNMP link up/down trap cur .Set SNMP write community string trsrc .Set SNMP trap source interface timeout .Display current system SNMP configuration Table 6-11 SNMP Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/ssnmp) Command Syntax and Usage snmpv3 Displays SNMPv3 menu.Alteon OS 22. It can have a maximum of 32 characters.0. To view menu options. name <new string (maximum 64 characters)> Configures the name for the system. The name can have a maximum of 64 characters.Enable/disable SNMP "sysAuthenTrap" linkt . The contact can have a maximum of 64 characters. The SNMPv3 packets do not contain this field. trsrc <interface number (1-256)> Defines the interface number for SNMP trap source interface.SNMPv3 Menu name .Set SNMP "sysContact" rcomm . cont <new string (maximum 64 characters)> Configures the name of the system contact.Set SNMP "sysName" locn . locn <new string (maximum 64 characters)> Configures the name of the system location.2 Command Reference [System SNMP Menu] snmpv3 . 315393-J. The location can have a maximum of 64 characters. NOTE – This command is applicable only to SNMPv1 and SNMPv2 traps because only the SNMPv1 and SNMPv2 trap packets contain the source IP address that can be set with this command. rcomm <new SNMP read community string (maximum 32 characters)> Configures the SNMP read community string.Set SNMP read community string wcomm . January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 245 .

The default setting is enabled. memory is allocated to store the output of the command.Alteon OS 22. cur Displays the current STP port parameters. auth disable|enable Enables or disables the use of the system authentication trap facility. When you use diff and apply. 1-30> Defines the timeout period for SNMP state machine. linkt <port> <disable|enable> Enables or disables the sending of SNMP link up and link down traps. January 2005 .2 Command Reference Table 6-11 SNMP Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/ssnmp) Command Syntax and Usage timeout <SNMP state machine timeout minutes.0. 246 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J. The timeout period determines when the resources/memory allocated for the output will be freed. The default setting is disabled.

The View-based Access Control Model defines a set of services that an application can use for checking access rights of the user. [SNMPv3 Menu] usm view access group comm taddr tparam notify v1v2 cur - usmUser Table menu vacmViewTreeFamily Table menu vacmAccess Table menu vacmSecurityToGroup Table menu community Table menu targetAddr Table menu targetParams Table menu notify Table menu Enable/disable V1/V2 access Display current SNMPv3 configuration Table 6-12 SNMPv3 Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3) Command Syntax and Usage usm <usmUser number [1-16]> This command allows you to create a user security model (USM) entry for an authorized user. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 247 . see page 251.2 Command Reference /cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3 SNMPv3 Configuration Menu SNMP version 3 (SNMPv3) is an extensible SNMP Framework that supplements the SNMPv2 Framework by supporting the following: a new SNMP message format security for messages access control remote configuration of SNMP parameters For more details on the SNMPv3 architecture please refer to RFC2271 to RFC2276. To view menu options. To view menu options. see page 249.Alteon OS 22. 315393-J. view <vacmViewTreeFamily number [1-128]> This command allows you to create different MIB views. You need access control when you have to process retrieval or modification request from an SNMP entity. access <vacmAccess number [1-32]> This command allows you to specify access rights. see page 250.0. You can also configure this entry through SNMP. To view menu options.

consisting of a transport domain and a transport address. There may be multiple transport endpoints associated with a particular set of SNMP parameters. see page 254.2 Command Reference Table 6-12 SNMPv3 Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3) group <vacmSecurityToGroup number [1-16]> A group maps the user name to the access group names and their access rights needed to access SNMP management objects.Alteon OS 22. To view menu options. 248 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J. January 2005 . and generates Notification-Class messages based on these events or conditions. To view menu options. and for selecting community strings based on target addresses for outgoing notifications. see page 256. This command is enabled by default. security level. see page 257. see page 253. To view menu options.0. A group defines the access rights assigned to all names that belong to a particular group. cur Displays the current SNMPv3 configuration. and security name information. security model. v1v2 disable|enable This command allows you to enable or disable the access to SNMP version 1 and version 2. This is also termed as transport endpoint. see page 255. comm <snmpCommunity number [1-16]> The community table contains objects for mapping community strings and version-independent SNMP message parameters. The SNMP MIB provides a mechanism for performing source address validation on incoming requests. consisting of message processing model. taddr <snmpTargetAddr number [1-16]> This command allows you to configure destination information. To view menu options. To view menu options. tparam <target params index [1-16]> This command allows you to configure SNMP parameters. or a particular transport endpoint may be associated with several sets of SNMP parameters. notify <notify index [1-16]> A notification application typically monitors a system for particular events or conditions.

then make sure that you have selected one of the authentication protocols (MD5 or HMAC-SHA-96). An SNMP engine must have the knowledge of applicable attributes of a user. This is the login name that you need in order to access the switch. you will get an error message. priv des|none This command allows you to configure the type of privacy protocol on your switch. This command allows you to create or change your password for authentication. privpw This command allows you to create or change the privacy password. If you specify des as the privacy protocol. If you select none as the authentication protocol.0. This menu helps you create a user security model entry for an authorized user. authpw If you selected an authentication algorithm using the above command. The options are des (CBC-DES Symmetric Encryption Protocol) or none.Alteon OS 22. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 249 . You need to provide a security name to create the USM entry. The default algorithm is none. auth md5|sha|none This command allows you to configure the authentication protocol between HMAC-MD5-96 or HMAC-SHA-96. [SNMPv3 usmUser name auth authpw priv privpw del cur 1 Menu] Set USM user name Set authentication protocol Set authentication password Set privacy protocol Set privacy password Delete usmUser entry Display current usmUser configuration Table 6-13 User Security Model Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/ssnmp/ snmpv3/usm) Command Syntax and Usage name <32 character name> This command allows you to configure a string up to 32 characters long that represents the name of the user. otherwise you will get an error message during validation. 315393-J. you need to provide a password. The privacy protocol protects messages from disclosure.2 Command Reference /cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/usm User Security Model Configuration Menu You can make use of a defined set of user identities using this Security Model.

which in combination with the corresponding tree defines a family of view subtrees.2 Command Reference Table 6-13 User Security Model Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/ssnmp/ snmpv3/usm) Command Syntax and Usage del Deletes the USM user entries.1.Display current vacmViewTreeFamily configuration Table 6-14 SNMPv3 View Menu Options (/cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/view) Command Syntax and Usage name <32 character name> This command defines the name for a family of view subtrees up to a maximum of 32 characters.Set view type del ..Set view mask type . max 32 characters> This command defines MIB tree.1. a string of maximum 32 characters.3. January 2005 .Alteon OS 22.0.2. type included|excluded This command indicates whether the corresponding instances of vacmViewTreeFamilySubtree and vacmViewTreeFamilyMask define a family of view subtrees.6.Set view name tree . del Deletes the vacmViewTreeFamily group entry.1. tree <object identifier. which is included in or excluded from the MIB view. 250 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J. such as. which when combined with the corresponding mask defines a family of view subtrees.1. max size 32 characters> This command defines the bit mask.Set MIB subtree(OID) which defines a family of view subtrees mask . mask <bitmask. cur Displays the current vacmViewTreeFamily configuration. cur Displays the USM user entries. cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/view SNMPv3 View Configuration Menu [SNMPv3 vacmViewTreeFamily 1 Menu] name . 1.0.Delete vacmViewTreeFamily entry cur .

Set prefix only or exact match rview .Display current vacmAccess configuration Table 6-15 View-based Access Control Model Menu Options (/cfg/sys/ssnmp/ snmpv3/access) Command Syntax and Usage name <32 character name> Defines the name of the group. Access control is needed when the user has to process SNMP retrieval or modification request from an SNMP entity. model usm|snmpv1|snmpv2 Allows you to select the security model to be used. level noAuthNoPriv|authNoPriv|authPriv Defines the minimum level of security required to gain access rights. The view-based Access Control Model defines a table that lists the locally available contexts by contextName.Alteon OS 22.0. For more information on naming the management information. see RFC2571.Set notify view index del .2 Command Reference /cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/access View-based Access Control Model Configuration Menu The view-based Access Control Model defines a set of services that an application can use for checking access rights of the user.Delete vacmAccess entry cur .Set group name prefix .Set write view index nview .Set minimum level of security match . The level noAuthNoPriv means that the SNMP message will be sent without authentication and without using a privacy protocol. the SNMP Architecture document. An SNMP context is a collection of management information that an SNMP entity can access.Set content prefix model . January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 251 .Set read view index wview . The authPriv means that the SNMP message will be sent both with authentication and using a privacy protocol. The level authNoPriv means that the SNMP message will be sent with authentication but without using a privacy protocol.Set security model level . An SNMP entity has access to many contexts. [SNMPv3 vacmAccess 1 Menu] name . prefix <32 character name> Defines the name of the context. 315393-J.

0.Alteon OS 22. If the value is empty or if there is no active MIB view having this value then no access is granted. then all the rows whose contextName exactly matches the prefix are selected. January 2005 . 252 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J. nview <32 character view name> This is a 32 character long notify view name that allows you notify access to the MIB view. If the value is set to prefix then the all the rows where the starting octets of the contextName exactly match the prefix are selected. del Deletes the View-based Access Control entry. cur Displays the View-based Access Control configuration.2 Command Reference Table 6-15 View-based Access Control Model Menu Options (/cfg/sys/ssnmp/ snmpv3/access) Command Syntax and Usage match exact|prefix If the value is set to exact. rview <32 character view name> This is a 32 character long read view name that allows you read access to a particular MIB view. If the value is empty or if there is no active MIB view having this value then no access is granted. wview <32 character view name> This is a 32 character long write view name that allows you write access to the MIB view.

gname <32 character name> The name for the access group as defined in /cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/access/name on page 251.Alteon OS 22. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 253 . cur Displays the current vacmSecurityToGroup configuration.0.Delete vacmSecurityToGroup entry cur . del Deletes the vacmSecurityToGroup entry.Display current vacmSecurityToGroup configuration Table 6-16 SNMPv3 Group Menu Options (/cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/group) Command Syntax and Usage model usm|snmpv1|snmpv2 Defines the security model.2 Command Reference /cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/group SNMPv3 Group Configuration Menu [SNMPv3 vacmSecurityToGroup 1 Menu] model .Set security model uname . uname <32 character name> Sets the user name as defined in /cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/usm/name on page 249. 315393-J.Set group gname del .Set USM user name gname .

Set community tag del . uname <32 character name> Defines a readable 32 character long string that represents the corresponding value of an SNMP community name in a security model. This tag specifies a set of transport endpoints to which a command responder application sends an SNMP trap. The configured entry is stored in the community table list in the SNMP engine.Set USM user name tag . [SNMPv3 snmpCommunityTable 1 Menu] index .Set community index name . del Deletes the community table entry.2 Command Reference /cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/comm SNMPv3 Community Table Configuration Menu This command is used for configuring the community table entry. name <32 character name> Defines the user name as defined in /cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/usm/name on page 249. January 2005 . cur Displays the community table configuration. tag <list of tag string. This table is used to configure community strings in the Local Configuration Datastore (LCD) of SNMP engine. max 255 characters> Allows you to configure a tag of up to 255 characters maximum. 254 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J.Display current communityTable configuration Table 6-17 SNMPv3 Community Table Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/ ssnmp/snmpv3/comm) Command Syntax and Usage index <32 character name> Allows you to configure the unique index value of a row in this table consisting of 32 characters maximum.Delete communityTable entry cur .0.Set community string uname .Alteon OS 22.

port <transport address port> Allows you to configure a transport address port that can be used in the generation of SNMP traps.0. This table of transport addresses is used in the generation of SNMP messages.Set target transport address port taglist . del Deletes the Target Address Table entry. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 255 . 315393-J. max 255 characters> Allows you to configure a list of tags that are used to select target addresses for a particular operation.Set target transport address IP port . cur Displays the current Target Address Table configuration. [SNMPv3 snmpTargetAddrTable 1 Menu] name .Set tag list pname . addr <transport address ip> Allows you to configure a transport address IP that can be used in the generation of SNMP traps. taglist <list of tag string.Set target address name addr .Set targetParams name del . but unique identifier.Display current targetAddrTable configuration Table 6-18 Target Address Table Menu Options (/cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/taddr) Command Syntax and Usage name <32 character name> Allows you to configure the locally arbitrary.2 Command Reference /cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/taddr SNMPv3 Target Address Table Configuration Menu This command is used to configure the target transport entry. The configured entry is stored in the target address table list in the SNMP engine.Alteon OS 22. target address name associated with this entry.Delete targetAddrTable entry cur . pname <32 character name> Defines the name as defined in /cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/tparam/name on page 256.

authNoPriv.Set target params name mpmodel . The authPriv means that the SNMP message will be sent both with authentication and using a privacy protocol. [SNMPv3 snmpTargetParamsTable 1 Menu] name . 256 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J. SNMPv1). model usm|snmpv1|snmpv2 Allows you to select the security model to be used when generating the SNMP messages. uname <32 character name> Defines the name that identifies the user in the USM table (page 249) on whose behalf the SNMP messages are generated using this entry. This table contains parameters that are used to generate a message. SNMPv2c. The level authNoPriv means that the SNMP message will be sent with authentication but without using a privacy protocol. level noAuthNoPriv|authNoPriv|authPriv Allows you to select the level of security to be used when generating the SNMP messages using this entry.Set minimum level of security del .Set USM user name level .Set security model uname . but unique identifier that is associated with this entry.Alteon OS 22. The level noAuthNoPriv means that the SNMP message will be sent without authentication and without using a privacy protocol.Set message processing model model . the security name.Display current targetParamsTable configuration Table 6-19 Target Parameters Table Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/ ssnmp/snmpv3/tparam) Command Syntax and Usage name <32 character name> Allows you to configure the locally arbitrary. The parameters include the message processing model (for example: SNMPv3.2 Command Reference /cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/tparam SNMPv3 Target Parameters Table Configuration Menu You can configure the target parameters entry and store it in the target parameters table in the SNMP engine. January 2005 . and the security level (noAuthnoPriv. the security model (for example: USM). or authPriv). mpmodel snmpv1|snmpv2c|snmpv3 Allows you to configure the message processing model that is used to generate SNMP messages.Delete targetParamsTable entry cur .0.

A notification typically monitors a system for particular events or conditions. and generates Notification-Class messages based on these events or conditions. del Deletes the notify table entry.Display current notifyTable configuration Table 6-20 Notify Table Menu Options (/cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/notify) Command Syntax and Usage name <32 character name> Defines a locally arbitrary but unique identifier associated with this SNMP notify entry. that matches the value of this tag.Set notify tag del . tag <list of tag string.2 Command Reference Table 6-19 Target Parameters Table Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/ ssnmp/snmpv3/tparam) Command Syntax and Usage del Deletes the targetParamsTable entry. cur Displays the current notify table configuration.Delete notifyTable entry cur . /cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/notify SNMPv3 Notify Table Configuration Menu SNMPv3 uses Notification Originator to send out traps. Any entry in the snmpTargetAddrTable. [SNMPv3 snmpNotifyTable 1 Menu] name . 315393-J. cur Displays the current targetParamsTable configuration. is selected. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 257 .Set notify name tag .0. max 255 characters> Allows you to configure a tag of 255 characters maximum that contains a tag value which is used to select entries in the Target Address Table.Alteon OS 22.

Specify a TCP service port number. such as 80 for HTTP.2 Command Reference /cfg/sys/health System Health Check Configuration Menu [System TCP Health Menu] add .Add TCP services to listen for health check rem .0.Turn system TCP health services ON off . cur Displays the current TCP health check services configuration. 258 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J.Turn system TCP health services OFF cur .Display current TCP health services configuration Table 6-21 System Health Check Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/health) Command Syntax and Usage add <TCP port (2-65534)> Adds TCP services to listen to the health checks. Specify a TCP service port number. such as 80 for HTTP. on Turns on the TCP health check services.Alteon OS 22. January 2005 .Remove TCP services from listening on . rem <TCP port (2-65534)> Removes TCP services that were added for listening to health checks. off Turns off the TCP health check services.

January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 259 . The default is HTTP port 80. snmp disable|read-only|read-write Sets the snmp user access level to either disabled. see page 261. read-only. If Global Server Load Balancing is to be used. Sets an optional telnet server port number for cases where the server listens for telnet sessions on a non-standard port.2 Command Reference /cfg/sys/access System Access Control Configuration [System Access Menu] mgmt .Enable/disable Telnet access tnport . see page 263. To view menu options. TCP. This command is disabled by default.Display current system access configuration Table 6-22 System Access Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/access) Command Syntax and Usage mgmt Displays the Management Configuration Menu.User Access Control Menu (passwords) https . https Displays HTTPS Server Access Menu. To view menu options. user Displays the User Access Control Menu. tnet Enables or disables Telnet access to the switch.Set SNMP access control tnet .Management Network Definition Menu user .0. see page 260. 315393-J. set this to a different port (such as 8080). tnport <TCP port number> The TCP port number that the telnet server listens for telnet sessions.Set max rate of ARP. or read-write.Enable/disable HTTP (Web) access wport .HTTPS (Web) Server Access Menu http .Alteon OS 22. You will see this command only if you are connected to the switch through the console port. or UDP packets to MP cur . To view menu options. http disable|enable Enables or disables HTTP (Web) access to the browser-based interface. It is disabled by default. wport <TCP port number (1-65535)> Sets the switch port used for serving switch Web content.Set Telnet server port number rlimit .Set HTTP (Web) server port number snmp . ICMP.

Display current mgmt network definitions Table 6-23 Management Network Menu Options (/cfg/sys/access/mgmt) Command Syntax and Usage add <mgmt network address> <mgmt network mask> Adds a defined network through which switch access is allowed through Telnet. Then specify the maximum rate. NOTE – If you configure the management network without including the switch interfaces.Add mgmt network definition rem .0. which the maximum number of packets per second that is allowed to enter the switch. /cfg/sys/access/mgmt Management Networks Menu This menu is used to define IP address ranges which are allowed to access the switch for management purposes. it will cause the Firewall Load Balancing health checks to fail and will create a “Network Down” state on the network. RIP. Specify which protocol you wish to limit. or the Alteon OS browser-based interface. or UDP protocols. Specify an IP address and mask address in dotted-decimal notation. TCP. NOTE – The add and rem commands below replace the /cfg/sys/mnet and /cfg/ sys/mmask commands found in earlier releases of Alteon OS. [Management Networks Menu] add .Alteon OS 22. ICMP. A range of IP addresses is produced when used with a network mask address. January 2005 . 260 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J. 0-65535 (pkts/sec)> Sets switch-wide rate limiting on traffic entering the switch over ARP. cur Displays the current configuration.2 Command Reference Table 6-22 System Access Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/access) Command Syntax and Usage rlimit <arp|icmp|tcp|udp> <max rate. SNMP.Remove mgmt network definition cur .

To view menu options.Alteon OS 22. He or she can view switch status information and statistics. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 261 . /cfg/sys/access/user User Access Control Menu uid usrpw sopw l4opw opw sapw l4apw admpw cur User ID Menu Set user password (user) Set SLB operator password (slboper) Set L4 operator password (l4oper) Set operator password (oper) Set Slb administrator password (slbadmin) Set L4 administrator password (l4admin) Set administrator password (admin) Display current user status NOTE – Passwords can be a maximum of 15 characters. Table 6-24 User Access Control Menu Options (/cfg/sys/access/user) Command Syntax and Usage uid <User ID. which consists of a management network address and a management network mask address. The SLB operator manages Web servers and other Internet services and their loads. The user has no direct responsibility for switch management. cur Displays the current configuration.2 Command Reference Table 6-23 Management Network Menu Options (/cfg/sys/access/mgmt) Command Syntax and Usage rem <mgmt network address> <mgmt network mask> Removes a defined network. see page 264. 1-10> Displays the User ID Menu. Access includes “user” functions. He or she can view all switch information and statistics and can enable/disable servers using the Server Load Balancing configuration menus. 315393-J. but cannot make any configuration changes.0. sopw Sets the SLB operator (slboper)password. usrpw Sets the user (user) password.

The super user administrator has complete access to all menus. He or she can view all switch information and statistics and can reset ports or the entire switch. He or she can view all switch information and statistics and can configure parameters on the Server Load Balancing menus. admpw Sets the administrator (admin) password. and configuration commands on the Alteon Application Switch. cur Displays the current user status. Access includes “slboper” functions.Alteon OS 22. but can configure changes only on the Server Load Balancing menus. 262 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J. Note that the Filter Menu options are not accessible to the SLB administrator. opw Sets the operator (oper)password. Access includes “l4oper” functions. The operator manages all functions of the switch. sapw Sets the SLB administrator (slbadmin) password. with the exception of not being able to configure filters. He or she can view all switch information and statistics. information. l4apw Sets the Layer 4 administrator (l4admin) password. Access includes “oper” and “l4admin” functions. January 2005 .2 Command Reference Table 6-24 User Access Control Menu Options (/cfg/sys/access/user) Command Syntax and Usage l4opw Sets the Layer 4 operator (l4oper)password. The Layer 4 operator manages traffic on the lines leading to the shared Internet services.0. Access includes “l4oper” functions. Access includes “slbadmin” functions. The Layer 4 administrator configures and manages traffic on the lines leading to the shared Internet services. Administrator who configures and manages Web servers and other Internet services and their loads. He or she can view all switch information and statistics. The operator password can have a maximum of 15 characters. including the ability to change both the user and administrator passwords.

Then the switch will restart SSL agent.2 Command Reference /cfg/sys/access/https HTTPS Access Configuration Menu [https Menu] https port generate certSave cur Enable/Disable HTTPS Web access HTTPS WebServer port number Generate self-signed HTTPS server certificate save HTTPS certificate Display current SSL Web Access configuration Table 6-25 HTTPS Access Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/access/https) Command Syntax and Usage https Enables or disables BBI access (Web access) using HTTPS. generate Allows you to generate a certificate to connect to the SSL to be used during the key exchange.0. certSave Allows the client. email address) []: info@nortelnetworks. to accept the certificate and save the certificate to Flash to be used when the switch is rebooted. It will take approximately 30 seconds to generate the certificate.Alteon OS 22. user’s name) []: Mr Smith Email (for example. port <TCP port number> Defines the HTTPS Web server port number. cur Displays the current SSL Web Access configuration. company) []: Nortel Networks Organizational Unit Name (for example. A default certificate is created when HTTPS is enabled for the first time. section) []: Alteon Common Name (for example. city) []: Ottawa Organization Name (for example. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 263 . For example: Country Name (2 letter code) [ ]: CA State or Province Name (full name) []: Ontario Locality Name (for example.com You will be asked to confirm if you want to generate the certificate. The user can create a new certificate defining the information that they want to be used in the various fields. or the Web browser. 315393-J.

264 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J.Delete user ID . 1-1023> Removes a real server access from this user. pswd <15 char max> Sets the user password of up to 15 characters maximum.Alteon OS 22. January 2005 .Disable user ID .Display current user configuration Table 6-26 User ID Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/access/user/uid) Command Syntax and Usage cos <user|slboper|l4oper|oper|slbadmin|l4admin|admin> Sets the Class-of-Service to define the user’s authority level.Set class of service .Remove real server .Set user password . dis Disables the user ID. and the number of current sessions. and Administrator. Layer 4 Operator.2 Command Reference /cfg/sys/access/user/uid System User ID Configuration Menu This feature allows the users to operate the real servers assigned to them.Set user name . ena Enables the user ID. the operational state of the real server. Alteon OS defines these levels as: User.Enable user ID .Add real server . 1-1023> Assigns a real server access to this user. the real server name. name <8 char max> Defines the user name of maximum eight characters. SLB Administrator.0. Using this command you can list the current status of the real server including the real server number. You can enable or disable the real servers and change the password for accessing these real servers. add <real server number. with User being the most restricted level. [User ID 1 cos name pswd add rem ena dis del cur Menu] . SLB Operator. rem <real server number. Operator.

The SFP modules are not shipped with the product. cur Displays the current user ID configuration. and support half or full-duplex operation. auto-negotiating.Alteon OS 22. /cfg/port <port number> Port Configuration The Port Menu enables you to configure settings for individual switch ports. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 265 . You may order the SFP modules from Nortel Networks.0.2 Command Reference Table 6-26 User ID Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/access/user/uid) Command Syntax and Usage del Deletes the user ID. SFP GBIC Ports The LC jack is used for connecting Gigabit Ethernet fiber optic segments. Port configuration is different on Alteon OS 2000 series and 3000 series. This command is enabled by default. The ports are auto-sensing. 315393-J. Alteon OS 2000 Series The following table displays the number of Fast Ethernet ports and SFP GBIC ports with the numbering of the ports on Alteon OS 2000 series: Table 6-27 Port Configuration and Numbering on Alteon OS 2000 Series Model Alteon 2208 (1U) Alteon 2216 (1U) Alteon 2224 (1U) Alteon 2424 (1U) 10/100 Mbps Fast Ethernet 1000 Mbps SFP GBIC Port Port Numbers Numbers 1–8 1–16 1–24 1–24 9–10 17–18 25–26 25–28 Fast Ethernet Ports The RJ-45 jack is used for connecting 10/100 Mbps Ethernet segments to the port.

gig If a port is configured to support Gigabit Ethernet. please refer to the Hardware Installation Guide for Alteon OS. pvid <VLAN number. The default number is 1.Alteon OS 22.Enable/disable VLAN tagging for port iponly . cont <BWM Contract (1-256)> Sets the default Bandwidth Management Contract for this port.Fast Phy Menu gig .Set BW Contract for non-IP traffic egbw .Enable/disable allowing only IP related frames at ingress ena . 1-256> Sets the Bandwidth Management contract for non-IP traffic for this port. this option displays the Gigabit Ethernet Physical Link Menu.Set default port VLAN id name .Display current port configuration Table 6-28 Port Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/port) Command Syntax and Usage fast If a port is configured to support Fast Ethernet.Set default port BW Contract nonip .Enable/Disable RMON for port tag . January 2005 . name <64 character string>|none Sets a name for the port. see page 276. 1-4090> Sets the default VLAN number which will be used to forward frames which are not VLAN tagged. The commands on Alteon OS 2000 series and their description are as follows: [Port 1 Menu] fast . 266 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J.Set port name cont . To view menu options. see page 276.Set port egress bandwidth Limit rmon .Enable port dis .2 Command Reference For more information on connectors.0. The assigned port name appears next to the port number on some information and statistics screens.Gig Phy Menu pvid . The default is set to none. nonip <BW Contract number.Disable port cur . this option displays the Fast Ethernet Physical Link Menu. To view menu options.

iponly disable|enable Disables or enables allowing only IP-related frames. refer to “Temporarily Disabling a Port” on page 277. rmon disable|enable Disables or enables RMON for this port.2 Command Reference Table 6-28 Port Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/port) Command Syntax and Usage egbw <0k-5000k|1m-1000m> Sets the egress bandwidth limit for the port to avoid overloading the receiving router or switch.Set auto negotiation cur . January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 267 .0. tag disable|enable Disables or enables VLAN tagging for this port. /cfg/port <port number> fast|gig Port Link Configuration [Fast Link Menu] speed . The default is 0. dis Disables the port. the egress bandwidth for an FE port will be 100m.Set flow control auto . This means that the port’s speed will be taken as the egress bandwidth. Using this command.Display current fast link configuration Use these menu options to set port parameters for the port link. It is disabled by default.) cur Displays the current port parameters. 315393-J. It is disabled by default. you can configure the egress bandwidth limit of the port to match with the bandwidth link of the receiving router or the switch. For example.Set link speed mode . It is disabled by default.Set full or half duplex mode fctl . (To temporarily disable a port without changing its configuration attributes. ena Enables the port.Alteon OS 22. NOTE – You need Bandwidth Management license to use this command.

Alteon OS 22. Not all options are valid on all ports. 268 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J. and negotiation mode for the port link. flow control. Link menu options are described in Table 6-36 and appear on the fast and gig port configuration menus for the Alteon Application Switch. This command is available only in the Fast Link Menu. January 2005 . you can set port parameters such as speed. mode full|half|any Sets the operating mode. Table 6-29 Port Link Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/port/fast|gig) Command Syntax and Usage speed 10|100|any Sets the link speed.0. fctl rx|tx|both|none Sets the flow control. cur Displays the current port parameters.The choices include: Any for auto negotiation (default) Full-duplex Half-duplex This menu appears only if a Fast Ethernet port is selected.2 Command Reference NOTE – Since the speed and mode parameters cannot be set for Gigabit Ethernet ports. Using these configuration menus. The choices include: Any for automatic detection (default) 10 Mbps 100 Mbps This menu appears only if a Fast Ethernet port is selected.The choices include: Receive flow control Transmit flow control Both receive and transmit flow control (default) No flow control auto on|off Enables or disables auto negotiation for the port. these options do not appear on the Gigabit Link Menu. This command is available only in the Fast Link Menu.

Alteon OS 22. When the 1000 Mbps SFP GBIC port is selected as the preferred link. Four Small Form Pluggable (SFP) GBIC Fiber ports (9–12). When the 10/100/1000Base-T copper port is selected as the preferred link. 2. 5. full-duplex with autonegotiation turned on. See “Dual-Mode Ports” on page 274 for more details. These ports have two interfaces each: 1000 Mbps SFP GBIC and 10/100/1000Base-T Copper. refer to the Alteon OS Hardware Installation Guide Part Number 315393-E. it can be configured at any speed. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 269 . it is fixed at 1000 Mbps. 2. 315393-J. NOTE – For more information on connectors. These ports are designed to operate at 1000 Mbps and full duplex mode only.2 Command Reference Alteon OS 3000 Series The following table displays the port configuration and numbering on Alteon OS 3408: Table 6-30 Port configuration on Alteon OS 3408 Model Alteon 3408 (1U) 10/100/1000Base-T Copper Port Numbers 1. Their description is as follows: Four 1000BaseT ports (1. However. autonegotiation must be turned on. and 6). You can set either interface as the preferred or backup link. Four dual-mode ports (3. if 1000 Mbps is selected. and 8) with RJ-45 connectors.0. 7. 7. The ports are autonegotiating and support half or full duplex operation. 4. 8 Dual-Mode Port Numbers 3–6 1000 Mbps SFP GBIC Port Numbers 9–12 Port Configuration on Alteon OS 3408 The Alteon OS 3408 contains 12 ports.

) 270 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J. ena Enables the port. you see the menu below: [Port 1 Menu] gig pvid name cont rmon tag iponly ena dis cur - Copper Gig Phy Menu Set default port VLAN id Set port name Set default port BW Contract Enable/Disable RMON for port Enable/disable VLAN tagging for port Enable/disable allowing only IP related frames Enable port Disable port Display current port configuration Table 6-31 Single-Mode Copper Port Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/port <1. or 8>) Command Syntax and Usage gig If a port is configured to support Gigabit Ethernet. this option displays the Copper Gigabit Ethernet Physical Link Menu. tag disable|enable Disables or enables VLAN tagging for this port. The assigned port name appears next to the port number on some information and statistics screens. see page 271.Alteon OS 22. The default is set to None. It is disabled by default. name <64 character string>|none Sets a name for the port. It is disabled by default. (To temporarily disable a port without changing its configuration attributes. 7.0. iponly disable|enable Disables or enables allowing only IP-related frames.2 Command Reference Single-Mode ports 10/100/1000Base-T Copper Ports When you select a single-mode copper port (1. 2. dis Disables the port. To view menu options. It is disabled by default. refer to “Temporarily Disabling a Port” on page 277. The default number is 1. pvid <VLAN number (1-4090)> Sets the default VLAN number which will be used to forward frames which are not VLAN tagged. or 8). 7. cont <BWM Contract (1-256)> Sets the default Bandwidth Management Contract for this port. rmon disable|enable Disables or enables RMON for this port. 2. January 2005 .

or 8>/gig) Command Syntax and Usage speed 10|100|1000|any Sets the link speed. Using these configuration menus.Display current ge copper link configuration Use these menu options to set port parameters for the port link.Alteon OS 22.0. 7. flow control. 2.The choices include: Receive flow control Transmit flow control Both receive and transmit flow control (default) No flow control Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 271 315393-J. you can set port parameters such as speed. The choices include: Any for auto negotiation (default) Full-duplex Half-duplex fctl rx|tx|both|none Sets the flow control. Link menu options are described in Table 6-36 and appear on the gig port configuration menus for the Alteon Application Switch.Set duplex mode fctl . Table 6-32 Single-Mode Copper Port Gigabit Ethernet Link Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/port <1. This command is available only in the Fast Link Menu. The choices include: Any for automatic detection (default) 10 Mbps 100 Mbps 1000 Mbps mode full|half|any Sets the operating mode. and negotiation mode for the port link.2 Command Reference Table 6-31 Single-Mode Copper Port Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/port <1. January 2005 .Set flow control auto .Set link speed mode . or 8>) Command Syntax and Usage cur Displays the current port parameters. 7. /cfg/port <port number> gig Single-Mode Copper Port Gigabit Ethernet Link Configuration Menu [GE Copper Link Menu] speed . 2. Not all options are valid on all ports.Set auto negotiate cur .

name <64 character string>|none Sets a name for the port. cont <BWM Contract (1-256)> Sets the default Bandwidth Management Contract for this port. 1000 Mbps SFP GBIC Fiber SFP Ports When you select a single-mode SFP fiber port (9–12).Alteon OS 22. pvid <VLAN number (1-4090)> Sets the default VLAN number which will be used to forward frames which are not VLAN tagged. you see a slightly different menu as below: [Port 9 Menu] gig pvid name cont egbw rmon tag iponly ena dis cur - SFP Gig Phy Menu Set default port VLAN id Set port name Set default port BW Contract Set port egress bandwidth Limit Enable/Disable RMON for port Enable/disable VLAN tagging for port Enable/disable allowing only IP related frames Enable port Disable port Display current port configuration Table 6-33 Single-Mode SFP Gigabit Ethernet Port Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/port <9–12>) Command Syntax and Usage gig If a port is configured to support Gigabit Ethernet. The default number is 1. 7. The default is set to None. January 2005 . 272 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J.2 Command Reference Table 6-32 Single-Mode Copper Port Gigabit Ethernet Link Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/port <1. see page 273. this option displays the SFP Gigabit Ethernet Physical Link Menu. 2. cur Displays the current Gigabit Ethernet copper link port parameters. To view menu options. or 8>/gig) Command Syntax and Usage auto on|off Enables or disables autonegotiation for the port. The assigned port name appears next to the port number on some information and statistics screens.0.

(To temporarily disable a port without changing its configuration attributes.Set flow control . It is disabled by default.Set auto negotiate .0. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 273 . 315393-J. tag disable|enable Disables or enables VLAN tagging for this port. ena Enables the port. you can set port parameters such as flow control. It is disabled by default. refer to “Temporarily Disabling a Port” on page 277. Using these configuration menus. dis Disables the port. /cfg/port <port number> gig Single-Mode SFP Gigabit Ethernet Port Link Configuration Menu [GE SFP Link fctl auto cur Menu] . It is disabled by default.Display current SFP gig link configuration Use these menu options to set port parameters for the port link. Link menu options are described in Table 6-36 and appear on the gig port configuration menus for the Alteon Application Switch.2 Command Reference Table 6-33 Single-Mode SFP Gigabit Ethernet Port Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/port <9–12>) Command Syntax and Usage rmon disable|enable Disables or enables RMON for this port. and negotiation mode for the port link. iponly disable|enable Disables or enables allowing only IP-related frames.Alteon OS 22.) cur Displays the current port parameters.

0. To view menu options. To view menu options. January 2005 . Dual-Mode Ports When you select any one of the dual-mode ports (3–6). see page 277. 274 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J. see page 276.Alteon OS 22. sfp Displays SFP Gigabit Physical Link Menu. The choices include: Receive flow control Transmit flow control Both receive and transmit flow control (default) No flow control auto on|off Enables or disables autonegotiation for the port.2 Command Reference Table 6-34 Single-Mode SFP Gigabit Ethernet Port Link Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/port <9-12>/gig) Command Syntax and Usage fctl rx|tx|both|none Sets the flow control. cur Displays the current SFP Gigabit Ethernet link port parameters. you see the menu below: [Port 3 Menu] cop sfp pref back pvid name cont rmon tag iponly ena dis cur - Copper Gig Phy Menu SFP Gig Phy Menu Set preferred link Set backup link Set default port VLAN id Set port name Set default port BW Contract Enable/Disable RMON for port Enable/disable VLAN tagging for port Enable/disable allowing only IP related frames Enable port Disable port Display current port configuration Table 6-35 Dual-Mode Port Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/port <3–6>) Command Syntax and Usage cop Displays Copper Gigabit Physical Link Menu.

pvid <VLAN number (1-4090)> Sets the default VLAN number which will be used to forward frames which are not VLAN tagged. The default number is 1. It is disabled by default. 315393-J. tag disable|enable Disables or enables VLAN tagging for this port. name <64 character string>|none Sets a name for the port. It is disabled by default. back copper|sfp|none Sets the preference for the backup link if the preferred port is not available. refer to “Temporarily Disabling a Port” on page 277. cont <BWM Contract (1-256)> Sets the default Bandwidth Management Contract for this port.0. If you choose none.Alteon OS 22. The default is set to None. (To temporarily disable a port without changing its configuration attributes.) cur Displays the current port parameters. ena Enables the port. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 275 . It is disabled by default. The assigned port name appears next to the port number on some information and statistics screens. dis Disables the port. The selected port will be used as the preferred port if both the ports are available. You cannot set the preferred port as the backup port. rmon disable|enable Disables or enables RMON for this port.2 Command Reference Table 6-35 Dual-Mode Port Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/port <3–6>) Command Syntax and Usage pref copper|sfp Sets the port preference between copper or SFP mode. the port will not switch automatically to the backup port if the preferred port goes down. iponly disable|enable Disables or enables allowing only IP-related frames.

Not all options are valid on all ports. Table 6-36 Dual-Mode Copper Port Link Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/port <3–6>/cop) Command Syntax and Usage speed 10|100|1000|any Sets the link speed.Set duplex mode fctl .0. Using these configuration menus. The choices include: Receive flow control Transmit flow control Both receive and transmit flow control (default) No flow control auto on|off Enables or disables auto negotiation for the port. January 2005 . The choices include: Any for automatic detection (default) 10 Mbps 100 Mbps 1000 Mbps mode full|half|any Sets the operating mode. you can set port parameters such as speed. flow control.Alteon OS 22.Set link speed mode .2 Command Reference /cfg/port <port number (3–6)> cop Dual-Mode Copper Port Link Configuration [GE Copper Link Menu] speed .Set flow control auto . and negotiation mode for the port link. cur Displays the current Gigabit Ethernet copper link port parameters. Link menu options are described in Table 6-36 and appear on the cop port configuration menus for the Alteon Application Switch. The choices include: Any for autonegotiation (default) Full-duplex Half-duplex fctl rx|tx|both|none Sets the flow control.Display current ge copper link configuration Use these menu options to set port parameters for the port link. 276 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J.Set auto negotiate cur .

The choices include: Receive flow control Transmit flow control Both receive and transmit flow control (default) No flow control cur Displays the current SFP Gigabit link port configuration. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 277 .Alteon OS 22. Temporarily Disabling a Port To temporarily disable a port without changing its stored configuration attributes. See the “Operations Menu” on page 433 for other operations-level commands. 315393-J. The port state will revert to its original configuration when the Alteon Application Switch is reset.Display current SFP gig link configuration Table 6-37 Dual-Mode SFP Gigabit Link Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/port <3-6>/sfp) Command Syntax and Usage fctl rx|tx|both|none Sets the flow control.0. you do not need to use apply or save. enter the following command at any prompt: Main# /oper/port <port number>/dis Because this configuration sets a temporary state for the port.2 Command Reference /cfg/port <port number (3–6)> sfp Dual-Mode SFP Gigabit Link Configuration Menu [GE SFP Link fctl cur Menu] .Set flow control .

January 2005 . enable.Display current Port-based Port Mirroring configuration 278 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J.2 Command Reference /cfg/pmirr Port Mirroring Menu [Port Mirroring mirror monport cur Menu] Enable/Disable Mirroring Configure Monitor Port Display All Mirrored and Monitored Ports and VLANs Port mirroring is disabled by default. When enabled.Rem "Mirrored" port and VLANs cur . To view menu options.0. By attaching a network analyzer to the monitor port. see page 278. you can collect detailed information about your network performance and usage. and disable the monitored port.Add "Mirrored" port and VLANs rem . Table 6-38 Port Mirroring menu options (/cfg/pmirr) Command Syntax and Usage mirror disable|enable Enables or disables port mirroring monport <monitoring port (port to mirror to)> Displays port-mirroring menu options that help configure the port.Alteon OS 22. The Port Mirroring Menu is used to configure. /cfg/pmirr/monport Port-Mirroring Menu [Port 1 Menu] add . network packets being sent and/or received on a target port are duplicated and sent to a monitor port. cur Displays the current settings of the mirrored and monitoring ports.

rem <mirrored port (port to mirror from)> <vlan index or Carriage Return for all vlans> Removes the mirrored port. If the destination port of the frame matches the mirrored port and the mirrored direction is egress or both.0. receive higher priority versus non-critical traffic. It allows companies to guarantee that critical business traffic. the frame is sent to the mirrored port. /cfg/bwm Bandwidth Management Configuration Bandwidth Management (BWM) enables Web site managers to allocate a portion of the available bandwidth for specific users or applications.2 Command Reference Table 6-39 Port-Based Port-Mirroring Menu Options (/cfg/pmirr/monport) Command Syntax and Usage add <mirrored port (port to mirror from)> <direction (in. By default. You can add specific VLAN(s) to a be monitored even if there are multiple VLANs associated with that port. cur Displays the current settings of the monitoring port. VLAN-based port mirroring allows the user to monitor traffic based on VLANs associated with a port. Refer to your Application Guide for more information. all traffic on that port will be mirrored. If you do not specify a VLAN. BWM is turned off. NOTE – BWM is a software key-enabled feature that requires users to purchase a license and a key. the frame is sent to the monitoring port. In order to enable BWM. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 279 . It is necessary to specify the direction because: If the source port of the frame matches the mirrored port and the mirrored direction is ingress or both (ingress and egress). users need to enter the Bandwidth Management key using the /oper/swkey command. Traffic classification can be based on user or application information. or both)> <vlan index or Carriage Return for all vlans> Adds the port to be mirrored. BWM policies can be configured to set lower and upper bounds on the bandwidth allocation. out.Alteon OS 22. such as e-commerce transactions. 315393-J. This command also allows you to enter the direction of the traffic.

For further details.Alteon OS 22. To view menu options. group <BW Group number (1-32)> Displays the Bandwidth Management Group Menu. see the Alteon OS 22.Set SMTP server user name entries . you must create one or more bandwidth management contracts.Globally turn Bandwidth Management processing ON off . January 2005 .Display current Bandwidth Management configuration NOTE – Up to 256 bandwidth management contracts can be configured on Alteon OS.Set the frequency of BWM email in minutes force . user <user name> Sets the SMTP user name to whom the history statistics will be mailed. see the Alteon OS 22.2 Application Guide. The switch uses these contracts to limit individual traffic flows.Group menu user .2 Application Guide. A bandwidth policy is often based on a rate structure whereby a Web host could charge a customer for bandwidth utilization.Contract menu policy . The default is set to 0. see page 281. entries <64k|128k|256k|512k|1024k> Sets the number of entries in the Bandwidth Management IP user table. By default. The default is set to None. frequen <1-1440 minutes. To view menu options.0.Set number of entries in the BWM IP user table frequen .0.0. Bandwidth policies are bandwidth limita- tions defined for any set of frames.Policy menu group . Table 6-40 Bandwidth Management Menu Options (/cfg/bwm) Command Syntax and Usage cont <BW contract number (1-256)> Displays the Bandwidth Management Contract Menu. For further details.2 Command Reference [Bandwidth Management Menu] cont .Globally turn Bandwidth Management processing OFF cur . 280 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J. 0 for default behavior> Sets the frequency of Bandwidth Management email in minutes.Enable/disable enforce policies on . To view menu options. To manage bandwidth on an Alteon Application Switch. policy <BW policy number (1-512)> Displays the Bandwidth Management Policy Menu. see page 284. see page 285. specifying the guaranteed bandwidth rates. this option is disabled.

Enable/disable user (IP address) limiting for this contract iptype .Enable/disable monitor-only mode for this Contract shaping .2 Command Reference Table 6-40 Bandwidth Management Menu Options (/cfg/bwm) Command Syntax and Usage force disable|enable Enables or disables the enforcement of bandwidth policy on the traffic. The packets will exit in the order they came in. Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 281 315393-J. this option is enabled. This means that no bandwidth limit is applied on the queues. name <15 character name> Sets the name for this Bandwidth Management contract.Set Contract Policy prec .Enable/disable Saving Contract stats history wtos .0.Alteon OS 22. When disabled.Disable BW Contract del . cur Displays the current Bandwidth Management configuration.Enable/disable overwriting IP TOS for this Contract mononly .Delete BW Contract cur . January 2005 .Set Contract Precedence history . By default.Enable/disable overwriting TCP Window for this Contract ena .Enable/disable traffic shaping for this contract iplimit .Enable BW Contract dis .Set user (IP address) limiting type for this contract wtcpwin . see page 283.Set Contract name policy . /cfg/bwm/cont <contract number> Bandwidth Management Contract Configuration [BW Contract 1 Menu] timepol .Time policy menu name . off Globally disables Bandwidth Management on this switch. To view menu options.Display current BW Contract configuration Table 6-41 Bandwidth Management Policy Menu Options (/cfg/bwm/cont) Command Syntax and Usage timepol <BW Contract time policy number (1-2)> Displays Time Policy Menu. the reordering of the packets does not occur. on Globally enables Bandwidth Management on this switch.

shaping disable|enable Disables or enables shaping of the traffic for this contract. By default. If enabled.2 Command Reference Table 6-41 Bandwidth Management Policy Menu Options (/cfg/bwm/cont) Command Syntax and Usage policy <Bandwidth policy number (1-512)> Sets the policy number for this Bandwidth Management contract. This command is used for design and auditing purposes only. January 2005 . mononly disable|enable Enables or disables monitor-only mode for this Contract. cur Displays the current Bandwidth Management contract configuration.Alteon OS 22. ena Enables this Bandwidth Management contract. Do not set the value to lower than 1500 bytes. This may help reduce the traffic congestion. By default. In this context. The default policy number is 64. By overwriting the default window size. The default value is 1. wtcpwin disable|enable Enables or disables overwriting TCP Window for this Contract. whether the user (IP address) limiting is enforced by the source IP address (SIP) or the destination IP address (DIP). refer to the Application Guide.0. iptype <sip|dip> Defines the IP type for this contract. the user can modify the TCP window size to a lower value so that when the packet arrives carrying the bytes within that window size. each IP address is limited to the user limit configured in /cfg/bwm/policy on page 284. shaping means buffering a packet and keeping it ready to be sent. the receiver of that packet does not have to wait for acknowledgement. The statistics are generated but no shaping or limiting will apply to this contract. iplimit disable|enable Enables or disables user (IP address) limiting for this contract. prec <Bandwidth precedence value (1-255)> Sets the precedence value for this Bandwidth Management contract. it is enabled. wtos disable|enable Disables or enables overwriting the IP Type of Service (TOS) for this contract. 282 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J. it is disabled. For details. dis Disables this Bandwidth Management contract. del Removes this contract from the switch. history disable|enable Disables or enables saving statistics for this contract on the server.

weekdays (Monday to Friday). The default is everyday. disable Disables the Time Policy command on the switch.Delete Time Policy cur .Set Time Policy to hour policy .Set Time Policy day from . enable Enables the Time Policy command on the switch.2 Command Reference /cfg/bwm/cont <contract number>/timepol <Contract time policy number> BWM Contract Time Policy Configuration Menu This feature enables the user to configure different policies based on the time of the day using the following menu and commands: [BW Contract 1 Time Policy 1 Menu] day .0. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 283 . the switch will default to am for numbers lower than 12 and will default to pm for numbers 13 or higher.Disable Time Policy delete .Alteon OS 22. to <1-12am/pm> Sets the end limit of time in hours. If am or pm is not specified. weekend (Saturday and Sunday) or everyday. 315393-J. If am or pm is not specified.Set Time Policy from hour to . 1-512> Defines the policy number for the contract.Enable Time Policy disable .Display current Time Policy configuration Table 6-42 BWM Contract Time Policy Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/bwm/ timepol) Command Syntax and Usage day <mon|tue|wed|thu|fri|sat|sun|weekday|weekend|everyday> Defines the day(s) of the week. from <1-12am/pm> Defines the time from where you need to start the time in hours. policy <BW Policy number. the switch will default to am for numbers lower than 12 and will default to pm for numbers 13 or higher.Set Time Policy enable .

cur Displays the current Time Policy configuration on the switch. resv <0k-5000k|1m-1000m> Sets the reserve limit for this policy. This is the amount of bandwidth always available to this policy. soft <0k-5000k|1m-1000m> Sets the soft bandwidth limit for this policy. January 2005 . This is the highest amount of bandwidth available to this policy.Alteon OS 22. The default value is 2000 kbps. The default value is 1000 kbps. /cfg/bwm/policy <policy number> Bandwidth Management Policy Configuration [Policy 1 Menu] hard soft resv userlim utos otos buffer del cur Set hard Limit Set soft Limit Set Reservation Limit Set per user (IP address) Limit Set underlimit (soft limit) TOS Set overlimit (soft limit) TOS Set Buffer Limit Delete BW Policy Display current Policy configuration Table 6-43 Bandwidth Management Policy Menu Options (/cfg/bwm/pol) Command Syntax and Usage hard <0k-5000k|1m-1000m> Sets the hard bandwidth limit for this policy.2 Command Reference Table 6-42 BWM Contract Time Policy Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/bwm/ timepol) Command Syntax and Usage delete Deletes Time Policy. 284 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J.0. The default value is 500Kbytes. userlim <0k-5000k|1m-1000m> Sets the bandwidth limit for each IP address in the contract traffic.

1-256> Adds a contract to this group.Alteon OS 22.0. del Deletes this Bandwidth Management group. With this option set to the default value of “0.Display current BW Group configuration Table 6-44 Bandwidth Management Group Menu Options (/cfg/bwm/group) Command Syntax and Usage add <BW Contract number. 315393-J. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 285 .Add Contract to this group rem . buffer <Maximum buffer space (bytes) (8192-128000)> Sets the buffer limit for this policy. /cfg/bwm/group Bandwidth Management Group Configuration Menu [BW Group 1 Menu] add .Delete BW Group cur . With this option set to the default value of “0.Remove Contract from this group del . cur Displays all current Bandwidth Management Group configurations. 1-256> Removes a contract from this group. del Deletes the bandwidth management policy. The default value is 8192 bytes.” the switch will not overwrite the TOS value.” the switch will not overwrite the TOS value. otos <BW Policy TOS (0-255)> Sets the new otos (over the limit TOS) value to overwrite the original TOS value if the traffic for this contract is over the soft limit.2 Command Reference Table 6-43 Bandwidth Management Policy Menu Options (/cfg/bwm/pol) Command Syntax and Usage utos <BW Policy TOS (0-255)> Sets the new utos (underlimit TOS) value to overwrite the original TOS value if the traffic for this contract is under the soft limit. cur Displays the current value of the bandwidth policy configuration. rem <BW Contract number.

Alteon OS 22.2 Command Reference /cfg/bwm/cur Bandwidth Management Current Configuration Current Bandwidth Management setting: ON Policy Enforcement: enabled SMTP server user name: Contract Name Policy Prec Hist TOS State Shaping 1 cont_1 1 1 E E E E 2 cont_2 2 1 E D D D 256 Default -0 E D E D *Default contract gets all the BW that is available on a port after the active contracts reserved BW is taken. January 2005 .0. Policy 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 Hard 25M 10M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M Soft 20M 8M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M Resv oTOS uTOS Buffer 500K 150 100 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 286 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J.

The ntmstg enabled device will not work with the device configured for Cisco implementation of Spanning Tree BPDUs.Alteon OS 22. To view menu options. To view menu options. When Nortel multiple STG mode is disabled. ntmstg disable|enable Enables or disables Nortel Multiple Spanning Tree Group mode. see page 294. When Nortel multiple STG mode is enabled. the Nortel implementation of multiple STGs will be followed. lacp Displays Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) Menu.2 Command Reference /cfg/l2 Layer 2 Configuration Menu [Layer 2 Menu] stg trunk lacp vlan ntmstg cur Spanning Tree Menu Trunk Group Menu Link Aggregation Control Protocol Menu VLAN Menu Enable/disable Nortel multiple STG mode Display current layer 2 parameters Table 6-45 Layer 2 Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l2) Command Syntax and Usage stg <group number [1-16]> Displays Spanning Tree Group Menu. see page 297. 315393-J. vlan <VLAN number (1-4090)> Displays VLAN Menu. The factory default value of this command is Nortel multiple STG mode disabled. To view menu options. see page 292. cur Displays the current Layer 2 parameters.0. trunk <trunk group number> Displays Trunk Group Menu. see page 288. To view menu options. You need to reset the switch with the command /boot/reset for the Spanning Tree Group configuration to change to ntmstg enabled. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 287 . the Cisco implementation of multiple STGs will be followed.

When multiple paths exist.Globally turn Spanning Tree OFF default . Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) detects and eliminates logical loops in a bridged or switched network. The default Spanning Tree group (1) can have more than one VLAN.2 Command Reference /cfg/l2/stg Spanning Tree Group Configuration When multiple paths exist on a network.Remove all VLANs from Spanning Tree Group on . Spanning Tree configures the network so that a switch uses only the most efficient path.Display current bridge parameters 288 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J.Add VLAN(s) to Spanning Tree Group remove . Alteon OS supports the IEEE 802. STP forces redundant data paths into a standby (blocked) state. Multiple Spanning Trees can be enabled on tagged or untagged ports.1p Spanning Tree Protocol (STP).Remove VLAN(s) from Spanning Tree Group clear . [Spanning Tree Group 1 Menu] brg . If that path fails. See your Application Guide for a detailed description of this feature and how to configure Spanning Tree Groups on the switch.Default Spanning Tree and Member parameters cur . Spanning Tree automatically sets up another active path on the network to sustain network operations. STP is used to prevent loops in the network topology.Globally turn Spanning Tree ON off . January 2005 . Spanning Tree can be enabled or disabled for each port.Alteon OS 22. All other Spanning Tree groups (2-16) can have only one VLAN associated with it.Port parameter menu add . This command is turned on by default.0.Bridge parameter menu port . Alteon OS supports up to 16 instances of Spanning Trees or Spanning Tree groups. Each VLAN can be placed in only one Spanning Tree group per switch except for the default Spanning Tree group (STG 1). Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) configures the network so that a switch uses only the most efficient path. Thus.

STP must be enabled. 315393-J. cur Displays the current Spanning Tree Protocol parameters. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 289 . default Resets STG and Group member parameters to factory default. Table 6-46 Spanning Tree Configuration Menu (/cfg/l2/stp) Command Syntax and Usage brg Displays the Bridge Spanning Tree Menu. off Globally disables Spanning Tree Protocol. on Globally enables Spanning Tree Protocol. see page 291. To view menu options. To view menu options. remove <VLAN numbers (1-4090)> Breaks the association between a VLAN and a spanning tree and requires an external VLAN ID as a parameter. port <port number> Displays the Spanning Tree Port Menu. see page 290.0. add <VLAN numbers (1-4090)> Associates a VLAN with a spanning tree and requires an external VLAN ID as a parameter.Alteon OS 22.2 Command Reference NOTE – When VRRP is used for active/active redundancy. clear Removes all VLANs from a spanning tree.

configure the bridge priority lower than all other switches and bridges on your network. and the default is 32768.Set bridge Forward Delay (4-30 secs) aging .Display current bridge parameters Spanning Tree bridge parameters affect the global STP operation of the switch. 290 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J.The hello time specifies how often the root bridge transmits a configuration bridge protocol data unit (BPDU). The bridge priority parameter controls which bridge on the network is the STP root bridge.Set bridge Priority [0-65535] hello . the higher the bridge priority. and the default is 15 seconds. The range is 4 to 30 seconds.Set bridge Hello Time [1-10 secs] mxage . January 2005 . Any bridge that is not the root bridge uses the root bridge hello value. and the default is 20 seconds. The maximum age parameter specifies the maximum time the bridge waits without receiving a configuration bridge protocol data unit before it re configures the STP network.Alteon OS 22. The range is 1 to 10 seconds. The range is 0 to 65535. mxage <new bridge max age (6-40 secs)> Configures the bridge maximum age. The lower the value.2 Command Reference /cfg/l2/stg/brg Bridge Spanning Tree Configuration [Bridge Spanning Tree Menu] prior . 0 to disable) cur .Set bridge Aging Time (1-65535 secs. The forward delay parameter specifies the amount of time that a bridge port has to wait before it changes from the listening state to the learning state and from the learning state to the forwarding state.Set bridge Max Age (6-40 secs) fwd . fwd <new bridge Forward Delay (4-30 secs)> Configures the bridge forward delay parameter. STP bridge parameters include: Bridge priority Bridge hello time Bridge maximum age Forwarding delay Bridge aging time Table 6-47 Bridge Spanning Tree Menu Options (/cfg/l2/stp/brg) Command Syntax and Usage prior <new bridge priority (0-65535)> Configures the bridge priority. To make this switch the root bridge. The range is 6 to 40 seconds. and the default is 2 seconds.0. hello <new bridge hello time (1-10 secs)> Configures the bridge hello time.

cur Displays the current bridge STP parameters.Alteon OS 22.Turn port's Spanning Tree ON off . 0 for default) on . the following formulas must be used: 2*(fwd-1) > mxage 2*(hello+1) < mxage /cfg/l2/stg <STG Group Index>/port <port #> Spanning Tree Port Configuration [Spanning Tree Port 1 Menu] prior . set this parameter to 0. To disable aging.0. 0 to disable)> Configures the forwarding database aging time. STP port parameters include: Port priority Port path cost STP is turned on by default for the port.Set port Priority (0-255) cost . 315393-J. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 291 . When configuring STP bridge parameters.Set port Path Cost (1-65535.Display current port Spanning Tree parameters Spanning Tree port parameters are used to modify STP operation on an individual port basis. The aging time specifies the amount of time the bridge waits without receiving a packet from a station before removing the station from the forwarding database. The range is 1 to 65535 seconds.2 Command Reference Table 6-47 Bridge Spanning Tree Menu Options (/cfg/l2/stp/brg) Command Syntax and Usage aging <new bridge Aging Time (1-65535 secs. and the default is 300 seconds.Turn port's Spanning Tree OFF cur .

/cfg/l2/trunk <trunk group number> Trunk Configuration Trunk groups can provide super-bandwidth and multi-link connections between Alteon Application Switches or other trunk capable devices. combining their bandwidth to create a single.Alteon OS 22. larger virtual link. Up to 12 trunk groups can be configured on the Alteon Application Switch. The range is 1 to 65535. 0 for default)> Configures the port path cost. Best performance is achieved when all ports in a trunk are configured for the same speed. cost <new port Path Cost (1-65535. The range is 0 to 255. In a network topology that has multiple bridge ports connected to a single segment.0. 292 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J.2 Command Reference Table 6-48 Spanning Tree Port Menu (/cfg/l2/stp/port) Command Syntax and Usage prior <new port Priority (0-255)> Configures the port priority. The default is 10 for 100Mbps ports. January 2005 . A value of 0 indicates that the default cost will be computed for an auto negotiated link speed. The port path cost is used to help determine the designated port for a segment. Trunking from non-Alteon devices must comply with Cisco® EtherChannel® technology. and the default is 128. the port with the lowest port priority becomes the designated port for the segment. Generally speaking. you can view the state of each port in the various trunk groups. When trunk groups are configured. the faster the port. off Disables STP on the port. on Enables STP on the port. cur Displays the current STP port parameters. A trunk group is a group of ports that act together. and 1 for Gigabit ports. The port priority helps determine which bridge port becomes the designated port. the lower the path cost. Up to eight ports/trunks can belong to the same trunk group. with the following restrictions: Any physical switch port can belong to no more than one trunk group.

Alteon OS 22.2 Command Reference By default. dis Turns the current trunk group off.Remove port from trunk group ena . [Trunk group 1 Menu] cont . the contract number is 256 for AD3 and 1024 for AD4.0. ena Enables the current trunk group. 315393-J. By default. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 293 .Delete trunk group cur . del Removes the current trunk group configuration. the trunk group is empty and disabled.Add port to trunk group rem .Display current Trunk Group configuration Table 6-49 Trunk Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l2/trunk) Command Syntax and Usage cont <BWM Contract (1-256)> Sets the default Bandwidth Management Contract for this trunk group. rem <port number> Removes a physical port from the current trunk group. cur Displays the current trunk group parameters.Set BW contract for this trunk group add .Disable trunk group del .Enable trunk group dis . add <port number> Adds a physical port to the current trunk group.

Link aggregation is a method of grouping physical link segments of the same media type and speed in full duplex. When the system initializes. The maximum number of active physical ports in any trunk group is eight and the number of standby ports is also eight.3ad standard allows two or more standard Ethernet links to form a single Layer 2 link using the Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP). and treating them as if they were part of a single. It provides for the controlled addition and removal of physical links for the link aggregation.3ad standard is Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP). The maximum number of configurable trunk groups are 40: 12 user configurable trunks and 28 LACP trunks depending upon the maximum number of ports in the switch.2 Command Reference /cfg/l2/lacp Link Aggregation Control Protocol Menu Alteon OS 22. The 802.3ad standard on the Alteon OS.3ad-2000 for a detailed information about the standard. LACP automatically determines which member links can be aggregated and then aggregates them. At the core of the 802. You can configure the trunk groups manually called the static trunks as well as you can configure dynamic trunk group using the IEEE 802. This protocol allows the user to group several physical ports into one logical port (LACP trunk group) with any switch that supports IEEE 802. This port initiates negotiation with the partner system port by sending LACPDU (Link Aggregation Control Protocol Data Unit) packets. 294 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J. active The port is capable of forming an LACP trunk. all ports are in off mode by default.2 supports IEEE 802. If a link in a LACP trunk group fails. traffic is reassigned dynamically to the remaining links of the LACP trunk group or is assigned to the standby LACP links. January 2005 . logical link segment. off (default) The user can configure this port to a regular static trunk group. This port only responds to the negotiation requests sent from an LACP active port.0.0.3ad standard called the LACP trunks. passive The port is capable of forming an LACP trunk.Alteon OS 22. NOTE – Refer to IEEE 802.3ad standard (LACP). Each external port in the Alteon OS can have one of the following LACP modes.

You can form an active LACP trunk group with all the ports that have the same LAG ID.Display current LACP configuration Table 6-50 Link Aggregation Control Protocol Menu Options (/cfg/l2/lacp) Command Syntax and Usage sysprio <1-65535> Defines the priority value (1 through 65535) for the Alteon OS. NOTE – All ports are in LACP off mode by default. Use the following commands to configure LACP on the Alteon OS.0. System priority is used when there are more than eight ports configured with the same adminkey. in conjunction with port priority. Lower numbers provide higher priority. The default value is 32768. All the aggregatable ports must have the same LAG ID. Please refer to your Alteon OS Application Guide for a detailed information on this protocol. see page 296. The default value is long.LACP port Menu cur . cur Displays the current LACP configuration.Alteon OS 22. You can choose between short (3 seconds) or long (90 seconds) timeout periods. The system priority.2 Command Reference Each LACP active or passive port needs an admin. [LACP Menu] sysprio . timeout <short|long> Defines the timeout period before invalidating LACP data from a remote partner. an operational key. The link can generate Link Aggregation ID (LAG ID) based on the operational key. and an aggregator for LACP to start negotiation on these ports. port <port number> Displays the LACP Port menu. decides which eight ports should be combined to form a trunk group between two switches. The rest of the ports stay in standby mode to substitute for any failed ports.Set LACP system timeout scale for timing out partner info port . You need to assign the same admin key to a group of ports to make them aggregatable. To view menu options. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 295 . 315393-J.Set LACP system priority timeout .

cur Displays the current LACP configuration for this port.Display current LACP port configuration Use the following commands to configure Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) on a selected port. Passive ports do not initiate negotiation. you can turn LACP off for this port. Lower numbers provide higher priority. January 2005 .Set LACP port priority adminkey . Table 6-51 Link Aggregation Control Protocol Port Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l2/lacp/port #) Command Syntax and Usage mode <off for no LACP or active or passive> off: Using this option. Only ports with the same admin key and oper key (operational state generated internally) can form an LACP trunk group. you can turn LACP on and set this port to active. The default value is 128. active: Using this option. but only respond to the negotiation requests from active ports. Only active ports initiate negotiation with the partner system port by sending the LACPDU packets. 296 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J. prio <1-65535> Sets the priority value for the selected port. adminkey <1-255> Sets the admin key for this port.0.Set LACP port admin key cur . All ports are in off mode by default. you can turn LACP on and set this port to passive mode. You can use this port to manually configure a static trunk.2 Command Reference /cfg/l2/lacp/port <port number> LACP Port Configuration Menu [LACP Port 1 Menu] mode . passive: Using this option.Alteon OS 22.Set LACP mode prio .

change the status of the VLAN. (1-256)> Sets the Bandwidth Management contract for this VLAN. the VLAN menu option is disabled except VLAN 1. see “Setup Part 3: VLANs” on page 34. [VLAN 1 Menu] name stg cont add rem def jumbo learn ena dis del cur - Set VLAN name Assign VLAN to a Spanning Tree Group Set BW contract Add port to VLAN Remove port from VLAN Define VLAN as list of ports Enable/disable Jumbo Frame support Enable/disable smac learning Enable VLAN Disable VLAN Delete VLAN Display current VLAN configuration Table 6-52 VLAN Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l2/vlan) Command Syntax and Usage name Assigns a name to the VLAN or changes the existing name. and change the port membership of the VLAN. The default VLAN name is the first one. rem <port number> Removes port(s) or trunk group(s) from this VLAN. delete the VLAN. The default contract number is 256 on AD3 and 1024 on AD4.0. which is enabled all the time. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 297 . 315393-J. For more information on configuring VLANs. add <port number> Adds port(s) or trunk group(s) to the VLAN membership.Alteon OS 22. By default. The commands in this menu configure VLAN attributes. to create logical segmentation of workgroups.2 Command Reference /cfg/l2/vlan <VLAN number> VLAN Configuration VLANs are commonly used to split up groups of network users into manageable broadcast domains. and to enforce security policies among logical segments. cont <BW Contract number. stg <Spanning Tree Group index (1-16)> Assigns a VLAN to a Spanning Tree Group.

You need to reset the switch using /boot/reset command to enable jumbo frames on the switch. ena Enables this VLAN. cur Displays the current VLAN configuration. Also. January 2005 . jumbo disable|enable Enables or disables jumbo frame support on this VLAN.0. Every port must be a member of at least one VLAN. By default. NOTE – All ports must belong to at least one VLAN.2 Command Reference Table 6-52 VLAN Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l2/vlan) Command Syntax and Usage def <list of port numbers> Defines which ports are members of this VLAN. You cannot remove a port from VLAN #1 if the port has no membership in any other VLAN. learn disable|enable Enables or disables source MAC address learning on this VLAN. dis Disables this VLAN without removing it from the configuration. Any port which is removed from a VLAN and which is not a member of any other VLAN is automatically added to default VLAN #1. it defines ports between 1-28 for VLAN 1. del Deletes this VLAN. you cannot add a port to more than one VLAN unless the port has VLAN tagging turned on (see the tag command on page 270).Alteon OS 22. 298 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J.

see page 304.2 Command Reference /cfg/l3 Layer 3 Configuration Menu [Layer 3 Menu] if gw route arp frwd nwf rmap rip1 ospf bgp port dns bootp vrrp rtrid metrc cur Interface Menu Default Gateway Menu Static Route Menu ARP Menu Forwarding Menu Network Filters Menu Route Map Menu Routing Information Protocol Menu Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) Menu Border Gateway Protocol Menu IP Port Menu Domain Name System Menu Bootstrap Protocol Relay Menu Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol Menu Set router ID Set default gateway metric Display current IP configuration Table 6-53 Layer 3 Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3) Command Syntax and Usage if <interface number (1-256)> Displays the IP Interface Menu. frwd Displays the IP Forwarding Menu. see page 301.Alteon OS 22.0. see page 304. rip1 Displays the Routing Interface Protocol Menu. see page 302. To view menu options. see page 306. gw <default gateway number (1-259)> Displays the IP Default Gateway Menu. To view menu options. arp Displays Address Resolution Protocol menu. route Displays the IP Static Route Menu. To view menu options see page 308. To view menu options see page 309. To view menu options. To view menu options. rmap <route map number (1-32)> Displays the Route Map Menu. see page 313. nwf <Network filter number (1-256)> Displays the Network Filter Configuration Menu. To view menu options. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 299 . To view menu options. 315393-J.

dns Displays the IP Domain Name System Menu. see page 331. vrrp Displays Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol Menu. January 2005 . rtrid <IP address (such as.17. see page 347.101)> Defines the router ID. To view menu options. To view menu options.0. see page 324. To view menu options. bootp Displays the Bootstrap Protocol Menu.4. cur Displays the current IP configuration. see page 333. 192.Alteon OS 22. metrc strict|roundrobin Sets the default gateway metric for strict or roundrobin. see page 315. To view menu options. port <port number> Displays the IP Port Menu. For more information on gateway metrics.2 Command Reference Table 6-53 Layer 3 Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3) Command Syntax and Usage ospf Displays the OSPF Menu. see page 330. bgp Displays the Border Gateway Protocol Menu. 300 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J. To view menu options. The default gateway metric is strict. see page 332. To view menu options.

0)> Configures the IP subnet address mask for the interface using dotted decimal notation. It is enabled by default. del Removes this IP interface.4.17. Each IP interface represents the Alteon Application Switch on an IP subnet on your network.101)> Configures the IP address of the switch interface using dotted decimal notation. The Interface option is disabled by default. cur Displays the current interface settings. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 301 . vlan <VLAN number (1-4090)> Configures the VLAN number for this interface. mask <IP subnet mask (such as 255. Table 6-54 IP Interface Menu Options (/cfg/l3/if) Command Syntax and Usage addr <IP address (such as 192.Alteon OS 22.255.255. 315393-J. Each interface can belong to one VLAN. dis Disables this IP interface. relay disable|enable Enables or disables the BOOTP relay on this interface.0.2 Command Reference /cfg/l3/if <interface number> IP Interface Configuration [IP Interface addr mask vlan relay ena dis del cur 1 Menu] Set IP address Set subnet mask Set VLAN number Enable/disable BOOTP relay Enable IP interface Disable IP interface Delete IP interface Display current interface configuration The Alteon Application Switch can be configured with up to 256 IP interfaces. ena Enables this IP interface. though any VLAN can have multiple IP interfaces in it.

Alteon OS 22.44)> Configures the IP address of the default IP gateway using dotted decimal notation. Gateways one to four are reserved for default gateway load balancing. The default is 8 attempts. The range is from 1 to 120 seconds. vlan <VLAN number (1-4090)> Sets the VLAN to be assigned to this default IP gateway. The default is 2 seconds.Set priority of default gateway route arp .Set interval between ping attempts retry . 192. intr <0-60 seconds> The switch pings the default gateway to verify that it’s up. Table 6-55 Default Gateway Options (/cfg/l3/gw) Command Syntax and Usage addr <default gateway address (such as. retry <number of attempts (1-120)> Sets the number of failed health check attempts required before declaring this default gateway inoperative.Set IP address intr .Enable/disable ARP only health checks ena . This option is disabled by default.Disable default gateway del .Enable default gateway dis .4.17.0.Set number of failed attempts to declare gateway DOWN vlan . Gateways five to 259 are used for load-balancing of VLAN-based gateways.Set VLAN number prio . 302 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J. January 2005 .2 Command Reference /cfg/l3/gw <gateway number> Default IP Gateway Configuration [Default gateway 1 Menu] addr .Delete default gateway cur .Display current default gateway configuration NOTE – The switch can be configured with up to 255 gateways. The range is from 1 to 120 attempts. The intr option sets the time between health checks.

then the default gateway route will always be preferred over learned default routes (such as from OSPF.0. Default Gateway Metrics For information about configuring which gateway is selected when multiple default gateways are enabled. 315393-J. relative to learned default routes. or RIP protocols). cur Displays the current gateway settings. arp disable|enable Enables or disables Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) health checks. BGP. see page 347. ena Enables the gateway for use. If you set the priority to high. NOTE – By default learned default route has higher priority than the configured default gateway route. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 303 . If you set the priority to low. This command is disabled by default. dis Disables the gateway.Alteon OS 22. then learned default routes will always be preferred over the default gateway route. del Deletes the gateway from the configuration.2 Command Reference Table 6-55 Default Gateway Options (/cfg/l3/gw) Command Syntax and Usage prio <high|low> Allows you to change the priority of the default gateway route to either high or low.

ARP queries machines on the local network for their physical addresses. /cfg/l3/arp ARP Configuration Menu Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) is the TCP/IP protocol that resides within the Internet layer.2 Command Reference /cfg/l3/route IP Static Route Configuration [IP Static Route Menu] add . rem <destination> <mask> Removes a static route. [ARP Menu] static rearp cur . ARP resolves a physical address from an IP address. Then the corresponding physical address is used to send a packet.Remove static route cur . The destination address of the route to remove must be specified using dotted decimal notation.0.Static ARP Menu . Table 6-56 IP Static Route Configuration Menu Options (cfg/l3/route) Command Syntax and Usage add <destination> <mask> <gateway> <interface number> Adds a static route.0.Display current static routes Up to 128 static routes can be configured. ARP also maintains IP to physical address pairs in its cache memory.Alteon OS 22. where any packet routed to this destination will be dropped. destination subnet mask. the ARP cache is consulted to see if the IP address of the computer or the router is present in the ARP cache. and gateway address.0. cur Displays the current IP static routes. January 2005 . Enter all addresses using dotted decimal notation.0. You will be prompted to enter a destination IP address.Set re-ARP period in minutes . the route becomes a black hole route. If a gateway address is 0. In any IP communication..Display current ARP configuration 304 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J.Add static route rem .

cur Displays current static ARP configuration. /cfg/l3/arp/static ARP Static Configuration Menu Static ARP entries are permanent in the ARP cache and do not age out like the ARP entries that are learnt dynamically. Static ARP entries enable the switch to reach the hosts without sending an ARP broadcast request to the network.0. To view options. cur Displays the current ARP configurations.4.17. [Static ARP Menu] add . NOTE – Alteon OS 21. del <IP address (such as. rearp <2-120 minutes> Defines re-ARP period in minutes. see page 305. 192. Alteon OS 20. 315393-J.101)> Deletes a permanent ARP entry. Static ARPs can also be configured on some gateways as a protection against malicious ARP Cache corruption and possible DOS attacks.Delete an ARP entry cur .Alteon OS 22.2 Command Reference Table 6-57 ARP Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/arp) Command Syntax and Usage static Displays Static ARP menu.x and below allow the user to configure the ARP information but that information cannot be retained over a switch reboot.Display current static ARP configuration Table 6-58 ARP Static Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/arp/static) Command Syntax and Usage add <IP address> <MAC address> <VLAN number> <port number> Adds a permanent ARP entry.Add a permanent ARP entry del .0 and above allows the static ARP configuration to be retained over reboots. You can set this duration between two and 120 minutes. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 305 . Static ARPs are also useful to communicate with devices that do not respond to ARP requests.

[IP Local Networks Menu] add .Display current IP Forwarding configuration Table 6-59 IP Forwarding Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/frwd) Command Syntax and Usage local Displays the menu used to define local network for route caching. see page 306.Remove local network definition cur . To view menu options. Forwarding is turned off by default. off Disables IP forwarding (routing) on the Alteon Application Switch.Globally turn IP Forwarding ON off .Add local network definition rem .Globally turn IP Forwarding OFF cur . and to remove local networks. cur Displays the current IP forwarding settings.2 Command Reference /cfg/l3/frwd IP Forwarding Configuration Menu [IP Forwarding Menu] local . /cfg/l3/frwd/local Local Network Route Caching Definition This menu is used for adding local networks by setting the local network address and netmask for the route cache.Alteon OS 22.Enable or disable forwarding directed broadcasts on . This command is disabled by default.0. January 2005 .Display current local network definitions 306 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J. Up to five local networks (lnets) can be configured. dirbr disable|enable Enables or disables forwarding directed broadcasts. on Enables IP forwarding (routing) on the Alteon Application Switch.Local network definition for route caching menu dirbr .

0 128. and the local network mask is the mask which is applied to produce the range.0.0.255.0. the local network address and mask are both set to 0. To limit the route cache to your local hosts.0 205.255 205.255.255.0 255.0.0.255. Defining IP Address Ranges for the Local Route Cache The Local Route Cache lets you use switch resources more efficiently.0.32.0.0 .127.0.0.0.0.0.255 Address 0.255. the destination address is masked (bitwise and) with the local network mask and checked against the local network address. By default.0. by reducing the size of the ARP table on the Alteon Application Switch. see “Defining IP Address Ranges for the Local Route Cache” on page 307. 315393-J.0. To determine if a route should be added to the memory cache.0. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 307 .255.0 .0 .0.Alteon OS 22. you could configure the parameters as shown in the examples in the following table.255 128.255.32. cur Displays the current local network definitions.2 Command Reference Table 2 IP Local Networks Menu Options (/cfg/l3/frwd/local) Command Syntax and Usage add <local network address> <local network mask> Adds a definition for a local network.255.32.0.0 through 255.0. The local network address is used to define the base IP address in the range which will be cached. For details.0 Mask 128.0. Table 6-60 Local Routing Cache Address Ranges Local Host Address Range 0. Addresses to be cached are subnets that are directly connected and for which there is an interface configured on the Alteon Application Switch.0.0.0 NOTE – All addresses that fall outside the defined range are forwarded to the default gateway. rem <local network address> <local network mask> Removes a definition for a local network.255. This produces a range that includes all Internet addresses for route caching: 0.255.205.0 128. The /cfg/l3/frwd/local/add parameters define a range of addresses that will be cached on the Alteon Application Switch. The default gateways must be within range.

assign the network filter to a route map.IP Subnet mask enable .Alteon OS 22. mask <subnet mask (such as. cur Displays the current the Network Filter configuration.2 Command Reference /cfg/l3/nwf Network Filter Configuration [IP Network Filter 1 Menu] addr .0. The default value is 0.4.0. then assign the route map to the peer. 308 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J. disable Disables the Network Filter configuration.Delete Network Filter cur .IP Address mask . 192.0.17. enable Enables the Network Filter configuration.Display current Network Filter configuration Table 6-61 IP Network Filter Menu Options (/cfg/l3/nwf) Command Syntax and Usage addr <IP address (such as. January 2005 .0.0)> Sets the IP subnet mask that is used with /cfg/l3/nwf/addr to define the range of IP addresses that will be accepted by the peer when the filter is enabled.Enable Network Filter disable . 255. delete Deletes the Network Filter configuration.Disable Network Filter delete .0.255. The default address is 0. For Border Gateway Protocol (BGP).255.44)> Sets the starting IP address for this filter.0.0.

315393-J. The path with the higher preference is preferred.Alteon OS 22. ap <AS number> [<AS number>] [<AS number>]|none Sets the AS path preference of the matched route. metric <(value 0-4294967294)>|none Sets the metric of the matched route. which affects both inbound and outbound directions. aspath <number (1-8)> Displays the Autonomous System (AS) Filter menu.0. lp <(value 0-4294967294)>|none Sets the local preference of the matched route. One to three path preferences can be configured. see page 312. see page 311. NOTE – The map number (1-32) represents the routing map you wish to configure. For more information. For more information.2 Command Reference /cfg/l3/rmap <route map number> Route Map Configuration Menu Route maps control and modify routing information. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 309 . [IP Route Map alist aspath ap lp metric type prec weight enable disable delete cur 1 - Menu] Access List number AS Filter Menu Set as-path prepend of the matched route Set local-preference of the matched route Set metric of the matched route Set OSPF metric-type of the matched route Set the precedence of this route map Set weight of the matched route Enable route map Disable route map Delete route map Display current route map configuration Table 6-62 Routing Map Menu Options (/cfg/l3/rmap) Command Syntax and Usage alist <number (1-8)> Displays the Access List menu.

enable Enables the route map. cur Displays the current route configuration.0.2 Command Reference Table 6-62 Routing Map Menu Options (/cfg/l3/rmap) (Continued) Command Syntax and Usage type <value (1|2)>|none Assigns the type of OSPF metric. January 2005 . Type 1—External routes are calculated using both internal and external metrics. The default is type 1. delete Deletes the route map. disable Disables the route map. 310 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J.Alteon OS 22. the higher the precedence. weight <value (0-65534)>|none Sets the weight of the route map. Type 2—External routes are calculated using only the external metrics. Type 2 routes have more cost than Type 2. The smaller the value. prec <value (1-255)> Sets the precedence of the route map. Default value is 10. none—Removes the OSPF metric.

315393-J. action permit|deny or p|d Permits or denies action for the access list. disable Disables the access list. See “/cfg/l3/nwf” on page 308 for details. cur Displays the current Access List configuration.2 Command Reference /cfg/l3/rmap <route map number/alist <access list number> IP Access List Configuration Menu NOTE – The route map number (1-32) and the access list number (1-8) represent the IP access list you wish to configure.Alteon OS 22. delete Deletes the access list. [IP Access List nwf metric action enable disable delete cur - 1 Menu] Network Filter number Metric Set Network Filter action Enable Access List Disable Access List Delete Access List Display current Access List configuration Table 6-63 IP Access List Menu Options (/cfg/l3/rmap/alist) Command Syntax and Usage nwf <network filter number (1-256)> Sets the network filter number.0. enable Enables the access list. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 311 . metric <(1-4294967294)>|none Sets the metric value in the AS-External (ASE) LSA.

Alteon OS 22.2 Command Reference /cfg/l3/rmap <route map number> aspath <autonomous system path> Autonomous System Filter Path NOTE – The rmap number (1-32) and the path number (1-8) represent the AS path you wish to configure. enable Enables the Autonomous System filter. action permit|deny or p|d Permits or denies Autonomous System filter action. disable Disables the Autonomous System filter. 312 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J.Enable AS Filter disable .Disable AS Filter delete . delete Deletes the Autonomous System filter.Display current AS Filter configuration Table 6-64 AS Filter Menu Options (/cfg/l3/rmap/aspath) Command Syntax and Usage as <AS number (1-65535)> Sets the Autonomous System filter’s path number.Delete AS Filter cur . January 2005 .0.AS number action . [AS Filter 1 Menu] as .Set AS Filter action enable . cur Displays the current Autonomous System filter configuration.

This update contains known networks and the distances (hop count) associated with each one. RIP sends routing information updates every 30 seconds.Enable/disable vip advertisement on .Enable/disable supplying static routes poisn . The distance or hop count is used as the metric to determine the best path to a remote network or host where the hop count does not exceed 15 hops assuming a cost of one for each network. mask information is sent. version 1 (RIP1) parameters.Enable/disable listening to route updates deflt .Enable/disable poisoned reverse vip .0.2 Command Reference /cfg/l3/rip1 Routing Information Protocol Configuration The Routing Information Protocol (RIP) is an interior gateway protocol (IGP). RIP uses broadcast User Datagram protocol (UDP) data packets to exchange routing information. it is removed from the routing table. the metric associated with the network is raised to infinity (U) – the metric is set for 16. the natural mask is always applied by the router receiving the update.Globally turn RIP OFF cur .Set update period in seconds spply . If information about a network is not received for 180 seconds (six update intervals). The RIP1 Menu is used for configuring Routing Information Protocol.Alteon OS 22.Globally turn RIP ON off .Enable/disable listening to default routes statc . January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 313 . which means the network has become unreachable. no mask information is exchanged. [Routing Information Protocol Menu] updat . 315393-J.Display current RIP configuration NOTE – Do not configure RIP1 parameters if your routing equipment uses RIP version 2. RIP is one of a class of algorithms known as distance vector algorithms. This option is turned off by default.Enable/disable supplying route updates lsten . For RIP2. For RIP1. If information about a network is not received for 90 seconds.

If we disable all the real servers using operation command. the switch supplies static routes. and the switch will continue to advertise the route. When enabled. If a VIP route exists in a routing table. the switch rejects RIP default routes.0. 314 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J. statc disable|enable This command is disabled by default. the switch accepts RIP default routes from other routers. Note: If all real servers behind a VIP go down. on Globally turns RIP ON. the switch uses split horizon with poisoned reverse. spply disable|enable Enables or disables supplying route updates. When enabled. When enabled. off Globally turns RIP OFF. the switch supplies routes to other routers. the switch uses only split horizon. This command is disabled by default. This command is disabled by default. lsten disable|enable When enabled. the route gets removed from the routing table. the switch learns routes from other routers. When disabled. deflt disable|enable When enabled. This command is disabled by default. the VIP route does not get eliminated from the routing table.Alteon OS 22. and will not be advertised.2 Command Reference Table 6-65 Routing Information Protocol Menu (/cfg/l3/rip1) Command Syntax and Usage updat <update period (1-120 seconds)> Sets the RIP update period in seconds. When disabled. poisn disable|enable This command is disabled by default. cur Displays the current RIP configuration. it will always be advertised except when it is included in another network route that is already being advertised. January 2005 . but gives them lower priority than configured gateways. vip disable|enable Enables or disables the advertisement of virtual IP addresses as Host Routes. It is set at 30 seconds by default.

OSPF Area (index) Menu range . refer to your Alteon OS Application Guide. 315393-J.OSPF Host Entry Menu redist . The AS can be divided into smaller logical units known as areas. See page 318 to view menu options. See page 317 to view menu options.Set the LSDB limit for external LSA default .Export default route information on . January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315 .Display current OSPF configuration Table 6-66 OSPF Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/ospf) Command Syntax and Usage aindex <area index (0-2)> Displays the area index menu. known as the backbone.Globally turn OSPF ON off .OSPF Interface Menu virt . one area must be designated as area 0. This area index does not represent the actual OSPF area number. range <range number (1-16)> Displays summary routes menu for up to 16 IP addresses. which then distributes it to other areas as needed. For more information on how to configure OSPF on the switch. OSPF is designed for routing traffic within a single IP domain called an Autonomous System (AS). [Open Shortest Path First Menu] aindex . In any AS with multiple areas. The Alteon OS implementation conforms to the OSPF version 2 specifications detailed in Internet RFC 1583.OSPF Summary Range Menu if . The backbone acts as the central OSPF area.OSPF MD5 Key Menu host . All other areas in the AS must be connected to the backbone.0. See page 319 to view menu options.OSPF Virtual Links Menu md5key .Globally turn OSPF OFF cur . if <interface number (1-256)> Displays the OSPF interface configuration menu.2 Command Reference /cfg/l3/ospf Open Shortest Path First Configuration Alteon OS supports the Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) routing protocol.OSPF Route Redistribute Menu lsdb . Areas inject summary routing information into the backbone. See page 321 to view menu options.Alteon OS 22. virt <virtual link (1-3)> Displays the Virtual Links menu used to configure OSPF for a Virtual Link.

See host <host entry number (1-128)> Displays the menu for configuring OSPF for the host routes. default <metric (1-16777215)> <metric-type 1|2>|none Sets one default route among multiple choices in an area. redist <fixed|static|rip|ebgp|ibgp> Displays Route Distribution Menu See page 323 to view menu options. It also makes Area Border Route (ABR) load sharing and ABR failover possible.2 Command Reference Table 6-66 OSPF Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/ospf) Command Syntax and Usage md5key <key ID (1-255)> Assigns a string to MD5 authentication key. January 2005 . on Enables OSPF on the Alteon Application Switch. Host routes are used for advertising network device IP addresses to external networks to perform server load balancing within OSPF. Up to 128 host routes can be configured. See page 322 to view menu options. 0 for no limit)> Sets the link state database limit.0. cur Displays the current OSPF configuration settings. off Disables OSPF on the Alteon Application Switch. 316 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J. Use none for no default.Alteon OS 22. lsdb <LSDB limit (0-2000.

Set area ID type .Enable area disable . 315393-J. auth none|password|md5 None: No authentication required. MD5: This parameter is used when MD5 cryptographic authentication is required. Password: Authenticates simple passwords so that only trusted routing devices can participate. the area type must be defined as transit.Disable area delete .101)> Defines the IP address of the OSPF area number. metric <metric value (1-65535)> Configures a stub area to send a numeric metric value.Alteon OS 22. External routes from outside the Autonomous System (AS) can be advertised within the NSSA but are not distributed into other areas.4.0. For example. Transit area: allows area summary information to be exchanged between routing devices. Metric type determines the method for influencing routing decisions for external routes. Typically. For example. routes originating from within the NSSA can be propagated to adjacent transit and backbone areas. NSSA: Not-So-Stubby Area (NSSA) is similar to stub area with additional capabilities.Set authentication type spf . a stub area is connected to only one other area. Any area that is not a stub area or NSSA is considered to be transit area.17.Display current OSPF area configuration Table 6-67 Area Index Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/ospf/aindex) Command Syntax and Usage areaid <IP address (such as.Set time interval between two SPF calculations enable .Set stub area metric auth . January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 317 . Stub area: is an area where external routing information is not distributed.Set area type metric . when a virtual link has to be established with the backbone. Metric value assigns the priority for choosing the switch for default route. 192.Delete area cur . type transit|stub|nssa Defines the type of area.2 Command Reference /cfg/l3/ospf/aindex Area Index Configuration Menu [OSPF Area (index) 1 Menu] areaid . All routes received via that stub area carry the configured metric to potentially influencing routing decisions.

Enable range .101> Displays the IP address mask for the range.101)> Displays the base IP address for the range. 192. aindex <area index [0-2]> Displays the area index used by the Alteon Application Switch. /cfg/l3/ospf/range OSPF Summary Range Configuration Menu [OSPF Summary addr mask aindex hide enable disable delete cur Range 1 Menu] .Enable/disable hide range .Alteon OS 22. disable Disables the OSPF area.17.Display current OSPF summary range configuration Table 6-68 OSPF Summary Range Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/ospf/range) Command Syntax and Usage addr <IP Address (such as.2 Command Reference Table 6-67 Area Index Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/ospf/aindex) Command Syntax and Usage spf <interval (0-255)> Sets time interval between two successive SPF (shortest path first) calculations of the shortest path tree using the Dijkstra’s algorithm. delete Deletes the OSPF area. enable Enables the OSPF area.4.Set area index . cur Displays the current OSPF configuration. 192.Set IP address .Disable range .4.Set IP mask . 318 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J.0. January 2005 . mask <IP address (such as.17.Delete range .

2 Command Reference Table 6-68 OSPF Summary Range Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/ospf/range) Command Syntax and Usage hide disable|enable Hides the OSPF summary range. /cfg/l3/ospf/if OSPF Interface Configuration Menu [OSPF Interface aindex prio cost hello dead trans retra key mdkey enable disable delete cur 1 Menu] Set area index Set interface router priority Set interface cost Set hello interval in seconds Set dead interval in seconds Set transit delay in seconds Set retransmit interval in seconds Set authentication key Set MD5 key ID Enable interface Disable interface Delete interface Display current OSPF interface configuration 315393-J. disable Disables the OSPF summary range. delete Deletes the OSPF summary range. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 319 . cur Displays the current OSPF summary range.0.Alteon OS 22. enable Enables the OSPF summary range.

disable Disables OSPF interface.) cost <cost value (1-65535)> Displays cost set for the selected path—preferred or backup. delete Deletes OSPF interface. which is set for an interval of seconds before declaring a silent router to be down. mdkey <key ID (1-255)>|none Assigns an MD5 key to the interface. Low cost indicates high bandwidth. prio <priority value (0-255)> Displays the assigned priority value to the Alteon Application Switch’s OSPF interfaces. retra <value (0-3600)> Displays the retransmit interval in seconds. Usually the cost is inversely proportional to the bandwidth of the interface. trans <value (0-3600)> Displays the transit delay in seconds. A priority value of 0 specifies that the interface cannot be used as Designated Router (DR) or Backup Designated Router (BDR).0. 320 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J. dead <value (1-65535)> Displays the health parameters of a hello packet. (A priority value of 127 is the highest and 1 is the lowest.2 Command Reference Table 6-69 OSPF Interface Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/ospf/if) Command Syntax and Usage aindex <area index (0-2)> Displays the OSPF area index. enable Enables OSPF interface. January 2005 .Alteon OS 22. cur Displays the current settings for OSPF interface. key <key>|none Sets the authentication key to clear the password. hello <value (1-65535)> Displays the interval in seconds between the hello packets for the interfaces.

Disable interface . January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 321 . nbr <nbr router ID (IP address)> Displays the router ID of the virtual neighbor. mdkey <key ID (1-255)>|none Sets MD5 key ID for each virtual link.Set dead interval in seconds .Set authentication key . trans <value (1-3600)> Displays the delay in transit in seconds.Set retransmit interval in seconds . key <key>|none Displays the password (up to eight characters) for each virtual link. which is set to be in an interval of seconds. retra <value (1-3600)> Displays the retransmit interval in seconds. Default is 40 seconds.0.0. Default is five seconds. which is set to be in an interval of seconds.0.Display current OSPF interface configuration Table 6-70 OSPF Virtual Link Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/ospf/virt) Command Syntax and Usage aindex <area index (0-2)> Displays the OSPF area index.Set hello interval in seconds .Set MD5 key ID .Alteon OS 22.Enable interface . dead <value (1-65535)> Displays the health parameters of a hello packet. Default is none.2 Command Reference /cfg/l3/ospf/virt OSPF Virtual Link Configuration Menu [OSPF Virtual aindex hello dead trans retra nbr key mdkey enable disable delete cur Link 1 Menu] .Delete interface .Set area index . Default is one seconds. Default is none.0.Set transit delay in seconds . 315393-J. hello <value (1-65535)> Displays the authentication parameters of a hello packet. Default is 0.Set router ID of virtual neighbor .

/cfg/l3/ospf/host OSPF Host Entry Configuration Menu [OSPF Host Entry 1 Menu] addr .Delete host entry cur .Disable host entry delete .0. 192.17. disable Disables OSPF virtual link. aindex <area index [0-2]> Displays the area index of the host.Set area index cost .4.101)> Displays the base IP address for the host entry. delete Deletes OSPF virtual link.Alteon OS 22. disable Disables OSPF host entry.Display current OSPF host entry configuration Table 6-71 OSPF Host Entry Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/ospf/host) Command Syntax and Usage addr <IP address (such as.Set host entry IP address aindex .Set cost of this host entry enable . 322 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J. cost <cost value [1-65535]> Displays the cost value of the host. cur Displays the current OSPF virtual link settings.2 Command Reference Table 6-70 OSPF Virtual Link Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/ospf/virt) Command Syntax and Usage enable Enables OSPF virtual link. enable Enables OSPF host entry. January 2005 .Enable host entry disable .

To remove a previous configuration and stop exporting the routes of the protocol. |all Removes the route map from the route redistribution list. [OSPF Redistribute Fixed Menu] add . 315393-J. To remove all 32 route maps. rem (<route map (1-32)> <route map (1-32)>) .Display current route-maps added Table 6-72 OSPF Route Redistribution Menu Options (/cfg/l3/ospf/redist) Command Syntax and Usage add (<route map (1-32)> <route map (1-32)>)|all Adds selected routing maps to the rmap list. Removes routing maps from the rmap list. enter all. /cfg/l3/ospf/redist <fixed|static|rip|ebgp|ibgp> OSPF Route Redistribution Configuration Menu.0.. NULL at the end.Export all routes of this protocol cur . To remove specific route maps. enter routing map numbers one per line. enter none. This option adds a route map to the route redistribution list.Remove rmap from route redistribution list export .To add all the 32 route maps. cur Displays the current route map settings..2 Command Reference Table 6-71 OSPF Host Entry Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/ospf/host) Command Syntax and Usage delete Deletes OSPF host entry. cur Displays the current OSPF host entries.Add rmap into route redistribution list rem . enter routing map numbers one per line. The routes of the redistribution protocol matched by the route maps in the route redistribution list will be redistributed. export <metric (1-16777215)><metric type (1|2)> |none Exports the routes of this protocol as external OSPF AS-external LSAs in which the metric and metric type are specified.Alteon OS 22. To add specific route maps. enter all. NULL at end. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 323 .

it is called external BGP (eBGP).0. You can configure BGP either within an autonomous system or between different autonomous systems. BGP is defined in RFC 1771. When run within an autonomous system. fixed routes and virtual server IP addresses with other internal and external routers. January 2005 . BGP is turned off by default. rather than simply setting a default route from your border router(s) to your upstream provider(s). /cfg/l3/bgp Border Gateway Protocol Configuration Border Gateway Protocol (BGP) is an Internet protocol that enables routers on a network to share routing information with each other and advertise information about the segments of the IP address space they can access within their network with routers on external networks. When run between different autonomous systems.Alteon OS 22. delete Deletes the authentication key for this OSPF packet. BGP allows you to decide what is the “best” route for a packet to take from your network to a destination on another network. The BGP Menu enables you to configure the switch to receive routes and to advertise static routes.2 Command Reference /cfg/l3/ospf/md5key OSPF MD5 Key Configuration Menu [OSPF MD5 Key key delete cur 1 Menu] Set authentication key Delete key Display current MD5 key configuration Table 6-73 OSPF MD5 Key Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/ospf/md5key) Command Syntax and Usage key <key. up to 16 chars> Sets the authentication key up to 16 characters for this OSPF packet. cur Displays the current MD5 key configuration. it is called internal BGP (iBGP). 324 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J.

To view menu options.0. The path with the higher value is preferred. To view menu options. An autonomous system (AS) is the unit of router policy. 315393-J. pref <preference (0-4294967294)> Sets the local preference. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 325 . a business enterprise.Alteon OS 22. on Globally turns BGP on. or a business division). within an autonomous system.2 Command Reference [Border Gateway peer aggr as pref on off cur - Protocol Menu] Peer menu Aggregation menu Set Autonomous System (AS) number Set Local Preference Globally turn BGP ON Globally turn BGP OFF Display current BGP configuration NOTE – Fixed routes are subnet routes. either a single network or a group of networks that is controlled by a common network administrator on behalf of an administrative entity (such as a university. see page 326. exchanges routing information with routers on other external networks. When multiple peers advertise the same route. use the route with the shortest AS path as the preferred route if you are using eBGP. Table 6-74 Border Gateway Protocol Menu (/cfg/l3/bgp) Command Syntax and Usage peer <peer number (1-16)> Displays the menu used to configure each BGP peer. as <autonomous system number (1-65535)> Sets Autonomous System Number for this autonomous system. Each border router. see page 329. aggr <aggregate number (1-16)> Displays the Aggregation Menu. An autonomous system shares routing information with other autonomous systems using the Border Gateway Protocol (BGP). An autonomous system is assigned a globally unique number called an Autonomous System Number (ASN). There is one fixed route per IP interface. or use the local preference if you are using iBGP.

addr <IP address (such as. 326 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J.Remove rmap from out-rmap list enable .Alteon OS 22.Set time-to-live of IP datagrams addi .Enable peer disable . The default address is 0.2 Command Reference Table 6-74 Border Gateway Protocol Menu (/cfg/l3/bgp) Command Syntax and Usage off Globally turns BGP off.17. Table 6-75 BGP Peer Configuration Options (/cfg/l3/bgp/peer) Command Syntax and Usage redist Displays BGP Redistribution Menu. 192.Set remote IP address ras .Set connect retry interval orig . using dotted decimal notation. see page 328.Set min time between route originations ttl .101)> Defines the IP address for the specified peer (border router). which are border routers that exchange routing information with routers on internal and external networks. cur Displays the current BGP configuration.4.Redistribution menu addr .0.Disable peer delete . /cfg/l3/bgp/peer <peer number> BGP Peer Configuration Menu [BGP Peer 1 Menu] redist . To view the menu options.0.Add rmap into in-rmap list addo .0.Set min time between advertisements retry .Display current peer configuration This menu is used to configure BGP peers. January 2005 . The peer option is disabled by default.Set keep alive time advert .Set remote autonomous system number hold .Delete peer cur .0.Add rmap into out-rmap list remi .Set hold time alive .Remove rmap from in-rmap list remo .

in seconds. remi <route map ID (1-32)> Removes route map from in-route map list. It is also used to support multi-hops. that will elapse before the peer session is torn down because the switch hasn’t received a “keep alive” message from the peer. which allow BGP peers to talk across a routed network. This value is used to restrict the number of “hops” the advertisement makes.2 Command Reference Table 6-75 BGP Peer Configuration Options (/cfg/l3/bgp/peer) Command Syntax and Usage ras <AS number (0-65535)> Sets the remote autonomous system number for the specified peer. retry <connect retry interval (1-65535)> Sets connection retry interval in seconds. 3-65535)> Sets the period of time. advert <min adv time (1-65535)> Sets time in seconds between advertisements. addo <route map ID (1-32)> Adds route map into out-route map list. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 327 . hold <hold time (0. when exhausted. TTL specifies a certain time span in seconds that. The default number is set at 1. orig <min orig time (1-65535)> Sets the minimum time between route originations in seconds. It is set at 90 seconds by default.0. 1-21845)> Sets the keep-alive time for the specified peer in seconds. The TTL is determined by the number of router hops the packet is allowed before it must be discarded. remo <route map ID (1-32)> Removes route map from out-route map list.Alteon OS 22. ena Enables this peer configuration. alive <keepalive time (0. This command specifies the number of router hops that the IP packet can make. would cause the packet to be discarded. It is set at 0 by default. 315393-J. ttl <number of router hops (1-255)> Time-to-live (TTL) is a value in an IP packet that tells a network router whether or not the packet has been in the network too long and should be discarded. addi <route map ID (1-32)> Adds route map into in-route map list. dis Disables this peer configuration.

originate.2 Command Reference Table 6-75 BGP Peer Configuration Options (/cfg/l3/bgp/peer) Command Syntax and Usage del Deletes this peer configuration.0. Originate: The switch sends a default route to peers even though it does not have any default routes in its routing table. or none.Alteon OS 22. redistribute. 328 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J. January 2005 . you have to enable static routes since the routes from default gateway are static routes. default none|import|originate|redistribute Sets default route action. Similarly. /cfg/l3/bgp/peer/redist BGP Redistribution Configuration Menu [Redistribution metric default rip ospf fixed static vip cur Menu] Set default-metric of advertised routes Set default route action Enable/disable advertising RIP routes Enable/disable advertising OSPF routes Enable/disable advertising fixed routes Enable/disable advertising static routes Enable/disable advertising VIP routes Display current redistribution configuration Table 6-76 BGP Redistribution Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/bgp/peer/redist) Command Syntax and Usage metric <metric (1-4294967294)>|none Sets default metric of advertised routes. cur Displays the current BGP peer configuration. Redistribute: Default routes are either configured through default gateway or learned through other protocols and redistributed to peer. None: No routes are configured Import: Import these routes. If the routes are learned from default gateway configuration. if the routes are learned from a certain routing protocol. you have to enable that protocol in this redistribute submenu. Defaults routes can be configured as import.

such as 192.2 Command Reference Table 6-76 BGP Redistribution Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/bgp/peer/redist) Command Syntax and Usage rip disable|enable Enables or disables advertising RIP routes ospf disable|enable Enables or disables advertising OSPF routes.Set aggregation IP address mask .17. Table 6-77 BGP Aggregate Menu Options (/cfg/l3/ip/bgp/aggr) Command Syntax and Usage addr <IP address. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 329 . static disable|enable Enables or disables advertising static routes.0. /cfg/l3/bgp/aggr <aggregate number> BGP Aggregate Routing Configuration Menu NOTE – The aggregate number (1-16) represents the aggregation route you wish to configure.Delete aggregation current . vip disable|enable Enables or disables advertising VIP routes.Enable aggregation disable .Set aggregation network mask enable . 315393-J.Alteon OS 22. cur Displays the current redistribution configuration. [BGP Aggr 1 Menu] addr .Disable aggregation delete .Display current aggregation configuration This menu allows you to configure aggregate routing to condense the number of routes between internal and external peer routers. fixed disable|enable Enables or disables advertising fixed routes.101> Adds the IP address to the selected aggregate.4.

Display current port configuration The Layer 3 Port Menu allows you to turn IP forwarding on or off on a port-by-port basis. delete Deletes the selected aggregate.0> Sets the IP mask for the selected aggregate. /cfg/l3/port <port number> IP Forwarding Port Configuration Menu [IP Forwarding Port 1 Menu] on .255.Turn Forwarding ON off . off Disables IP forwarding for the current port.Alteon OS 22.0. 330 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J. Table 6-78 IP Forwarding Port Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/port) Command Syntax and Usage on Enables IP forwarding for the current port. cur Displays the current IP forwarding settings. January 2005 . disable Disables the selected aggregate.255. such as 255. By default. the port forwarding option is turned on. current Displays the current aggregate configuration.Turn Forwarding OFF cur .2 Command Reference Table 6-77 BGP Aggregate Menu Options (/cfg/l3/ip/bgp/aggr) (Continued) Command Syntax and Usage mask <IP subnet mask. enable Enables the selected aggregate.

315393-J. traceroute. For example: mycompany.101)> You will be prompted to set the IP address for your secondary DNS server.Alteon OS 22.Display current DNS configuration The Domain Name System (DNS) Menu is used for defining the primary and secondary DNS servers on your local network. dname <dotted DNS notation>|none Sets the default domain name used by the switch. Enter the IP address using dotted decimal notation. 192.0.17. If the primary DNS server fails.com cur Displays the current Domain Name System settings. secon <IP address (such as. Use dotted decimal notation.4.2 Command Reference /cfg/l3/dns Domain Name System Configuration Menu [Domain Name System Menu] prima . and for setting the default domain name served by the switch services. Table 6-79 Domain Name System Menu Options (/cfg/l3/dns) Command Syntax and Usage prima <IP address (such as.Set IP address of primary DNS server secon .101)> You will be prompted to set the IP address for your primary DNS server. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 331 .4. the configured secondary will be used instead.Set IP address of secondary DNS server dname .17.Set default domain name cur . and tftp commands. DNS parameters must be configured prior to using hostname parameters with the ping. 192.

332 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J. addr2 <IP address (such as. January 2005 . Table 6-80 Bootstrap Protocol Relay Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/bootp) Command Syntax and Usage addr <IP address (such as. BOOTP relay menu is turned off by default.2 Command Reference /cfg/l3/bootp Bootstrap Protocol Relay Configuration Menu [Bootstrap Protocol Relay Menu] addr .Alteon OS 22. cur Displays the current BOOTP relay configuration.Set IP address of BOOTP server addr2 .17.Display current BOOTP relay configuration The Bootstrap Protocol (BOOTP) Relay Menu is used to allow hosts to obtain their configurations from a Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) server.101)> Sets the IP address of the second BOOTP server.Globally turn BOOTP relay OFF cur . on Globally turns on BOOTP relay.17. 192.0.Set IP address of second BOOTP server on .4.Globally turn BOOTP relay ON off . The BOOTP configuration enables the switch to forward a client request for an IP address to two DHCP/BOOTP servers with IP addresses that have been configured on the Alteon Application Switch. 192.4.101)> Sets the IP address of the BOOTP server. off Globally turns off BOOTP relay.

see the “High Availability” chapter in your Alteon OS 22. If the master fails. Group options must be configured when using two or more Alteon switches in a hotstandby failover configuration where only one switch is active at any given time. see page 345.0. Alteon OS has extended VRRP to include virtual servers as well. One of the virtual routers is then elected as the master.0. Table 6-81 Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol Options (/cfg/l3/vrrp) Command Syntax and Usage vr <virtual router number (1-1024)> Displays the VRRP Virtual Router Menu.2 Command Reference /cfg/l3/vrrp VRRP Configuration Menu [Virtual Router vr vrgroup group if track hotstan on off holdoff cur Redundancy Protocol Menu] VRRP Virtual Router Menu VRRP Virtual Router Vrgroup Menu VRRP Virtual Router Group Menu VRRP Interface Menu VRRP Priority Tracking Menu Enable/disable hot-standby processing Globally turn VRRP ON Globally turn VRRP OFF Globally VRRP hold off time Display current VRRP configuration Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP) support on Alteon Application Switch provides redundancy between routers in a LAN. see page 341. By default. For more information on VRRP. and assumes control of the shared virtual router IP address. To view menu options. one of the backup virtual routers will assume routing authority and take control of the virtual router IP address. To view menu options. This is accomplished by configuring the same virtual router IP address and ID number on each participating VRRP-capable routing device. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 333 . see page 338. 315393-J. This menu is used for configuring up to 1024 virtual routers on this switch. To view menu options. group Displays the VRRP virtual router group menu. based on a number of priority criteria. To view menu options.2 Application Guide. see page 334.Alteon OS 22. allowing for full active/active redundancy between its Layer 4 switches. if <interface number (1-256)> Displays the VRRP Virtual Router Interface Menu. used to combine all virtual routers together as one logical entity. vrgroup <virtual router vrgroup number (1-16)> Displays VR Group Menu. VRRP is disabled.

a virtual router will be configured to share the same virtual router ID and IP address. 334 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J.Enable or disable sharing .Set IP address . hotstan disable|enable Enables or disables hot standby processing.Display current VRRP virtual router configuration This menu is used for configuring up to 256 virtual routers for this switch. By default.Set renter priority . in which two or more switches provide redundancy for each other. on Globally enables VRRP on this switch. this option is disabled.Delete virtual router .Set interface number . see page 346.Set advertisement interval .Disable virtual router . To view menu options.Priority Tracking Menu . off Globally disables VRRP on this switch.Enable virtual router . This menu is used for weighting the criteria used when modifying priority levels in the master router election process.Set virtual router ID .2 Command Reference Table 6-81 Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol Options (/cfg/l3/vrrp) Command Syntax and Usage track Displays the VRRP Tracking Menu.Alteon OS 22.Enable or disable preemption . holdoff <0-255 seconds> Globally suspends VRRP operation for the specified interval. On each VRRP-capable routing device participating in redundancy for this virtual router. A virtual router is defined by its virtual router ID and an IP address.0. January 2005 . cur Displays the current VRRP parameters. /cfg/l3/vrrp/vr <router number> Virtual Router Configuration Menu [VRRP Virtual track vrid addr if prio adver preem share ena dis del cur Router 1 Menu] .

This can be any integer between 1 and 255 seconds. even if it must preempt another virtual router which has assumed master routing authority. prio <priority (1-254)> Defines the election priority bias for this virtual server. All vrid values must be unique within the VLAN to which the virtual router’s IP interface belongs. this base priority value can be modified according to a number of performance and operational criteria. if <interface number (1-256)> Selects a switch IP interface (between 1 and 256). The default address is 0. the priority for this virtual router will automatically be set to 255 (highest). To view menu options.2 Command Reference Virtual routers are disabled by default. If this virtual router’s IP address (addr) is the same as the one used by the IP interface. each participating VRRP device must be configured with the same virtual router: one that shares the same vrid and addr combination.0. vrid <virtual router ID (1-1024)> Defines the virtual router ID.0. Tracking is Alteon’s proprietary extension to VRRP.17. addr <IP address (such as.101)> Defines the IP address for this virtual router using dotted decimal notation. The vrid of virtual server routers where the virtual router IP address is the same as the virtual server can be between 1 and 1024. This is used in conjunction with addr (below) to define a virtual router on this switch. The default value is 1.4. If there is a tie. used for modifying the standard priority system used for electing the master router. If the IP interface has the same IP address as the addr option above. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 335 . the routing device with the highest virtual router priority number wins. This can be any integer between 1 and 254. This preemption occurs even if the preem option below is disabled. This is used in conjunction with the vrid (above) to configure the same virtual router on each participating VRRP device. the device with the highest IP interface address wins. The default value is 1. adver <seconds (1-255)> Defines the time interval between VRRP master advertisements. see page 336.0. Table 6-82 VRRP Virtual Router Options (/cfg/l3/vrrp/vr) Command Syntax and Usage track Displays the VRRP Priority Tracking Menu for this virtual router. 192. During the master router election process. An owner has a special priority of 255 (highest) and will always assume the role of master router.0. 315393-J. The default value is 100. Tracking is not needed if sharing (share) is enabled. The default value is 1. this switch is considered the “owner” of the defined virtual router. To create a pool of VRRP-enabled routing devices which can provide redundancy to each other. When priority tracking is used (/cfg/l3/vrrp/track or /cfg/l3/vrrp/vr #/track). The vrid for standard virtual routers (where the virtual router IP address is not the same as any virtual server) can be any integer between 1 and 255.Alteon OS 22.

Alteon OS 22. if this virtual router is in backup mode but has a higher priority than the current master.Enable/disable tracking other interfaces . this switch will process any traffic addressed to this virtual router. By default.Display current VRRP virtual router configuration This menu is used for modifying the priority system used when electing the master router from a pool of virtual routers.Enable/disable tracking VLAN switch ports . dis Disables this virtual router. When enabled. January 2005 . cur Displays the current configuration information for this virtual router. share disable|enable Enables or disables virtual router sharing.Enable/disable tracking HSRP by VLAN .Enable/disable tracking L4 switch ports . When enabled.Enable/disable tracking HSRP . the priority level for the virtual router is increased by an amount defined through the VRRP Tracking Menu (see page 346).Enable/disable tracking master virtual routers . By default. ena Enables this virtual router.0. this virtual router will preempt the lower priority master and assume control. del Deletes this virtual router from the switch configuration. this virtual router will always preempt any other master if this switch is the owner (the IP interface address and virtual router addr are the same). this option is enabled. Each time one of the tracking criteria is met.2 Command Reference Table 6-82 VRRP Virtual Router Options (/cfg/l3/vrrp/vr) Command Syntax and Usage preem disable|enable Enables or disables master preemption. Various tracking criteria can be used to bias the election results. Note that even when preem is disabled. this option is enabled. an Alteon proprietary extension to VRRP. even when in backup mode. 336 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J.Enable/disable tracking L4 real servers . /cfg/l3/vrrp/vr <router number>/track Virtual Router Priority Tracking Configuration [VRRP Virtual vrs ifs ports l4pts reals hsrp hsrv cur Router 1 Priority Tracking Menu] .

the priority for this virtual router will be increased for each physical switch port which has active Layer 4 processing on this switch.” which perform Layer 4 Server Load Balancing functions. increasing routing and load balancing efficiency.2 Command Reference Criteria are tracked dynamically. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 337 . ifs. the priority for this virtual router will be increased for each virtual router in master mode on this switch.Alteon OS 22. This command is disabled by default. reals disable|enable When enabled for virtual server routers. This command is disabled by default. If the virtual router preemption option (see preem in Table 6-82 on page 335) is enabled. the priority for this virtual router will be increased for each IP interface active on this switch. 315393-J. ports disable|enable When enabled. This helps elect the virtual routers with the most available ports as the master. reals. the priority for this virtual router will be increased for each active port on the same VLAN. the priority for this virtual router will be increased for each healthy real server behind the virtual server IP address of the same IP address as the virtual router on this switch. ifs disable|enable When enabled. continuously updating virtual router priority levels when enabled. This helps elect the virtual routers with the most available routes as the master. This helps elect the switch with the largest server pool as the master. An IP interface is considered active when there is at least one active port on the same VLAN. This command is disabled by default. increasing Layer 4 efficiency. A virtual server router is defined as any virtual router whose IP address (addr) is the same as any configured virtual server IP address. and hsrp) apply to “virtual server routers. Table 6-83 VRRP Priority Tracking Menu Options (/cfg/l3/vrrp/vr/track) Command Syntax and Usage vrs disable|enable When enabled. This is useful for making sure that traffic for any particular client/server pairing are handled by the same switch. l4pts disable|enable When enabled for virtual server routers.” Other tracking criteria (l4pts.0. Some tracking criteria (vrs. A port is considered “active” if it has a link and is forwarding traffic. This helps elect the main Layer 4 switch as the master. This command is disabled by default. This command is disabled by default. otherwise called “virtual interface routers. and ports below) apply to standard virtual routers. this virtual router can assume master routing authority when its priority level rises above that of the current master.

Enabling HSRP helps elect the switch closest to the master HSRP router as the master. you can group VIRs and VSRs to serve the high availability of a specific customer.2 Command Reference Table 6-83 VRRP Priority Tracking Menu Options (/cfg/l3/vrrp/vr/track) Command Syntax and Usage hsrp disable|enable <priority (1-254)> Hot Standby Router Protocol (HSRP) is used with some types of routers for establishing router failover. /cfg/l3/vrrp/vrgroup Virtual Router Group Menu This feature allows the failover of individual groups of VIRs and VSRs. This command is disabled by default. the group of VIRs and VSRs associated with that customer alone will fail over to the backup switch. enable this switch option to increase the priority of this virtual router for each Layer 4 client-only port that receives HSRP advertisements.Alteon OS 22.Delete virtual router group cur . January 2005 .Add virtual router to group rem . Up to 16 virtual router groups can be configured on the switch.Remove virtual router from group prio .Set virtual router group name add .Set priority for virtual router group ena . If failover occurs on a customer link. The VIRs and VSRs configured for the other customers on the master switch are not affected.Disable virtual router group del . When Web hosting is shared between two or more customers on a single VRRP switch. optimizing routing efficiency. In networks where HSRP is used.Enable virtual router group dis . Enable this switch option to increment only that vrrp instance that is on the same VLAN as the tagged hsrp master flagged packet. This command is disabled by default. hsrv disable|enable Hot Standby Router on VLAN (HSRV) is used to work in VLAN-tagged environments. [VRRP Virtual Router Vrgroup 1 Menu] track .Priority Tracking Menu name . cur Displays the current configuration for priority tracking for this virtual router.0.Display current VRRP virtual router group configuration 338 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J.

When priority tracking is used (/cfg/l3/vrrp/vrgroup #/track). name Defines virtual router group name up to eight characters. To view menu options. del Deletes the virtual router group. the device with the highest IP interface address wins. used for modifying the standard priority system used for electing the master router. prio <1-254> Defines the election priority bias for this virtual router group. dis Disables the virtual router group.0. rem <virtual router number (1-1024)> Removes a virtual router from the group. the routing device with the highest virtual router priority number wins. see page 340. Tracking is Alteon’s proprietary extension to VRRP. If there is a tie. the priority for this virtual router will automatically be set to 255 (highest).Alteon OS 22. this base priority value can be modified according to a number of performance and operational criteria. 315393-J. During the master router election process. The default value is 100. If this virtual router’s IP address (addr) is the same as the one used by the IP interface.2 Command Reference Table 6-84 Virtual Router Group Menu Options (/cfg/l3/vrrp/vrgroup) Command Syntax and Usage track Displays VRRP priority tracking menu for this virtual router group. Each virtual router group can have up to 64 virtual routers. cur Displays the current VRRP virtual router group configuration. This can be any integer between 1 and 254. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 339 . add <virtual router number (1-1024)> Adds a virtual router to the group. ena Enables the virtual router group.

A port is considered “active” if it has a link and is forwarding traffic. the priority will be increased for each IP interface active on this virtual router group. Each time one of the tracking criteria is met. increasing Layer 4 efficiency. the priority will be increased for each active port on the VLAN on this virtual router group.0. This command is disabled by default. This helps elect the main Layer 4 switch as the master.2 Command Reference /cfg/l3/vrrp/vrgroup <vrgroup number>/ track Virtual Router Group Priority Tracking Configuration Menu This menu is used for modifying the priority system used when electing the master router from a pool of virtual routers. the priority will be increased for each physical switch port which has active Layer 4 processing on this virtual router group. This helps elect the switch with the largest server pool as the master. This helps elect the virtual routers with the most available routes as the master. January 2005 . [VRRP Vrgroup ifs ports l4pts reals hsrp hsrv cur 1 Priority Tracking Menu] Enable/disable tracking interfaces Enable/disable tracking VLAN switch ports Enable/disable tracking L4 switch ports Enable/disable tracking L4 real servers Enable/disable tracking HSRP Enable/disable tracking HSRP by VLAN Display current VRRP vrgroup tracking configuration Table 6-85 Virtual Router Group Priority Tracking Menu Options (/cfg/l3/vrrp/vrgroup/track) Command Syntax and Usage ifs disable|enable When enabled. Various tracking criteria can be used to bias the election results. the priority level for the virtual router is increased by an amount defined through the VRRP Tracking Menu (see page 346). 340 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J. This command is disabled by default. This command is disabled by default.Alteon OS 22. l4pts disable|enable When enabled for virtual server routers. reals disable|enable When enabled for virtual server routers. continuously updating virtual router priority levels when enabled. Criteria are tracked dynamically. ports disable|enable When enabled. This command is disabled by default. This helps elect the virtual routers with the most available ports as the master. An IP interface is considered active when there is at least one active port on the same VLAN. the priority will be increased for each healthy real server behind the virtual server IP address of the same IP address as the virtual router on this virtual router group.

Set renter priority . hsrv disable|enable Hot Standby Router on VLAN (HSRV) is used to work in VLAN-tagged environments.Display current VRRP virtual router configuration The Virtual Router Group menu is used for associating all virtual routers into a single logical virtual router. /cfg/l3/vrrp/group Virtual Router Group Configuration [VRRP Virtual track vrid if prio adver preem share ena dis del cur Router Group Menu] . On each VRRP-capable routing device participating in redundancy for this virtual router. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 341 .Enable virtual router . cur Displays the current configuration for priority tracking for this virtual router group.Disable virtual router .Set virtual router ID . Enabling HSRP helps elect the switch closest to the master HSRP router as the master. a virtual router will be configured to share the same virtual router ID and IP address.Alteon OS 22.Set advertisement interval . In networks where HSRP is used. optimizing routing efficiency.Delete virtual router .Set interface number .Enable or disable sharing . enable this switch option to increase the priority of this virtual router group for each Layer 4 client-only port that receives HSRP advertisements. which forces all virtual routers on the Alteon Application Switch to either be master or backup as a group.2 Command Reference Table 6-85 Virtual Router Group Priority Tracking Menu Options (/cfg/l3/vrrp/vrgroup/track) Command Syntax and Usage hsrp disable|enable Hot Standby Router Protocol (HSRP) is used with some types of routers for establishing router failover.0. This command is disabled by default. A virtual router is defined by its virtual router ID and an IP address. 315393-J. This command is disabled by default.Enable or disable preemption . Enable this switch option to increment only that vrrp instance on the virtual router group that is on the same VLAN as the tagged hsrp master flagged packet.Priority Tracking Menu .

By default. this option is enabled. adver <seconds (1-255)> Defines the time interval between VRRP master advertisements. Alteon’s proprietary extension to VRRP. this virtual router will always preempt any other master if this switch is the owner (the IP interface address and virtual router addr are the same). January 2005 . where only one switch is active at any time. if the virtual router group is in backup mode but has a higher priority than the current master. this virtual router will preempt the lower priority master and assume control. This can be any integer between 1 and 255 seconds. preem disable|enable Enables or disables master preemption. This can be any integer between 1 and 254. this option is enabled. When priority tracking is used (/cfg/l3/vrrp/track or /cfg/l3/vrrp/vr #/track). Tracking is Alteon’s proprietary extension to VRRP. Table 6-86 VRRP Virtual Router Group Options (/cfg/l3/vrrp/group) Command Syntax and Usage track Displays the VRRP Priority Tracking Menu for the virtual router group. The default is 1. prio <priority (1-254)> Defines the election priority bias for this virtual router group. To view menu options. even when in backup mode. If this virtual router’s IP address (addr) is the same as the one used by the IP interface. if <interface number (1-256)> Selects a switch IP interface (between 1 and 256). see page 346.2 Command Reference NOTE – This option is required to be configured only when using at least two Alteon Application Switches in a hot-standby failover configuration. this base priority value can be modified according to a number of performance and operational criteria. The default switch IP interface number is 1. When enabled. this switch will process any traffic addressed to this virtual router. When enabled. By default. the priority for this virtual router will automatically be set to 255 (highest). Tracking is not needed if sharing (share) is enabled. vrid <virtual router ID (1-255)> Defines the virtual router ID for this group. Note that even when preem is disabled. the device with the highest IP interface address wins.0. If there is a tie. During the master router election process. the routing device with the highest virtual router priority number wins. The default value is 100. 342 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J. share disable|enable Enables or disables virtual router sharing. used for modifying the standard priority system used for electing the master router.Alteon OS 22.

2 Command Reference Table 6-86 VRRP Virtual Router Group Options (/cfg/l3/vrrp/group) Command Syntax and Usage ena Enables the virtual router group. del Deletes the virtual router group from the switch configuration. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 343 .Alteon OS 22. dis Disables the virtual router group. 315393-J. /cfg/l3/vrrp/group/track Virtual Router Group Priority Tracking Configuration [Virtual Router vrs ifs ports l4pts reals hsrp hsrv cur Group Priority Tracking Menu] Enable/disable tracking master virtual routers Enable/disable tracking other interfaces Enable/disable tracking VLAN switch ports Enable/disable tracking L4 switch ports Enable/disable tracking L4 real servers Enable/disable tracking HSRP Enable/disable tracking HSRP by VLAN Display current VRRP Group Tracking configuration NOTE – If Virtual Router Group Tracking is enabled. then the tracking option will be available only under group option.0. cur Displays the current configuration information for the virtual router group. The tracking setting for the other individual virtual routers will be ignored.

This command is disabled by default. This helps elect the main Layer 4 switch as the master. A port is considered “active” if it has a link and is forwarding traffic. An IP interface is considered active when there is at least one active port on the same VLAN. This command is disabled by default. the priority for this virtual router will be increased for each physical switch port which has active Layer 4 processing on this switch.2 Command Reference Table 6-87 Virtual Router Group Priority Tracking Options (/cfg/l3/vr/group/track) Command Syntax and Usage vrs disable|enable When enabled. This command is disabled by default. This command is disabled by default. This command is disabled by default. Enable this switch option to increment only that vrrp instance that is on the same VLAN as the tagged hsrp master flagged packet. This command is disabled by default. This helps elect the switch with the largest server pool as the master. hsrv disable|enable Hot Standby Router on VLAN (HSRV) is used to work in VLAN-tagged environments.0. ifs disable|enable When enabled. This command is disabled by default. enable this switch option to increase the priority of this virtual router for each Layer 4 client-only port that receives HSRP advertisements. optimizing routing efficiency.Alteon OS 22. increasing routing and load balancing efficiency. January 2005 . This helps elect the virtual routers with the most available ports as the master. In networks where HSRP is used. the priority for this virtual router will be increased for each active port on the same VLAN. the priority for this virtual router will be increased for each virtual router in master mode on this switch. l4pts disable|enable When enabled for virtual server routers. HSRP is used with some types of routers for establishing router failover. This helps elect the virtual routers with the most available routes as the master. reals disable|enable When enabled for virtual server routers. cur Displays the current configuration for priority tracking for this virtual router. increasing Layer 4 efficiency. the priority for this virtual router will be increased for each other IP interface active on this switch. the priority for this virtual router will be increased for each healthy real server. ports disable|enable When enabled. This helps elect the switch closest to the master HSRP router as the master. 344 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J. hsrp disable|enable Enables Hot Standby Router Protocol (HSRP) for this virtual router group. This is useful for making sure that traffic for any particular client/server pairing are handled by the same switch.

315393-J. [VRRP Interface auth passw del cur - 1 Menu] Set authentication types Set plain-text password Delete interface Display current VRRP interface configuration This menu is used for configuring VRRP authentication parameters for the IP interfaces used with the virtual routers. passw <password> Defines a plain text password up to eight characters long.2 Command Reference /cfg/l3/vrrp/if <interface number> VRRP Interface Configuration NOTE – The interface-number (1 to 256) represents the IP interface on which authentication parameters must be configured. The IP interface itself is not deleted. Table 6-88 VRRP Interface Menu Options (/cfg/l3/vrrp/if) Command Syntax and Usage auth none|password Defines the type of authentication that will be used: none (no authentication). del Clears the authentication configuration parameters for this IP interface.0. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 345 .Alteon OS 22. cur Displays the current configuration for this IP interface’s authentication parameters. or password (password authentication). This password will be added to each VRRP packet transmitted by this interface when password authentication is chosen (see auth above).

Set priority increment for HSRP tracking hsrv . the priority level for the virtual router is increased by an amount defined through this menu. The default value is 2.Set priority increment for HSRP by VLAN tracking cur .Set priority increment for L4 switch port tracking reals . reals <0-254> Defines the priority increment value (1 through 254) for healthy real servers behind the virtual server router.2 Command Reference /cfg/l3/vrrp/track VRRP Tracking Configuration [VRRP Tracking Menu] vrs . hsrp <0-254> Defines the priority increment value (1 through 254) for switch ports with Layer 4 client-only processing that receive HSRP broadcasts. Each time one of the tracking criteria is met (see “VRRP Virtual Router Priority Tracking Menu” on page 336). l4pts <0-254> Defines the priority increment value (1 through 254) for physical switch ports with active Layer 4 processing.Set priority increment for VLAN switch port tracking l4pts . The default value is 2. January 2005 .Display current VRRP Priority Tracking configuration This menu is used for setting weights for the various criteria used to modify priority levels during the master router election process.Set priority increment for L4 real server tracking hsrp .0.Set priority increment for IP interface tracking ports . Table 6-89 VRRP Tracking Options (/cfg/l3/vrrp/track) Command Syntax and Usage vrs <0-254> Defines the priority increment value (1 through 254) for virtual routers in master mode detected on this switch. ports <0-254> Defines the priority increment value (1 through 254) for active ports on the virtual router’s VLAN. 346 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J.Set priority increment for virtual router tracking ifs . The default value is 2. The default value is 10. The default value is 2. The default value is 2. ifs <0-254> Defines the priority increment value (1 through 254) for active IP interfaces detected on this switch.Alteon OS 22.

Table 6-90 Default Gateway Metrics (/cfg/l3/metrc) Option strict Description The gateway number determines its level of preference. This provides basic gateway load balancing. These options do not affect the VRRP master router election process until options under the VRRP Virtual Router Priority Tracking Menu (see page 336) are enabled. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 347 .0. a metric can be set to determine which primary gateway is selected. All gateway requests to the same destination IP address are resolved to the same gateway. /cfg/l3/metrc <metric name> Default Gateway Metrics If multiple default gateways are configured and enabled. Gateway #1 acts as the preferred default IP gateway until it fails or is disabled. These priority tracking options only define increment values. at which point the next in line will take over as the default IP gateway. cur Displays the current configuration of priority tracking increment values. The switch sends each new gateway request to the next healthy. roundrobin 315393-J. There are two metrics.2 Command Reference Table 6-89 VRRP Tracking Options (/cfg/l3/vrrp/track) Command Syntax and Usage hsrv <0-254> Defines the priority increment value (1 through 254) for vrrp instances that are on the same VLAN. enabled gateway in line. which are described in the table “Default Gateway Metrics (/cfg/l3/metrc)” on page 347.Alteon OS 22. The default value is 10.

2 Command Reference /cfg/security Security Configuration Menu [Security Menu] ipacl pgroup port udpblast seclog fragment pdepth cur IP Address ACL Menu Pattern Match Group Menu Port Security Menu UDP Blast Menu Set rate threshold for security logging Set out of order IP fragments handling in filtering Set packet depth for pattern matching Display current Security configuration Table 6-91 Security Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/security) Command Syntax and Usage ipacl Displays IP address Access Control Menu. pgroup <pattern group ID (1-128)> Displays Pattern Match Group Menu. To view options.Alteon OS 22. pdepth <# of packets. To view menu options. port <port number> Displays Port Security Menu. udpblast Displays UDP Blast Menu. seclog <rate threshold (in packets)> Defines the rate threshold for security logging by the number of packets per second. cur Displays the current security configuration. 348 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J. see page 349. Any packets above the current threshold will be logged. To view menu options. see page 350. see page 351. When set to allow. the switch will let through all the out-of-order fragments in filtering. The window is in units of packets. fragment <allow|deny> Sets the handling of out-of-order IP fragment packets during filtering. When set to deny. The default is allow.0. To view menu options. see page 352. January 2005 . the switch will drop these packets. 1-255|none> Defines the search window for pattern matching beginning from the start of the packet stream.

Alteon OS 22. rem <IP address/mask pair index> Removes range of source IP addresses to be denied. If a match is found. [IP ACL Menu] add .0. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 349 .Display All IP address/mask for access control Table 6-92 IP Address ACL Menu Options (/cfg/sec/ipacl) Command Syntax and Usage add <IP address> <IP mask> Adds range of source IP addresses to be denied. defined by the IP address/mask pair index. defined by the IP address/mask pair.Remove IP Address/Mask for access control cur .2 Command Reference /cfg/security/ipacl IP Address Access Control List Configuration Menu Alteon OS can be configured with IP access control lists (ACLs) composed of ranges of client IP addresses that are to be denied access to the switch.Add IP Address/Mask for access control rem . 315393-J. cur Displays current IP addresses ranges in Access Control List. the client source IP address is checked against this pool of addresses. then the client traffic is blocked. When traffic ingresses the switch.

del Deletes the pattern group. By applying the patterns and groups to a deny filter. the switch will match any of the strings or patterns within that group before denying and dropping the packet.Add SLB string to group rem . When a pattern group is applied to a deny filter. The filtering commands in Alteon OS Advanced Denial of Service Pack allow the administrator to define groups of patterns. it is useful to combine them into one group and give the group a name that is easy to remember. also on page 411. Up to five patterns can be combined into a single pattern group.Remove SLB string from group del . cur Displays the current configuration of this pattern group. group them into a pattern group. 350 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J. add <string ID> Adds a pre-configured SLB string to this pattern group by the string ID number. the packet content can be detected and thus denied access to the network. January 2005 . To view existing strings and their ID numbers. [Pattern Match Group 1 Menu] name . rem <SLB string ID> Removes an SLB string from this pattern group.Set pattern group name add . use the /cfg/slb/layer7/slb/cur command. and then apply the group to a filter.Alteon OS 22. Up to five patterns can be combined into a single pattern group.Delete pattern group cur .2 Command Reference /cfg/security/pgroup <pattern group number> Pattern Matching Menu When a virus or other attack contains multiple patterns or strings.0. use the /cfg/slb/layer7/slb/add command described on page 411. To configure SLB strings. Configure the binary or ASCII pattern strings. name the pattern group.Display current configuration Table 6-93 Pattern Matching Group Menu Options (/cfg/sec/pgroup) Command Syntax and Usage name <31 character name>|none Specifies a descriptive name for this pattern group. Note: You can only add the binary or ASCII strings to a pattern matching group.

Nullscan: TCP sequence number is zero and all control bits are zeros. Enabling this command will allow detection of the following DoS attacks: Smurf: ICMP ping request to a broadcast destination IP (x. Xmascan: TCP sequence number is zero and the FIN.2 Command Reference /cfg/security/port <port number> Port Security Configuration Menu Alteon OS can protect switch ports against a variety of Denial of Service (DOS) attacks including Port Smurf. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 351 .0. Nullscan. Enable DOS protection on ports connected to any network that could be the source of an attack. Blat: TCP packets with SIP!=DIP and SPORT=DPORT. PortZero. ipacl disable|enable Enables or disables IP access control List denial on this port.Alteon OS 22. ScanSynFin: SYN and FIN bits are set in the packet.255). and ScanSynFin. Fraggle: UDP packet sent to a broadcast destination IP (x.x. URG and PSH bits are set.255). LandAttack: Packets with source IP equal to destination IP. Fraggle.x. cur Displays the current security configuration on this port. LandAttack. 315393-J. Xmascan. udpblast disable|enable Enables or disables UDP blast protection on this port. PortZero: TCP/UDP Packets whose source or destination port is zero.x.x. [Port 1 Menu] dos ipacl udpblast cur - Enable/disable DOS attack detection Enable/disable IP ACL processing Enable/disable UDP Blast processing Display current port configuration Table 6-94 Port Security Menu Options (/cfg/security/port) Command Syntax and Usage dos disable|enable Enables or disables Denial of Service (DOS) protection on this port.

cur Displays all UDP blast protection ports. UDP traffic is shut down on those ports. 352 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J. The maximum port range is 5000. thus ensuring that backend servers are not flooded with data and disabled. Alteon OS can be configured to restrict the amount of traffic allowed on any UDP port. While you can configure multiple port ranges.2 Command Reference /cfg/security/udpblast UDP Blast Protection Configuration Menu Malicious attacks over UDP protocol ports are becoming a common way to bring down real servers.Alteon OS 22. [UDP Blast Protection Menu] add . Alteon OS supports up to 5000 UDP port numbers.Add UDP port/range for UDP blast protection rem . the sum of ranges cannot exceed the maximum of 5000 ports. If the number of packets on this port range exceeds the maximum packet rate per second.Default packet rate for UDP blast protection cur . using any integer from 1 to 65535.Display all UDP blast protection Ports Table 6-95 UDP Blast Protection Menu Options (/cfg/sec/udpblast) Command Syntax and Usage add <UDP port number or range (first-last)> [packet rate] Adds UDP port or range for UDP blast protection. default <packet rate> Defines the default packet rate for UDP blast protection. When the maximum number of packets/second is reached. January 2005 . You can specify a series of UDP port ranges and the allowed packet limit for that range. UDP traffic will be dropped.0. rem <UDP port number or range (first-last)> Removes UDP port or range for UDP blast protection. If the first port number is 300.Remove UDP port/range for UDP blast protection default . as well as the maximum packet rate per second. the last number that can be used is 5300.

at the Configuration# prompt. “First-Time Configuration.0. enter: Configuration# setup /cfg/dump Dump The dump program writes the current switch configuration to the terminal screen. BOOTP. For a complete description of how to use setup.” To start the setup program. VLAN parameters. To start the dump program. and placed in a script file. paste the configuration commands from the script file at the command line prompt of the switch. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 353 . The active configuration can also be saved or loaded via TFTP. IP.Alteon OS 22.2 Command Reference /cfg/setup Setup The setup program steps you through configuring the system date and time. at the Configuration# prompt. and IP interfaces. When using Telnet to configure a new switch. as described on page 354. which can be used to configure other switches through a Telnet connection. enter: Configuration# dump The configuration is displayed with parameters that have been changed from the default values. see Chapter 2. edited. port speed/mode. 315393-J. The screen display can be captured. Spanning Tree.

To start the switch configuration upload. enter: Configuration# ptcfg <TFTP server> <filename> [-m | -mgmt | -d | -data] where server is the TFTP server IP address or hostname. the active configuration will be replaced with the commands found in the specified configuration file. at the Configuration# prompt. and filename is the name of the target script configuration file. the apply action will be performed automatically.Alteon OS 22.2 Command Reference /cfg/ptcfg <TFTP server> <filename> Saving the Active Switch Configuration When the ptcfg command is used. /cfg/gtcfg <TFTP server> <filename> Restoring the Active Switch Configuration When the gtcfg command is used. the switch’s active configuration commands (as displayed using /cfg/dump) will be uploaded to the specified script configuration file on the TFTP server. NOTE – The output file is formatted with line-breaks but no carriage returns—the file cannot be viewed with editors that require carriage returns (such as Microsoft Notepad). The contents of the specified file will be replaced with the current configuration data. and filename is the name of the target script configuration file. The configuration loaded using gtcfg is not activated until the apply command is used. The file can contain a full switch configuration or a partial switch configuration. 354 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J. To start the switch configuration download. January 2005 . enter: Configuration# gtcfg <TFTP server> <filename> [-m | -mgmt | -d | -data] where server is the TFTP server IP address or hostname. If the apply command is found in the configuration script file loaded using this command. NOTE – If the TFTP server is running SunOS or the Solaris operating system.0. the specified ptcfg file must exist prior to executing the ptcfg command and must be writable (set with proper permission. at the Configuration# prompt. and not locked by any application).

each server usually specializes in providing one or two unique services. This chapter discusses how to use the Command Line Interface (CLI) for configuring Server Load Balancing (SLB) on the Alteon Application Switch. 315393-J. With this software feature. based on a variety of load-balancing algorithms. In an average network that employs multiple servers without server load balancing. Refer to your Alteon OS Application Guide for detailed information on this feature.CHAPTER 7 The SLB Configuration Menu Server Load Balancing (SLB) allows you to configure the Alteon Application Switch to balance user session traffic among a pool of available servers that provide shared services. January 2005 355 . If one of these servers provides access to applications or data that is in high demand. it can become overutilized. Placing this kind of strain on a server can decrease the performance of the entire network as user requests are rejected by the server and then resubmitted by the user stations. the switch is aware of the services provided by each server and can direct user session traffic to an appropriate server.

see page 372. virt <virtual server number (1-1024)> Displays the menu for defining virtual servers. gslb Displays the menu for configuring Global Server Load Balancing. To view menu options. To view menu options. see page 358. 356 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-J. To view menu options.0. filt <filter ID (1-2048)> Displays the menu for Filtering and Application Redirection.Alteon OS 22. To view menu options. To view menu options. January 2005 . To view menu options. see page 383. see page 401. group <real server group number (1-1024)> Displays the menu for placing real servers into real server groups. see page 364. port <port number> Displays the menu for setting physical switch port states for Layer 4 activity.2 Command Reference /cfg/slb SLB Configuration [Layer 4 Menu] real group virt filt port gslb layer7 wap sync adv linklb advhc pip peerpip on off cur Real Server Menu Real Server Group Menu Virtual Server Menu Filtering Menu Layer 4 Port Menu Global SLB Menu Layer 7 Resource Definition Menu WAP Menu Config Synch Menu Layer 4 Advanced Menu Inbound Linklb Menu Layer 4 Advanced Health Check Menu Proxy IP Address Menu Peer Proxy IP Address Menu Globally turn Layer 4 processing ON Globally turn Layer 4 processing OFF Display current Layer 4 configuration Table 7-1 Server Load Balancing Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb) Command Syntax and Usage real <real server number (1-1023)> Displays the menu for configuring real servers. see page 399.

see page 431. When this command is enabled. adv Displays the Layer 4 Advanced Menu. This option can be performed only after the optional Layer 4 software is enabled (see “Activating Optional Software on page 441). This prevents the dropping of a packet or being sent to the backup switch in the absence of the proxy IP address of the peer switch.2 Command Reference Table 7-1 Server Load Balancing Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb) Command Syntax and Usage layer7 Displays Layer 7 Resource Definition Menu. When the pip is defined. on Globally turns on Layer 4 software services for Server Load Balancing and Application Redirection. linklb Displays Inbound Link Load Balancing Menu. Enabling Layer 4 services is not necessary for using filters only to allow. pip This menu is used to set the switch proxy IP address using dotted decimal notation. or NAT traffic. client address information in Layer 4 requests is replaced with this proxy IP address. sync Displays the Synch Peer Switch Menu. peerpip Displays Peer Proxy IP address Menu. see page 421. deny. To view menu options. the switch is able to forward traffic from the other switch. off Globally disables Layer 4 services.Alteon OS 22. To view menu options. but the software processes will no longer be active in the switch cur Displays the current Server Load Balancing configuration.To view options. All configuration information will remain in place (if applied or saved). see page 419. see page 415. wap Displays WAP Menu. without performing server processing on the packets of the other switch. see page 430. January 2005 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 357 . To view menu options. 315393-J. advhc Displays Layer 4 Advanced Health Check Menu. To view menu options. This happens because the peer switches are aware of each other’s proxy IP addresses.0. To view menu options. see page 413. To view menu options. see page 412. using Layer 2. To view menu options. see page 408.

IDS Command Menu rip .Set backup real server inter .2 Command Reference Filtering and Layer 4 (Server Load Balancing) Filters configured to allow. /cfg/slb/real <server number> Real Server SLB Configuration [Real server 1 Menu] layer7 .Set real server name weight . Layer 4 processing must be turned on before redirection filters will work. deny.Set minutes inactive connection remains open backup .Set number of failed attempts to declare server DOWN restr .Set interval between health checks retry . however. or perform Network Address Translation (NAT) on traffic do not require Layer 4 software to be activated.0.Set maximum number of connections tmout .Enable/disable client proxy operation fasthc .Add real port to server remport .Display current real server configuration 358 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-J.Enable real server dis . Application Redirection filters.Layer 7 Command Menu ids .Alteon OS 22.Set Global SLB availability for real server maxcon .Enable/disable Global SLB remote site operation proxy .Disable real server del .Set number of successful attempts to declare server UP addport . January 2005 .Set IP addr of real server name .Enable/disable fast health check operation submac .Set weight for real server avail .Remove real port from server remote . These filters are not affected by the Server Load Balancing on and off commands in this menu.Delete real server cur . require Layer 4 software services.Enable/disable source MAC address substitution ena .

2 Command Reference This menu is used for configuring information about real servers that participate in a server pool for Server Load Balancing or Application Redirection. the address entered is PINGed to determine if the server is up. By default.000. When this command is used. client requests will be dropped by the virtual server. To view menu options. client requests will be sent to the backup/overflow server or backup/overflow server group. New connections will be issued again to this server once the number of current connections has decreased below the maxcon setting. avail <server weight (1-48)> Displays the currently available real server for Global server load balancing and allows the user to change to another real server for Global server load balancing. weight <real server weight (1-48)> Sets the weighting value (1 to 48) that this real server will be given in the load balancing algorithms.Alteon OS 22. 315393-J. If no backup servers/server group are configured. the number of maximum connections is set at 20. If all servers in a real server group for a virtual server reach their maxcon limit at the same time. maxcon <maximum connections (0-200000)> Sets the maximum number of connections that this server should simultaneously support. The required parameters are: Real server IP address Real server enabled (disabled by default) Table 7-2 Real Server Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/real) Command Syntax and Usage layer7 Displays the Layer 7 Menu. such that new connections will not be issued to this server if the maxcon limit is reached. January 2005 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 359 . This will enable the network administrator to quickly identify the server by a natural language keyword value. This option sets a threshold as an artificial barrier. see page 363. By default. A setting of 10 would assign the server roughly 10 times the number of connections as a server with a weight of 1. Weights are not applied when using the hash or minmisses metrics (see “Server Load Balancing Metrics” on page 370). each real server is given a weight setting of 1. and the administrator will be warned if the server does not respond.0. name <string. Higher weighting values force the server to receive more connections than the other servers configured in the same real server group. see page 362. ids Displays Intrusion Detection Server/system menu. rip <real server IP address> Sets the IP address of the real server in dotted decimal format. To view menu options. maximum 31 characters>|none Defines a 15-character alias for each real server.

backup <real server number (1-1023)>|none Sets the real server used as the backup/overflow server for this real server. the switch verifies that real servers and their corresponding services are operational by opening a TCP connection to each service. TCP/UDP connections will remain registered in the switch's binding table. you can set the number of minutes to wait before removing orphan table entries. The same backup/overflow server may be assigned to more than one real server at the same time inter <number of seconds between health checks (0-60)> Sets the interval between real server health verification attempts. An interval of “0” disables health checking for the server. if the real server becomes inoperative. Settings must be specified in even numbered increments between 2 and 32768 minutes. this option sets how long an idle client is allowed to remain associated with a particular server. When persistent is activated. For TCP services. The default is 8 attempts 360 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-J. The range is from 1 to 63 attempts. The inter option lets you choose the time between health checks. Using the tmout option. retry <number of consecutive health checks (1-63)> Sets the number of failed health check attempts required before declaring this real server inoperative. Determining the health of each real server is a necessary function for Layer 4 switching. such as when a client application is abnormally terminated by the client's system. and the session table entry is then removed. This option is also used with the Persistent option (see /cfg/slb/virt/pbind).2 Command Reference Table 7-2 Real Server Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/real) Command Syntax and Usage tmout <even number of minutes (2-32768)> Sets the number of minutes an inactive session remains open (in even numbered increments). The backup server is also used in overflow situations. The range is from 1 to 60 seconds. The data is transferred until the client ends the session. In certain circumstances. When a client makes a request. these orphaned entries must be aged out of the binding table. The default setting is 10. the switch pings servers to determine their status.Alteon OS 22. the session is recorded in the table. using the defined service ports configured as part of each virtual service. use this option to assign a backup real server number. The default interval is 2 seconds. Then. To prevent loss of service if a particular real server fails. Every client-to-server session being load balanced is recorded in the switch's Session Table. January 2005 . The default is 4 attempts restr <number of consecutive health checks (1-63)> Sets the number of successful health check attempts required before declaring a UDP service operational. the backup comes online to provide additional processing power until the original server becomes desaturated. In order to prevent table overflow.0. If the real server reaches its maxcon (maximum connections) limit. the switch will activate the backup real server until the original becomes operative again. For UDP services. The range is from 1 to 63 attempts.

See /oper/slb/dis on page 436 for an operations-level command that permits graceful server shutdown. as it will delete any configuration options that have been set for this real server.Alteon OS 22. This option. this option is disabled.2 Command Reference Table 7-2 Real Server Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/real) Command Syntax and Usage addport <real server port (2–65534)> Add multiple service ports to the server. Use this command with caution. dis Disables this real server from Layer 4 service. del Deletes this real server from the Layer 4 switching software configuration. This option. the real server will go down only after the configured health check interval. When enabled. By default. With this option enabled (default). submac disable|enable Enables or disables source MAC address substitution. the real server goes down operationally as soon as the physical port connected to the real server goes down. This removes the real server from operation within its real server groups. remport <real server port (2–65534)> Remove multiple service ports from the server. This option should be enabled when the real IP address supplied above represents a remote server (real or virtual) that this switch will access as part of its Global Server Load Balancing network. When disabled. when the apply and save commands are used. A disabled server will no longer process virtual server requests as part of the real server group to which it is assigned. a client request from any application can be proxied using a load-balancing Proxy IP address (PIP). fasthc disable|enable Enables or disables Fast Health Check operation. remote disable|enable Enables or disables remote site operation for this server. This command is enabled by default. This option does not perform a graceful server shutdown. 315393-J. when the apply and save commands are used. this option is disabled. January 2005 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 361 . proxy disable|enable Enables or disables proxy IP address translation. NOTE – This option does not perform a graceful server shutdown. By default. the real server can process virtual server requests associated with its real server group. disables this real server until it is explicitly re-enabled. When enabled.0. enables this real server for operation until explicitly disabled. ena You must perform this command to enable this real server for Layer 4 service. See /oper/slb/ena on page 436 for an operations-level command.

Alteon OS 22. this option is disabled. remlb <URL path ID [1-1024]> Removes the predefined URL loadbalance string ID from the real server.Enable/disable LDAP Write server cur . LDAP servers are of two types: read servers and write servers.Add SLB string for content load balance remlb . Table 7-3 Layer 7 Commands Menu Options (/cfg/slb/real/layer7) Command Syntax and Usage addlb <URL path ID [1-1024]> Adds the predefined URL loadbalance string ID to the real server.Display current real server configuration This menu is used for entering commands and strings for Layer 7 processing. exclude disable|enable Enables or disables exclusionary string matching.Remove SLB string for content load balance cookser . ldapwr disable|enable Enables or disables LDAP write server.Enable/disable exclusionary string matching ldapwr . and embeds the IP address of the real server that will handle the subsequent requests from the client. /cfg/slb/real <server number>/layer7 Real Server Layer 7 Configuration [Real Server 1 Layer 7 Commands Menu] addlb . cookser disable|enable Enables or disables the real server to handle client requests that don’t contain a cookie. assigns the cookie.0.2 Command Reference Table 7-2 Real Server Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/real) Command Syntax and Usage cur Displays the current configuration information for this real server. You need to use the write servers when you want to modify the directory on the server. This server gets the client request. this option is disabled. The write server can conduct both read and write operations. This option is used if you want to designate a specific server to assign cookies only. By default. 362 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-J.Enable/disable cookie assignment server exclude . You need to use read servers when you only want to browse the directory. By default. January 2005 .

January 2005 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 363 .Display current real server configuration Table 7-4 IDS Configuration Menu options (/cfg/slb/real/ids) Command Syntax and Usage idsvlan <vlan number (1-4090> Defines VLAN ID for Intrusion Detection Server. comm <SNMP health check community string to override group community string> Overrides community string for SNMP health checks.0.Override OID for SNMP HC comm . /cfg/slb/real <real server number>/ids Real server IDS Configuration Menu Intrusion Detection System (IDS) is a type of security management system for computers and networks. 315393-J. Note: IDS can only be configured on real servers between one to maximum number of ports on the switch.Alteon OS 22. An Intrusion Detection System gathers and analyzes information from various areas within a computer or a network to identify possible security breaches.Set Vlan ID for ID Server idsport .Override community string for SNMP HC cur .2 Command Reference Table 7-3 Layer 7 Commands Menu Options (/cfg/slb/real/layer7) Command Syntax and Usage cur Displays the current real server configuration. Refer to your Application Guide for more information. This OID overrides the OID for SNMP health checks. [Real Server 1 IDS Menu] idsvlan . cur Displays the current real server configuration. which include both intrusions (attacks from outside the organization) and misuse (attacks from within the organization). idsport <port number> Defines port for Intrusion Detection Server.Set Port for ID Server oid . oid <SNMP health check object identifier to override group OID> Specifies the object identifier (OID).

Set health check type backup . rmetric Sets the load balancing metric used for determining which port in the real server will be the target of the next client request.Enable real server in this group dis . Each real server can belong to more than one group.Set metric used to select next server in group rmetric .Set an advance group health check formula mhash . Each real server group should consist of all the real servers which provide a specific service for load balancing.Enable/disable Intrusion Detection idsfld .Set real server failure threshold idsrprt .Display current group configuration This menu is used for combining real servers into real server groups. The default setting is leastconns. January 2005 .Disable real server in this group add .Set real server group name realthr .Set minmisses hash parameter viphlth .0.Enable/disable the access to this group for operator ena .Alteon OS 22.Delete real server group cur .Set backup real server or group name . Table 7-5 Real Server Group Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/group) Command Syntax and Usage metric leastconns|roundrobin|minmisses|hash|response|bandwidth|phash Sets the load balancing metric used for determining which real server in the group will be the target of the next client request.Enable/disable Intrusion Detection Group Flood oper . See “Server Load Balancing Metrics” on page 370 for more information.Enable/disable VIP health checking in DSR mode ids .Set metric used to select next rport in server content . Each group must consist of at least one real server.Set health check content health .Add real server rem .Remove real server del .2 Command Reference /cfg/slb/group <real server group number> Real Server Group SLB Configuration [Real server group 1 Menu] metric . Real server groups are used both for Server Load Balancing and Application Redirection.Set Intrusion Detection Port advhlth . 364 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-J.

which also means the option is disabled idsrprt <real server port (2-65534)>|any Sets real server port for the Intrusion Detection Server. the number reaches this minimum limit. If any time. To prevent loss of service if the entire real server group fails. The backup server/server group is also used in overflow situations. The same backup/overflow server/server group may be assigned to more than one real server group at the same time. The default threshold is 0. the backup server/server group comes online to provide additional processing power until one of the original servers becomes desaturated. health link|arp|icmp|tcp|http|httphead|dns|pop3|smtp|nntp|ftp|imap| sslh|radius-auth|radius-acc|script<n>|udpdns|wsp|wtp|wtls|ldap| snmp<n>|tftp|rtsp|sip http . The default is tcp. This will enable the network administrator to quickly identify the server group by a natural language keyword value. if the real server group becomes inoperative. See “SLB Health Check Types” on page 367. realthr <real servers (1-15. 0 for disabled)> Specifies a minimum number of real servers available. If all the servers in the real server group reach their maxcon (maximum connections) limit.2 Command Reference Table 7-5 Real Server Group Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/group) Command Syntax and Usage content <filename>|//<host>/<filename>|none This option defines the specific content which is examined during health checks. backup r<real server number (1-256)>|g<group number>|none Sets the real server or real server group used as the backup/overflow server/server group for this real server group.use GET method. use this option to assign a backup real server/real server group number. the switch will activate the backup real server /server group until one of the original real servers becomes operative again. The content depends on the type of health check specified in the health option (see below). Then.0. January 2005 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 365 . name <maximum 31 characters>|none Defines a 15-character alias for each Real Server Group. a SYSLOG ALERT message is sent to the configured SYSLOG servers stating that the real server threshold has been reached for the concerned server load balancing group. 315393-J.use HEAD method Sets the type of health checking performed. httphead .Alteon OS 22.

add <real server number (1-1023)> Adds a real server to this real server group.Alteon OS 22. Using parenthesis with the boolean operators. if a real server is a member of more than one group. dis <real server number. By default the minmiss algorithm uses the upper 24-bits of the source IP address to calculate the real server that the traffic should be sent to when the minmiss metric is selected. AND or OR that are used to manipulate TRUE or FLALSE values. However. you can create a boolean expression to state the health of the server group. mhash 24|32 <number of sip bits used for minmisses hash> Defines the minmisses hash parameter for this real server as either 24 or 32 bits. whether DSR is enabled or disabled. you can configure this real server to accept requests from all the groups or any number of groups that this real server is member of. You will be prompted to enter the number of the real server to add to this group. This command also supports a string expression which is up to 128 characters long. or you can also set the formula expression as none. This command supports two boolean operators.2 Command Reference Table 7-5 Real Server Group Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/group) Command Syntax and Usage advhlth <(1&2|3. January 2005 . This command allows you to create a boolean expression to health check the real server group based on the state of the virtual services. 1-1023> Disables a real server in this group gracefully or on a per group basis. ids disable|enable Enables or disables Intrusion Detection Server (IDS) load balancing for the designated real server group.). This feature is enabled by default.You can also select all 32-bits of the source IP address to hash to the real server. viphlth disable|enable Enables or disables VIP health checking in a service. For example. 1-1023> Enables a real server in this group gracefully or on a per group basis..0. the switch uses RIP to perform all health checks. 128>|none Defines an advanced health check formula expression for the real servers. When viphlth is disabled. idsfld disable|enable Enables or disables the Intrusion Detection flood. oper disable|enable Enables or disables the real server group operation. ena <real server number. You will be prompted for the ID number for the real server to remove from this group. it works only when the service has DSR (Direct Server Return) feature enabled. rem <real server number (1-1023)> Remove a real server from this real server group. This feature can only be configured on real server groups between 1-63. 366 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-J.

Use this command with caution: if you remove the only group that is assigned to a virtual server. Table 7-6 SLB Health Check Types (/cfg/slb/group/health) Option and Description link Checks status of port for each server for IDSLB group only. SLB Health Check Types Using the health command. the virtual server will become inoperative. January 2005 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 367 . cur Displays the current configuration parameters for this real server group. dns For Domain Name Service. You can use this command to test the validity and access to the hypertext links or to look for any recent modification to the URL. icmp For Layer 3 health checking. arp Sends an ARP request for Layer 2 health checking. 315393-J. an HTTP/1.Alteon OS 22. you can specify the type of health check for the group of real servers. check that the domain name specified in content can be resolved by the server.0. The health check options are described in the following table. the health check will revert back to TCP on the port that is being load balanced.0 GET occurs. This removes the group from operation under all virtual servers it is assigned to.2 Command Reference Table 7-5 Real Server Group Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/group) Command Syntax and Usage del Deletes this real server group from the Layer 4 software configuration. Note: If the content is not specified. http For HTTP service. httphead Allows the switch to declare if the server is up or not just by locating the URL header and not wait until all the URL contents are received. pings the server. tcp Opens and closes a TCP/IP connection to the server for TCP service. use HTTP 1.1 GETS when a HOST: header is required to check that the URL content is specified in content command. Refer to your Application Guide for their detailed description. Otherwise.

radius-auth. check that the user:password value specified in content exists on the serve sslh Enables the switch to query the health of the SSL servers by sending an SSL client “Hello” packet and then verify the contents of the server’s “Hello” response. To perform application health checking to a RADIUS server. check that the user:password value specified in content exists on the Alteon Application Switch and the server. check that the user:password account specified in content exists on the server. check that the filename specified in content is accessible on the server through anonymous login. the network administrator must also configure the /cfg/slb/ secrt parameter. 368 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-J. script <n> Enables the use of script-based health checks in send/expect format to check for application and content availability. nntp For newsgroup services.Alteon OS 22.2 Command Reference Table 7-6 SLB Health Check Types (/cfg/slb/group/health) Option and Description pop3 For user mail service. imap For user mail service. the user and server exchange security certificates. check that the user specified in content is accessible on the server. The secrt value is a field of up to 32 alphanumeric characters that is used by the switch to encrypt a password during the RSA Message Digest Algorithm (MD5) and by the RADIUS server to decrypt the password during verification. negotiate an encryption and compression method. ftp For FTP services. The content under /cfg/ slb/adv/waphc (see page 421) must also be configured. smtp For mail-server services. <n> denotes the health script number (1-8). radius-acc For RADIUS remote access server authentication. udpdns Allows the user to perform health checking using UDP DNS queries. wsp Enables connectionless WSP content health checks for WAP gateways. During the handshake. check that the newsgroup name specified in content is accessible on the server.0. and establish a session ID for each session. January 2005 .

If this is not the response. If content is supplied the switch will issue the RTSP DESCRIBE method. This health check consists of three LDAP messages over one TCP connection: a bind request. The health check fails if the switch receives an error packet from the real server. The RTSP health check can operate with or without content. The content under /cfg/slb/adv/waphc (see page 421) must also be configured wtls Provides Wireless Transport Layer Security (WTLS) Hello-based health check for encrypted and connection-oriented WTLS traffic on port 9203. the switch transmits TFTP read requests (RRQ) to all servers in the group. a bind result.Alteon OS 22. The switch sends an anonymous bind request to the server. January 2005 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 369 .2 Command Reference Table 7-6 SLB Health Check Types (/cfg/slb/group/health) Option and Description wtp Enables connection-oriented WTP + WSP content health checks for WAP gateways. the health check will fail. The switch administrator can choose LDAP version 2 or 3 as both the versions are compatible with Alteon OS 22. snmp <n> Enables the use of SNMP-based health checks. If there is no content configured the switch will issue an RTSP OPTIONS method. If the response to either method is RTSP/200 then the health check passes.0.0. it will send the bind result message and the switch will mark the server as alive. The switch must send an unbind request so that the server does not hold resources indefinitely. You can perform the SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) health check by using SIP PING request.2. At regular intervals. The LDAP health checks enable the switch to determine if the LDAP server is alive. ldap Sets the health check type to LDAP. If the server is up. sip Sets the health check type to sip. tftp Sets the health check type to TFTP. You must enable UDP to perform SIP load balancing. 315393-J. The health check is successful if the server responds to the RRQ. <n> denotes the health script number (1-5). This protocol enables the user to request a file from the server. and an unbind request. rtsp Sets the health check type to RTSP.

This is particularly useful for maximizing successful cache hits. leastconns Least connections. With this option. This metric is optimized for Application Redirection. process. due to their ability to accept.0. all requests for a specific IP destination address will be sent to the same server. 370 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-J. The hash metric should be used if the statistical load balancing achieved using minmisses is not as optimal as desired. followed by the third real server. with the fastest servers typically getting the most connections over time. Although the hash metric can provide more even load balancing at any given instance. The server with the fewest current connections is considered to be the best choice for the next client connection request. and shut down connections faster than slower servers. all requests for a specific IP destination address will be sent to the same server. For Server Load Balancing. This option is the most self-regulating.2 Command Reference Server Load Balancing Metrics Using the metric command. This is useful for applications where client information must be retained between sessions. These metrics are described in the following table: Table 7-7 Real Server Group Metrics (/cfg/slb/group/metric) Option and Description minmisses Minimum misses. and so on. the number of connections currently open on each real server is measured in real time. hash Like minmisses. If the Load Balancing statistics indicate that one server is processing significantly more requests over time than other servers. When specified for a real server group performing Server Load Balancing. the issuing process starts over with the first real server. When all the real servers in this group have received at least one connection. roundrobin Round robin. all requests from a specific client will be sent to the same server. helping to maximize successful cache hits. Best statistical load balancing is achieved when the IP address destinations of load balanced frames are spread across a broad range of IP subnets. consider using the hash metric. When minmisses is specified for a real server group performing Application Redirection. This is useful for applications where client information must be retained on the server between sessions. Server load with this metric becomes most evenly balanced as the number of active clients increases.Alteon OS 22. the hash metric uses IP address information in the client request to select a server. January 2005 . With this option. all requests from a specific client will be sent to the same server. This is particularly useful in caching applications. the second real server gets the next connection. new connections are issued to each server in turn: the first real server in this group gets the first connection. it is not as effective as minmisses when servers leave and reenter service. Minmisses can also be used for Server Load Balancing. you can set a number of metrics for selecting which real server in a group gets the next client request. For Application Redirection.

If the first hash hits a dead server.2 Command Reference Table 7-7 Real Server Group Metrics (/cfg/slb/group/metric) Option and Description response Real server response time. roundrobin. With phash enabled. 315393-J. hash. phash The phash metric utilizes the best features of the hash and minmiss metrics. the smaller is the weight assigned to that server. NOTE – Under the leastconns.0. This results in a request always being sent to a server that is up. January 2005 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 371 . Weights are not applied when using the minmisses metrics. With this option. the real server weights are adjusted so they are inversely proportional to the number of octets that the real server processes during a given interval. and phash metrics. The higher the bandwidth used. a higher proportion of connections are given to servers with higher weights. The weights are adjusted so they are inversely proportional to a moving average of response time.Alteon OS 22. bandwidth Bandwidth Metric. the switch monitors and records the amount of time that each real server takes to reply to a health check. With the phash metric. when real servers are configured with weights (see the weight option on page 359). it will rehash for that request based on the actual number of servers that are up. This can improve load balancing among servers of different performance levels. With this option. The response time is used to adjust the real server weights. the first hash will always be the same even if a real server is down. the switch supports an even load distribution (hash) and stable server assignment (minmiss) even when a server in the group goes down.

Configuring a virtual server requires the following parameters: Creating a virtual server IP address Adding TCP/UDP port and real server group Enabling the virtual server (disabled by default) Table 7-8 Virtual Server Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/virt) Command Syntax and Usage service <virtual port or name> Displays the Virtual Services Menu. To get more information about well-known ports.0. 372 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-J. and so on. The allowable port range is from 13 to 65534. The virtual port name can be a well-known port name. Client requests directed to the virtual server’s IP address will be balanced among the real servers available to it through real server group assignments.Alteon OS 22.2 Command Reference /cfg/slb/virt <virtual server number> Virtual Server SLB Configuration [Virtual Server service vip dname cont weight avail addrule remrule layr3 ena dis del cur 1 Menu] Virtual Service Menu Set IP addr of virtual server Set domain name of virtual server Set BW Contract Set Global SLB weight for virtual server Set Global SLB availability for virtual server Add Global SLB rule to domain Remove Global SLB rule from domain Enable/disable layer 3 only balancing Enable virtual server Disable virtual server Delete virtual server Display current virtual configuration This menu is used for configuring the virtual servers which will be the target for client requests for Server Load Balancing. vip <virtual server IP address> Sets the IP address of the virtual server using dotted-decimal notation. see the sport command on page 385. To view services menu options. The virtual server created within the switch will respond to ARPs and PINGs from network ports as if it was a normal server. such as http. see page 375. ftp. the service number. January 2005 .

2 Command Reference Table 7-8 Virtual Server Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/virt) Command Syntax and Usage dname <34 character domain name>|none Sets the domain name for this virtual server. To define the hostname. and so forth). see hname below. The response time of this site is divided by this weight before the best site is assigned to a client. It does not include the hostname portion (www. The maximum number of characters that can be used in a domain name is 34. addrule <rule. To clear the dname. This option is necessary for some server applications where state information about the client system is divided across different simultaneous connections. the more connections that will be directed to the local site. Rule allows the server selected for GSLB to use different metric preference based on time of the day.0. The server selected for GSLB selects the first rule that matches the domain and starts with the first metric in the preference list of the rule. the BW contract can be changed for a selected virtual server with /cfg/slb/virt <number>/service <number>/cont. layr3 disable|enable Normally.gov. Each rule has metric preference list. www2. 315393-J.com. and so forth). . and the Internet group code (. The default number of contracts is set at 256 for Alteon OS. . However. avail Sets the Global SLB availability for the virtual server. specify the name as none. 1-64> Adds Global SLB rule to domain. All the frames that match this virtual server services are assigned this BW contract if the previously assigned contract for the frame has lower or equal precedence of the virtual server contract. 1-64> Removes Global SLB rule from domain. Each domain has one or more rules. the client IP address is used with the client Layer 4 port number to produce a session identifier. January 2005 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 373 . It associates all the connections from the same client with the same real server while any connection exists between them.edu. cont <BWM contract (1-256)> Enter a new Bandwidth Management Contract for this virtual service.org.Alteon OS 22. The domain name typically includes the name of the company or organization. When the layr3 option is enabled (disabled by default). The higher the weight value.com. the Layer 4 software will allow the client to connect to a different server. the switch uses only the client IP address as the session identifier. The default is 1. and also in applications where TCP fragments are generated. An example would be foocorp. ftp. all services under this virtual server are assigned this BW contract. remrule <rule. By default. . Remote site response times are divided by the real server weight before selection occurs. The default is rule 1. If the real server to which the client is assigned becomes unavailable. weight Sets the Global server weight for the virtual server.

Use this command with caution. This option activates the virtual server within the switch so that it can service client requests sent to its defined IP address. as it will delete the options that have been set for this virtual server. dis This option disables the virtual server so that it no longer services client requests.0.Alteon OS 22. 374 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-J. cur Displays the current configuration of the specified virtual server. January 2005 . del This command removes this virtual server from operation within the switch and deletes it from the Layer 4 switching software configuration.2 Command Reference Table 7-8 Virtual Server Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/virt) Command Syntax and Usage ena Enables this virtual server.

Set BW cont of an SLB string specific to this service pbind .Alteon OS 22.0.Enable/disable UDP balancing frag . The following example shows a menu for http (port 80) services.Set hash parameter dbind .Set real port hname .Enable/disable delayed binding udp .Delete virtual service cur .Set real server group number rport .Enable/disable remapping UDP server fragments nonat .Set multi response count thash . See page 380 to view the menu options for configuring virtual services on port 554 for RTSP.Set BW contract for this virtual service urlcont . NOTE – Select virtual service port 554 to configure RTSP traffic.Set HTTP SLB processing cont .Enable/disable DNS query load balancing http .Display current virtual service configuration 315393-J.Set persistent binding type rcount . January 2005 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 375 .Enable/disable HTTP redirects for Global SLB direct .Enable/disable only substituting MAC addresses dnsslb .Enable/disable direct access mode sip .Set hostname httpslb . [Virtual Server 1 http Service Menu] group .Enable/disable X-Forwarded-For for proxy mode epip .2 Command Reference /cfg/slb/virt <server number>/service <virtual port or name> Virtual Server Service Configuration This menu is used for configuring services assigned to a virtual server.Enable/disable pip selection based on egress port/vlan del .Enable/disable SIP load balancing xforward .

others: Requires inputs for a particular header field You may choose to combine or select applications to load balance using the commands and and/or or. to add a hostname for Web services. By default.2 Command Reference Table 7-9 Virtual Server Service Configuration Options (/cfg/slb/virt/service) Command Syntax and Usage group <real server group number (1-1024)> Sets a real server group for this service. starting point of the cookie value.Alteon OS 22. number of bytes to be extracted. this is the same as the virtual port (service virtual port). it will carry the value entered for the Virtual Server IP (vip) contract. The default is set at 1. 0 for VIP default> Sets a Bandwidth Management contract for this virtual service. enable/disable checking for cookie in URI browser: Enable or disable SLB. “www. For example: httpslb <application> httpslb <application> and|or <application> cont <BWM Contract (0-256). You will be prompted for the following: Cookie name. Note: If you enter 0 for the service contract. use the command: # hname none httpslb urlslb|host|cookie|browser|urlhash|headerhash|others Load balances on the following applications: urlslb: Enable or disable URL SLB host: Enable or disable for virtual hosting cookie: Enable or disable cookie-based SLB for cookie-based preferential load balancing. hname <hostname>|none Sets the hostname for a service added. based on browser type urlhash: Enable or disable URL hashing based on URI headerhash: Hashes on any HTTP header value. This is used in conjunction with dname (above) to create a full host/domain name for individual services. 376 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-J. the switch will map the virtual port to this real port.0. If a dname of “foocorp.foocorp. You will be prompted to enter the number (1 to 256) of the real server group to add to this service. If rport is configured to be different than the virtual port defined in /cfg/slb/virt <number>/service <virtual port>. rport <real server port (0-65534)> Defines the real server TCP or UDP port assigned to this service. January 2005 .com” would be the full host/ domain name for the service. To clear the hostname for a service. you could specify www as the hostname. The default number of contracts is set at 256 for Alteon OS. The format for this command is: # hname <hostname> For example.com” was defined (above).

HTTPS). they will be connected to the most appropriate real server based on the load balancing metric.0. The clientip option uses the client IP address as an identifier. which is a set of protocols built on top of TCP/IP that allow an application server and user to communicate over an encrypted HTTP session. different services from the same client may not map to the same server. and associates all connections from the same client with the same real server until the client becomes inactive and the connection is aged out of the binding table. see “Cookie-Based Persistence” on page 381. Web site search results. In Alteon OS 22. SSL provides authentication. all subsequent SSL sessions which present the same session ID will be directed to the same real server. since the services are related.2 Application Guide. This may be necessary for some server applications where state information about the client system is retained on the server over a series of sequential connections. and security.Alteon OS 22.0.2. The session ID is a value comprising 32 random bytes chosen by the SSL server that gets stored in a session hash table. Whereas. if it has previously been enabled for a particular application. By enabling the sslid option. or until the maximum count is reached. The disable option allows you to disable presistent binding. pbind clientip|cookie<p|r|i>|sslid|disable Enables or disables persistent bindings for a real server (disabled by default). The Alteon Application Switch will examine each server response until the cookie is found. January 2005 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 377 . with clientip command enabled. The sslid option is for Secure Sockets Layer (SSL). see the Persistence chapter in the Alteon OS 20. An alternative approach may be to use the real server group metrics minmisses or hash (see Server Load Balancing Metrics). 315393-J. For more information on cookie option. Only use this command when a string is shared by multiple virtual services and each service requires a separate bandwidth. The default number is 1. When the client resumes activity after their connection has been aged out. For detailed information on Cookie-Based Persistence. such as with SSL (Secure Socket Layer. HTTP and HTTPs traffic from the same client will map to the same server irrespective of the load balancing metric used. or multi-page Web forms. rcount <response count number (1–16)> Sets the maximum response counter for cookie-based persistence. The cookie option uses a cookie defined in the HTTP header or placed in the URI for hashing. The default is set at 1024. The connection timeout value (set in the Real Server Menu) is used to control how long these inactive but persistent connections remain associated with their real servers. non-repudiation.2 Command Reference Table 7-9 Virtual Server Service Configuration Options (/cfg/slb/virt/service) Command Syntax and Usage urlcont <URL path ID> <BW contract> Sets the Bandwidth Management contract of a string specific to this virtual service.

the switch will use default hash parameter.0. This option is enabled by default. see the cache command in Table 7-14 on page 390. http disable|enable Enables or disables HTTP Redirection for Global server load balancing on a per VIP basis. and minmisses SLB metrics. frag disable|enable Enables or disables remapping server fragments for virtual port. For example. 378 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-J. no session table entry is created. you have to bind to a new server every time.Alteon OS 22. If the user does not select any. For more information. Enabling this command protects the server from Denial of Service (DoS) attacks. This option is disabled by default. When stateless is enabled. Tunable hash feature allows the user to select different parameters for computing the hash value used by the hash. nonat disable|enable Enables or disables substituting only the MAC address of the real server (disabled by default). you must activate UDP balancing for the particular virtual servers that clients will communicate with using UDP. Since no session is created. You can configure this option if the service(s) to be load balanced include UDP and TCP. which is sip. udp disable|enable|stateless Enables or disables UDP load balancing for a virtual port (disabled by default). Disabling HTTP Redirection causes GSLB to use proxy IP address for HTTP. the source IP address. DNS uses UDP and TCP. or both source IP address and source port. phash. direct disable|enable Enables or disables Direct Access Mode (DAM) on the selected virtual service. January 2005 . dbind disable|enable Enables or disables Layer 4 Delayed Binding for TCP service and ports. disable caching on that filter for optimal performance.2 Command Reference Table 7-9 Virtual Server Service Configuration Options (/cfg/slb/virt/service) Command Syntax and Usage thash sip|sip+sport Defines hash parameter. This option is used for Direct Server Return (DSR) in an one-armed load balancing setup. For example. In those environments. Note: If applying a filter to the same virtual server IP address on which UDP load balancing is enabled. This option does not substitute IP addresses. so that frames returning from server to the client do not have to pass through the switch. dnsslb disable|enable Enables or disables DNS-based Layer 7 content load balancing. This command takes precedence over the command to globally enable or disable Direct Access Mode on the switch.

X-Forward-For is a special header that stores and identifies the client IP information. Using SIP on your switch. This feature is applicable only on HTTP protocol. January 2005 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 379 .Alteon OS 22. 315393-J. You can use only minmiss as the load balancing metric since the load balancing is performed based on the Call-ID. The SIP processing occurs at application level in order to parse out messages coming from client side as well as the server side. you can scan and hash calls based on a SIP Call-ID header to an MCS server. cur Displays the current configuration of services on the specified virtual server. Use this command with caution. Nortel Networks’ MCS is a SIP enabled application Server.2 Command Reference Table 7-9 Virtual Server Service Configuration Options (/cfg/slb/virt/service) Command Syntax and Usage sip disable|enable Enables or disables Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) server load balancing on the Alteon OS. By default. the SP selects the proxy IP address based on ingress port or VLAN. SIP is a UDP-based application-level control protocol for creating. When enabled. you can load balance Nortel’s MCS (Multimedia Communication Server) proxy servers. epip disable|enable Enables or disables proxy IP selection based on egress port or VLAN. modifying and terminating sessions with one or more participants (documented in RFC3261). del This command removes this virtual service from operation within the switch and deletes it from the Layer 4 switching software configuration.0. you can configure SIP service on the service port 5060 for a virtual server. as it will delete the options that have been set for this virtual service. you can configure the SP to select proxy IP address based on the egress port or VLAN. When SIP is enabled. xforward disable|enable Enables or disables inserting the X-Forward-For header into the client HTTP request to preserve the client IP information. Using the epip command. You need to turn Direct Access Mode (DAM) on to perform SIP load balancing.

the destination IP address.foocorp. to add a hostname for Web services. either hash or patternMatch. thash sip|sip+sport Defines hash parameter. patternMatch: If you select this option. you could specify www as the hostname. This is used in conjunction with dname (above) to create a full host/domain name for individual services. If a dname of “foocorp. dis: If set at disable. RTSP will use Layer 4 metrics to select a server to load balance. “www. Tunable hash feature allows the user to select different parameters for computing the hash value used by the hash. hname <hostname>|none Sets the hostname for a service added. the switch will match the string or pattern within the URL to select a server based on the string configured on the real server. the switch will use default hash parameter. the source IP address. hash: If you use hash. If the user does not select any. For example.com” was defined (above). The default is hash. which is sip. and minmisses SLB metrics. phash. RTSP will parse the URL and will hash the URL to select a server to load balance. The format for this command is: # hname <hostname> For example.com” would be the full host/ domain name for the service.2 Command Reference /cfg/slb/virt <server number>/service 554 Virtual Server RTSP Configuration This menu displays virtual services configured on service port 554 for RTSP traffic.0. 380 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-J. use the command: # hname none rtspslb hash|patternMatch|dis This Layer 7 load balancing option sets the type of rtspslb. To clear the hostname for a service. thereby enabling the service. January 2005 .Alteon OS 22. or both source IP address and source port. [Virtual Server group hname rtspslb thash del cur 1 rtsp Service Menu] Set real server group number Set hostname Set RTSP URL load balancing type Set hash parameter Delete virtual service Display current virtual service configuration Table 7-10 Virtual Server Service Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/virt 1/service 554) Command Syntax and Usage group <real server group number (1-1024)> Sets real server group number.

Cookie-Based Persistence The cookie option is used to establish cookie-based persistence.Alteon OS 22. 315393-J. and has the following command syntax and usage: pbind cookie <mode> <name> <offset> <length> <URI> Each parameter is explained in the following table.0.2 Command Reference Table 7-10 Virtual Server Service Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/virt 1/service 554) Command Syntax and Usage del Deletes this virtual service. cur Displays the current virtual service configuration. January 2005 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 381 .

In active cookie mode (or cookie rewrite mode). and not the network administrator. For cookie rewrite.. generates the cookie value on behalf of the server. To look for cookie in the HTTP header. The switch uses this cookie to bind to the appropriate server. the extracting length must be 8 or 16. Enter the starting point of the cookie value (1-64) Enter number of bytes to extract (1-64).0. The following three modes are available: p: Passive mode. a duration <days[:hours[:minutes]]> (e. 382 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-J.. enter d to disable this option..Alteon OS 22. see the Alteon OS 22. a date <MM/dd/yy[@hh:mm]> (e... i: Insert mode. the server responds with the data.g. If you want to look for cookie name or value in the URI. Look for cookie in the URI. Insert cookie mode expiration parameters are as follows: Enter insert-cookie expiration as either: .2 Command Reference Table 7-11 Command Syntax and Usage for pbind cookie Options (/cfg/slb/virt/service/pbind cookie) Option <mode> Description Specify the mode for cookie-based persistence. 12/31/01@23:59) .0. or none <return> <name> <offset> <length> <URI> Enter the name of the cookie. January 2005 .g. and the switch inserts an Alteon persistence cookie into the data packet. In this mode. For more information on Cookie-Based Persistence. r: Rewrite mode.2 Application Guide. the switch. When a client sends a request without a cookie. enter e to enable this option.. The switch intercepts this persistence cookie and rewrites the value to include server-specific information before sending it to the client. the network administrator configures the Web server to embed a cookie in the server response that the switch looks for in subsequent requests from the same client. 45:30:90) .

Set action group .Set which addresses are network address translated vlan .Set source IP mask dip . There are several options available in the Filter Advanced Menu (/cfg/slb/filt/adv.Set destination IP address dmask . Each filter can be configured to allow. and each physical switch port can be configured to use any combination of filters.Delete filter cur . deny.Set real server group for redirection rport .Set real server port for redirection nat .2 Command Reference /cfg/slb/filt <filter number> SLB Filter Configuration [Filter 1 Menu] adv . redirect or perform Network Address Translation on traffic according to a variety of address and protocol specifications.0.Set IP protocol sport . page 388) that can be used to provide more information through syslog. January 2005 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 383 .Set source TCP/UDP port or range dport .Alteon OS 22.Set source MAC address dmac .Disable filter del .Enable filter dis .Set destination TCP/UDP port or range action .Set source IP address smask . This command is disabled by default.Set filter name smac .Set destination IP mask proto .Set vlan id invert .Set destination MAC address sip . The types of information include: IP protocol TCP/UDP ports TCP flags ICMP message type 315393-J.Enable/disable filter inversion ena .Display current filter configuration The switch supports up to 2048 traffic filters.Filter Advanced Menu name .

0)> This IP address mask is used with the dip to select traffic which this filter will affect. see “Defining IP Address Ranges for Filters” on page 387. January 2005 . name <31 character name>|none Allows the user to assign a name to a filter. 255. To view menu options. smac any|<MAC address (such as.2 Command Reference The following parameters are required for filtering: Set the address. masks. Specify an IP address in dotted decimal notation. 255.0> This IP address mask is used with the sip to select traffic which this filter will affect. A range of IP addresses is produced when used with the smask below. For more information. 00:60:cf:40:56:00)> Sets the destination MAC address.255. see “Defining IP Address Ranges for Filters” on page 387. Specify an IP address in dotted decimal notation. The default is any. traffic with this destination IP address will be affected by this filter. nat) Enable the filter Add the filter to a switch port Enable filtering on the Alteon Application Switch port Table 7-12 Filter Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/filt) Command Syntax and Usage adv Displays the Filter Advanced Menu. redirect. see page 388. A range of IP addresses is produced when used with the dmask below. The default is any if the destination MAC address is any. sip any|<IP address> If defined. traffic with this source IP address will be affected by this filter.255.Alteon OS 22. or any. and/or protocol that will be affected by the filter Set the filter action (allow. The default is any if the source MAC address is any. dmask <IP subnet mask (such as. The default is any. 384 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-J. smask <IP subnet mask (such as. See details below for more information on producing address ranges. or any.255. 00:60:cf:40:56:00)> Sets the source MAC address.255. dip any|<IP address> If defined. For more information.0. deny. dmac any|<MAC address (such as.

2 Command Reference Table 7-12 Filter Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/filt) Command Syntax and Usage proto any|<number>|<name> If defined. name. The default is any. name. or “any”. January 2005 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 385 . Specify the port number. or “any”.Alteon OS 22. 315393-J. range. traffic with the specified real server TCP or UDP destination port will be affected by this filter. name. Listed below are some of the well-known ports: Number 20 21 22 23 25 37 42 43 53 69 70 79 80 109 110 Name ftp-data ftp ssh telnet smtp time name whois domain tftp gopher finger http pop2 pop3 dport any|<name>|<port>|<port>-<port> If defined. Specify the protocol number. The default is any.0. or “any”. The default is set at any. Number 1 2 6 17 89 112 Name icmp igmp tcp udp ospf vrrp sport any|<name>|<port>|<port>-<port> If defined. just as with sport above. range. traffic from the specified protocol is affected by this filter. Listed below are some of the well-known protocols. traffic with the specified TCP or UDP source port will be affected by this filter. Specify the port number.

Allows the user to specify a target filter ID that the filter search should jump to when a match occurs. For valid Layer 4 health checks. This is used in conjunction with the nat option (mentioned in this table) and can also be combined with proxies. If dest is specified.0. The goto action causes filter processing to jump to a designated filter. nat goto 386 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-J. Perform generic Network Address Translation (NAT). this command specifies whether Network Address Translation (NAT) is performed on the source or the destination information. Define a real server group (1 to 16) to which redirected traffic will be sent. nat source|dest When nat is set as the filter action (see above). this must be configured whenever TCP protocol traffic is redirected.Alteon OS 22. if transparent proxies are used for Network Address Translation (NAT) on the Alteon Application Switch (see the pip option in Table 7-22 on page 399). To specify the new filter to goto. January 2005 . use the /cfg. Destination (dest) is set as the default filter. such as for web cache redirection. the frame’s source IP address (sip) and port number (sport) are replaced with the dip and dport values. Layer 4 processing must be activated (see the /cfg/slb/on command on page 356). the frame’s destination IP address (dip) and port number (dport) are replaced with the sip and sport values. Discard frames that fit this filter’s profile. group <real server group number (1-1024)> This option applies only when redir is specified at the filter action. rport must be configured for all Application Redirection filters. The default is set at 0. In addition.slb/filt/adv/goto command. Also. If source is specified. This defines the real server TCP or UDP port to which redirected traffic will be sent. The default is group 1 rport <real server port (0-65535)> This option applies only when redir is specified at the filter action.2 Command Reference Table 7-12 Filter Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/filt) Command Syntax and Usage action allow|deny|redir|nat|goto Specifies the action this filter takes: allow deny redir Allow the frame to pass (by default). effectively skipping over a block of filter IDs. Redirect frames that fit this filter’s profile. This can be used for building basic security profiles. This can be used to map the source or destination IP address and port information of a private network scheme to/from the advertised network IP address and ports. Filter searching action will then continue from the designated filter ID.

Defining IP Address Ranges for Filters You can specify a range of IP address for filtering both the source and/or destination IP address for traffic. A VLAN has a set of member ports.2 Command Reference Table 7-12 Filter Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/filt) Command Syntax and Usage vlan any|<VLAN ID (1 . 315393-J. This option is disabled by default.4090)> Sets the ID of the VLAN that is to be filtered.0. But by applying this filter to a VLAN. dis Disables this filter. to determine if a client request’s destination IP address should be redirected to the cache servers attached to a particular switch. ena Enables this filter. You have to manually add the filter to the port. the destination IP address is masked (bitwise AND) with the dmask and then compared to the dip. and the smask (source) or dmask (destination) is the mask which is applied to produce the range. invert disable|enable Inverts the filter logic. If the conditions for the filter are not met. perform the assigned action. and applies a filter to a VLAN that already has been configured. January 2005 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 387 . If the conditions of the filter are met. which means the switch will match any VLAN ID of the incoming packet This command allows filters to be configured on per VLAN basis. The default is any. For example.Alteon OS 22. don’t act. del Deletes this filter. This option allows you to match the VLAN ID of the switch against the VLAN ID of the incoming packet. the sip (source) or dip (destination) defines the base IP address in the desired range. the filter does not get applied to all the member ports of this VLAN. cur Displays the current configuration of the filter. When a range of IP addresses is needed.

0. January 2005 .Set GOTO filter ID reverse .0. you could configure the switch with two filters so that each would handle traffic filtering for one half of the Internet. To do this.Enable/disable logging fwlb .1p Advanced Menu tcp .Display current advanced filter configuration 388 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-J.0.255.Set hash parameter for intrusion detection SLB thash .0.0.255 128.0.Set ICMP message type cont .0.IP Advanced Menu layer7 .255.Set IDS server group for intrusion detection SLB idshash .0 /cfg/slb/filt <filter number>/adv Advanced Filter Configuration [Filter 1 Advanced Menu] 8021p .Set NAT or L7 lookup session timeout idsgrp .0.2 Command Reference As another example.Enable/disable creating session for reverse side traffic proxyip .255.Set hash parameter for Filter goto .0 128.Enable/disable WAN link load balancing dbind .Enable/disable delayed binding for redirection pbind .0.255 0.Enable/disable client proxy epip .Set client proxy IP address cache . you could define the following parameters: Table 7-13 Filtering IP Address Ranges Filter #1 #2 Internet Address Range dip dmask 128.Enable/disable pip selection based on egress port/vlan cur .0.0.0.Alteon OS 22.Security Menu icmp .0 255.Layer 7 Advanced Menu security .255.0 .Enable/disable caching sessions that match filter log .802.Set BW contract for the reverse session tmout .0.Enable/disable firewall redirect hash method linklb .Set BW contract revcont .TCP Advanced Menu ip .0 128.0 0.127.Enable/disable persistent binding for redirection proxy .

January 2005 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 389 . the contract number is set at 256. IEEE 802.2 Command Reference Table 7-14 Advanced Filter Menu (/cfg/slb/filt/adv) Command Syntax and Usage 8021p Displays 8021p Advanced Menu. By default. see page 391.0. see page 392. ip Sets IP advanced menu. For a list of ICMP message types.Alteon OS 22. 1-1024>|none Sets the IDS server group for intrusion detection server load balancing. see page 397 icmp any|<number>|<type. cont <BWM Contract (1-256)> Sets the Bandwidth Management Contract. revcont <BW Contract. destination IP (dip).2 Application Guide. layer7 Displays Layer7 advanced menu. tmout <even number of minutes (4-32768)> Sets the session timeout in an even number of minutes. Using this command you can preserve 802. To view menu options. "icmp list" for list> Sets the ICMP message type.0. 1-256> Sets the Bandwidth Management contract for the reverse traffic session. To view menu options. see the Alteon OS 22. tcp Displays the TCP Flags advanced menu.1p bits in all the frames that pass through the switch. When filtering is used for IDSLB. see Table 7-18 on page 394. or both. To view menu options. security Displays the filter Security Menu. To view menu options. idshash sip|dip|both Sets the hash metric parameter for Intrusion Detection System Server Load Balancing: source IP (sip). see page 395. To view menu options. The default is set at 4 minutes.1p is the specification for prioritizing the net- work traffic at the Layer 2 level in your switch. 315393-J. idsgrp <real server group number. This command helps you assign a different Bandwidth management contract from the one configured on the ingress filter. For a detailed description of filtering and ICMP. each filter added to an IDSLB-enabled port can be assigned a unique IDS real server group. The default is set at any. see page 393.

390 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-J. Exercise caution while applying cacheenabled and cache-disabled filters to the same switch port. this option is disabled. cache disable|enable Enables or disables caching sessions that match the filter. In order to use this feature. Filter searching will then continue from the designated filter ID. so that the switch can bypass checking for subsequent frames that match the same criteria. By default. the switch uses the proxy IP address configured under /cfg/slb/pip command. The option both allows you to perform tunable hash on both source IP address and the destination IP address at the same time. reverse disable|enable Enables or disables the creation of a session for traffic coming from the reverse side. linklb disable|enable Enables or disables WAN Link Load Balancing.0. fwlb disable|enable To ensure that the stateful inspection behavior of firewalls is maintained. Note: Cache should be disabled if applying a filter to virtual server IP address while performing UDP load balancing (see “udp disable|enable|stateless” on page 378). If the dport is 80 or 21. The option sip+sport allows you to perform tunable hash on both source IP address and source port at the same time. By default. proxyip <IP address> Defines client proxy IP address. The switch uses the configured proxy IP address to replace the client's IP address. goto <filter ID> Allows the user to specify a target filter ID that the filter search should jump to when a match occurs. enabling this option changes the hash of the filter from a WCR hash to a FWLB hash. this option is disabled. This command allows for the creation of a session entry for reverse traffic to avoid inspecting traffic in both directions. The Default is auto. January 2005 . log disable|enable Enables or disables generating of syslog messages when a filter is hit. The sip option allows you to perform tunable hash on source IP address for this filter. A cache-enabled filter creates a session entry in the switch. Cache is enabled by default. If the user does not configure the proxy IP address in the filter.2 Command Reference Table 7-14 Advanced Filter Menu (/cfg/slb/filt/adv) Command Syntax and Usage thash auto|sip|dip|both|sip+sport Allows you to choose hash parameter to use for filter redirection. a hashing algorithm is used to ensure that inbound packets and outbound packets for a pair of IPSA/IPDA traverse through the same firewall. This option is disabled by default. Use this command to specify the new filter to go to.Alteon OS 22. the action on this filter must be set to goto. The option dip allows you to perform tunable hash on destination IP address for this filter.

The 802.2 Command Reference Table 7-14 Advanced Filter Menu (/cfg/slb/filt/adv) Command Syntax and Usage dbind disable|enable Enables or disables delayed binding for redirection on this filter. this is enabled. If disabled. or when other forms of translation (such as Application Redirection or NAT) are preferred. the SP selects the proxy IP address based on ingress port or VLAN. any proxy defined for the switch port using the pip command (see page 399) is not performed for traffic meeting the filter criteria.1p bits in the packet's VLAN header. This option applies only when redir or nat is specified as the filter action. By default.1p value matching cur . By default.1p Advanced Menu This feature provides the Alteon OS the capability to filter IP packets based on the 802. cur Displays the current advanced filter configuration.1p value match . This is useful when certain traffic must retain original IP address information.1p value.1p Advanced Menu] value . /cfg/slb/filt <filter number>/adv/8021p 802.Set 802. epip disable|enable Enables or disables proxy IP selection based on egress port or VLAN. [802.0.1p bits specify the priority that you should give to the packets while forwarding them. The value is the priority bits information in the packet structure.Display current 802. pbind disable|enable Enables or disables persistent binding for redirection on this filter. The packets with a higher (non-zero) priority bits are given forwarding preference over packets with numerically lower priority bits value. Using the epip command. January 2005 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 391 . Enable or disable proxy IP address translation for traffic matching the filter criteria.Alteon OS 22.1p configuration Table 7-15 8021p Advanced Menu Options (/cfg/slb/filt/adv/8021p) Command Syntax and Usage value <0-7> Defines 802. you can configure the SP to select proxy IP address based on the egress port or VLAN. proxy disable|enable Enables or disables client proxy.Enable/disable 802. 315393-J.

392 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-J. the switch matches the original priority bits information with the priority bits information after the frame processing is complete.Enable/disable TCP FIN matching . ack disable|enable Enables or disables TCP ACK (acknowledgement) flag matching.Alteon OS 22. rst disable|enable Enables or disables TCP RST (reset) flag matching. this option is disabled.2 Command Reference Table 7-15 8021p Advanced Menu Options (/cfg/slb/filt/adv/8021p) Command Syntax and Usage match disable|enable Enables or disables matching of 802. this option is disabled. January 2005 . By default.Enable/disable TCP RST matching . By default. syn disable|enable Enables or disables TCP SYN (synchronize) flag matching. this option is disabled.1p configuration. psh disable|enable Enables or disables TCP PSH (push) flag matching. this option is disabled.Enable/disable TCP URG matching . By default. /cfg/slb/filt <filter number>/adv/tcp Advanced Filter TCP Configuration [TCP Advanced urg ack psh rst syn fin ackrst cur Menu] . By default.Enable/disable TCP SYN matching .1p value. Table 7-16 Advanced Filter TCP Menu (/cfg/slb/filt/adv/tcp) Command Syntax and Usage urg disable|enable Enables or disables TCP URG (urgent) flag matching.Enable/disable TCP ACK matching . By default.Display current TCP configuration These commands can be used to configure packet filtering for specific TCP flags.Enable/disable TCP ACK or RST matching . cur Displays current 802.0.Enable/disable TCP PSH matching . this option is disabled. When the Management Processor needs to reuse the packet to send to the destination.

this option is disabled. 64-65535>|any Defines the limit of IP packet’s length.Alteon OS 22.Display current IP configuration Table 7-17 IP Advanced Menu Options (/cfg/slb/filt #/adv/ip) Command Syntax and Usage tos <0-255> Sets IP type of service (ToS) and the value of the type of service. length <IP packet length (in bytes).Set IP TOS mask newtos . tmask <0-255> Sets IP type of service mask.2 Command Reference Table 7-16 Advanced Filter TCP Menu (/cfg/slb/filt/adv/tcp) Command Syntax and Usage fin disable|enable Enables or disables TCP FIN (finish) flag matching. ackrst disable|enable Enables or disables TCP acknowledgement or reset flag matching. option disable|enable Enables or disables IP option matching.Set IP maximum packet length option . refer to RFC 1340 and 1349.Set IP Type of Service tmask . Any packet exceeding the maximum length will not match the filter. cur Displays the current Access Control List TCP filter configuration. /cfg/slb/filt <filter number> /adv/ip IP Advanced Menu [IP Advanced Menu] tos .Set new IP TOS length . By default. 315393-J. By default. January 2005 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 393 .0. For more information on ToS.Enable/disable IP option matching cur . newtos <0-255> Sets new IP type of service. this option is disabled.

2 Command Reference Table 7-17 IP Advanced Menu Options (/cfg/slb/filt #/adv/ip) Command Syntax and Usage cur Displays the current advanced IP settings for the selected filter. ICMP Message Types The following ICMP message types are used with the /cfg/slb/filt/adv/icmp command.Alteon OS 22. You can list all ICMP message types with the /cfg/slb/filt/adv/icmp list command. Table 7-18 ICMP Message Types Type # Message Type 0 3 4 5 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 echorep destun quench redir echoreq rtradv rtrsol timex param timereq timerep inforeq inforep maskreq maskrep Description ICMP echo reply ICMP destination unreachable ICMP source quench ICMP redirect ICMP echo request ICMP router advertisement ICMP router solicitation ICMP time exceeded ICMP parameter problem ICMP timestamp request ICMP timestamp reply ICMP information request ICMP information reply ICMP address mask request ICMP address mask reply 394 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-J. January 2005 .0.

Set BW cont of an URL path specific to this filter addrd . remrd <string id to redirect from (1-512)> <string id to redirect to (2-512)> Removes an HTTP redirection mapping that was added using the addrd command described above. January 2005 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 395 . addstr <string id (1-1024)> Adds the string ID to this filter for L7 filtering. The string is defined under: /cfg/slb/ layer7/slb/add. 315393-J. please refer to your Application Guide. then send back an HTTP redirection message back to the client that contains information in the second string ID.Alteon OS 22. For more details.Remove HTTP redirection mapping addstr . rdsnp disable|enable Enables or disables WAP RADIUS snooping on this filter. remstr <string id (1-1024)> Removes the string ID for Layer 7 filtering.Enable/disable WAP RADIUS Snooping rdswap . This command tells the filter that if it matches on the first string id.Display current layer 7 configuration Table 7-19 Layer 7 Advanced Filter Menu Options (/cfg/slb/filt/adv/layer7) Command Syntax and Usage urlcont <URL path ID> <BW contract> Sets the URL path BW contract for this filter. Only use this command when a string is shared by multiple filters and each filter requires a separate bandwidth.Enable/disable layer 7 lookup (parsing) of all packets cur . Radius snooping allows the Alteon OS to examine RADIUS accounting packets for client information.Enable/disable active FTP NAT l7lkup .2 Command Reference /cfg/slb/filt <filter number> /adv/layer7 Layer 7 Advanced Filter Configuration Menu [Layer 7 Advanced Menu] urlcont .Add HTTP redirection mapping remrd .Enable/disable RADIUS/WAP Persistence ftpa . addrd [1>2] Adds an HTTP redirection mapping.0. This information is needed to add to or delete static session entries in the switch’s session table so that it can perform the required persistency for load balancing. The string is defined under: /cfg/slb/layer7/ slb/add. Strings are defined under: /cfg/slb/layer7/slb/add.Enable/disable Layer 7 content lookup parseall .Remove string for layer 7 filtering rdsnp .Add string for layer 7 filtering remstr .

This command replaces the urlp and l7deny commands found in earlier releases of Alteon OS. please refer to your Application Guide. This command is enabled by default. the filter performs a lookup on layer 7 content such as HTTP strings or headers. and normally all data packets in a session are examined by the filter. ftpa disable|enable Enables or disables active FTP Client Network Address Translation (NAT).0. parseall disable|enable Enables or disables parsing of all packets in a session where layer 7 lookup is being performed. deny. By default. this option is disabled. The server replies with a Radius Accept or Reject frame. After the RAS receives the Radius accept packet. that is PIP:PPORT. When a client in active FTP mode sends a PORT command to a remote FTP server. When parseall is disabled.Alteon OS 22. it sends a RADIUS accounting start packet on UDP port 1813 to the bound server. For more details. the switch will look into the data part of the frame and replace the client 's private IP address with a proxy IP (PIP) address. cur Displays the current advanced Layer 7 configuration of the filter including the Radius/Wap persistence settings. January 2005 . redir).2 Command Reference Table 7-19 Layer 7 Advanced Filter Menu Options (/cfg/slb/filt/adv/layer7) Command Syntax and Usage rdswap enable|disable Enables or disables WAP RADIUS persistence on this filter. this feature enables content-intelligent redirection or content-intelligent deny filtering. Once this packet is found. The switch forwards this reply to the RAS. This feature allows for RADIUS and WAP persistence by binding both (RADIUS accounting and WAP) sessions to the same server. When enabled. 396 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-J. l7lkup disable|enable Enables or disables layer 7 lookup on this filter. The application switch snoops on the RADIUS accounting start packet for the “framed IP address” attribute. A WAP client is first authenticated by the RADIUS server on UDP port 1812. The real server port (RPORT) will be replaced with a proxy port (PPORT). subsequent packets can be ignored. However. The “framed IP address” attribute is used to rebind the RADIUS accounting session to a new server. When combined with a filter action (for example. layer 7 lookup is turned off for the remaining packets in the session. some sessions may contain only one packet containing the layer 7 content.

0. Currently. Pattern groups are added using the /cfg/security/ pgroup/add command. Once this packet is found. pmatch disable|enable Enables or disables pattern matching on this filter. subsequent packets can be ignored. parseall disable|enable Enables or disables pattern string lookup (parsing) of all packets in a session where pattern matching is being performed. pattern matching is turned off for the remaining packets in the session. To view menu options see page 398. and ICMP protocols. January 2005 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 397 .Alteon OS 22. cur Displays the current configuration.2 Command Reference /cfg/slb/filt <filter number> /adv/security SLB Filter Advanced Security Menu [Security Menu] ratelim addgrp remgrp pmatch matchall parseall cur Rate Limiting Menu Add pattern match group for layer 7 filtering Remove pattern match group for layer 7 filtering Enable/disable pattern matching Enable/disable match-all criteria for layer 7 filtering Enable/disable layer 7 lookup (parsing) of all packets Display current Security configuration Table 7-20 Layer 7 Advanced Filter Menu Options (/cfg/slb/filt/adv/security) Command Syntax and Usage ratelim Displays the Rate Limiting Menu. addgrp <pattern match group id> Adds a pattern group to this filter. matchall disable|enable Enables or disables matching of all configured patterns before the filter can perform the deny action. the switch allows rate limiting to be enabled on TCP. remgrp <pattern match group id> Removes a pattern group from this filter. This feature enables the switch to detect and block UDP or ICMP-based DOS attacks that slow down or decapitate the servers. This command is enabled by default. and normally all data packets in a session are examined by the filter. some sessions may contain only one packet containing the layer 7 content. However. When parseall is disabled. UDP. 315393-J. The protocol-based rate limiting limits the traffic coming from specific clients based on the IP address of the client.

after which new TCP connection requests or packets from the client are allowed once again to pass through. any new TCP connection requests or UDP/ICMP packets from the client are blocked. holddur <minutes. or ICMP rate limiting Display current rate limiting configuration Table 7-21 Rate Limiting Advanced Menu Options (/cfg/slb/filt/adv/security/ ratelim) Command Syntax and Usage maxconn <# of connections in units of 10 (0-255)> Defines maximum connections for rate limiting. 398 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-J. UDP.Alteon OS 22. The client is held down for a specified number of minutes. When blocking occurs.0. When the number of new connections or packets exceeds the configured limit. and ICMP. or ICMP rate limiting. The time window can be configured per filter and not globally on all the filters. or ICMP rate limiting Disable TCP. 1-65535> Defines time window for rate limiting. timewin <seconds. Rate limiting is applied to the protocol configured on the filter. A time window is a configured period of time (in seconds) during which packets are allowed to be received. The supported protocols are: TCP. UDP. ena Enables the protocol for rate limiting. UDP. UDP. dis Disables TCP. The hold-down duration can be configured per filter and not globally on all the filters. January 2005 . 2-65535> Defines hold down duration for rate limiting. the client is said to be held down. cur Displays the current rate limiting configuration.2 Command Reference /cfg/slb/filt <filter number> /adv/security/ ratelim Advanced Security Rate Limiting Configuration Menu [Rate Limiting maxconn timewin holddur ena dis cur Menu] Set maximum connections for rate limiting Set time window for rate limiting Set hold down duration for rate limiting Enable TCP.

To make port filter changes take effect immediately. the switch port re-maps real server IP addresses and Layer 4 port values to virtual server IP addresses and Layer 4 ports.2 Command Reference /cfg/slb/port <port number> Port SLB Configuration [SLB port 1 Menu] client . re-mapping virtual server IP addresses and port values to real server IP addresses and ports. expanding your topology options. or another switch. the port can be enabled or disabled to process client Layer 4 traffic.Display current port configuration Alteon OS switch software allows you to enable or disable processing independently for each type of Layer 4 traffic (client and server) on a per port basis. server disable|enable Ports configured to provide real server responses to client requests require real servers to be connected to the Layer 4 switch. router. This option is disabled by default.Enable/disable filtering add . January 2005 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 399 . Table 7-22 Port Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/port) Command Syntax and Usage client disable|enable For Server Load Balancing. 315393-J.Enable/disable server processing rts .Enable/disable intrusion detection server load balancing cur .Enable/disable use of PIP for ingress traffic filt .Enable/disable RTS processing hotstan . NOTE – When changing the filters on a given port.Add filter to port rem . Ports configured to process client request traffic bind servers to clients and provide address translation from the virtual server IP address to the real server IP address. Traffic not associated with virtual servers is switched normally. This option is disabled by default.Enable/disable inter-switch processing proxy . Traffic not associated with virtual servers is switched normally. When server processing is enabled. Maximizing the number of these ports on the Layer 4 switch will improve the switch’s potential for effective Server Load Balancing.Remove filter from port idslb .0.Alteon OS 22. directly or through a hub. it may take some time before the port session information is updated so that the filter changes take effect.Enable/disable client processing server .Enable/disable hot-standby processing intersw . clear the session binding table for the port (see the clear command in Table 8-3 on page 436).

Use this option and the intersw option in conjunction with VRRP hot-standby failover.0. For more information on using rts.Alteon OS 22. January 2005 . rem <filter ID (1 to 2048)|block of IDs (first-last)> Removes a filter or a block of filters from use on this port. intersw disable|enable Enables or disables inter-switch processing. 1-100. cur Displays the current system parameters. This option is disabled by default. see the “Firewall Load Balancing” and “VPN Load Balancing” chapters in the Alteon OS 22. When pip is used with Application Redirection filters. For example. IDSLB is done at the end of filter processing or at the end of client processing where filtering is not enabled.0. 400 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-J. each filter’s rport parameter must also be defined (see rport on page 384).2 Application Guide. For example. client address information in Layer 4 requests is replaced with this proxy IP address. This option is enabled for ports connected to a peer switch and is disabled by default. IDSLB is enabled on a port and a real server group is designated for IDSLB. rather than around it. as is possible in complex routing environments. Enter filter ID (1 to 2048) or a contiguous block of filter IDs. In Server Load Balancing applications. Enabling the filter sets up the Real Server to look into the VPN session table. This option is disabled by default. proxy disable|enable Enables or disables a proxy for traffic that ingresses this port. 1-100. This option is disabled by default. This option is used for firewall load balancing or VPN load balancing applications.2 Command Reference Table 7-22 Port Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/port) rts disable|enable Enables or disables Return to Sender (RTS) load balancing on this port.This option is disabled by default. Proxies are also useful for Application Redirection and Network Address Translation (NAT). idslb disable|enable Enables or disables Intrusion Detection System Server Load Balancing on this port. filt disable|enable Enables or disables filtering on this port.0. When the PIP is defined. Enable rts on all client-side ports to ensure that traffic ingresses and egresses through the same port. add <filter ID (1 to 2048)|block of IDs (first-last)> Adds a filter or a block of filters for use on this port. In the case of client processing. Enter filter ID (1 to 2048) or a contiguous block of filter IDs. this forces response traffic to return through the switch.2. In Alteon OS 22. hotstan disable|enable Enables or disables hot-standby processing. This option is disabled by default.

For more information. GSLB uses the health and response time to select the server in the GSLB selection engine. [Global SLB Menu] site .Display current Global SLB configuration Table 7-23 Global SLB Menu Options (/cfg/slb/gslb) Command Syntax and Usage site <remote site (1-64)> Displays the menu for a remote site.Set interval in seconds for remote site updates sesscap .Enable/disable HTTP redirect based GSLB usern . In addition. GSLB sends the health and response time together with the local session and CPU utilization information that are collectively known as remote site updates.Set sessions utilization capacity threshold (DSSPv2) cpucap .Set TCP port number for DSSPv2 remote site updates sinter .Remote Site Menu network .Rule Menu version .2 Command Reference /cfg/slb/gslb Global SLB Configuration Global Server Load Balancing (GSLB) at any given site performs periodic SLB health checks to determine the health and response time of the remote real server corresponding to the virtual server at the remote site. 315393-J. network <network (1-128)> Displays Network Preference Menu. see page 405.Enable/disable no remote real SLB encrypt . To view menu options. rule <rule (1-128)> Displays the Rule Menu. The switch performs this periodically on every remote site using Distributed Site State Protocol (DSSP). To view menu options.Enable/disable virtual service hostname matching http . To view menu options.Set sessions available capacity threshold dns . January 2005 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 401 .Set DSSP version 1 or 2 to send out remote site updates port . see page 406.Network Preference Menu rule . please refer to your Application Guide. see page 403.Enable/disable authoritative DNS direct based GSLB hostlk .Alteon OS 22.0.Globally turn Global SLB ON off . DSSP is a proprietary protocol that resides above TCP.Enable/disable HTTP redirect to remote real server name norem .Set CPU utilization capacity threshold (DSSPv2) mincon .Enable/disable encrypting remote site updates on .Globally turn Global SLB OFF cur .

sesscap <Session utilization capacity threshold (1-100)> Sets the threshold for session utilization capacity. The default configuration is 90%.Alteon OS 22. sinter <remote site updates interval in seconds. the switch will not perform HTTP Redirects. will be used to resolve the IP address for the domain. January 2005 . the hostname specified in the Virtual Service configuration. the client will be redirected to the domain name specified by the remote real server name plus virtual server domain name: <remote real server name> <virtual server domain name> 402 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-J. mincon <available sessions threshold. the client is redirected to the new site's IP address.2 Command Reference Table 7-23 Global SLB Menu Options (/cfg/slb/gslb) Command Syntax and Usage version <DSSP version 1 or 2> Defines the version of Distributed Site State Protocol (DSSP) that is used to send out the remote site updates. 10-7200> Sets the time interval in seconds for remote site updates. When enabled. usern disable|enable Enables or disables an HTTP redirect to a real server name. only the domain name will be used to match. The default TCP port is 80. 0-65535> Defines the capacity threshold for the sessions available on the real server for GSLB. http disable|enable Enables or disables HTTP redirects to peer sites by this switch. in addition to the domain name. hostlk disable|enable Enables or disables lookups based on host or domain name in a GSLB configuration. cpucap <CPU utilization capacity threshold (1-100)> Sets the threshold for the CPU utilization capacity. When a site redirects a client to another site using an HTTP redirect. this switch will redirect client requests to peer sites if its own real servers fail or have reached their maximum connection limits. port <TCP port number> Sets the TCP port number for remote site updates for Global server load balancing. If usern is enabled. This option is enabled by default.0. This option is disabled by default. The range is between 10 and 7200 seconds. When enabled (default). If disabled. but will instead drop requests for new connections and cause the client’s browser to eventually issue a new DNS request. The default configuration is 90%. dns disable|enable Enables or disables DNS direct-based GSLB. When disabled.

Each virtual server has a domain name. This option can be performed only once the optional GSLB software is activated (refer to “Activating Optional Software” on page 441). Each site has a virtual server for the domain. off Turns GSLB off for this switch. but will not hand off requests to this switch. 315393-J. For HTTP protocols.2 Command Reference Table 7-23 Global SLB Menu Options (/cfg/slb/gslb) Command Syntax and Usage norem This command enables or disables no-remote real server load balancing. GSLB is turned off. January 2005 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 403 . The combination of a virtual server and a virtual service is called a domain.Alteon OS 22. This option allows the GSLB feature to work with older versions of Web OS that do not encrypt DSSP messages on Activates Global Server Load Balancing (GSLB) for this switch. encrypt This command enables or disables encrypting of DSSP updates. /cfg/slb/gslb/site <site number> GSLB Remote Site Configuration The switch initiates a global server selection to direct client traffic to the best server for a given domain. If enabled. cur Displays the current Global SLB configuration.0. By default. Each virtual server has a number of virtual services. Any active remote sites will still perform GSLB services with each other. Each virtual service has a host name. you need to disable the http parameter in the same menu. If disabled. if you want to do no-remote-real-server load balancing. Each domain has one or more sites. Each virtual service has a group of real servers. the switch will not do remote real server load balancing for non-http protocols. the switch will not encrypt the DSSP messages going out of the switch.

secon <server IP address> If the remote site is configured with a redundant switch.Alteon OS 22. Both services cannot use the same port. enter the IP address of the IP interface for the remote secondary switch here. By default.Enable/disable remote site updates ena . If your local firewall does not permit this traffic. configure the Alteon OS Browser-Based Interface (BBI) to use a different service port (see the /cfg/sys/access/wport option on page 259). name <31 character name>|none Sets the name of the remote site.Disable remote site del . The remote real servers are the virtual servers at the remote sites. If the remote site primary switch fails. January 2005 . this switch will send regular Distributed Site State Protocol (DSSP) updates to its remote peers using HTTP port 80.Delete remote site cur . Use dotted decimal notation. disable the updates. 404 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-J. Global Server Load Balancing uses service port 80 on the IP interface for DSSP updates. the switch will not send state updates.Set remote site name update . The default is set at none. ena Enables this remote site for use with Global Server Load Balancing.Enable remote site dis . there is a local virtual server but no remote virtual server. Table 7-24 GSLB Remote Site Menu Options (/cfg/slb/gslb/site) Command Syntax and Usage prima <server IP address> Defines the IP interface IP address of the primary switch at the remote site used for Global Server Load Balancing. The local virtual server has a number of local virtual services Each local virtual service has a group of local or remote real servers. If enabled (default).2 Command Reference At a local site for a domain. Note: When update is enabled. If both are enabled. the local switch will address the remote site secondary switch instead. [Remote site 1 Menu] prima .Display current remote site configuration Up to 64 remote sites can be configured. the Alteon OS Web-based interface also uses port 80. update disable|enable Enables or disables remote site updates. If disabled.Set primary switch IP address of remote site secon .0.Set secondary switch IP address of remote site name .

/cfg/slb/gslb/network <network number> GSLB Network Preference Configuration Menu Network preference selects a server based on the preferred network of the source IP address for a given domain. [Network 1 Menu] sip . mask <IP subnet mask (such as.Set source IP and network netmask addvirt .255. The switch will no longer use this remote site for Global Server Load Balancing. del Removes this remote site from operation and deletes its configuration.Enable network dis .0.255. Specify an IP address in dotted decimal notation.Disable network del .Add virtual server to network remvirt . 315393-J.Remove virtual server from network addreal . The preferred network contains a subset of the servers for the domain.Display current network configuration Table 7-25 GSLB Network Menu Options (/cfg/slb/gslb/network) Command Syntax and Usage sip <IP address> Defines the source (client) IP address. cur Displays the current remote site configuration.0)> This IP address mask is used with the source IP (SIP) address to find a correct virtual server IP address to respond to a DNS request. 255.Delete network cur . Up to 128 network preference numbers can be set.Add remote real server to network remreal . A range of IP addresses is produced when used with the mask option.2 Command Reference Table 7-24 GSLB Remote Site Menu Options (/cfg/slb/gslb/site) Command Syntax and Usage dis Disables this remote site. January 2005 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 405 .Set source IP address mask .Alteon OS 22.Remove remote real server from network ena .

remvirt <virtual server number (1-1024)> Removes a virtual server from the network. addreal <real server number (1-1023)> Adds a real server to the network. dis Disables the network.0. January 2005 .2 Command Reference Table 7-25 GSLB Network Menu Options (/cfg/slb/gslb/network) Command Syntax and Usage addvirt <virtual server number (1-1024)> Adds a virtual server to the network. del Deletes the network entry. The GSLB selection selects the first rule that matches the domain and starts with the first metric in the metric preference list of the rule. /cfg/slb/gslb/rule GSLB Rule Configuration Menu Rules allow the GSLB selection to use different metric preferences based on time-of-day. Each rule has a metric preference list. cur Displays the current Internet network entry configuration. No virtual server is added by default.Alteon OS 22. You can configure one or more rules on each domain. remreal <real server number (1-1023)> Removes a real server from the network. [Rule 1 Menu] metric start end ttl rr dname ena dis del cur - Metric Menu Set start time for rule Set end time for rule Set Time To Live in seconds of DNS resource records Set DNS resource records in DNS response Set network preference domain name for rule Enable rule Disable rule Delete rule Display current rule configuration 406 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-J. ena Enables the network.

Higher numbers may reduce the amount of DNS traffic. rr <rr (1-10)> Sets the DNS resource records that how many DNS resource records will be returned in the DNS response. cur Displays the current rule configuration. with default at 60) that the DNS response from the switch (indicating site of best service) will remain in the cache of DNS servers. but will generate more DNS traffic. dname <34 character (wildcard "*" allowed) domain name> | none Defines the domain name for the rule for network preference. The default is 2 records. ena Enables the rule.0. You can use wildcard “*” while creating the domain name. A lower value may increase the ability of the GSLB system to adjust to sudden changes in traffic load. end <hour (0-23)> <minutes (0-59)> Defines the end time for the rule. Default is none. del Deletes the rule.2 Command Reference Table 7-26 GSLB Rule Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/gslb/rule) Command Syntax and Usage metric <metric (1-16)> Displays Metric Preference Menu. 315393-J. ttl <time to live in seconds (0-65535)> Specifies the duration (from 0 to 65535 seconds. The default is zero. dis Disables the rule. January 2005 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 407 . but may slow GSLB’s response to sudden traffic changes. start <hour (0-23)> <minutes (0-59)> Defines the start time for the rule. see page 408. The maximum length for the domain name can be 34 characters. To view menu options. The default is zero.Alteon OS 22.

0. cur Displays the current configuration of the metric.Add network to gmetric=network remnet .Set metric to use to select next server addnet .2 Command Reference /cfg/slb/gslb/rule/metric Global SLB Rule Metric Menu [Rule 1 Metric 1 Menu] gmetric . This command applies only if you select network as the metric. The default is none.Display current Layer 7 configuration Table 7-28 Layer 7 Resource Definition Menu Options (/cfg/slb/layer7) Command Syntax and Usage redir Displays the Web Cache Redirection Menu.Alteon OS 22. remnet Allows you to delete a network that was added to the selected metric.Set timeout for incomplete delayed binding connections cur . To view menu options. January 2005 .Server Load Balancing Menu dbindtm . addnet Allows you to add a network to the selected metric.Web Cache Redirection Menu slb .Remove network from gmetric=network cur .Display current metric configuration Table 7-27 Global SLB Rule Metric Menu Options (/cfg/slb/gslb/rule/metric) Command Syntax and Usage gmetric leastconns|roundrobin|response|geographical|network|random|availability|qos|minmisses|hash|local|always|remote|none Defines the metric to select the next real server for GSLB. 408 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-J. /cfg/slb/layer7 Layer 7 SLB Resource Definition Menu [Layer 7 Resource Definition Menu] redir . see page 409.

/cfg/slb/layer7/redir Web Cache Redirection Configuration [Web Cache Redirection Menu] urlal .Enable/disable server loadbalance based on HTTP header cur .Enable/disable URL hashing based on URI header . the switch will redirect all requests that contain Cookie: in the HTTP header to the origin server.0.Display current WCR configuration Table 7-29 Web Cache Redirection Menu Options (/cfg/slb/layer7/redir) Command Syntax and Usage urlal disable|enable Enables or disables auto-ALLOW for non-GETs to origin servers. If this command is enabled. cookie disable|enable Enables or disables auto-ALLOW for cookie to origin servers. 315393-J.2 Command Reference Table 7-28 Layer 7 Resource Definition Menu Options (/cfg/slb/layer7) Command Syntax and Usage slb Displays the Server Load Balancing Menu.Enable/disable auto-ALLOW for non-GETs to origin servers cookie . see page 411.Enable/disable auto-ALLOW for Cookie to origin servers nocache . the switch will compare the URI against the expression table to determine whether it should redirect all requests that contain Cookie: in the HTTP header to a cache server or origin server. cur Displays the current Layer 7 configuration. dbindtm <10-60 seconds> Sets the timeout for incomplete delayed binding connections. This option is disabled by default. To view menu options. If this command is enabled. January 2005 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 409 . the switch will compare the URI against the expression table to determine whether all non-GET requests should be redirected to a cache server or origin server. This option is enabled by default. If this command is disabled.Alteon OS 22. If this command is disabled.Enable/disable no-cache control header to origin servers hash . the switch will redirect all non-GET requests to the origin server.

or Pragma: no-cache in HTTP/1. If hashing is enabled.0 header to a cache server or origin server. header disable|enable host|useragent|others Enables or disables server load balancing based on HTTP header.Alteon OS 22.1 header. This option is disabled by default. 410 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-J. the switch will redirect all requests that contain Cache-Control: nocache in HTTP/1. January 2005 . If this command is disabled. or Pragma: no-cache in HTTP/1. the switch will compare the URI against the expression table to determine whether it should redirect requests that contain Cache-Control: no-cache in HTTP/ 1. This option is disabled by default.0 header to the origin server. If this command is enabled. you can set the length of URI that will be used to hash into the cache server by specifying a number from 1-255. This option is enabled by default.0.2 Command Reference Table 7-29 Web Cache Redirection Menu Options (/cfg/slb/layer7/redir) Command Syntax and Usage nocache disable|enable Enables or disables no-cache control header to origin servers. hash disable|enable <number (1-255)> Enables or disables URL hashing based on the URI.1 header. If hashing is disabled. cur Displays the current URL expression table. the switch will only use the host header field to calculate the hash key.

1 to perform HTTP request methods. January 2005 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 411 . The default message is “No available server to handle this request. addmeth <Method. If you choose l7lkup string. 315393-J.0.Remove SLB string for load balance rename . If you choose pattern string.Add HTTP method type remmeth .0. Alteon OS 22. The methods GET and HEAD must be supported by all general-purpose servers.Add SLB string for load balance remstr . you can define a string for server load balancing or a string for Layer 7 lookup.” addstr <l7lkup|pattern> Allows the user to define a string that can be used for server load balancing or filtering by selecting either a Layer 7 look up string or a pattern match.Display current configuration Table 7-30 Server Load Balance Resource Menu Options (/cfg/slb/layer7/slb) Command Syntax and Usage message <64 byte error message> Sets the message that will be displayed when an error occurs. rename <SLB string ID> <SLB string> Renames the SLB string for load balancing.2 supports 22 request methods by default.0 and HTTP 1.Remove HTTP method type case . remstr <SLB string ID> Removes this SLB string from the real server. These strings will only be used for filtering string pattern matching.Enable/disable case sensitive for string matching cont . All other methods are optional.Rename SLB string for load balance addmeth . you will have the option to choose between ascii or binary strings on a specific offset of the IP frame. The software supports both HTTP 1.2 Command Reference /cfg/slb/layer7/slb Server Load Balance Resource Configuration Menu [Server Loadbalance Resource Menu] message . You can see a list of supported default methods by using the command cur in this menu.Set HTTP error message addstr .Alteon OS 22.Set BW contract for the SLB string cur . HTTP allows an open-ended set of methods to be used to indicate the purpose of a request. A method is case-sensitive. 1-32> Allows you to add HTTP request methods of maximum 32 characters to your switch software.

cur Displays the currently configured SLB strings and their associated string IDs (index numbers) and the supported HTTP request methods. /cfg/slb/wap WAP Configuration [WAP Options Menu] tpcp . This option is disabled by default. cont <SLB string ID [1-1024]> <BW contract number [1-256]> Sets the Bandwidth Management contract for a specified string for the SLB string ID. Using this command you can do either case sensitive or case insensitive string comparison. cur Displays the current WAP configuration 412 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-J. January 2005 .Display current WAP configuration Table 7-31 WAP Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/wap) Command Syntax and Usage tpcp disable|enable Enables or disables the TPCP external notification for Add/Delete session requests.Enable/disable WAP TPCP external notification debug .Alteon OS 22. If you disable case sensitive.0.WAP debug level cur .2 Command Reference Table 7-30 Server Load Balance Resource Menu Options (/cfg/slb/layer7/slb) Command Syntax and Usage remmeth <Method ID> Allows you to remove HTTP methods from your switch software. debug <wap debug level (0-10)> Sets the debug level for tracing the WAP related messages. all load balancing strings and all the request strings arriving on the switch will have to be converted to lower case before doing any string comparison. case disable|enable Enables or disables case sensitivity for string matching. The default is set at 0.

Enable/disable syncing BWM configuration state .2 Command Reference /cfg/slb/sync Synchronize Peer Switch Configuration [Config Synchronization Menu] peer . This option is enabled by default.Enable/disable syncing proxy IP addresses peerpips . prios disable|enable Enables or disables syncing VRRP priorities. pips disable|enable Enables or disables synchronizing proxy IP addresses.0.Set stateful failover update period cur .Enable/disable syncing VRRP priorities pips .Enable/disable syncing filter configuration ports . see page 414. filt disable|enable Enables or disables synchronizing filter configuration. Peer proxy IP addresses are used in VRRP Active/Active configuration. and VRRP configuration updates using /oper/slb/ synch. This option is disabled by default. To view menu options. peerpips disable|enable Enables or disables synchronizing the peer proxy IP addresses. a peer must be configured and enabled on each switch. This option is disabled by default. Switches being synchronized must use the same administrator password. January 2005 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 413 .Enable/disable syncing port configuration prios . Peers are sent SLB. ports disable|enable Enables or disables synchronizing Layer 4 port configuration.Display current Layer 4 sync configuration To synchronize the configuration between two switches. 315393-J. Table 7-32 Synchronization Menu Options (/cfg/slb/sync) Command Syntax and Usage peer <peer switch number (1-2)> Displays the Sync Peer Switch Menu.Enable/disable syncing persistent session state update . FILT. This option is disabled by default. This option is enabled by default.Alteon OS 22.Synch Peer Switch Menu filt . This option is enabled by default.Enable/disable syncing peer proxy IP addresses bwm .

The default is 0. This option is enabled by default. to the backup switch at the specified update interval.Disable peer switch del . Switches being synchronized must use the same administrator password. dis Disables the peer for this switch. cur Displays the current Layer 4 synchronization configuration. The active switch sends update packets of new persistent binding entries. The default value is 30 seconds. update <seconds.2 Command Reference Table 7-32 Synchronization Menu Options (/cfg/slb/sync) Command Syntax and Usage bwm disable|enable Enables or disables synchronizing Bandwidth Management configuration between Master and backup switches. this option is disabled. if any. /cfg/slb/sync/peer <peer switch number> Peer Switch Configuration [Peer Switch 1 Menu] addr . 414 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-J. January 2005 .0.0 ena Enables the peer for this switch. a peer must be configured and enabled on each switch.Alteon OS 22. By default.Delete peer switch cur .Display current peer switch configuration To synchronize the configuration between two switches.0.0. This option is disabled by default. state disable|enable Enables or disables stateful failover for synchronizing the persistent session state. Table 7-33 Peer Switch Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/sync/peer) Command Syntax and Usage addr <IP address> Sets the peer switch IP address.Set peer switch IP address ena .Enable peer switch dis . 1–60> Sets the stateful failover update interval.

Display current Layer 4 advanced configuration Table 7-34 Layer 4 Advanced Menu Options (/cfg/slb/adv) Command Syntax and Usage synatk Displays SYN Attack Detection Menu.SYN Attack Detection Menu smtport .Alteon OS 22.Enable/disable graceful real server failure matrix .Set management network mmask .Enable/disable Virtual Service Statistics rtsvlan .Set management subnet mask pmask .Service Mapping Table Real Port Menu imask .Set virtual and real IP address mask mnet .0.Set persistent mask intrval . 315393-J.Enable/disable Virtual Matrix Architecture tpcp .Session table fast-age (1 sec) period bit shift slowage . January 2005 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 415 .2 Command Reference Table 7-33 Peer Switch Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/sync/peer) Command Syntax and Usage del Deletes the peer for this switch cur Displays the current peer switch configuration.Enable/disable Ingress Port For Session Table Binding fastage .Enable/disable Direct Access Mode grace . /cfg/slb/adv Advanced Layer 4 Configuration [Layer 4 Advanced Menu] synatk . see page 421.Enable/disable Source MAC address substitution direct .Enable/disable using VLAN info for real server lookup portbind . To view menu options.Set SLB session attack inspection interval allowlim .Set SLB session attack alert allowable limit submac .Enable/disable Transparent Proxy Cache Protocol vstat .Session table slow-age (2 min) period bit shift cur .

0)> Configures the real and virtual server IP address mask using dotted decimal notation. Typically.255.Alteon OS 22. mmask <IP subnet mask (such as 255.255.255. imask <IP subnet mask (such as 255.0. January 2005 . direct disable|enable Enable/disables Direct Access Mode to real servers/services. To view menu options. Using this command you can add or remove a number of real server service port(s) that will process client traffic by-passing the server.2 Command Reference Table 7-34 Layer 4 Advanced Menu Options (/cfg/slb/adv) Command Syntax and Usage smtport Displays Service Mapping Table (SMT) Real Server Port Menu. By default. intrval <time window for collecting sessions (0-3600)> This command allows you to configure the time interval (from one second to one hour) to specify how frequently you want to check the SLB sessions (attacks) the switch received. At the configured interval of time the switch will check if the number of sessions is within the configured limits.255. The default is 255. management traffic with this source IP address will be allowed direct (non-Layer 4) access to the real servers.255. The default is 255.255. If the number of sessions exceeds this limit.255. But if you enable this command.0)> Sets persistent mask. allowlim <allowable limit (1-2097104)> This command allows you to specify the maximum number of sessions the switch can receive at any given period of time. the source MAC is not modified for the packets going to the servers in an SLB environment.255. The default is 255. pmask <IP subnet mask (such as 255. the switch will substitute the source MAC address (for the packets going to the server) with the MAC address of the switch.255.255. A range of IP addresses is produced when used with the mmask option. This option also allows any virtual server to load balance any real server.255.0)> This IP address mask is used with the mnet to select management traffic which is allowed direct access to real servers. submac disable|enable Enables or disables Source MAC address substitution. 416 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-J.255. Specify an IP address in dotted decimal notation. mnet <IP address> If defined. see page 418. this option is disabled.255.255.255. the switch will generate a syslog and an SNMP trap to alert the administrator that the switch is under SLB attack. In other words. this service port’s client request will not be processed by the server processor. You can set this limit by using the next command in this menu: allowlim.

January 2005 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 417 . 315393-J.2 Command Reference Table 7-34 Layer 4 Advanced Menu Options (/cfg/slb/adv) Command Syntax and Usage grace disable|enable Enables or disables graceful real server failure. Each incremental increase of the value doubles the length of the interval. The default is 0. fastage <shift the fast-age (1sec) period 0-7 bits> Controls how frequently a fastage scan is performed. a session can remain in the session table for months.Alteon OS 22. The default is 0. The default interval is two seconds. Each incremental increase of the value doubles the length of the interval. this option is enabled.2 Application Guide).0. vstat disable|enable Enables or disables reporting of virtual service statistics. cur Displays the current Layer 4 advanced configuration. matrix disable|enable Enables or disables the use of Virtual Matrix Architecture on the Alteon Application Switch. The slowage scan is used to remove idle or non-TCP sessions from the session at the specified intervals. By default. a session can remain in the session table for a few minutes. Allows existing sessions to remain bound to a server after the server has been placed in the service failed state (for more information. The fastage scan is used to remove TCP sessions that have been closed with a FIN and sessions that have been identified by the slowage scan as idle for the maximum allowed period. By default. which causes the time to double per increment). portbind disable|enable Enables or disables the inclusion of the ingress port number in the session table look up. If a large value of fastage is used. rtsvlan disable|enable Enables or disables the use of VLAN for Return to Sender information on the real server. tpcp disable|enable Enables or disables the TPCP (Transparent Proxy Cache Protocol). (Value is set in bits rather than seconds. If a large value of slowage is used. slowage <shift the slow-age (2min) period 0-14 bits> Controls how frequently a slowage scan is performed.0. see “Service Failure” in the Alteon OS 22. The default interval is two minutes. this option is disabled. By default. This command is used for security reasons—the UDP port can be closed. this option is disabled.

Set SYN attack detection interval thrshld . cur Displays real port configuration.2 Command Reference /cfg/slb/adv/synatk SYN Attack Detection Configuration Menu [SYN Attack Detection Menu] intrval . 418 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-J.Alteon OS 22. January 2005 .Display real port configuration Table 7-36 Advanced SMT Real Server Port Menu Options (/cfg/slb/adv/smtport) Command Syntax and Usage add <real server port (2-65534)> This command allows you to add a service port to the real server that is configured to process client traffic by-passing the server processor.Set SYN attack alarm threshold cur . thrshld <SYN attack alarm threshold (new half-open sessions/second) (1-100000)> Sets the threshold of SYN attack alarm. /cfg/slb/adv/smtport Advanced SMT Real Server Port Configuration Menu [SMT Real Port Menu] add .Display current SYN attack detection configuration Table 7-35 SYN Attack Detection Menu Options (/cfg/slb/adv/synatk) Command Syntax and Usage intrval <SYN attack check interval in seconds (2-3600)> Sets the interval of SYN attack inspection. remove <real server port (2-65534)> This command allows you to remove a service port from the real server that is configured to process client traffic by-passing the server processor.Remove real port cur .Add real port remove . cur Displays the current SYN attack detection configuration.0.

315393-J.Alteon OS 22. ena Enables inbound link load balancing.2 Command Reference /cfg/slb/linklb Inbound Link Load Balancing configuration Menu [Inbound Linklb group ttl drecord ena dis cur Menu] Set real server group Set Time to Live of DNS resource records Domain Record Menu Enable Inbound Linklb Disable Inbound Linklb Display current Inbound Linklb configuration Table 7-37 Inbound Link Load Balancing Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/ linklb) Command Syntax and Usage group <real server group number (1-256)> Sets the real server ISP group number. drecord <domain record number (1-64)> Displays domain record menu. ttl <time to live in seconds (0-65535)> Sets the time-to-live for DNS resource records.0. dis Disables inbound link load balancing. To view menu options. see page 420. cur Displays current inbound link load configuration. January 2005 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 419 .

0.Delete Domain Record cur . del Deletes the domain records. January 2005 . ena Enables the domain records.Alteon OS 22.Disable Domain Record del . Default is none. dis Disables the domain records. 420 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-J.Set Domain Name entry . cur Displays the current domain records. entry <linklb entry number (1-8)> Displays the link load balancer’s mapping menu for the virtual and real servers.Virt Real Mapping Menu ena .Display current Domain Record configuration Table 7-38 Inbound Link Load Balancing Domain Record Menu Options (/cfg/slb/ linklb/drecord) Command Syntax and Usage domain <34 character domain name>|none Allows you to configure the domain name.2 Command Reference /cfg/slb/linklb/drecord Inbound Link Load Balancing Domain Record Menu [Domain Record Menu] domain . See page 390 to view menu options.Enable Domain Record dis .

0.Set Virtual Server Number real .Display current Entry configuration Table 7-39 Command Syntax & Usage virt <virtual server number. cur Displays the current real and virtual server mappings for drecords entries.Alteon OS 22. dis Disables the entry for drecords. ena Enables the entry for drecords.WAP Health Check Menu aphttp . 1-1024> Defines the virtual server number for mapping.Set Real Server Number ena .Display current Layer 4 advanced health check configuration 315393-J.LDAP version secret .Set interval of response and bandwidth metric updates cur .Scriptable Health Check Menu snmphc .Set RADIUS secret minter . del Deletes the entry for drecords. real Defines the real server number for mapping.Enable Entry dis .Enable/disable Allow HTTP Health Check on any port ldapver . /cfg/slb/advhc Advanced Health Check Configuration Menu [Layer 4 Advanced Health Check Menu] script .2 Command Reference /cfg/slb/linklb/drecord/entry Inbound Link Load Balancing Mapping Menu [Virt Real Mapping 1 Menu] virt . January 2005 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 421 .SNMP Health Check Menu waphc .Disable Entry del .Delete Entry cur .

0. waphc Displays the WAP Health Check Menu. When disabled. snmphc <SNMP health check number (1-5)> Displays the SNMP Health Check Menu. like HTTPs.Alteon OS 22. The secret value is a field of up to 32 alphanumeric characters that is used by the switch to encrypt a password during the RSA Message Digest Algorithm (MD5) and by the RADIUS server to decrypt the password during verification. this option is disabled. By default. aphttp disable|enable Enables or disables HTTP health checks on any port. the network administrator must configure two parameters in the switch: the /cfg/slb/secret value and the cntnt parameter with a username:password value. The default is 2. To view menu options. see page 426.2 Command Reference Table 7-40 Advanced Health Check Menu Options (/cfg/slb/advhc) Command Syntax and Usage script <health script number (1-16)> Displays the Scriptable Health Check Menu. The default is set at 10. ldapver <LDAP version> Sets the LDAP version to 2 or 3. see page 425. minter <number of seconds between updates (1-256)> This command sets the interval of response and bandwidth metric updates. To view menu options. cur Displays the current Layer 4 advanced health check configuration. you can use HTTP health checks only for HTTP service. secret <1-32 character secret> To perform application health checking to a RADIUS server. January 2005 . Enabling it will allow you to use it on any port. To view menu options. see page 423. 422 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-J. The default is none.

Add expect command to end of script bexpect . bsend <hex string> Sends a binary request string in hexadecimal format for the request packet through an open TCP or UDP port to the server.Add send command to end of script bsend . the users can define their own health checks of varied complexity. Up to 32 scripts can be configured. So both TCP and UDP services can be health-checked. 315393-J.Add additional send binary string to end of script expect .2 allows a maximum of 256 bytes to be entered.0. [Health Script 1 Menu] open .0. hex string (UDP)> Sends an ASCII request string through an open TCP or UDP port to the server.2 Command Reference / c f g / s l b / a d v h c / s c r i p t <health script number> Scriptable Health Checks Configuration Scriptable health checks provide a robust and extensible way to health check a group of real servers. Using one or more nsend commands allows you to generate a binary content of more than 256 bytes in length. nsend <additional hex string (UDP)> Allows you to append additional content to the packet generated by the bsend command. The Alteon OS 22. With these health checks.Add close command to end of script (TCP only) rem .Alteon OS 22.Add binary send command to end of script nsend .Remove last command from script del .Add depth command to end of script wait .Add offset command to end of script depth . The Health Script menu provides commands that can be used to define the health “script.Delete script cur .Add open command to end of script send .Display current script configuration Table 7-41 Scriptable Health Check Menu Options (/cfg/slb/adv/script) Command Syntax and Usage open <real port or name (such as: http)> <tcp|udp> Opens a TCP connection or specifies a UDP port for the health check. and the port number. You need to specify the protocol (TCP or UDP).Add binary expect command to end of script nexpect .Add additional expect binary string to end of script offset . The ASCII and binary-based scripts control how a group of real servers are healthchecked. January 2005 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 423 .Add wait command to end of script close .” The total number of characters cannot exceed 6144 bytes. send <text string (TCP).

the health check passes. 1-1464> Allows you to specify the depth (the window) in bytes beginning from the start of the UDP data area. rem Removes the last entered line from the script.Alteon OS 22. the server does not pass the expect step and the health check fails. If you do not see this string in any response packet before the health check interval or the configured wait window expires. The wait command should follow the offset and depth commands in the script. The wait window is set in the units of milli-seconds. otherwise the health check fails. January 2005 . you must do it after executing the bexpect command. nexpect <additional hex string (UDP)> Allows you to append additional content to the original content of the response packet specified by the bexpect command. 1-1464> Allows you to specify the offset from the beginning of the UDP data area to start matching the content specified in the expect command. depth <depth. wait <wait window in milliseconds (1-65535)> Allows the user to configure a wait window for the expected response. 424 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-J. bexpect <hex string> Allows you to configure binary content request string (in hexadecimal format) that you can search in each server response packet for successful health check on an open TCP port. or beginning from offset if offset was specified. del Deletes the current script.2 Command Reference Table 7-41 Scriptable Health Check Menu Options (/cfg/slb/adv/script) Command Syntax and Usage expect <text string (TCP). The wait window starts when the request is sent from the switch. If the expected response is received within the wait window. hex string (UDP)> Allows you to configure an ASCII request string that you can search in each server response packet for successful health check on an open TCP port. to search for the bexpect content. If you need to specify offset. offset <offset. close Closes TCP connection. cur Lists the current script configuration.0.

Alteon OS 22. weight disable|enable When enabled.Display current SNMP health check configuration Table 7-42 SNMP Health Check Menu Options (/cfg/slb/adv/snmphc) Command Syntax and Usage oid <object identifier.6.1.4. del Deletes the current SNMP health check.6.1.2.1. cur Displays the current SNMP Health Check configuration. for example. the health check fails if the response packet contains the value specified in the receive content (rcvnt) field. The format of the OID depends on the MIB file.7.Enable/disable readjusting of weights based on response del . January 2005 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 425 .OID to be sent in the SNMP request packet comm .1.11. invert disable|enable Enables or disables the inversion of the expected value.Enable/disable inversion of expected value weight .Community string used in the SNMP request packet rcvcnt .5. the real server weights are dynamically adjusted based on SNMP health check response.3. 315393-J.Delete SNMP health check cur . rcvcnt <expected content an integer value or a string> Enter the content the switch expects to receive from the SNMP agent on the real server.2 Command Reference /cfg/slb/advhc/snmphc SNMP Health Check Configuration [SNMP Health Check 1 Menu] oid .Expected value in the SNMP response packet invert .0 max 30 sub-identifiers> Specify the Object Identifier (OID) to be sent in the SNMP GET request packet. When the invert option is enabled. maximum 32 characters> Enter the community string used in the SNMP get request packet.1. an OID is of the form 1.1872.3. 1.0. comm <community string.1.2. The default community string is public. such as.

WTLS port number to health check couple . Application switches can be used to load balance the gateways in both modes of operation. WTP+WSP.Enable/disable coupling with RADIUS Accounting Service cur .WSP port number to health check wtpport .2 Command Reference /cfg/slb/advhc/waphc WAP Health Check Configuration Wireless Session Protocol (WSP) is used within the Wireless Application Protocol (WAP) suite to manage sessions between wireless devices and WAP content servers or WAP gateways. refer to the Application Guide. wtpport <wtp port number to health check (0-65534)> Defines the WTP port number to health check.WSP Health Check Content Menu wtpcnt . wtpcnt Displays WTP and WSP Health Check Content Menu.WTLS+WSP port number to health check wtlsprt . Alteon OS provides a content-based health check mechanism where customized WSP packets are sent to the WAP gateways. For further details. WTLS+WSP.0. Alteon OS allows you to configure three WAP gateway health check types for all four WAP services (WSP. To view menu options. wspport <wsp port number to health check (0-65534)> Enter the port number on which WSP health checks will be performed.WTP+WSP Health Check Content Menu wspport .Alteon OS 22. see page 428. WSP content health checks can be configured in two modes: connectionless and connectionoriented. To view menu options. 426 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-J. The default port number is 9201. [WAP Health Check Menu] wspcnt . in a manner similar to scriptable health checks. The default port number is 9200.WTP port number to health check wtlswsp . deployed on WAP gateways/ servers. Connectionless WSP runs on UDP/IP protocol. ports 9200 and 9202 and connectionoriented (WTP) traffic runs on ports 9201 and 9203. WTLS+WTP+WSP).Display current WAP health check configuration Table 7-43 WAP Health Check Menu Options (/cfg/slb/adv/waphc) Command Syntax and Usage wspcnt Displays WSP Health Check Content Menu. January 2005 . and the switch verifies the expected response. see page 429.

315393-J. WTP+WSP. then all of the four WAP services and Radius Accounting Service are disabled.0. WTLS+WSP. If the health check to any one of the four WAP services or Radius Accounting Service fails. January 2005 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 427 . The connection-oriented WTLS traffic uses default port 9203. wtlsprt <port number (0-65534)> Enter the port number on which WTLS health checks will be performed. WTLS+WTP+WSP) with Radius Accounting Service.Alteon OS 22. The connectionless encrypted WTLS traffic uses default port 9202. cur Displays the current WAP Health Check configuration.2 Command Reference Table 7-43 WAP Health Check Menu Options (/cfg/slb/adv/waphc) Command Syntax and Usage wtlswsp <wtls+wsp port number to health check (0-65534)> Defines the WTLS (Wireless Transport Layer Security) and WSP port number to health check. couple disable|enable Enables or disables coupling together of all the four WAP services (WSP.

0. sndcnt <send content as hexadecimal string> Enter a hexadecimal string that represents a connectionless WSP request to a WSP gateway.Content to be sent to the WAP gateway rcvcnt . rcvcnt <receive content as hexadecimal string> Enter a hexadecimal string that represents the content that the switch expects to receive from the WSP gateway. This string will be delivered to the WSP gateway.Display current WSP health check content configuration Table 7-44 WSP Content Health Check Options (/cfg/slb/advhc/waphc/wspcnt) Command Syntax and Usage offset <Offset in the received WSP packet (0-512)> Enter the offset value content of the received WSP packages.Alteon OS 22.2 Command Reference /cfg/slb/advhc/waphc/wspcnt WSP Content Health Check [WSP Health Check Content Menu] offset . January 2005 . 428 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-J. An offset value of 0 (default) sets the switch to start comparisons from the beginning of the content of the received packet.Content to be received from the WAP gateway cur .Offset in received WSP packet sndcnt . cur Displays the current WAP Health Check configuration.

CONNECT PDU to be sent to the sndcnt . rcvcnt <receive content as a hexadecimal string> Enter a hexadecimal string that represents the content that the switch expects to receive from the WSP gateway.Offset in received WSP PDU connect . An offset value of 0 (default) sets the switch to start comparisons from the beginning of WSP PDU of the received packet.Display current WTP+WSP health WAP gateway gateway the WAP gateway check content configuration Table 7-45 WTP and WSP Content Health Check Menu Options (/cfg/slb/advhc/ waphc/wtpcnt) Command Syntax and Usage offset <offset in the received WSP PDU> Enter the offset value content of the received WSP packets. 315393-J. cur Displays current WTP+WSP health check content configuration. This command allows you to customize the headers in the connect message. sndcnt <send content as hexadecimal string> Enter a hexadecimal string that represents a WSP request to a WSP gateway.GET PDU to be sent to the WAP rcvcnt .2 Command Reference /cfg/slb/advhc/waphc/wtpcnt WTP and WSP Content Health Check Menu This menu is used for configuring the health check for connection-oriented unencrypted WAP traffic. at which the comparison begins to match with the expected receive content.REPLY PDU to be received from cur . [WTP+WSP Health Check Content Menu] offset . January 2005 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 429 . The offset value is the number of bytes from the beginning of the WSP PDU.0.Alteon OS 22. connect <connect content as hexstring> Enter the content for the first switch-generated WSP session packet. This string will be delivered to the WSP gateway.

0.Remove port or VLAN from Proxy IP address cur . You can configure multiple proxy IP addresses based on either port or VLAN. January 2005 .2 Command Reference /cfg/slb/pip Proxy IP Address Configuration Menu You need to enable proxy IP address processing on the port to use this command.Alteon OS 22. You can configure up to 32 proxy IP addresses on per port or per VLAN basis. [Proxy IP Address Menu] type . add <IP address> <port number|vlan number>|<port number-port number|vlan number-vlan number> Allows you to add either a port or a VLAN to a proxy IP address. This command also allows you to remove all ports or VLANs assigned to any proxy IP address. 430 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-J.Set base type of Proxy IP address add . whether it is port-based or VLAN-based. cur Displays the current Proxy IP address configuration.Add port or VLAN to Proxy IP address rem . rem <<PIP ID> <port#|vlan#>|<port#-port#|vlan#-vlan#>> Allows you to remove a port or a VLAN from a proxy IP address.Display current Proxy IP address configuration Table 7-46 Proxy IP Address Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/pip) Command Syntax and Usage type <port|vlan> Defines the base type of the proxy IP address.

Display current peer Proxy IP address configuration Table 7-47 Peer Proxy IP Address Menu Options (/cfg/slb/peerpip) Command Syntax and Usage add <IP address> Allows you to add a proxy IP address to the server load balancing peer. without performing server processing on the packets of the other switch. This prevents the dropping of a packet or being sent to the backup switch in the absence of the proxy IP address of the peer switch. the switch is able to forward traffic from the other switch.2 Command Reference /cfg/slb/peerpip SLB Peer Proxy IP Address Menu When this command is enabled. January 2005 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 431 . This happens because the peer switches are aware of each other’s proxy IP addresses. 315393-J.0. rem <IP address> Allows you to remove a proxy IP address from the server load balancing peer.Add peer Proxy IP address rem . [Peer Proxy IP Address Menu] add . cur Displays the current proxy address configuration of the peer.Rem peer Proxy IP address cur . using Layer 2.Alteon OS 22.

2 Command Reference 432 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-J.0. January 2005 .Alteon OS 22.

Operational Virtual Router Redundancy Menu bwm .CHAPTER 8 The Operations Menu The Operations Menu is generally used for commands that affect switch performance immediately. the port returns to its normally configured operation.Operational Bandwidth Management Menu ip . 315393-J. /oper Operations Menu [Operations Menu] port . For example.Enter key to enable software feature rmkey . January 2005 433 . you can use the Operations Menu to immediately disable a port (without the need to apply or save the change). Port Mirroring menu options are accessible only to the Alteon AD4 and Alteon 184 WebSwitches.Operational IP Menu swkey . with the understanding that when the switch is reset.Change current user password clrlog .Operational Server Load Balancing Menu vrrp .Send NTP request The commands of the Operations Menu enable you to alter switch operational characteristics without affecting switch configuration. but do not alter permanent switch configurations.Clear syslog messages ntpreq .Enter software feature to be removed passwd .Operational Port Menu slb .

see page 439. clrlog Clears all syslog messages. see page 441. the Operational Border Gateway Protocol Menu. bwm Operational Bandwidth Management Menu. see page 435. To view menu options. January 2005 . To view menu options.Alteon OS 22. For details. passwd <15 char max> Allows the user to change the password.0. You need to enter the current password in use for validation. swkey <16-hexadecimal digit key to enable software feature> Sets key to enable software feature. To view menu options. see page 439. 434 Chapter 8: The Operations Menu 315393-J. slb Displays the Operational Layer 4 Menu. see page 442. which has one sub-menu/option. see page 436. ntpreq Allows the user to send requests to the NTP server. rmkey <software feature to be removed (GSL|BWM|Security)> Defines software feature to be removed. To view menu options. vrrp Displays the Operational Virtual Router Redundancy Menu.2 Command Reference Table 8-1 Operations Menu Options (/oper) Command Syntax and Usage port <port number> Displays the Operational Port Menu. To view menu options. see page 439. For details. ip Displays the IP Operations Menu.

and for changing Remote Monitoring (RMON) status on a port. The port will be returned to its configured operation mode when the switch is reset. Table 8-2 Operations-Level Port Menu Options (/oper/port) Command Syntax and Usage rmon disable|enable Temporarily enables/disables Remote Monitoring on the port.Enable/Disable RMON for port ena .0. dis Temporarily disables the port. January 2005 Chapter 8: The Operations Menu 435 . 315393-J. The port will be returned to its configured operation mode when the switch is reset. ena Temporarily enables the port.Enable port dis .Current port state Operations-level port options are used for temporarily disabling or enabling a port. cur Displays the current settings for the port.Alteon OS 22.Disable port cur .2 Command Reference /oper/port <port number> Operations-Level Port Options [Operations Port 1 Menu] rmon . The port will be returned to its configured operation mode when the switch is reset.

Global SLB Operations Menu sync . port.Real Server Group Menu gslb . gslb Displays Global SLB Operations Menu. the operations-level Server Load Balancing options are used for temporarily disabling or enabling real servers and synchronizing the configuration between the active/active switches. To view menu options. filter. The real server will be returned to its configured operation mode when the switch is reset.Disable real server clear . VRRP and other configurations on peers ena . and VR priorities on a peer switch (a switch that owns the IP address).Clear session table cur . To take effect.Current layer 4 operational state When the optional Layer 4 software is enabled.Alteon OS 22. see page 438. To view menu options. peers must be configured on the Alteon Application Switch and the administrator password on the switch must be identical. Table 8-3 Server Load Balancing Operations Menu Options (/oper/slb) Command Syntax and Usage group <real server group number (1-1024)> Displays the Real Server Group Menu.Synchronize SLB.0. sync Synchronizes the SLB. VRRP. January 2005 . ena <real server number (1-1023)> Temporarily enables a real server.2 Command Reference /oper/slb Operations-Level SLB Options [Server Load Balancing Operations Menu] group . 436 Chapter 8: The Operations Menu 315393-J. see page 437.Enable real server dis . Bandwidth Management configuration.

Enable real server in this group dis . 315393-J. 1-1023> [P .0.2 Command Reference Table 8-3 Server Load Balancing Operations Menu Options (/oper/slb) Command Syntax and Usage dis <real server number. cur Displays current operational state of the server group.2 Application Guide.Alteon OS 22. see “Disabling and Enabling Real Servers” in the Alteon OS 22. cur Displays the current SLB operational state. dis <real server number (1-1023)> Disables real server in this group.Current server group operational state Table 8-4 Real Server Group Operations Options (oper/slb/group) Command Syntax and Usage ena <real server number (1-1023)> Enables real server in this group. NOTE – This command provides for orderly server shutdown to allow maintenance on a server.0 sessions] p|n The disable command is used to temporarily disable real servers as follows: Using the p (persistent) option—immediately suspends assignment of connections to the specified real server (except for persistent http 1. /oper/slb/group Real Server Group Operations [Real server group 1 Menu] ena .0 sessions) by removing the real server from operation within its real server group and virtual server Using the n (none) option—immediately suspends assignment of connections to the specified real server by removing the real server from operation within its real server group and virtual server The real server will be returned to its configured state after a switch reset.0. January 2005 Chapter 8: The Operations Menu 437 .Disable real server in this group cur . clear Clears all session tables and allows port filter changes to take effect immediately.allow persistent http 1. NOTE – This command disrupts current SLB and Application Redirection sessions. For more information.

2 Command Reference /oper/slb/gslb Global SLB Operations Menu [Global SLB Operations Menu] query .Query Global SLB selection Table 8-5 Global SLB Operations Menu Options (/oper/slb/gslb) Command Syntax and Usage query Allows you to query the Global site selection.Alteon OS 22. January 2005 .0. 438 Chapter 8: The Operations Menu 315393-J.

This is generally used for passing master control back to a preferred switch once the preferred switch has been returned to service after a failure.Alteon OS 22. [VRRP Operations Menu] back . the current master gives up control and initiates a new election by temporarily advertising its own priority level as 0 (lowest). There are no other virtual routers available to take master control. 315393-J.Send BW History to SMTP server Table 8-7 Bandwidth Operations Menu Options (/oper/bwm/sndhist) Command Syntax and Usage sndhist Sends the bandwidth history to a system administrator specified under /cfg/bwm/user (see page 279). the virtual router forced into backup mode by this command will resume master control in the following cases: This switch owns the virtual router (the IP addresses of the virtual router and its IP interface are the same) This switch’s virtual router has a higher priority and preemption is enabled. When this command is executed. January 2005 Chapter 8: The Operations Menu 439 .Set virtual router to backup Table 8-6 Virtual Router Redundancy Operations Menu Options (/oper/vrrp) Command Syntax and Usage back <virtual router number (1-256)> Forces the specified master virtual router on this switch into backup mode. After the new election.0. /oper/bwm Operations-Level Bandwidth Management Options [Bandwidth Management Operations Menu] sndhist .2 Command Reference /oper/vrrp Operations-Level VRRP Options.

cur Displays the current BGP operational state.Alteon OS 22.2 Command Reference /oper/ip Operations-Level IP Options [IP Operations Menu] bgp . To view the menu options see page 440. stop <peer number (1-16)> Stops the peer session.0. 440 Chapter 8: The Operations Menu 315393-J. January 2005 .Operational Border Gateway Protocol Menu Table 8-8 IP Operations Menu Options (/oper/ip) Command Syntax and Usage bgp Displays the Border Gateway Protocol Operations Menu. /oper/ip/bgp Operations-Level BGP Options [Border Gateway start stop cur Protocol Operations Menu] Start peer session Stop peer session Current BGP operational state Table 8-9 IP Operations Menu Options (/oper/ip) Command Syntax and Usage start <peer number (1-16)> Starts the peer session.

2 Command Reference /oper/swkey Activating Optional Software The swkey option is used for activating any optional software you have purchased for your switch. Once you have your License Password. you must register each License Certificate with Nortel Networks and provide the MAC address of the Alteon OS switch that will run the optional software. enter: Main# oper 3. NOTE – Each License Password will work only on the specific switch which has the MAC address you provided when registering your Licence Certificate. perform the following actions: 1. At the Main# prompt. you must obtain a software license from your Nortel Networks representative or authorized reseller. “The Command Line Interface”). One software license is needed for each switch where the optional software is to be used. 2. Nortel Networks will then provide a License Password. January 2005 Chapter 8: The Operations Menu 441 .Alteon OS 22. At the Operations# prompt. Before you can activate optional software.0. Connect to the switch’s command line interface and log in as the administrator (see Chapter 1. enter: Operations# swkey 315393-J. Currently the following software packages are available for purchase and installation: Security Pack Bandwidth Management Global Server Load Balancing To obtain a software key. You will receive a Licence Certificate for each software license purchased.

When prompted.Alteon OS 22. enter the following at the Operations Menu: Operations# rmkey When prompted. January 2005 . Software feature enabled. enter your 16-digit software key code. you will see the following message: Valid software key entered. Deactivated software is still present in switch memory and can be reactivated at any later time. For example: Enter Software Feature to be removed:[GSLB]||BWM|Security: GSLB 442 Chapter 8: The Operations Menu 315393-J. 123456789ABCDEF)> If the correct code is entered.2 Command Reference 4. For example: Enter Software Key: <16 hexadecimal-digit key to enable software feature (such as. To deactivate optional software. /oper/rmkey Removing Optional Software The rmkey option is used for deactivating any optional software. enter the code for software to be removed.0.

Download new software image via TFTP . January 2005 443 .Scheduled Switch Reset Menu .Upload selected software image via TFTP .Display current boot options Each of these options is discussed in greater detail in the following sections.CHAPTER 9 The Boot Options Menu To use the Boot Options Menu.Reset switch [WARNING: Restarts Spanning Tree] .Select software image to use on next boot . The Boot Options Menu provides options for: Selecting a switch software image to be used when the switch is next reset Selecting a configuration block to be used when the switch is next reset Downloading or uploading a new software image to the switch via TFTP /boot Boot Menu [Boot Options sched image conf gtimg ptimg reset cur Menu] . you must be logged in to the switch as the administrator. 315393-J.Select config block to use on next boot .

if your active image is currently loaded into image1. image2.Alteon OS 22. When you download new software. For example. called image1 and image2. Upgrading the software image on your switch requires the following: Loading the new image onto a TFTP server on your network Downloading the new image from the TFTP server to your switch Selecting the new software image to be loaded into switch memory the next time the switch is reset Downloading New Software to Your Switch The switch can store up to two different software images. cancel a previously scheduled reboot. You can set the reboot time. called boot. As new versions of the image are released.2 Command Reference Scheduled Reboot of the Switch This feature allows the switch administrator to schedule a reboot to occur at a particular time in future. and check the time of the currently set reboot schedule with the help of the following sub-menu: /boot/sched Scheduled Reboot Menu [Boot Schedule Menu] set . A version of the image ships with the switch.0. as well as boot software. 444 Chapter 9: The Boot Options Menu 315393-J. you can upgrade the software running on your switch. or boot.Cancel pending switch reset cur . you would probably load the new image software into image2. and comes pre-installed on the device.Display current switch reset schedule Updating the Switch Software Image The switch software image is the executable code running on the Alteon Application Switch. you must specify where it should be placed: either into image1. This lets you test the new software and reload the original active image (stored in image1).Set switch reset time cancel . if needed. January 2005 . This feature is particularly helpful if the user needs to perform switch upgrades during off-peak hours.

you will need the following: The image or boot software loaded on a TFTP server on your network The hostname or IP address of the TFTP server The name of the new software image or boot file Setup the TFTP option (/cfg/sys/mgmt/tftp) for the TFTP connection. use the following procedure to download the new software to your switch. Enter name of file on TFTP server: <filename> The exact form of the name will vary by TFTP server. Enter the hostname or IP address of the TFTP server.Alteon OS 22. NOTE – The DNS parameters must be configured if specifying hostnames.0. 1. You should next select a software image to run. enter: Boot Options# gtimg 2. 5. 315393-J. Enter the name of the switch software to be replaced: Enter name of switch software image to be replaced ["image1"/"image2"/"boot"]: <image> 3. See “Domain Name System Configuration Menu” on page 331).2 Command Reference To download a new software to your switch. The system prompts you to confirm your request. Enter hostname or IP address of TFTP server: <server name or IP address> 4. note that you can override this setting with the option provided to these operational commands. the file location is normally relative to the TFTP directory (usually /tftpboot). However. When the above requirements are met. However. This sets the default option for the gtimg and ptimg commands. as described below. January 2005 Chapter 9: The Boot Options Menu 445 . Enter the name of the new software file on the server. At the Boot Options# prompt.

At the Boot Options# prompt. Enter the name or the IP address of the TFTP server: Enter hostname or IP address of TFTP server: <server name or IP address> 4. 1.0.Alteon OS 22. Enter the name of the image you want the switch to use upon the next boot. enter: Boot Options# ptimg 2. The system prompts you for information. Enter the desired image: Enter name of switch software image to be uploaded ["image1"|"image2"|"boot"]: <image> <hostname or server-IP-addr> <server-file- name> 3. The system informs you of which image is currently set to be loaded at the next reset. At the Boot Options# prompt. Enter the name of the file into which the image will be uploaded on the TFTP server: Enter name of file on TFTP server: <filename> 446 Chapter 9: The Boot Options Menu 315393-J. Specify new image to use on next reset ["image1"/"image2"]: Uploading a Software Image from Your Switch You can upload a software image from the switch to a TFTP server. January 2005 . enter: Boot Options# image 2.2 Command Reference Selecting a Software Image to Run You can select which software image (image1 or image2) you want to run in switch memory for the next reboot. 1. and prompts you to enter a new choice: Currently set to use switch software "image1" on next reset.

2. This can be useful when a custom-configured Alteon Application Switch is moved to a network environment where it will be re configured for a different purpose. Specify new block to use ["active"/"backup"/"factory"]: 315393-J. Under certain circumstances. image2 currently contains Software Version 20. and prompts you to enter a new choice: Currently set to use active configuration block on next reset. To have the file uploaded. When you perform the save command. enter: Boot Options# conf 2.2 Command Reference 5.0.1.1.1. Confirm upload operation [y/n]: y Selecting a Configuration Block When you make configuration changes to the Alteon Application Switch. At the Boot Options# prompt. This holds the default configuration set by the factory when your Alteon Application Switch was manufactured.Alteon OS 22. January 2005 Chapter 9: The Boot Options Menu 447 . it may be desirable to reset the switch configuration to the default. There is also a factory configuration block. enter Y. Use the following procedure to set which configuration block you want the switch to load the next time it is reset: 1.7 Upload will transfer image2 (1889411 bytes) to file "test" on TFTP server 192. your new configuration changes are placed in the active configuration block. The previous configuration is copied into the backup configuration block.0. you must save the changes so that they are retained beyond the next time the switch is reset. Enter the name of the configuration block you want the switch to use: The system informs you of which configuration block is currently set to be loaded at the next reset. The system then requests confirmation of what you have entered.

448 Chapter 9: The Boot Options Menu 315393-J. January 2005 .2 Command Reference Resetting the Switch You can reset the switch to make your software image file and configuration block changes occur.0. NOTE – Resetting the switch causes the Spanning Tree Protocol to restart. depending on the topology of your network. enter: >> Boot Options# reset You are prompted to confirm your request. This process can be lengthy. To reset the switch.Alteon OS 22. at the Boot Options# prompt.

315393-J.Tech support dump Dump information contains internal switch state data that is written to flash memory on the Alteon Application Switch after any one of the following occurs: The switch administrator forces a switch panic. The switch administrator enters the switch reset key combination on a device that is attached to the console port. you must be logged in to the switch as the administrator.ARP Cache Manipulation Menu route .Forwarding Database Manipulation Menu arp . causes the switch to dump state information to flash memory.Dump state information to FLASH and reboot tsdmp .Debugging Menu uudmp . January 2005 449 . The switch reset key combination is <Shift><Ctrl><->.Uuencode FLASH dump ptdmp . [Maintenance Menu] sys .List FLASH dump panic .Clear FLASH dump lsdmp . The panic option. /maint Maintenance Menu NOTE – To use the Maintenance Menu.CHAPTER 10 The Maintenance Menu The Maintenance Menu is used to manage dump information and forward database information. found in the Maintenance Menu.System Maintenance Menu fdb .IP Route Manipulation Menu debug .tftp put FLASH dump to tftp server cldmp . It also includes a debugging menu to help with troubleshooting. and then causes the switch to reboot.

To view menu options. To view menu options. route Displays the IP Route Manipulation Menu. see page 451. statistics. see page 454.Alteon OS 22. see page 455. and configuration. ptdmp hostname filename [-mgmt| -data] Saves the system dump information via TFTP.0. January 2005 . cldmp Clears dump information from flash memory. lsdmp Displays list flash dump. arp Displays the ARP Cache Manipulation Menu. tsdmp Dumps all Alteon Application Switch information. For details. To view menu options. For details. The switch detects a hardware or software problem that requires a reboot. Table 10-1 Maintenance Menu Options (/maint) Command Syntax and Usage sys Displays the System Maintenance Menu. 450 Chapter 10: The Maintenance Menu 315393-J. For details. The purpose of the watchdog timer is to reboot the switch if the switch software freezes. To view menu options. and send it to Nortel Networks Tech Support for debugging purposes. panic Dumps MP information to FLASH and reboots. To view menu options. see page 456. see page 456. debug Displays the Debugging Menu. see page 457. uudmp Displays dump information in uuencoded format. see page 452. For details.You can log the tsdump output into a file. fdb Displays the Forwarding Database Manipulation Menu.2 Command Reference The watchdog timer forces a switch reset. see page 457. see page 451.

Show all FDB entries del . 315393-J. This is helpful in identifying problems associated with MAC address learning and packet forwarding decisions. January 2005 Chapter 10: The Maintenance Menu 451 .Clear entire FDB The Forwarding Database Manipulation Menu can be used to view information and to delete a MAC address from the forwarding database or clear the entire forwarding database.Set NVRAM flag word Table 10-2 System Maintenance Menu Options (/maint/sys) Command Syntax and Usage flags <new NVRAM flags word as 0xXXXXXXXX> This command sets the flags that are used for debugging purposes by Tech support group. [System Maintenance Menu] flags .0.2 Command Reference /maint/sys System Maintenance Options This menu is reserved for use by Nortel Networks Customer Support group.Alteon OS 22.Delete an FDB entry clear .Show FDB entries for a single port trunk .Show FDB entries referenced by a single port dump .Show a single FDB entry by MAC address port . /maint/fdb Forwarding Database Options [FDB Manipulation Menu] find .Show FDB entries on a single trunk vlan .Show FDB entries for a single VLAN refpt . The options are used to perform system debugging.

del <MAC address> [<VLAN number>] Removes a single FDB entry.Alteon OS 22. clear Clears the entire Forwarding Database from switch memory. dump Displays all entries in the Forwarding Database. trunk <trunk number (1-12)> Displays all FDB entries for the specified trunk group. 0 for unknown>> Displays all FDB entries for a particular port.0.Show ARP address list 452 Chapter 10: The Maintenance Menu 315393-J. refpt <SP number (1-4)> Displays all FDB entries reference by a single port.Show ARP entries on a single port vlan .2 Command Reference Table 10-3 FDB Manipulation Menu Options (/maint/fdb) Command Syntax and Usage find <MAC address> [<VLAN>] Displays a single database entry by its MAC address. vlan <VLAN number (1-4090)> Displays all FDB entries on a single VLAN.Show ARP entries referenced by a single SP dump .Show all ARP entries clear .Show ARP entries on a single VLAN refpt . Use “0” for unknown port number. /maint/arp ARP Cache Options [Address Resolution Protocol Menu] find . For details. January 2005 . see page 79. Enter the MAC address using the xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx format (such as 08:00:20:12:34:56) or xxxxxxxxxxxx format (such as 080020123456). You are prompted to enter the MAC address of the device. port <port number.Clear ARP cache addr .Show a single ARP entry by IP address port .

/maint/arp/port <port number> ARP Entries on a Single Port IP address Flags MAC address VLAN Port Referenced SPs --------------.1 00:e0:16:7c:28:82 1 1 empty 47.16.---.80.169 00:04:75:db:1c:1a 1 1 empty NOTE – To display all ARP entries currently held in the switch.80. dump Shows all ARP entries. See page 453 for a sample output. clear Clears the entire ARP list from switch memory.2 Command Reference Table 10-4 Address Resolution Protocol Menu Options (/maint/arp) Command Syntax and Usage find <IP address (such as. refpt. refpt <SP number (1-4)> Shows all ARP entries referenced by a single port.0. vlan. 192. you can also refer to “ARP Information” on page 93.--------------47. January 2005 Chapter 10: The Maintenance Menu 453 .4.81 00:e0:81:24:ef:3c 1 1 empty 47. or a portion according to one of the options listed on the menu above (find.101)> Shows a single ARP entry by IP address. dump). port.80.----.Alteon OS 22.16. addr Shows the list of IP addresses which the switch will respond to for ARP requests.----------------.17.----. vlan <VLAN number (1-4090)> Shows ARP entries on a single VLAN. 315393-J. port <port number> Displays ARP entries on a single port.17.

Alteon OS 22.0.2 Command Reference

/maint/route IP Route Manipulation
[IP Routing Menu] find - Show a single route by destination IP address gw - Show routes to a single gateway type - Show routes of a single type tag - Show routes of a single tag if - Show routes on a single interface dump - Show all routes clear - Clear route table

Table 10-5 IP Route Manipulation Menu Options (/maint/route)
Command Syntax and Usage find <IP address (such as, 192.4.17.101)> Shows a single route by destination IP address. gw <default gateway address (such as, 192.4.17.44)> Shows routes to a default gateway. type indirect|direct|local|broadcast|martian|multicast Shows routes of a single type. For a description of IP routing types, see Table 4-19 on page 92 tag fixed|static|addr|rip|ospf|bgp|broadcast|martian|vip Shows routes of a single tag. For a description of IP routing tags, see Table 4-20 on page 93 if <interface number (1-256)> Shows routes on a single interface. dump Shows all routes. clear Clears the route table from switch memory.

NOTE – To display all routes, you can also refer to “IP Routing Information” on page 92.

454

Chapter 10: The Maintenance Menu

315393-J, January 2005

Alteon OS 22.0.2 Command Reference

/maint/debug Debugging Options
[Miscellaneous Debug Menu] tbuf - Show MP trace buffer sptb - Show SP trace buffer spall - Show All SPs trace buffers clrcfg - Clear all flash configs vmasp - Show designated SP for IP address

The Miscellaneous Debug Menu displays trace buffer information about events that can be helpful in understanding switch operation. You can view the following information using the debug menu: Events traced by the Management Processor (MP) Events traced by the Switch Processor (SP) Events traced to a buffer area when a reset occurs If the switch resets for any reason, the MP trace buffer and SP trace buffers are saved into the snap trace buffer area. The output from these commands can be interpreted by the Nortel Networks Customer Support division. Table 10-6 Miscellaneous Debug Menu Options (/maint/debug)
Command Syntax and Usage tbuf Displays the Management Processor trace buffer. Header information similar to the following is shown: MP trace buffer at 13:28:15 Fri May 25, 2001; mask: 0x2ffdf748 The buffer information is displayed after the header. sptb <port number (1-4)> Displays the Switch Processor trace buffer. Header information similar to the following is shown: SP 1 trace buffer at 10:56:35 Tue Jul 30, 2002; mask: 0x00800008 The buffer information is displayed after the header. spall Displays the Switch Processor trace buffer. Header information similar to the following is shown: SP 1 trace buffer at 10:56:35 Tue Jul 30, 2002; mask: 0x00800008. The buffer information is displayed after the header. Displays all SP trace buffers. clrcfg Deletes all flash configuration blocks. vmasp <IP address> Displays the assigned SP (Switch Processor) for this IP address.

315393-J, January 2005

Chapter 10: The Maintenance Menu

455

Alteon OS 22.0.2 Command Reference

/maint/uudmp Uuencode Flash Dump
Using this command, dump information is presented in uuencoded format. This format makes it easy to capture the dump information as a file or a string of characters. You can then contact Nortel Networks Customer Support for help analyzing the information. If you want to capture dump information to a file, set your communication software on your workstation to capture session data prior to issuing the uudmp command. This will ensure that you do not lose any information. Once entered, the uudmp command will cause approximately 23,300 lines of data to be displayed on your screen and copied into the file. Using the uudmp command, dump information can be read multiple times. The command does not cause the information to be updated or cleared from flash memory. NOTE – Dump information is not cleared automatically. In order for any subsequent dump information to be written to flash memory, you must manually clear the dump region. For more information on clearing the dump region, see page 457. To access dump information, at the Maintenance# prompt, enter:
Maintenance# uudmp

The dump information is displayed on your screen and, if you have configured your communication software to do so, captured to a file. If the dump region is empty, the following appears:
No FLASH dump available.

/maint/ptdmp <server> <filename> TFTP System Dump Put
Use this command to put (save) the system dump to a TFTP server. NOTE – If the TFTP server is running SunOS or the Solaris operating system, the specified ptdmp file must exist prior to executing the ptdmp command, and must be writable (set with proper permission, and not locked by any application). The contents of the specified file will be replaced with the current dump data. To save dump information via TFTP, at the Maintenance# prompt, enter:
Maintenance# ptdmp <server> <filename> [-mgmt| -data]

Where server is the TFTP server IP address or hostname, and filename is the target dump file.
456 Chapter 10: The Maintenance Menu

315393-J, January 2005

Alteon OS 22.0.2 Command Reference

/maint/cldmp Clearing Dump Information
To clear dump information from flash memory, at the Maintenance# prompt, enter:
Maintenance# cldmp

The switch clears the dump region of flash memory and displays the following message:
FLASH dump region cleared.

If the flash dump region is already clear, the switch displays the following message:
FLASH dump region is already clear.

/maint/panic Panic Command
The panic command causes the switch to immediately dump state information to flash memory and automatically reboot. To select panic, at the Maintenance# prompt, enter:
>> Maintenance# panic A FLASH dump already exists. Confirm replacing existing dump and reboot [y/n]:

Enter y to confirm the command:
Confirm dump and reboot [y/n]: y

The following messages are displayed:
Loading Image:.......... Alteon Application Switch 2424 Rebooted because of Software PANIC. Booting complete 19:15:23 Thu Jan 9, 2003: Version 20.2.7 from FLASH image1, active config block. Jan 9 19:15:32 NOTICE system: link up on port 25 Enter password:

315393-J, January 2005

Chapter 10: The Maintenance Menu

457

Alteon OS 22.0.2 Command Reference

Unscheduled System Dumps
If there is an unscheduled system dump to flash memory, the following message is displayed when you log on to the switch:
Note: A system dump exists in FLASH. The dump was saved at 19:15:23 Thu Jan 9, 2003. Use /maint/uudmp to extract the dump for analysis and /maint/cldmp to clear the FLASH region. The region must be cleared before another dump can be saved.

458

Chapter 10: The Maintenance Menu

315393-J, January 2005

APPENDIX A

Alteon OS Syslog Messages
The following syntax is used when outputting syslog messages: <Time stamp><Log Label>Web OS<Thread ID>:<Message> where <Timestamp> The time of the message event is displayed in month day hour:minute:second format. For example: Aug 19 14:20:30 <Log Label> The following types of log messages are recorded: LOG_EMERG, LOG_ALERT, LOG_CRIT, LOG_ERR, LOG_WARNING, LOG_NOTICE, LOG_INFO, and LOG_DEBUG <Thread ID> This is the software thread that reports the log message. The following thread IDs are recorded: stp, ip, slb, console, telnet, vrrp, system, web server, ssh, and bgp <Message>: The log message Following is a list of potential syslog messages. To keep this list as short as possible, only <Thread ID> and <Message> are shown. The messages are sorted by <Log Label>. Where the <Thread ID> is listed as mgmt, one of the following may be shown: console, telnet, web server, or ssh.

LOG_WARNING
FILTER “filter <filter number> fired on port <port number>, <source IP address> -> <destination IP address>, [<ICMP type>], [<IP protocol>], [<layer-4 ports>], [<TCP f1ags>]”
ntp: ntp cannot contact primary NTP server <ip_address> cannot contact secondary NTP server <ip_address>

315393-J, January 2005

459

Alteon OS 22.0.2 Command Reference

LOG_ALERT
stp: IP vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: slb: slb: gslb: gslb: gslb: gslb: slb: slb: slb: slb: bgp: bgp: vrrp: vrrp: dps: dps: syn_atk tcplim own BPDU received from port <port_id> cannot contact default gateway <ip_address> received errored advertisement from <ip_address> received incorrect password from <ip_address> received incorrect addresses from <ip_address> received incorrect advertisement interval <seconds> from <ip_address> cannot contact real server <ip_address> real server <ip_address> has reached maximum connections received update from <ip_address> for unknown remote server <ip_address> received update from <ip_address> for unknown virtual service received update for unknown remote server <ip_address> from <ip_address> received update for unknown service <ip_address:service> cannot contact real service <ip_address:real_port> real server failure threshold (<threshold>) has been reach for group <group_id> real server <ip_address> disabled through configuration Virtual Service Pool full. gSvcPool=MAX_SERVICES notification (<reason>) received from <BGP peer ip_address> session with <BGP peer ip_address> failed (<reason>) Synchronization from non-configured peer <ip_address> Synchronization from non-configured peer <ip_address> was blocked hold down triggered: <ip_address> for <min> minutes manual hold down: <ip_address> SYN attack detected: <count> new half-open sessions per second hold down triggered: <ip_address> for <min> minutes

460

Appendix A: Alteon OS Syslog Messages

315393-J, January 2005

Alteon OS 22.0.2 Command Reference

LOG_CRIT
SYSTEM: temperature at sensor <sensor_id> exceeded threshold SYSTEM: internal power supply failed SYSTEM: redundant power supply failed SYSTEM: fan failure detected SSH can't allocate memory in load_MP_INT

LOG_ERR
mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: ntp: isd: stp: stp: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: PANIC at <file>:<line> in thread <thread id> VERIFY at <file>:<line> in thread <thread id> ASSERT at <file>:<line> in thread <thread id> unable to listen to NTP port unable to listen to BOOTP_SERVER_PORT port Error: Error writing STG config to FLASH Error: Error writing config to FLASH Apply not done Save not done “<““apply””|““save””> is issued by another user. Try later” Error: Error writing %s config to FLASH New Path Cost for Port <port_id> is invalid PVID <vlan_id> for port <port_id> is not created RADIUS secret must be 1-32 characters long Please configure primary RADIUS server address STP changes can't be applied since STP is OFF Switch reset is required to turn STP on/off Trunk group <trunk_id> contains ports with different PVIDs Trunk group <trunk_id> has more than <max_trunk_ports> ports

315393-J, January 2005

Appendix A: Alteon OS Syslog Messages

461

Alteon OS 22.0.2 Command Reference

LOG_ERR (Continued)
cli: cli: cli: Trunk group <trunk_id> contains no ports but is enabled Not all ports in trunk group <trunk_id> are in VLAN <vlan_id> Trunk groups <trunk_id> and <trunk_id> can not share the same port

port_mirr: Port Mirroring changes are not applied cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: Broadcast address for IP interface <interface_id> is invalid IP Interfaces <interface_id> and <interface_id> are on the same subnet Multiple static routes have same destination Virtual router <vr_id> must have sharing disabled when hotstandby is enabled Virtual router group must be enabled when hotstandby is enabled At least one virtual router must be enabled when group is enabled Virtual router group must have sharing disabled when hotstandby is enabled Virtual router group must have preemption enabled when hotstandby is enabled Virtual router <vr_id> must have an IP address Virtual router <vr_id> cannot have same VRID and VLAN as <vlan_id> Virtual router <vr_id> cannot have same IP address as <ip_address> Virtual router <vr_id> corresponding virtual server <server_id> is not enabled Hot-standby must be enabled when a virtual router has a PIP address Virtual router <vr_id> IP interface should be <interface_id> Enabled real server <server_id> has no IP address Real server <server_id> has same IP address as IP interface <interface_id> Real server <server_id> has same IP address as switch Real server <server_id> (Backup for <server_id>) is not enabled Real server <server_id> has same IP address as virtual server <server_id> Real server <server_id> has same IP address as real server <server_id> Real server group <group_id> cannot backup itself Real server <server_id> cannot be added to same group Enabled virtual server <server_id> has no IP address

462

Appendix A: Alteon OS Syslog Messages

315393-J, January 2005

ports 1-8 must all have a PIP if any one does” Client bindings are not supported with proxy IP addresses DAM must be turned on or a PIP must be enabled for port <port_id> in order for virtual server to support FTP parsing Real server <server_id> and group %u cannot both have backups configured Virtual server <server_id> : port mapping but layer3 bindings Extracting length has to set to 8 or 16 for cookie rewrite mode DAM must be turned on or a PIP must be enabled for port <port_id> in order for virtural server <server_id> to support URL parsing Port filtering must be disabled on port <port_id> in order to support cookie based persistence for virtual server <server_id> Virtual server <server_id>: port mapping but Direct Access Mode Virtual server %lu: support nonat IP but not layer 3 bindings Virtual servers: all that support IP must use same group Virtual servers <server_id> and <server_id> that include the same real server <server_id> cannot map the same real port or balance UDP Virtual server <server_id>: UDP service <virtual_port> with out-of-range port number 315393-J. January 2005 Appendix A: Alteon OS Syslog Messages 463 .2 Command Reference LOG_ERR (Continued) cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: Virtual server <server_id> has same IP address as IP interface <interface_id> Virtual server <server_id> has same IP address as switch Virtual servers <server_id> and <server_id> with same IP address must support same layr3 configuration Real server <server_id> cannot be backup server for both real server <server_id> and group <group_id> Virtual server <server_id> has same IP address and vport as virtual server <server_id> RS <server_id> can't exist for VS <server_id> vport <virtual_port> Switch port <port_id> has same proxy IP address as port <port_id> Switch port <port_id> has same IP address as IP interface <interface_id> A hot-standby port cannot also be an inter-switch port There must be at least one inter-switch port if any hot-standby port exist “With VMA.0.Alteon OS 22.

Alteon OS 22.<domain_name>” Direct access mode is not supported with default gateway load balancing SLB Radius secret must be 16 characters long Dynamic NAT filter <filter_id> must be cached NAT filter <filter_id> must have same smask and dmask NAT filter <filter_id> cannot have port ranges NAT filter <filter_id> must be cached NAT filter <filter_id> dest range includes VIP <server_id> NAT filter <filter_id> dest range includes RIP <server_id> Redirection filter <filter_id> must be cached Filter with L4 ports configured <port_id> must have IP protocol configured “For Global SLB. <host_name>.0.2 Command Reference LOG_ERR (Continued) cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: Switch cannot support more than <MAX_VIRT_SERVICES> virtual services Switch cannot support more than <MAX_SMT> real services Trunk group (<trunk_id>) ports must have same L4 config Trunk group (<trunk_id>) ports must all have a PIP DAM must be turned on or a PIP must be enabled for ports <port_id> in order to do URL based redirection “Two services have same hostname. Web server must be moved from TCP port 80” Remote site <site_id> does not have a primary IP address Primary and secondary remote site <site_id> switches must differ Remote sites <site_id> and <site_id> must use different addresses Remote site <site_id> and real server <server_id> must use different addresses Remote site <site_id> and virtual server <server_id> must use different addresses Only <MAX_SLB_SITES> remote servers are allowed per group Only <MAX_SLB_SERVICES> remote services are supported Enabled external lookup IP address has no IP address domain name must be configured 464 Appendix A: Alteon OS Syslog Messages 315393-J. January 2005 .

0.<domain_name>” Loadbalance string must be added to real server <server_id> in order to enable exclusionary string matching intrval input value must be in the range [0-24] unapplied changes reverted unsaved changes reverted Attempting to redirect a previously redirected output Attempting to redirect a previously redirected output cfg_sync_tx_putsn: ABORTED Synchronization TX Error Synchronization TX connection RESET Synchronization TX connection TIMEOUT Synchronization TX connection UNREACEABLE Synchronization TX connection UNKNOWN CLOSE Synchronization RX connection RESET Synchronization RX connection TIMEOUT Synchronization RX connection UNREACEABLE Synchronization RX connection UNKNOWN CLOSE Synchronization connection RCLOSE by peer Synchronization connection RCLOSE before RX 315393-J. <host_name>.Alteon OS 22. January 2005 Appendix A: Alteon OS Syslog Messages 465 .2 Command Reference LOG_ERR (Continued) cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: Network <static_network_id> has no VIP address duplicate default entry BGP peer <bgp_peer_id> must have an IP address BGP peers <bgp_peer_id> and <bgp_peer_id> have same address BGP peer <bgp_peer_id> have same address as IP interface <ip_interface_id> BGP peer <bgp_peer_id> IP interface <ip_interface_id> is not enabled Filter with ICMP types configured (<icmp_type>) must have IP protocol configure to ICMP “Two services have same hostname.

Try later” new configuration did not validate (rc = ) new configuration did not apply (rc = ) new configuration did not save (rc = ) Sync config apply error Restoring Current Config Sync rx tcp open error Sync Version/Password Failed-No Version/Password Line Sync Version Failed .Alteon OS 22.Resuming Console thread “<""apply""|""save""> is issued by another user. January 2005 .peer:%s config:%s Sync Password Failed-Bad Password Sync receive already in progress … cannot start Sync receive Sync transmit in progress … cannot start Sync receive 466 Appendix A: Alteon OS Syslog Messages 315393-J.2 Command Reference LOG_ERR (Continued) vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: Synchronization connection early RCLOSE in RX Synchronization connection Wait-For-Close Timeout Synchronization connection Transmit Timeout Synchronization Receive Timeout Synchronization Receive UNKNOWN Timeout Sync transmit in progress … cannot start Sync Sync receive in progress … cannot start Sync Sync already in progress … cannot start Sync Config Sync route find error Config Sync tcp_open error Config Synchronization Timeout .0.

January 2005 Appendix A: Alteon OS Syslog Messages 467 .2 Command Reference LOG_NOTICE system: system: system: system: system: system: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: ssh: ssh: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: internal power supply ok redundant power supply present and ok temperature ok fan ok rebooted <last_reset_information> rebooted <last_reset_information> administrator logged in boot config block changed boot image changed switch reset from CLI syslog host changed to <ip_address> syslog host changed to this host second syslog host changed to <ip_address> second syslog host changed to this host Next boot will use active config block user password changed SLB operator password changed L4 operator password changed operator password changed SLB administrator password changed L4 administrator password changed administrator password changed scp <login_level> login “scp <login_level> <""connection closed""|""idle timeout""|""logout"">” RADIUS server timeouts Failed login attempt via TELNET from host %s PASSWORD FIX-UP MODE IN USE <login_level> login on Console 315393-J.Alteon OS 22.0.

2 Command Reference LOG_NOTICE (Continued) mgmt: mgmt: “<login_level> <""idle timeout""|""logout""> from Console” PANIC command from CLI port_mirr: “port mirroring is <""enabled""|""disabled"">” vlan: mgmt: mgmt: IP IP vrrp: vrrp: slb: slb: slb: slb: slb: slb: slb: slb: slb: slb: bgp: Default VLAN can not be deleted <login_level> login from host <ip_address> “<login_level> <""connection closed""|""idle timeout""|""logout""> from” “default gateway <ip_address> <""enabled""|""disabled"">” default gateway <ip_address> operational virtual router <ip_address> is now master virtual router <ip_address> is now backup “backup server <ip_address> <""enabled""|""diabled""> for real server <server_id>” “backup server <ip_address> <""enabled""|""disabled""> for real server group <group_id>” “backup group server <ip_address> <""enabled""|""disabled""> for real server group group_id>” “overflow server <ip_address> <""enabled""|""disabled""> for real server <server_id>” “overflow server <ip_address> <""enabled""|""disabled""> for real server group <group_id>” “overflow group server <ip_address> <""enabled""|""disabled""> for real server group <group_id>” real server <ip_address> operational real service <ip_address:real_port> operational No services are available for Virtual Server <virtual_server> Services are available for Virtual Server <virtual_server> session established with <BGP_peer_ip_address> 468 Appendix A: Alteon OS Syslog Messages 315393-J. January 2005 .Alteon OS 22.0.

2 Command Reference LOG_INFO SYSTEM: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: ssh: ssh: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: ssh: ssh: ssh: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: bootp response from <ip_address> new configuration applied new configuration saved unsaved changes reverted Could not revert unsaved changes "<image1|image2> downloaded from host <ip_address>.Alteon OS 22. January 2005 Appendix A: Alteon OS Syslog Messages 469 . file <file_name> <software_version>" serial EEPROM downloaded from host <ip_address> file <file_name> scp <login_level> login "scp <login_level> <""connection closed""|""idle timeout""|""logout"">" <login_level> login on Console "<login_level> <""idle timeout""|""logout""> from Console" <login_level> login from host <ip_address> "<login_level> <""connection closed""|""idle timeout""|""logout""> from Telnet/SSH.0." server key autogen starts server key autogen completes server key autogen timer timeouts new synch configuration applied new synch configuration saved Synchronizing from <host_name> Synchronizing to <host_name> Config Synchronization Transmit Successful Config Synchronization Receive Successful new configuration VALIDATED 315393-J.

Alteon OS 22.0. January 2005 .2 Command Reference 470 Appendix A: Alteon OS Syslog Messages 315393-J.

History.mib aosTrap.APPENDIX B Alteon OS SNMP Agent The Alteon OS SNMP agent supports SNMP Version 1.EtherLike MIB RFC 1493 . January 2005 .SynOptics Registration MIB s5tcs112. Version 3 supports two authentication protocols: MD5 and SHA.Bridge MIB RFC 1757 .MIB II (System.mib -.mib aosBwm.Textual Convention MIB s5emt104.Ethernet Multi segment Autotopology MIB SNMPv1|v2|v3 traps can be sent to the hosts configured in targetAddr table. Up to 16 IP addresses can be configured in targetAddr table. Version 2.SynOptics Root MIB s5roo117. ICMP.MIB II Extension (IFX table) RFC 1643 .mib aosSwitch. Address Translation. Alteon OS SNMP agent supports the following standard MIBs: RFC 1213 .mib -. TCP. Alteon MIBs are registered as Vendor 1872. Event Groups) RFC 1850 for OSPF 471 315393-J. SNMP Groups) RFC 1573 .mib aosLayer4. Interface.mib -.RMON MIB (Statistics.mib aosPhysical. and Version 3. the following SynOptics MIBS are also supported: synro193.mib -. UDP. Alarm. Detailed SNMP MIBs and trap definitions of the Alteon OS SNMP agent can be found in the following enterprise MIB documents: altroot.mib aosLayer7. IP.mib In addition.mib aosNetwork.

VACM MIB RFC 2576 .2 Command Reference RFC 1657 for BGP IEEE 802.Alteon OS 22.Community MIB Alteon OS SNMP agent supports the following generic traps as defined in RFC 1215: ColdStart WarmStart LinkDown LinkUp AuthenticationFailure The SNMP agent also supports two Spanning Tree traps as defined in RFC 1493: NewRoot TopologyChange The following are the enterprise SNMP traps supported in Alteon OS: Table 10-7 Alteon OS-Supported Enterprise SNMP Traps Trap Name Description altSwDefGwUp altSwDefGwDown altSwDefGwInService altSwDefGwNotInService altSwSlbRealServerUp altSwSlbRealServerDown altSwSlbRealServerMaxConnReached Signifies that the default gateway is alive.Target MIB RFC 2574 .SNMP Frame work RFC 2572 .USM MIB RFC 2575 . Signifies that the default gateway is down. Signifies that the default gateway is up and in service Signifies that the default gateway is alive but not in service Signifies that the real server is up and operational Signifies that the real server is down and out of service Signifies that the real server has reached maximum connections 472 Appendix B: Alteon OS SNMP Agent 315393-J. January 2005 .0.3ad MIB for LACP The following SNMPv3 MIBs are supported: RFC 2571 .MPD MIB RFC 2573 .

An altSwLoginFailure trap signifies that someone failed to enter a valid username/password combination.2 Command Reference Table 10-7 Alteon OS-Supported Enterprise SNMP Traps Trap Name Description altSwSlbBkupRealServerAct altSwSlbBkupRealServerDeact altSwSlbBkupRealServerActOverflow altSwSlbBkupRealServerDeactOverflow altSwfltFilterFired altSwSlbRealServerServiceUp altSwSlbRealServerServiceDown altSwVrrpNewMaster altSwVrrpNewBackup Signifies that the backup real server is activated due to availablity of the primary real server Signifies that the backup real server is deactivated due to the primary real server is available Signifies that the backup real server is deactivated due to the primary real server is overflowed Signifies that the backup real server is deactivated due to the primary real server is out from overflow situation Signifies that the packet received on a switch port matches the filter rule Signifies that the service port of the real server is up and operational Signifies that the service port of the real server is down and out of service The newMaster trap indicates that the sending agent has transitioned to 'Master' state. An altSwTempExceedThreshold trap signifies that the switch temperature has exceeded maximum safety limits. altSwVrrpAuthFailure altSwLoginFailure altSwSlbSynAttack altSwTcpHoldDown An altSwSlbSynAttack trap signifies that a SYN attack has been detected.Alteon OS 22. Implementation of this trap is optional. The newBackup trap indicates that the sending agent has transitioned to 'Backup' state. A vrrpAuthFailure trap signifies that a packet has been received from a router whose authentication key or authentication type conflicts with this router's authentication key or authentication type. altSwTempExceedThreshold 315393-J. An altSwTcpHoldDown trap signifies that new TCP connection requests from a particular client will be blocked for a pre-determined amount of time since the rate of new TCP connections from that client has reached a pre-determined threshold. January 2005 Appendix B: Alteon OS SNMP Agent 473 .0.

0. An altSwFanFailure trap signifies that a fan failure has occured. January 2005 . altSwSlbSessAttack altSwFanFailure 474 Appendix B: Alteon OS SNMP Agent 315393-J.Alteon OS 22.2 Command Reference Table 10-7 Alteon OS-Supported Enterprise SNMP Traps Trap Name Description An altSwSlbSessAttack trap signifies that an SLB attack has been detected.

January 2005 475 .PPCBoot 2. Start hyper terminal (part of Microsoft Windows) and set the following parameters: Parameter Baud Rate Data Bits Parity Stop Bits Flow Control Value 9600 8 None 1 None 3. This procedure requires the following: A computer running terminal emulation software A standard serial cable with a male DB9 connector (see your switch hardware installation guide for specifics) A binary switch firmware image (not the tftp file used for TFTP download) Use the following procedure to perform a serial upgrade.2. 1. Using the serial cable.APPENDIX C Performing a Serial Download You can perform a serial download of the new Alteon Application Switch software if you are upgrading Alteon OS directly from any image. connect the Console port of an Alteon Application Switch to the serial port of your PC that supports XModem/1K XModem. 2. To download a serial image use 1K Xmodem at 115200 315393-J. Power on the switch. Hold the <Shift> key down and hit D repeatedly until the following message appears: Alteon Application Switch . 4.

. NOTE – Although slower. otherwise.0.. 8. Power off the switch. Reconfigure your terminal emulation software with the following parameters (only after you see the message displayed in step 4): Parameter Baud Rate Data Bits Parity Stop Bits Flow Control Value 115200 8 None 1 None NOTE – You can perform serial downloads at 57600 baud rate by pressing Shift f or at 115200 baud rate by pressing Shift d. You should see the following sample log on your screen: Alteon Application Switch . CAUTION—Do not power off the switch until you see the message: “Change your baud rate to 9600 bps and power cycle switch”. Do *NOT* power cycle the switch Updating flash. January 2005 .img" (Or the file previously downloaded to the computer) 7. When the Console Port is successfully communicating with the PC. 6.Alteon OS 22. Select <Transfer-Send File> and choose the following: file: For example. the switch will be inoperable..2. Press <Enter> on the key board of the PC that is connected to the console port of the switch.. ################################################################# Change your baudrate to 9600 bps and power cycle the switch ! 476 Appendix C: Performing a Serial Download 315393-J.0.PPCBoot 2. To download a serial image use 1K Xmodem at 115200 CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC Total bytes transferred: 0x4ff400 Extracting images. "21. wait for a few seconds and power the switch on. you will see: CCCC. The switch will boot with the new software load. 9.0.. This file can be downloaded from the CD that is shipped with the switch..0_Serial. XMODEM will work too if you choose not to use 1K MODEM.2 Command Reference 5. protocol: 1K XMODEM It will take about 15 minutes for the transfer to complete. Make sure that the new binary firmware file is available on the computer.

Can be any value represented by a 8-bit value in the IP header adherent to the IP specification (for example. and so on. Virtual server-based load balancing uses half NAT by design. Minimum value is 1 and maximum value is 254. TCP. the value given to a Virtual Router to determine its ranking with its peer(s). In VRRP.Glossary DIP (Destination IP Address) Dport (Destination Port) NAT (Network Address Translation) The destination IP address of a frame. or a filter. ICMP. January 2005 477 . Full NAT is when both addresses are changed from one address to another. http-80/https-443/DNS-53) Any time an IP address is changed from one source IP or destination IP address to another address. because it translates the destination IP address from the Virtual Server IP address.) A group of real servers that are associated with a Virtual Server IP address. preemption will cause a Virtual Router that has a lower priority to go into backup should a peer Virtual Router start advertising with a higher priority. In VRRP. The destination port (application socket: for example. Default is 100. In general. A higher number will win out for master designation. UDP. to that of one of the real servers. Preemption Priority Proto (Protocol) Real Server Group 315393-J. network address translation can be said to have taken place. No NAT is when neither source nor destination IP addresses are translated. OSPF. half NAT is when the destination IP or source IP address is changed from one address to another. The protocol of a frame.

Filters can be configured to filter on the SIP/Range (via netmask). Instead. Tracking can be very valuable in an active/active configuration.2 Command Reference Redirection or Filter-Based Load Balancing A type of load balancing that operates differently from virtual server-based load balancing. January 2005 . DIP/Range (via netmask). The source IP address of a frame. Deny. In redirection-based load balancing. With this type of load balancing. spam filter. or NAT (translation of either the source IP or destination IP address). client or server designation (increments priority by 2 for each reals: healthy real servers (increments by 2 for each healthy real server) hsrp: HSRP announcements heard on a client designated port (increments by 10 for each) An IP address that the switch owns and uses to load balance particular service requests (like HTTP) to other servers. “Transparently” means that requests are not specifically destined for a Virtual Server IP address that the switch owns. Redirect to a Server Group. SPort/Range or DPort/Range. VIP (Virtual Server IP Address) VIR (Virtual Interface Router) 478 Glossary 315393-J. or transparent Web cache. A VRRP address that is an IP interface address shared between two or more virtual routers. requests are transparently intercepted and “redirected” to a server group. HTTP-80/HTTPS-443/DNS-53). An IP addresses that the switch load balances to when requests are made to a Virtual Server IP address (VIP). RIP (Real Server) SIP (Source IP Address) SPort (Source Port) Tracking The source port (application socket: for example. The action on a filter can be Allow. redirection-based load balancing is designed to load balance devices that normally operate transparently in your network—such as a firewall. Protocol. In VRRP.Alteon OS 22.0. a filter is configured in the switch. Therefore. the destination IP address is not translated to that of one of the real servers. This filter intercepts traffic based on certain IP header criteria and load balances it. Real Server IP Address. You can track the following: Vrs: Virtual Routers in Master Mode (increments priority by 2 for each) Ifs: Active IP interfaces on the Alteon Application Switch (increments priority by 2 for each) Ports: Active ports on the same VLAN (increments priority by 2 for each) l4pts: Active Layer 4 Ports. a method to increase the priority of a virtual router and thus master designation (with preemption enabled).

the backup will take over ownership of the VRRP IP and MAC addresses as defined by the specification. and advertisements. as defined in RFC 2338.Alteon OS 22. one switch is considered the master and the other the backup.2 Command Reference Virtual Router A shared address between two devices utilizing VRRP. The backup switch is always listening for the broadcasts. Virtual Server Load Balancing VRID (Virtual Router Identifier) VRRP (Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol) VSR (Virtual Server Router) 315393-J. For a more detailed description. refer to RFC 2338. Network address translation is done back and forth. If there is more than one VLAN defined on the Alteon Application Switch. then the VRRP broadcasts will only be sent out on the VLAN of which the associated IP interface is a member. The switch announces this change in ownership to the devices around it by way of a Gratuitous ARP.0. a server would receive the frame that was destined for it's MAC address. Classic load balancing. forcing the packet up to Layer 3. If the backup switch didn't do the Gratuitous ARP the Layer 2 devices attached to the switch would not know that the MAC address had moved in the network. Frames come to the switch destined for the VIP.18. Requests destined for a Virtual Server IP address (VIP). This process of replacing the destination IP (VIP) with one of the real server addresses is called half NAT. then the VRID number needs to be identical on both switches so each virtual router on each switch knows whom to share with. If they didn’t. If the frames were not half NAT'ed to the address of one of the RIPs. VSR is Alteon WebSystems’ proprietary extension to the VRRP specification. One virtual router is associated with an IP interface. January 2005 Glossary 479 . updates the relevant checksums. Two or more devices sharing an IP interface are either advertising or listening for advertisements. With VRRP. If you have a VRRP address that two switches are sharing. The switches must be able to share Virtual Server IP addresses. as requests come and go. A VRRP address that is a shared Virtual Server IP address. a value between 1 and 255 that is used by each virtual router to create its MAC address and identify its peer for which it is sharing this VRRP address. The server would then drop the frame. Should the master stop advertising. This is one of the IP interfaces that the switch is assigned. The master is always advertising via the broadcasts. as well as IP interfaces. which is owned by the switch. since the packet would have the DIP of the VIP and not that of the server (RIP). All IP interfaces on the Alteon Application Switch must be in a VLAN. and forwards the frame to the server for which it is now destined. A protocol that acts very similarly to Cisco's proprietary HSRP address sharing protocol. The VRRP MAC address as defined in the RFC is 00-00-5E-00-01-{VRID}. In VRRP.0. The switch then replaces the VIP and with one of the real server IP addresses (RIP's). The reason for both of these protocols is so devices have a next hop or default gateway that is always available. are load balanced to a real server contained in the group associated with the VIP. and the ARP tables in the devices around them would have two ARP entries with the same IP address but different MAC addresses. by the switch.0. the two switches would fight for ownership of the Virtual Server IP address. These advertisements are sent via a broadcast message to an address such as 224.

Alteon OS 22.0.2 Command Reference 480 Glossary 315393-J. January 2005 .

.......................................................... 230.................................................................... 259 action (SLB filtering option) .................... 312 autonomous system filter path action ............................................................................................... 386 filter states............................................................................................. 276 setup......... 86 application redirection .......................................................... 33 port speed..... 229 ASCII terminal ........ 268......................................... 280 bandwidth management contract precedence value ............. 281 481 315393-J. 386 activating optional software .............................................................. 32 enable/disable on port .................................. 312 as ....... 282 bandwidth management contract configuration ............................................ 274...... 314 aging STP bridge option .................................................... 453 administrator account ...... 344 active port VLAN .............................. saving and loading configuration ................................................. 447 active FTP SLB parsing statistics .............................................................................................. 33 autonomous system filter action ...... 447 backup server activations (SLB statistics) ........ 344 active switch configuration gtcfg .............................................................................................................. 358 within real server groups .. 262 advertisement of virtual IP addresses ............... 32 link.........Index Symbols (MD5) .................... 27 B backup SLB real server group option ................... 188 active IP interface .......................................... 32 auto-negotiation ........ 234........ 32...... 441 active configuration block .............................................. 365 backup configuration block .............................. 359........................... 32..... 475 3000 series...... 344 active Layer 4 processing .................. 364 apply (global command) ...................................... 229 applying configuration changes ........................................... 230........................................................................ 269 A abbreviating commands (CLI) ........... 365 / command ...................................................................................................... 422 (SLB real server group option) content ....................................................................................... 20 autoconfiguration duplex mode .......... 354 restoring . 279 contracts ...................................................................................................................... 24................... 111 filters ................................................................. 312 aspath .... 52 access control system .. 354 active switch. 195 bandwidth management configuration .......................... January 2005 .............................. 453 IP route tag ........... 272. 173.................... 400 addr ARP entries......................................................................... 93 Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) address list ...................................................... 312 Numerics 1K XModem ........................... 291 STP information ............................... 17 admpw (system option) .......................................................... 49 [ ].................................. 354 add SLB port option . 354 ptcfg ..............

..................................................................................................................................................327 IP address.............................................324 eBGP ..................................................232 baud rate console connection ..........................332 Border Gateway Protocol ..............0................440 BPDU....... 52 conventions used in this manual .326 redistribution configuration .....................................................................................................326 IP route tag ....... 194 binding table .............................. 200 history statistics ................................................... 27.............. 93 IP route type ..327 router hops......... 36 Browser-Based Interface ......................284 over the limit TOS . 49 Command-Line Interface (CLI) .......290 broadcast IP route tag ................................................... 52 482 Index 315393-J...............................................................20 serial download ...........................................................................327 binary .......................................................................................................... 49 shortcuts .................. 399 command (help) .....................................................476 binding failure ........................................................................................... 457 FDB entry ...2 Command Reference Bandwidth Management options operations-level options ....... 92 broadcast domains ...................................................................................285 hard bandwidth limit .284 buffer limit ............... 203 port ...................................................... bridge parameter menu..................... 201 contract statistics....................... 292 clear ARP entries .................................. See Bridge Protocol Data Unit........284 soft bandwidth limit . 52 stacking ........................................................................................324 in route ................ for STP ..........................................................................................................................377 BLOCKING (port state).................93 keep-alive time ...............................................86 STP transmission frequency ......................325 peer configuration ................ 52 tab completion ........... 454 clearing SLB statistics ............................................ 297 broadcast IP address ....................289 bridge priority ...........................................................475 binary firmware image ....................................Alteon OS 22.......285 bandwidth management statistics ...................... 453 dump information ......................... 199 switch processor rate contract statistics ...... 17 global commands ..............327 peer ..........290 Bridge Spanning-Tree parameters ............475.... 19 to 25................................. 19 BWM contract rate statistics................................................................ 199 C capture dump information to a file. 456 Cisco Ether Channel ............................. 452 routing table .........................................................................................................................................93 configuration.............................................................................172......................... border router ...............285 reserve limit ........ January 2005 .............................................198 banner (system option).................................86 boot options menu ..................86 Bridge Protocol Data Unit (BPDU) ...................284 underlimit TOS ...................................... 47 commands abbreviations ......................................................................................................................................................443 BOOTP ..........................................30 system option ........................... 199 switch processor contract statistics ..........................232 bootstrap protocol ........439 bandwidth management policy configuration ..........................................................324 Border Gateway Protocol (BGP) operations-level options ............................................... 476 BBI ......................19 BGP configuration.......... 196 client traffic processing .....................21 setup (enable/disable) ................................................328 remote autonomous system ...............................324 iBGP..

. 20 connecting ........... 240....................................................... 229 setup ................ 447 factory ....................... 304 Layer 4 administrator password ....... 209........... 475.................................................... 229 Fast Ethernet ....... 240 user password ............................................................ 272 IP static route ......................................... 301 VLAN tagging .. 301 TACACS+ .................... 449 default gateway information ........................................................... 195 designated port.................. 302 metrics ................................................................................ 86 STP port option................................... 449 state information ............................................................................................................. 173...... 270........................................ 160 Domain Name System (DNS) health checks ............................... 266.......................................... 194 D date setup........ 270 cost STP information ................................ 271........ 447 configuration menu ................ 353 switch IP address ...... 353 maintenance .................................................................................................. 275 VRRP ...................................................... 268............... 229 VLAN default (PVID) ..... 270.................. 227 configuring routing information protocol ................................... 268...................................2 Command Reference configuration administrator password ...... 195 dump configuration command ............................................. 211 cur (system option) .......... 271.................................................................................. 276 port mirroring ...... 95 diff (global) command........ 267.... 21 connection timeout (Real Server Menu option) ............Alteon OS 22.................................................... 302 dump command ............................. 387 DNS statistics .... 86 disconnect idle timeout .... 173........................ 447 backup.. 452 deny (filtering) .................................... for health checks .................................................... January 2005 Index 483 ............. 387 direct (IP route type) .... 402 dmask destination mask for filtering .................0.............. 275 VLAN IP interface ...... 270... 209........ 276 Gigabit Ethernet .. 24 delete FDB entry ........................ 266................................................... 274............ 229 default gateway interval....... 347 round robin......................... 353 setup command .... 92 directed broadcasts...... for health checks.................... 276 port link speed ............................ 365 contracts........ ...................... 444 dropped frames (No Server Available) counter ................................... 447 selection .... viewing changes ......................... 268..... 261 view changes................... 20 via Telnet............................................................................................................... 229 dip (destination IP address for filtering) ................. 333 configuration block active ....................................................... 306 save changes .............. 30 system option .......... 243 current bindings ................................ 25 Distributed Site State Protocol (DSSP) setting update interval . 292 counters....................................................................................... 313 connecting via console .. 90 interval.............................................. 172............................... 476 content SLB real server group option ............................................................................................. 20 serial download settings ................ 243 debugging ...................... 353 effect on Spanning-Tree Protocol ................................ 262 apply changes ............. 271.... 306 DISABLED (port state) ...... 377 console port communication settings .... 262 operating mode ................................. 292 route cache..................................................... 272...... 232 daylight savings time .. bandwidth management ..................... 266 flow control .......................................................................... 302 default gateway IP address ....... No Server Available (dropped frames) ........................................... 457 315393-J.............................................................................. 368 downloading software .................................... 278 port trunking ... 273.............................................................. 211 CPU utilization .................................. 280 copper ports .......................... 347 default password .................. load balancing for .................................. 195 CPU statistics ..

...................................... 28 Fast Ethernet Physical Link ..................................... 417 Greenwich ..............189 FTP SLB statistics dump ................................. SLB ................... 346 use with VRRP ...... 344 hot-standby failover ........................................................................................................................................................ 232 HSRP..266 Fast Ethernet.................. 49 host routes ............................ 32 hash metric .................................................. 425 WAP .......447 factory default configuration ................................................54..............272 File Transfer Protocol ..... 360 default gateway interval..................................145 fiber optic ports .....32 dynamic routes ............. 302 script ........ 110 parameters for most protocols .................................292 F factory configuration block ............................................... 314 Hot Standby Router on VLAN (HSRV) use with VLAN-tagged environment ............189 full-duplex ................................................................ 369.... 302 IDSLB........................................ See Hot Standby Router Protocol.. 266............. 86 help ...................................2 Command Reference duplex mode .. 180 gtcfg (TFTP load command) ............ 338 VRRP priority increment value ..........32 link status ............ 266.................... 86....79.. 270................................78 Forwarding Database Menu......... 276 setup ........................................................ 338.............. 119 configuring .................. 368 redirection (rport) ....................... 25................... 270..........Alteon OS 22.................................. 423 SNMP ......................................................................38 first-time configuration ........... 195 filters IP address ranges ......................387 Final Steps................ configuring ports for ............................... 27 to 43 fixed IP route tag ...................0....452 Forwarding Database Information Menu .................................... 19 hprompt system option ................... 266..................................306 forwarding database (FDB) .... 177 global SLB statistics ......................... 272 global commands................................................................................................................................54.............................290 FwdDel (forward delay).......................................................................................... 370 health check types......................... January 2005 ..............449 delete entry ..................................................................................... 346 Hot Standby Router VLAN (HSRV) use with VRRP ............... 27........................95 flow control .................................. 347 Hot Standby Router Protocol (HSRP) priority increment value for L4 client ports .......................... 484 Index 315393-J................................................................ 87 FTP server health checks ...93 flag field................ 354 E EMS............................ 119 setup ...............................................................86 H half-duplex ...................... number of failed health checks .............................. 270........................................................... 386 retry............... 367 layer information .............181 filtered (denied) frames .................................................... 242 Greenwich Mean Time (GMT) ......................32 fwd (STP bridge option) ...........266 fastage ... 344 VRRP priority increment value ...............32................................................ 69.... 272 Gigabit Ethernet configuration ................................454 G gig (Port Menu option) .............................................268.................................417 FDB statistics ......................... 272 Gigabit Ethernet Physical Link ............451 forwarding state (FWD) ............................39 emulation software .......................................................................................................................... 426 hello STP information ... 33 forwarding configuration IP forwarding configuration ............. retries .................368 FTP SLB maintenance statistics..............173....... 242 group ..........................................187 filter statistics .........475 EtherChannel as used with port trunking ........................................... 342 HP-OpenView ............................................... 367 health checks........................................................ 49 global SLB maintenance statistics ....... bridge port ...... 274............. 174 grace graceful real server failure .......25. 271................................Alteon EMS ..........

...................................................................................................................................................................................... 155 IP subnet mask .................... 402 system option .............................. 330 directed broadcasts ........................... 161 idle timeout overview......................................................................................................... configuring ................................... 92 local network for route caching .. selecting ............................1d Spanning-Tree Protocol .. 344 layer 7 SLB maintenance statistics ................................................ 24 Layer 4 processing active............................................ 119 port speed........................................ 87 Information Menu ...................................................... 85......Alteon OS 22............................ 330 IP Route Manipulation Menu .. 90 lnet (routing option) ................................... 308 IP port configuration ........ 69....2 Command Reference HSRV..................... 173........................................................................... 93 priority increment value (ifs) for VRRP ................................................................................. 233 logical segment.................................. 92 Information Trunk Group Information............................. 368 redirects (Global SLB option) ........................................................................... 54..................................... 262 Layer 4 administrator account.. 25 IDSLB health checks ........................................................................ 307 log syslog messages ............................................. See Hot Standby Router Protocol...... 301 active ................................................. 35 IP forwarding ..................................................... 306 IP forwarding information ............0.............................. 454 IP routing ...................................... 259 HTTP health checks on any port (aphttp) ................... 370 licence certificate .................... 344 configuring address .......................................... 246 LISTENING (port state) ........................................................... 90 IP Information Menu ...... 304 IP statistics ............................................ 446 IMAP server health checks .. January 2005 Index 485 ................................. 90 local (IP route type) .................................................................... 387 IP interface ................ See IP subnets........................ 306 local route cache IP address ranges for...................... 194 incorrect Vports (dropped frames counter) ............................................................... 301 configuring VLANs ................ 302 filter ranges ...... 422 LEARNING (port state) ............ 35 tag parameters ............................. 54 command .............................. 69... 441 link speed...................................... 119 Link Status Information ............ 53 Interface change stats ................................ 259 http ....... 94 BOOTP .................... 35 IP subnets VLANs .......................... 172......................................................... 416 incorrect VIPs (statistic) .. 346 IP network filter configuration ........... 288 image downloading ........................... 35 local route cache ranges ........................... 92 information .................................. 86 lmask (routing option) ................................ 367.................. 368 imask (IP address mask) ... 195 indirect (IP route type) ...... 301 L l4apw (L4 administrator system option) ............... 184 layer 7 SLB string statistics ................................. 35............ 93 IP Static Route Menu .............. 21 IP address mask for SLB .. 54.............. 271................... 35 ARP information ............................................................... 119 duplex mode ............................................ 367 IEEE standards 802............................ 297 I ICMP statistics .................................................... 276 link status........................................................................................ 163 IP address ....... 119 linkt (SNMP option) ......... 307 Telnet ............... 90 IP route tag ........ 444 software.. HTTP application health checks ................ 154 interface statistics ......................... 416 IP configuration via setup .................................................................................... 268................................ 422 IP interfaces ............................................................. 86 least connections (SLB Real Server metric) .................................................................... 441 license password .................................... 104 IP interface ................. 315393-J...... 21 configuring default gateway ... 306 local networks for route caching ...................................................... 90............................ 183 layer7 redirection statistics ....... 182 LDAP version ........

...........................301 MaxAge (STP information) .......................320 media access control................ 243 NTP time zone ....... 151 hello.......................290 O octet counters ......................................................................................................................................................... N nbr change statistics.............................................. 439 operations-level IP options ......................................................................................19 non TCP/IP frames ......... health parameter of a hello packet ........................153 Network Address Translation (NAT) filter action ...... 441 removing ................93 IP route type (filtered out) ..............455 mmask IP address mask for SLB ................ See MAC address...... 54.....317 MD5 key .........................416 mnet management traffic IP address for SLB .............. 435 operations-level SLB options ........455 display MAC address .................... 440 operations-level BWM options ....................... 94....... 442 OSPF area types ...... 317 authentication key ...................... 439 optional software ....... metric SLB real server group option............................................................... 440 Operations-Level Port Options ................92 multi-links between switches using port trunking. 232 NTP synchronization .............................. 320 cost value of the host ........21 Main Menu ............. 320 dead.... declaring a silent router to be down ..................... 195................................................... 320 configuration ..............316 MD5 cryptographic authentication .........................25 summary ..............92 mask IP interface subnet address ..278 mp packet ....... 436 operations-level VRRP options .........................370 minimum misses (SLB real server metric) .......Alteon OS 22............................... See Management Processor....48 Maintenance Menu ........................367...................................86 mcon (maximum connections) ............................ 276 operations menu ........................................................449 Management Processor (MP).............................................................................................................. 49 operating mode........................... 242 switch location .............. 127 activating ........................... 78....................364 metrics.............................173.............. 179 online help ..............................2 Command Reference M MAC (media access control) address......47 Command-Line Interface (CLI) .........................................386 network management .....................................................................17 martian IP route tag (filtered) ..........................................................................................................172.55 manual style conventions .....416 monitor port...................... multicast IP route type ...................... January 2005 .............. 323 fixed routes ... 98......... 268..........................................87................................................ 292 mxage (STP bridge option) ................................ 315........ 322 dead............................................................................................ 271. 370 Miscellaneous Debug Menu ........... 325 general ........... 315 cost of the selected path ......................................... 194 486 Index 315393-J. SLB . authentication parameter of a hello packet .......................................... configuring ....... 451 notice ................................... 433 operations-level BGP options .................55................................................................................ 151 global ................... 441........................................................... 321 export .0........... 365 MD5 authentication key .......206 MP.................. 315 ospf area index ......................................................

........ 54.. 318 transit area .................................................0................................................................................................... 24 user account ..................................................... 173............................... 188 Password user access control .......... 32 setup....... 120 IP status ............................. 24 VRRP authentication ........................................... 292 port trunking configuration ... 316 MD5 authentication key.................................... 292 VLAN ID..... router ID ................................. 292 ports configuration .................................................. 359 PIP ........................... 102 OSPF statistics ..................................... 265 SLB state information ............................... 88 priority.................................................................................... 323 spf..... 314 POP3 server health checks........................................ 31 disabling (temporarily).................. 50....... 101 OSPF general ................................... 79 port trunking description .......................... 119 port speed ......................................... 316 interface .................................................................... 69........................................................ 316 Not-So-Stubby Area .............................. 198 port configuration ...................................... 317 summary range configuration ......... 150 overflow server activations ........................ 24 default ................ 90 membership of the VLAN .................................................... 270........................................................................... 457 switch (and Maintenance Menu option) ................... 265 port flow control............................... 23 315393-J............... 322 host routes ............ 316 route redistribution configuration ........................... 449 parameters tag .................... 278 Port number ............... 239 proxies IP address translation .............................................. 195 overflow servers ................. 337 virtual router ...................... 318 stub area .................................. 92 Passive FTP SLB Parsing Statistics ................................... 93 type.................... 317 transit delay .............................................. January 2005 .. 321 virtual neighbor.. 315 interface configuration ............... 277 information .............. 317 priority value of the switch interface............................... 120 preemption assuming VRRP master routing authority .. 321 OSPF Database Information .......................... 336...... 100 OSPF Information ................ as used with split horizon .................. 342 priority virtual router ........................................ 266 configuring Gigabit Ethernet (gig) ................... 320 range number ..................................... 24 L4 administrator account ............................................... 270 configuring Fast Ethernet ...................................... 78.......................................................................................... 32 port states UNK (unknown) ................................................. 315 virtual link configuration ....................................................................................... 261 password administrator account .......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 317 virtual link ...... 54...........................2 Command Reference host entry configuration ......................... 319 link state database ........ 345 passwords ..... 292 prisrv primary radius server ......... 86 RJ-45........................................................................................................... 99 OSPF General Information ................................................................ 361 Index 487 199 P panic command ............................... 98 OSPF Information Route Codes ........... 315 redistribution menu ................... 377 ping ................................. 360 321 persistent bindings real server ........ 342 priority (STP port option) ................... 368 port bandwidth management switch processor statistics switch port contract statistics menu.......................................................................... 266............................................... See flow control.............. 430 poisoned reverse................................................... 119 auto-sense ......... shortest path first .. Port Menu configuration options ........... 111 STP port priority ..................... 272 port mirroring configuration ..............................................Alteon OS 22.................................... 320 type.......

........ See IP subnets................... 271........................................................ January 2005 ............... 423 scriptable health checks configuration .................................................................................................................. 268..............0.............79 referenced port .......Alteon OS 22.......................... 457 receive flow control 32..................... See IP subnets...............................................................................................180 real server SLB configuration . 314 split horizon ...................... 367..... 93 options .... serial cable ............................................................................. 238 security VLANs......................... 229 noback option ............ 20 serial download ..............................442 S save (global command) ............................................................... rmkey .........................................................................................50 round robin as used in gateway load balancing . 327 routing information protocol configuration ...................358 real servers backup ...................2 Command Reference proxy IP address (PIP) ..................... 152 Q quiet (screen display option) ....... 306 route statistics ...................... 230 save command....................364 real server group statistics ................ 190 rx flow control .. 423 secret radius server .................................. See Routing Information Protocol....... segments.................435 remote site servers .............................. 32.................. 276.........175 real server group options add ...................... 314 poisoned reverse ..346 SLB state information .........................................................179 real server global SLB statistics .................................................. 120 pwd .................................. 475 Server Load Balancing IDS ............................................... 370 route cache configuration ........ 347 roundrobin SLB Real Server metric ..... 447 script health checks .....239 retry health checks for default gateway .............................................................180 real server groups combining servers into ....... 376 RTSP SLB statistics ..........29 retries radius server .............................................................................................................................................. 33 Rx/Tx statistics............... 239 Secure Shell ............................................ 436 real server weights ....430 ptcfg (TFTP save command) ................................ 363 operations-level options ........368 read community string (SNMP option) .................366 real server group SLB configuration..........................................................................364 statistics ...............245 real server statistics ...................................93 RIP..............................................110 reboot ............................................................................................................... 33.....442 reset key combination ...............................................................................54.......................... 277 redir (SLB filtering option) .......449 restarting switch setup .............449...............................111 proxy IP address (PIP) configuration ......95 remote monitoring on the port (rmon) .............................. 314 version 1 parameters.................................................386 reference ports ............................. 239 secsrv secondary radius server ......50 R RADIUS server authentication ................................................................................................................... 297 segmentation............................................... 274..............................................365 priority increment value (reals) for VRRP ............. 313 rport SLB virtual server option ...... 157 router hops ..............................................361 removing optional software ......354 PVID (port VLAN ID)..... 313 Routing Information Protocol (RIP) ....................................... 359 488 Index 315393-J..............302 rip IP route tag ...................................................

................................ 425 SNMP health checks ............................ 386 SLB Information .......... 359 restr (restore) SLB real server UDP option ........................... server port mapping .............................................................................................................................. 369 SNMP statistics .................................................................. 471 SNMP health check configuration ......................................................................... 30 VLAN name ..............2 Command Reference server load balancing client traffic processing................................ 361 tmout (time out) ............................................................................................................. 187.................................................................................................... 182 SLB real server group health checks arp................ 245 set and get access . 30 duplex mode ................... 270 SIP (source IP address for filtering) .......................................................................... 194 315393-J...... 111 server traffic processing ............ configuration ....................................................... 360 weights ......................................................................... 368 wsp .......... 365 metric ........................ 367 metrics ............................... 360 retry ..... 387 SLB filtering option action . 367 icmp .............................. 232 SMTP server health checks ...................................................... 19............... 425 HP-OpenView ............................. 32 IP configuration ........ 32 restarting .......... 27 BOOTP ..... real server IP address ............................. 360 maxcon (maximum connections) ..........................................................................................................................................0......................................................... 35 IP subnet mask ........ 368 http.......... 33 port speed ........ 399 health check .................. 19 menu options ................ 359 name............... 33 VLANs .................... 365 health checking .......................................................................................... 356 Server Load Balancing Maintenance Statistics Menu ............................ 34 SFD statistics mp specific ............. 130 health checks ........................ 368 smtp ................. 369 sslh................................................. 367 dns ............................................................ 52 single-mode ports .............................................................................................................. 400 server traffic processing .......................................................... 353 setup facility ...... 367 imap .................................................................................... 360 RIP..... 367 ftp ........................ 367 SNMP ................................................................................................................................................... 272 shortcuts (CLI) ............................................................................................................ 368 script ............................................................. 34 VLAN tagging ......................... 387 smtp ................ 218 186................................. 367 udpdns . 364 SLB real server option backup ... 34 VLAN port numbers ...................................... 399 server load balancing configuration options .................................... 245 SNMP Agent ....................................................................... 455 SNMP ..................... 368 snap traces buffer ............................................................................................ 359 submac ................. 29 Spanning-Tree Protocol .................................................................................................................... 30 system time ........................................................... January 2005 Index 489 .... 359 slowage . alias for each real server ......................................................... 417 smask source mask for filtering ................ 29 system date .. 370 port options ........ 33 port configuration ........ 31 port flow control ................................ 368 wtls ... 373 setup configuration .................... 368 tcp ................................. 367 health check types .................................................................................. 110 SLB layer7 statistics ................... 369 radius ............................................................................................................................................................................... 399 Session Binding Table ..Alteon OS 22. 32....................................................................... 368 ldap ..... 360 intr (interval) ............................................................................... 32..................... 28 stopping............. 360 session identifier .......................................................................... 25................................................................................................. 35 port auto-negotiation mode ..... 353 setup command....................... 31 starting .......................................................................................... 209 SFP GBIC ports ................................................. 369 SLB real server group option application health checking .......................

................. 233 system contact (SNMP option) .................35 IP interface .......................................................................................................441 SYN attack detection configuration .448 split horizon......................................28 state (STP information) ............................................180 management processor ................................. January 2005 ........... 259 l4apw (Layer 4 administrator password) .......................86............................................ 52 tacacs ............................................... 232 tnet............................... 17 TFTP .......304 statistics group ....................................................................................... 259 System Maintenance Menu .............39 software image file and version ...................... 21 BOOTP ................ 451 system options admpw (administrator password) .................................................................... 243 T tab completion (CLI) .292 root bridge ...............................................................................................................................87......................86 port cost option .....205 Statistics Menu .................................................... 413... 353 telnet radius server ................... 262 login banner .....................................455 swkey .....................304 static routes Routing Information Protocol (RIP) ...........0................................................................................. 240 Telnet support optional setup for Telnet support ............................ 53........................... 240 TCP fragments ...........................................314 statis route add .......................... 368 source and destination ports.................301 switch resetting ......... 445 PUT and GET commands ........................................................................................................290 bridge priority ........... 360 health checks ................................................................ 229 bridge aging option ............................................................................93 static route rem ............. 240.................................................291 bridge parameters .................................................................................. 354 TFTP server ...... 259 tnport ......................................................... 232 hprompt .................................................... 208 Telnet ........................................... 165...... 232 cur (current system parameters) ......................................................292 port priority option..455 display trace buffer ............................................................................... 290 setup (on/off) .............................................. 39 terminal emulation ............ 262 BOOTP ................... 240..............288 Spanning-Tree Protocol .............................................................. 232 time.................................................................................................... 21 configuring switches using .........................................................................................................................................................................................31 switch reset effect ...55 license ............................................448 Switch Processor (SP)..29 subnet address maskconfiguration IP subnet address ................... 436 syslog system host log configuration .............. 354 315393-J...............................................377 secure socket layer statistics .............................................301 subnet mask ....86 state information........ 436 synchronization VRRP switch................... 232 HTTP access ... client system..................................................... 259 usrpw (user password) ...................................377 static IP route tag .. 243 date ................................... current ..............2 Command Reference SNMP Support optional setup for SNMP support ............................................................... 385 TCP statistics .186 stacking commands (CLI) . 240 TACACS+ ............. 245 system access control configuration.............................................................441 software image ..............................................................418 490 Index sync ..........................................35 subnets ...................................................444 SP specific statistics ............................................................................................210 spanning tree configuration...........................................314 SSL ........................................................................................................... 245 date and time .................... 261 system parameters...............................52 starting switch setup ......... 20 text conventions ..... 373 health checking using .........................Alteon OS 22.............................. 55 location (SNMP option) ...................129 stopping switch setup............................................................

............Alteon OS 22...................................................... 342 virtual routers HSRP failover ....... 277 transparent proxies........................ 111 virtual router description ................ 154 time-to-live....................................... 181 VLAN active port ...................... 345 group options (prio) .. 335..................................................................................................... 267............................................... 50 vip advertisement of virtual IP addresses as Host Routes ............................................ 181 virtual servers ....... 172....... 342 master preemption (prio) ..0................................. 93 virtual IP address (VIP) ............................................... 346 virtual server global SLB statistics .................................................................... 314 IP route tag ....... 344 priority..... 232 timeout radius server .......... 336. 111 user account ........................ 92 typographic conventions....... 417 trace buffer .......... 25 timers kickoff........ authentication ............ 33 407 tnet system option .... 273................................................ 317 type parameters .. 385 UDP statistics ............... 111 statistics ........... 360 source and destination ports ............. 276......................................................... 33................ 32............ 30 system option ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 259 TPCP (Transparent Proxy Cache Protocol) ......... 337 Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol configuration333 virtual router sharing ............................. 271.................................... 298 setup.......... 33 type of area ospf............................. 344 configuration ........................................ 386 Trunk Group Information .............................. 194 server status using ............................................................ 326................................. 275 port restrictions ............................................... 167 unknown (UNK) port state ................................................................ 342 virtual router group configuration ................................. 367 SLB state information ........ 175 virtual server SLB statistics ...... 339 transmit flow control32............... January 2005 Index 491 ....... 242 U UCB statistics ............ 239 timeouts idle connection ...... 342 operations-level options ........................................ 335 priority tracking options ... 439 password.. 336 priority increment values (vrs) for VRRP ......... 79 Unscheduled System Dump ................................................ 111 virtual port state.. 455 traceroute........ 338....... 347 increasing priority level of ......................................... 337 virtual router group VRRP priority tracking ...................... 340 incrementing VRRP instance ................ 338 master preemption (preem) ....... 346 HSRV.............................2 Command Reference time setup . when used for NAT ...................................... 270....................................... 268............................................................................... 297 VLAN tagging port configuration............................. 455 Switch Processor ................ 456 315393-J.. 24 usrpw (system option) .............................. 344 HSRP priority increment value ................................... 87 ttl (time to live............................................................. 444 URL for health checks .............. 50 Tracking VRRP ........................................ 401 tx flow control.............................................................................................. 274......................... SLB information about ... switch software .................................................... DNS response (global SLB menu option) V verbose . global SLB menu option) ......................................................................................................................................... 334 master mode ............................ 343 Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP) authentication parameters for IP interfaces .......... 261 Uuencode Flash Dump .............................................................. 341 virtual router group priority tracking ..... 17 tzone .. 344 HSRV priority increment value ... manual ... 259 tnport system option .. 342 tracking criteria ............................................................................................. 208 UDP datagrams .............. 345 priority election for the virtual router ........................ 458 upgrade....................

...................425...................................88 interface .....................................................335 tracking .......................34 security .450 web-based management interface.................................................................288 name .....345 master advertisements ................342 VRRP statistics ..Alteon OS 22.........................34 port membership...............192 watchdog timer ............................................ 475 275 W WAP health checks ..................................33..............19 weights for SLB real servers ... 88 name setup..............................335.335.............425...................................159 X XModem ........................................346 write community string (SNMP option) .............................. 270...........................................................................................................................297 setting default number (PVID) .............................88 VRID (virtual router ID) ..................................426 WAP health check wspport .... 427 WAP health check configuration .................336 VRRP Information .......................................................................................................... 342 VRRP interface configuration ...78..........0..245 wspport WAP health check ......................................... 426 wtlsprt .... 298 VLAN Number .2 Command Reference VLANs ...............................................288 tagging ..34 Spanning-Tree Protocol ........... 88 port numbers ......................425..............266........................................ setup .35 ARP entry information .....................................371 setting virtual router priority values .......................................... January 2005 ............................................................................................ 427 492 Index 315393-J......................................... 120..............................78....36 multiple spanning trees .............................................297 information .............. 54.......................................................................................................................................425.346 virtual router sharing ......................94 broadcast domains ....................... 272.. 339 tracking configuration ...............105 VRRP master advertisements time interval ............. 426 wtlsprt WAP health check ...426 WAP SLB statistics ...............

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful